m CKAZr'l l.&*Azt*/ A.$Jt4 i'J&A*’ '”*-‘S^,*€< "fi* " -44»" ! C i^CUL*A&AfiA*v> JHk^V-vdcX "i < k ClL-.^ «£*, ^ >«■ j l^ ^ _a*n^o-a.^c - map a 4 OX^^T t vx i ft * £ 9^u^e%^ J*hrv^njceL. Xyvv^vv # 3v*tiS-v%.4^r & C©.^, *T^ B» 4T^ # 18 8 0 ERRATA. p. II. 1. 20. extends for extents. p. III. 1. 22. Kachchh for Kachh. p. III. 1. 28. Kachchlu for Kaehhf. p. IY. 1. 2 9. however for howerer. p. YI. 1. 2. eighthly for eightly. p.VHL 1. 14. XXXYII for XXXY. p. IX. 1. 29. and the short for and of the short. p. XYII. 1. 32. valakko for valakko. p. XXIY. 1. 17. what for wbat. p. XXY. 1. 33. Prachya for Pracha. p. XXY. 1. 34. Prachya for Graudi. p. XXXYII. 1. 1 1 . comes for come. p. XXXYII. 1. 20. Prakas for Prakas. p. 17. 1. 28. difficulty for difficulty. p. 56. 1. 27. give thou for take thou. p. 57. 1. 5. for p. 61. 1. 3 3. for p. 64. j. 31. Sffi or for or sq^\ p. 65. 1 29. § 77 for § 74. p. 70. L 7. add: E. H. or sbr . p. TO: 1. 10. for p. 104. 1. 34. oTT3q for ST3£. p. 107. 1. 6. f or p. 110. 1. 24. rnT for xrit6>. p. 110. 1. 26: flptyr for ff^cuVr. p. 112. 1. 23. for rr^srq. p. 123. 1. 34. for p. 124. 1. 10. irsrr son for irfr so< p. 141. 1. 6. or for ADDENDA. 67. rule 119, 2. W. H. fTST three and a half for Pr. wiftj see § 416. ja&. rule 160. becomes in S., P., Mw. for suf£ of pres, part., see § 301. Also P., S. *TsT five for Pr. cfc Skr, 3^, see p. 256. 90. rule 17 2. W. H. fftET for ^^r^tjrT three and a half sc § 416. 90. add rule 172 a . ^ is elided; rarely; E. H. ft| desires, Pr. Bkr. *S^TT?rfH, see p. 389, footnote 113. rule 227. The forms tT and rFT are preserved in the 0. £ of Chand; e. g. sZrf old age Pr. R. 28, 38; ?ftrTrT^T friem ship Pr. R. 28, 56; prosperity Pr. R. 28, 38; 5[3r? old age Pr. R. 28, 38. LI 7. rule 239. In 0. H. the suff. is ^?t; e. g. fiUffT blood Chand Pr. R. 28, 3 9. BY CHARLES GKEORQ T, BONN, CONTENTS. ft INTRODUCTION ..... I On the Distribution and Af- finities of Gaudian ... I Eastern Hindi Literature . XXXVI The Terms tatsama, tadbhava , XXXVIII SECTION On Letters Sounds * 1 4PTER. The Alphabet 1 Vowels 3 Neutral and short . 4 Nasalization .... 6 Consonants 8 Pronunciation of pa- latals .... 7 Pronunciation of ce- rebrals 8 Nasals 10 Semivowels .... 16 Sibilants 24 Foreign Sounds . . 25 ['he Visarga and Anus - )&ra 26 * Visarga 26 Anusvara . t . . < 27 lPTER. Euphonic Per- utation 31 1. j[n Pronunciation and Inflexion 31 ' Vowels 31 Single Consonants . . 34 Conjunct Consonants 35 page 2. In Derivahon .... 36 a) Changes of Final Sounds 36 b) Changes of Medial Sounds 42 cc) Single Vowels . . 42 ff) Vowels in contact 47 y) Single Consonants 57 aa) Softening . . 60 bb) Reduction . . 65 cc) Vocalisation . 67 dd) Elision ... 69 ee) Hardening . . 72 ff) Miscellaneous . 72 Sair-ul Mutakkerin« will remember how often the Mahomedan Soubas of Azimabad (Patna) found it necessary to chastise^ the turbulent Zemindars of Bhojpur, and how little the latter seemed to profit by the lesson. It is remarkable that throughout the area of the Bhojpuri lan- guage a spirit of bigoted devotion to the old Hindu faith still exists, and that the proportion of Mahomedans to Hindus is very small. Rajpoots everywhere predominate, together with a caste called Babhans (STTiR) or Bhuinhars = landleute) who appear to be a sort of bastard Brahmins, and concerning whose origin many curious legends are told. tt Beames J. R. A. S. vol. Ill, p. 484 (new series). INTRODUCTION. *1 so after tlie ancient city of Mithila, the capital of Videlia or modern Tirhu£ (Tirabhukti). Eightly , the Magadh or the dialect spoken to the south of the Ganges between Gaya, Patna and Bhagalpur. It has its name from the old district of Magadh, now better known as Bihar. j These dialects naturally divide themselves into two great groups, according to some very marked peculiarities of pronun- ciation and inflexion, etc., which will be noted presently. The first group comprises the western dialects; viz. those of W. and E. Rajputana, of the Braj andofKanauj. The ^second group includes the dialects of Banaras, Tirhut and Bihar. The central dialect of Audh and Baghelkhand. is of uncertain affiliation. In some points it agrees with the western group (e. g. , in having the W. H. past part, in d or see § 802 ); but as m most others (e. g., the E. H. future in db) it exhibits the same peculiarities as the eastern dialects', it appears more appropriate to class it, for the present, with the latter. The eastern group of dialects constitutes, what I have called, the Eastern Hindi lan- guage; the western group the Western Hindi. The latter language is that which most nearly resembles what is commonly Jpown as Hindi, namely the literary of High-Hindi. This latter is merely a modified form of the Braj dialect, which was first transmuted into the Urdu by curtailing the amplitude of its inflexional forms and rh ^’tUrg a -jv of i • o- ‘ peculiar to Panjabi and Marwari; afterwards Urdu was changed into High-Hindi. The H. H., as distinguished from the Urdu or Hindustani, is a very modern language; but Urdu itself is comparatively modern. It originated during the twelfth century 1 ) in the country around Delhi,, the centre of the Muhammedan power. In that spot the Braj dialect comes into contact with the Marwari and Panjabi; and there among the great camps ( urdu ) of the Muhammedan soldiery in their 1) The great battle of Panipat near Delhi was fought A. D. 1192. It put an- end to the Hindu and established the Muhammedan empire of Delhi. The last Hindu ruler ( Prithirdj ) fell in the battle. INTRODUCTION. *VI1 intercourse with the surrounding populations a mixed language grew up, which, as regards giammar, is, in the main, Braj, though intermixed with Panjabi and Marwari forms, while as regards vocabulary, it is partly indigenous Hindi, partly foreign (Persian and Arabic). For example, the fin aFJong ^d of strong jcaaseuline nouns, where the Brayjias cm and the MdrwarTo, is a bit of Panjabi, again the affix ne of the active case is a contribution from Marwari 1 ). Where the Braj has alternative forms, one only was adopted by the Uidii. Thus Braj forms the future either in ihaum or m aamyau ^l st pers. sg.); Urdu has retained only the latter m the form ihncjd, on account (no doubt) of its similaiity to the Panjabi ctmgd. It was only in the sixteenth century, chiefly m the reign of Akbar, that Urdu was reduced to a cultivated form. With the extension of the Muhammedan power, its use spread over the whole of the Hindi area; but it remained the language of those exclusively who were more immediately connected with that power, either in the army or court or the pursuit of learning; it never became the vernacular of the people. The High-Hmdf dates only from the present century. It is an outcome of the Hindu revival under the influence of English Missions and Education. Naturally enough, Urdu, the dominant and official dialect, came to hand in this movement and was Ihnduised or turned into High-Hindi by exchanging its Persian and Arabic elements- for words of native origin (more or less purely Sanskrit). Hence Urdu and High-Hindf are really the same language; they have an identical grammar and differ merely in the vocabulary, the former using as many foreign words, the latter as few as possible. It appears , then , that there are three different forms of speech current in the Hindi area; viz. the H. Hindi or Urdu, the W. Hindi, and the E. Hindi. The first of these is nowhere the vernacular of the people, but it is the language of literature, of 1) The affix of the active case was originally a dative affix, which is m Mr ne : m P. nim, in Br. haam, see § 371, VlH INTRODUCTION. the towns, and of the higher classes of the population ; and it takes the form of Urdu among Muhammedans and of Hindi among Hindus; though the difference between these two forms is less marked m the mouth of the people than in the books of the learned. On the other hand, both the W. H. and E. H. are ver- naculars of the people generally. Their boundary line may be roughly set down at about the 80 th degree of E. Longitude. In the area lying to the west of that line and containing about 150000 square miles W. H. is spoken by about 40 millions of people, in some one or other of its above mentioned dialectic forms. Among these the Braj Bhasha is the most important, as it is the best known variety. It is not only the source of the Urdii and, through it, of the modern literary Hindi, but it has itself received some measure of literary cultivation (see pg. XXXY). In this respect, indeed, the Braj occupies an unique position not only in the W. H., but amongst Hindi dialects generally. In the following pages, whenever W. H. simply is spoken of, the Braj , as being its typical form, is especially intended. The E. H. area, lying to the east of the 8 0 th degree, con- tains about 100000 square miles and a population pf about 20 millions. Among the various E. H. dialects spoken by these people, that of the Banaras district or the Bhojpuri is the most important. It is the one which is especially referred to in this work by the term Eastern Hindi, and the grammar of which forms more prominently my subject. It must be considered the typical dialect of the E. H.; for it exhibits all the peculiar fea- tures of that language in their fullest? number and most marked form. This js much less the case with the other E. H. dialects. The more westerly, the Baiswari, in some not unimportant points shows the distinctive marks of the W. H. (see pg. YI). On the other hand the easterly, the Maithili especially, exhibit unmistake- able similarities to the neighbouring Bangali and Naipali. Indeed, I am doubtful, whether it is not more correct to class the Maithili » as a Bangali dialect rather than as an E. H. one. Thus in the INTRODUCTION. ’IX formation of the past tense, Maithili agrees very closely with Bangalf, while it differs widely from the E. H., see § 508. Taking, then, the Braj and the Bhojpurf as the two typical dialects of the two great W. H. and E. H. groups respectively, and comparing them with each other, without entirely excluding from consideration the others; a number of very marked peculia- rities present themselves. These, it will be seen, are so important, especially when considered m their relation to the non-Hindi (i. e., other Graudian) languages, that it appears perfectly justifiable to consider the W. II. and E. H. a s being as completely dist inct lan- guages as the other North-Indian languages are universally allowed to be. The following enumeration of differences is not an ex- haustive one. I shall only mention the most important. There are many others which the reader will not fail to note for him- self, as he goes through the grammar. I shall arrange them under the following heads: 1) pronunciation, 2) derivation, 8) in- flexion^T) construction, 5) vocables. ^^Flrstly; as to pronunciation: 1) E. H. has a tendency to den- talise cerebral semivowels; thus E. H. often has r and rh for W. II. r or rh\%it has also r and sometim es n for W. H . I (see §§ 16. If 9, * 2) While sometimes W. H. omits medial h, E. H. inserts an euphonic h 1 ). 8) While E. H. never tolerates, W. H. sometimes adds euphonically an initial y or v 2 ). 4) E. H. nas the short vowels e, qi : 0 , cm which are unknown to W. H. (see §§ 5. 6). 5) E. H. generally prefers to retain the hiatus cm and au , while W. II. always contracts them to ca and au 3 ) (see § 68 ). Secondly; as to derivation: 1) the strong form of masc. nouns of the a-base has in E. H. a final d, and of the short form of pronouns a final e, but in W. H. a final au or 0 (see §§ 47. 1) e. g., E. H., dihal he gave, but W. II. did or diyd 2) e. g , E. H., e me in this, 0 me in that, but W H. yd mem , vd mem. 3) g. g.j E H., baithai ho sits, W. H. baithe, E. H. aur and,W.H. aur* X INTRODUCTION. 48. 43 3. 437, 4) 1 ). 2) The singular possessive pronoun has in E. II. a medial o, but in W. H. e or d (see §§ 449. 450) 2 ). 3) E. H. prefers the weak form m (quiescent) a of masculine nouns with an arbase , W. H. the strong form m an or o 3 ) (see § 205). 4) E. H. prefers the long form (of subst.) in am or an, W. H. that in ciyci or at (see § 202) 4 ). (5.) While W. TI. uses, as a rule, only the short form of the pronouns, E. H. has gene- rally also a long form in net (see §§ 436. 437,3) 5 ). Thirdly; as to inflexion; and here both as regards declension and conjugation. As to declension: 1) E. H. does not possess the active case of the W. H. formed with the affix ne (see §§ 3 70. 3 71) 6 ). 2) The oblique form singular of strong masculine nouns in d has m E. H. a final d, but m W. H. e (see §§ 3 63, 5. 3 65, 3.6) 7 ). Next as to conjugation • 1) the present tense is made in E. H. by adding the auxiliary participle Id to the ancient (Sanskrit) present; in W. II. by adding gd or licit or clihai (see §§ 500. 501) 8 ). 2) The past tense is formed m E II. by means of the suffix al or d, m W. H. by the suffix yciu or yo (see §§ 502. 505) 9 ). 3) The future tense is made in E. II. by means of the suffix ab or tin in W. H. by the suffixes ill or as (or, what Cheed not concern us here, by adding the auxiliary participles gem or go to the ancient present) (see §§ 508. 509) 10 ). 4) While E. H. 1) E. H bhald good, W. FI. bhalcm or bhalo) E H. je which, W. H. jau or jo. 2) E. H. mori (fem.) mine, but W. H. mcri or man. 3) e. g., E H bar great, W. H. barau, E H. mor mine, W H merau; E. H. det giving, W. H. (Mw.) deto, E H parhal read, W. H. parhyau. 4) e. g., E H. rani’vd or ramau Ram, W. H ramayd or ramai 5) e. g , E. H. se or tavan he, W. H. only so. 6) e. g., E. H. u Icades he -did, W. H vd ne Iciyau . 7) e. g , E. H gen ghord hai, W Ef ghore Jcau of nom gkora horse. 8) e. g , E. H hold he becomes, W. H. haigd or hvaihai or hvaichhai . 9) e. g , E. H. rahal he remained, W. H. rahyau. 10) e. g., E. II. hardboiji I shall do, W, H. hanhaum or Jcarasum (or karaumgau). INTRODUCTION. ’SI ’ possesses the infinitive in ab or ib m common with W. H., it does not share with it that in an (see §261) 1 ). Fourthly; as regards construction, there is one great difference, that, in the case of the past tense of transitive verbs, E. H. possesses a regular active construction with a proper active jiast tense, whereas W. H. uses a passive construction with the help of the active case (m ne) of the subject; (see §§ 371. 487). Fifthly; as regards the vocabulary, some of the commonest and most important vocables are altogether different. Thus the (so-called) substantive verb is in E. H. 3. sing, present bdtal he is, past rahal he was, in W. II. pres, hai (or chhai ), past tho (or ho or chho)\ again the prohibitive particle is in E. H. jin , in W. II. mat\ again the causative post- position is in E. H. bade or bare for the sake of, in W. H. hye. These differences are sufficiently radical in themselves, to establish the claim of the E. H. to be considered a distinct lan- guage from W. H. But their importance will be seen still more clearly, if we now examine them in their relation to the eastern and western Gaudian languages; setting aside, for the present those of ^jbte north (Naipali) and south (Marathi). To the east of the combined E. H. and W. H. area are Bangali and Oriya; to the west Panjabi, Gujarati and Sindhi. On comparing these languages with W. H. and E. H., it appears that B. and 0. have in common with the latter all those peculiarities in which it differs from the former; and that P., G. and S. share with the former ^tll (or nearly all) those peculiarities in which it differs from the latter. Thus all the languages of the former class (i. e. E. H., B., 0.) show a preference for n over Z; and of at and an over ai and au\ they do not tolerate an initial y or v\ and possess the short e and o; their short pronouns have a final e and their possessive pronouns a medial o\ most of their pronouns have an alternative long form in na , and their masculine nouns of the a-base, gene- 1) e. g., E. H. karab doing, W. H. karabaum or karanaum. XII INTRODUCTION lally, the weak form in a\ they have no active case; their oblique f form singular of strong masculine nouns in d ends in d\ their past tense is made with d and their future tense and infinitive with ib\ and lastly they construct actively the past tense of tran- sitive verbs. Only m the present tense do B. and 0. differ from E. H. in that they form no compound tense like it, but only use the simple ancient' present tense; a form which'' they have in common not only with E. EL, but (as will be shown further on, pg. XXXII) with all Gel. languages. The case of W H. in respect to P., G. and S. is precisely similar. They all prefer r, Z, to r and n\ and ai and cm to ai and au\ in certain cases they make use of initial y and v, but have no short e and o; their strong masculine nouns and short pronouns end in o 1 ); their pronouns have no long form in wa 2 ), and, as a rule, their masculine nouns have the strong form in o or cm ; they have an active case made with ne 3 ), and an oblique form singular in e 4 ) of strong masculine nouns in o (or P. a) ; they make their past tense with the suffix ya or ia, and an in- finitive with an ; lastly they all construct passively the past tense of transitive verbs. Besides, G. and P., like W. H., forjp the pre- sent tense by adding the auxiliary verb cliliai or hai , and the future by the suffixes ill or as ; and their singular possessive pro- nouns have, as in W. H., a medial e or d. In these three points S. follows a way of its own, different, however, from both the others. Although , therefore , the agreement is not quite perfect within each of the two groups 5 ), yet it is complete in the most 1) Exc", P* strong masc. nouns end in a\ G. short pron end in 0 , exc. so who. 2) Exc. relat pron. Jeon in W. II., P., G., but not in S. 3) Exc., S. and Mw. use no affix with the active case. 4) Exc., G and Mw. and partially Br. and Kn. in d. 5) The agreement is much more complete m the E. than in the W group. This circumstance is significant, on ‘account of its bearing on the probable history of their respective immigration into and occupation of North-India (see pg. XXXII), INTRODUCTION. £in important points. These are the sis following, of which the live first are morphological and the sixth syntactical; viz. 1) the form of masculine nouns of an a-base, whether weak or strong; 2) the termination of such strong masculine nouns, whether in d or o; 3) their oblique form singular, whether ending in d or e; 4) the suffix of the past tense, whether al or ya\ 5) the suffix of the future, whether db or ill (or as)\ 6) the construction of the past tense, whether actively or passively. Even in regard to the minor points, the divergences are mostly confined to S., which is the most outlying of the &audian languages. There are two conclusions which are obviously suggested by that agreement. In the first place; E. H. has evidently a much closer resemblance to B. and 0., than to W. H.; and on the other hand, W. H. is much more nearly allied to P., Gr. and S., than * to E. H. Whence it follows, that since B. and 0. are accounted separate languages from E. H., and P., Gr. and S. from W. H., a fortiori E. H. and W. H. must be considered as distinct lan- guages, and not merely as dialects of one and the same. Indeed, the only two points of any importance, in which E. H. agrees with W. 'I. rather than with B. and 0. are; 1) the oblique form singular in e of strong masculine adjectives in d (see § 386), which adjectives the latter do not possess at all; and 2) the first preterite tense made with the past participle in ya or ict (see 502. 503), which they form a little differently 1 ), but which, strictly, belongs not so much to E. H. , as to the intermediate ^dialect, the Baiswari. The second conclusion is, that the languages whose affinities have been hitherto discussed, divide themselves into two large groups or two great forms of speech; the one extending over the eastern half of North-India and comprising E. H., B. and 0.; the other covering its western half and including W. H., P., Gr. and S. 1) e. g., E. H. parky om I read, B. parkiydckhi , 0. parhiaokhum, but W. H, parky au. INTRODUCTION. XIV These two great forms of speech I designate in this treatise the r Eastern Gaudiau and the Western Gaudian speeches or groups of languages. The close resemblance of the various members of these two groups among themselves clearly points to a time, when those two forms of speech' were nothing more than distinct languages, and what we now know as separate languages, were merely their different dialects. We have now to consider, what relation the two remaining Gaudian languages, viz. Marathi and Naipali, bear to those two great forms of speech, the E. Gd. and the W. Gd. On examining their affinities with respect to the points ^ discussed above, it will be found, that they each occupy a distinct position, yet so that Marathi is rather more nearly allied to E. Gd. ; and Naipali to W. Gd. Their positio» as forms of speech distinct from both E. Gd. and W. Gd., is founded chiefly on these two facts: 1) that with respect to some of the points, in which E. and W. Gd. differ from one another, M. and N. sometimes agree with one, some- times with the other; and 2) that in some other points they agree with neither, but follow a line of their own. Thus as regards Marathi, it agrees with E. Gd. fa the fol- lowing points: 1) the termination d of the strong masculine nouns of the a-base (see § 48); 2) the final d of their oblique form singular 1 ); 3) the formation of the past tense by the suffix ail (see § 505); and 4) the formation of the future by the addition of the * auxiliary participle la to the ancient present (see § 509). This lkst point requires a word of explanation. It will be remem- bered (see pg. X and VII) that this compound form, which serves in M. as dr future, is used in E. H. as a present, and that a similar compound form, made up of the auxiliary participle ga and the ancient present, is used in W. H. as a present tense, and in P. (and H. H.) as a future (see § 501). Now these circum- 1) e. g., gen. ghodyd did of ghodd horse; vichvd chd of vidiii scor- pion; pdnyd did of pefyi water. INTRODUCTION. stances show, that the compound form in ga is W. Gd., and the other in la E. Gd. On the other hand, M. agrees with W. Gd. in the following points : 1) the pronunciation generally (see §§11.16.18); 2) the o termination of the short pronouns (see § 487,3.4); 3) the ab- sence of the pronouns of a long form in na ; exc. the mterog. pron. Iwn who; 4) the strong form, generally, of masculine nouns of the a-base (see § 205); 5) the long form in ay a of the same nouns (see § 202); 6) the active case formed with ne (see § 371); 7) an infinitive made Vith the suffix an (see § 320); and lastly 8) the passive construction of the past tense (see § 487). It will be observed that of those six characteristics which have been noted as being the most important points of difference between the E. Gd. and W. Gd., .M. agrees with the former in four, and 1 with the latter only in tivo. Having regard to this circumstance, M. must be considered to rank with the E. Gd. rather than with the W. Gd. group. Moreover, of the two points in which M. agrees with W. Gd., one is syntactical, while all four points which it has in common with E. Gd., are morphological. This show's still more eiea^y the E. Gd. character of M. ; for languages are classi- fied according to their morphological characteristics *). Further, the points which are peculiar to M. are the fol- lowing: 1) its pronunciation of the palatals, as ts, cl#, etc. (see § 11), audits disaspiration of a medial aspirate (see § 145.exe. 2., e. g., vichi't scorpion for viclihu ) ; 2) its possession of a peculiar form of the singular possessive pronoun (see §§ 450. 430, 5) 2 ); 1J This is illustrated by an observation which Bs. J, 102 quotes from a native author (Shastn Vrajlal Kahdas m his History of 4he Gujarati Language pg. 50). „If a native from the North (speaking W Hindi) comes into Gujarat, the Gujarati people find no difficulty m understanding his language; but when people from the South (speaking Marathi) come to Gujarat, the Gujarati people do not m the least comprehend what they say. u The reason simply is, that although syntaeticelly G. does not differ either from M. or W. H., yet m its morphological characters it differs widely from M , while it agrees very closely with W. H. 2) e g., M. mdjha mine, but E. Gd. mor, W. Gd merau or maro. XVI INTRODUCTION. 3) of a distinct oblique form singular of all nouns (see § 3 63) 1 ); 4) of a peculiar present resembling closely in form that tense which, in common with all other Gd. languages, it uses as a pre- terite subjunctive (see § 501); and 5) of a peculiar conjunctive participle in tin (see § 491). For these reasons, as well as be- cause, with respect to the points before referred to, M. is neither decidedly E. Gd. nor W. Gd„ it must be considered to constitute a group by itself. This third group will be called, in this trea- tise, the Southern Gaudian speech . The case of Naipali (including Garhwali and Kumaoni) very much resembles that of Marathi. It agrees with W. Gd. in the following points: 1) the final o of the strong masculine nouns of the debase (see § 48); 2) the final o of the short pronouns (see §437, 3. 4); 3) the medial e of the singular possessive pronouns (see § 450); 4) the preference of the strong form m nouns of the a-base\ 5) the possession of an active case made the affix le (= ne of the W. Gd., see § 371); 6) the formation of the pre- sent by adding the auxiliary verb child to the ancient tense (see §501); 7) of the past by the suffix yo or %yo (see §§ 305. 503); and 8) of the infinitive by the suffix an (see § 3 20).^ On the other hand, N. agrees with E. Gd. in the following points; 1) the pronunciation generally 2 3 ) ; 2) the final d of the obliqtte form singular of strong masculine nouns of the a-base (see § 363) 8 ); and 3) the formation of the future by adding the auxiliary par- ticiple P lti to the ancient present tense (as in the M. future and the E. H. present, see pg. X, XIV and § 509); and 4) the active construction of the past tense of transitive verbs (see § 487). Here agaim it will be observed that of the six important points before mentioned, N. agrees with the W. Gd. in three } and with the E. Gd. in three; but while of the 'former all three, of the 1) e * &*> ghard of ghar house; ham of ham poet; gurti of guru teacher; ghodyd of ghodd horse; vichvd of vichu scorpion; pan yd of pdni water. 2) e. g., often n for Z; short e and o 3) e. g., gem sg. hum ho of huro word. INTRODUCTION SVII , latter only two are morphological characters. It follows accor- dingly that N. is more closely allied to the W. Gtf. than to the E Grd. group of languages. Further, N. stands by itself m the following points: 1) the aspiration, m certain cases, of a medial consonant 1 ); 2) the sof- tening, occasionally, of an initial hard consonant 2 ); 3) the active affix le. These are not very important matters; but taken to- gether with the other fact, that in the six main points N. is di- vided in its affinity between the W. and E. Grd., they show that it must be looked up&i as constituting a separate group of its own , which I shall call in this treatise the Northern Gaudtan speech. Perhaps the circumstance which brings out most clearly that both M. and N. are really separate forms of speech as well as the W. and E. Gd. is this: that, as regards the past tense of tran- sitive verbs, M. agrees morphologically (suffix at) with E. Gd. ? but syntactically (passive constr.) with W. Gd., while on the other hand N. agrees morphologically (suff. ya or ia) with W. Gd., but syntactically (active constr.) with E. Gd. The result, then, so far arrived at is, that there are four great fori^s of speech, occupying the whole of North-India (viz. N Gd., W. Gd., S. Gd., and E. Gd), At a former period each constituted a single language. They have gradually broken up into varieties which in the W. Gd. and E. Gd. have already become distinct languages, while in the N. Gd. and S. Gd. they are as yet ' no more than dialects. Further, it has appeared thajb these four great forms of speech naturally divide themselves into two greater groups; one comprising the N. Gd. and W. Gd., the other the S. Gd. and E. Gd. This circumstance, then, points to a still more remote period m the glottic history of India, when there 1) Apparently only when there was originally a double consonant; e g , N. aphu self, for H. dp, Pr. appa, N. aghi before, for H. age, Pr. agge ; N. bdlakh child, for H bdlak , Pr. valdkho ; N. mdjhad for H mdjat , Pr. majjanto , etc.; see S Luke 1, 17. 24 41. 11, 39. 2) e. g., root gar to do for Icar . xvtn INTRODUCTION. were only two great varieties of speech current in North India, r which divided that country diagonally between them, the one occupying the north-western, the other the south-eastern half. These two greater glottic divisions I shall designate, for reasons to be explained presently, the Sauraseni Prakrit tongue and the Magadhi Prdkiit tongue respectively. The oldest Prakrit grammar, which we possess (that of Yararuchi, 1 st cent. B. C.) enumerates four varieties of Prakrit; viz. the Prakrit proper, the Sauraseni, the Magadhi and the f Paisachi The first of these is commonly called the Maharashtri (now Marathi); the Sauraseni (now Braj) and Magadhi (now Bihar!) take their names from the provinces which form the cen- tres of the W. Gd. and E. Gd areas respectively: the Paisachi is ascribed by some later Pr. grammarians *) to Nepal among other places. Hence it might be thought, that those four ancient Prakrit varieties are coordinate forms of speech and correspond to the four Gaudian speeches. This view, however plausible at first sight, is certainly erroneous. The whole subject of the relation of the Prakrits, as learned from the old native writers* to the Gaudians, as known to us by actual experience , is involved in £much con- fusion and obscurity, partly because of the sometimes uncertain, sometimes (seemingly) contradictory statements of those authors, r partly on account of the apparent discrepancy in phonological and morphological characters between the Prakrits and the Gaudians. The most probable account of the matter seems to be the fol- lowing. There are in reality only two varieties of Prakrit. One in- cludes the Sauraseni and the (so-called) Maharashtri. These are said to be the prose and poetic phases of the same variety, and even this distinction is, probably, artificial. The other is the Magadhi. The relation of Paisachi to these two varieties may be roughly de- scribed as that of Low or Yulgar to High-Prakrit. The latter 1) e &*5 by Lakshmldhara in his Shadbhasha Chandrika, see Ls. 13. INTRODUCTION. X5X was used m literature, and never strictly a spoken language ; it was more or less artificial from the very beginning, and ’became still more so in course of time. On the other hand, the Low-Prakrit (or Paisachi) was the spoken language of the people; that is, pro- bably in the beginning, of those aborigines, who fell under the domination and influence of the Aryan immigrants, and in whose mouth the Aryan vernacular was distorted into Paisachi. For that name is a term of contempt; the uncouth dialect of the savages or cannibals , as the Aryans called it. It is ascribed by the native grammarians to the tnbtes, bordering on the Aryan area in the north (Himalaya, Nepal) and south (Pandya, Dakhan) l ). Again the most striking feature of the Paisachi is its change of the Aryan n, l and the sonants into n, l and the surds respectively, which latter are peculiar to the Dra vidian languages. According to Caldwell (Cp. Gr. p. 102 — 105) those languages had originally no ’Sonant mutes The Dravidians, therefore, when adopting Aryan speech, would naturally mispronounce its sonants as surds. All this time, of course, the Aryan immigrants had their own vernacular , understanding by that term the spoken language of the people as distinguished from its literary form. Gradually as-* the aboriginal population were amalgamated by the Aryan immigrants, the pecu- liarities of its Paisachi speech would naturally die out 2 ); and the Aryan vernacular, incorporating whatever in the Dra vidian speech was capable of assimilation, would remain the sole occupant of the field. This Aryan vernacular is called by the Pr. grammarians the Apabkramsa Prakrit, as being m their opinion a corrupted language in comparison with what they considered the purer, the 1) e. g., Lakshmidhara m the Shadbhasha Chandrika says* pisacha- desas tu vrddhair uktah, pandya kekaya vahlika sahya nepala kuntalah, sudesha bhota gandhara haiva kanojanas tatka. Ls. IB. 2) None of the Gaudians show any trace of the Paisachi change of sonants into surds though some have the n and l ; nor is any specimen of Paisachi found m the Pr plays (Ls. 888), the ancient Brhatkatha of Gu- nadhya is supposed to have been written in a Paisachi dialect (see Pischel Diss. inaug. 32, 33). Pais, clearly died out »at a very early period. INTRODUCTION. XK literary Prakrit (i. e., the Mh.-Sr. and the Mg.). In reality it was r * \ merely the illiterate vernacular of the people spoken by the side of the literary Saurasenf and Magadhf, and certainly more ancient than the literary Maharashtrf *). It follows, then, that the verna- cular of the Aryans when spoken by themselves is the Apabhramsa, and when spoken by the aborigines, the Paisachf. The Apabhramsa, however, of the Pr. grammarians exhibits the Aryan vernacular, as it was at a rather later period than that in which it became Paisachf in the mouth of the aborigines 1 2 ). Of the oldest Aryan vernacular (the Ancient Af '»y*/ /'/#'>" as T may call it) which was the contemporary of Paisachf and probably not greatly different from it, we have no record; unless, indeed, it be the Pali. In order of time, therefore, Ps. comes first, next the Ap. Pr., lastly Gd, ; but in order of descent the series is: Anc. Ap. (or Pali), Ap. Pr., Gd. 3 * * * * 8 ). 1) Compare e g the past part. pass. Sr. and early Ap. kadhido or ka- ludo , Mg. kadhide or kalnde , Mh kahio , later Ap. kahiu ,,said“. 2) In the time of the later Pr. gramm., at all events, the knowledge of what Ps really was, had become lost Though, following old tradition, they all give the rules of Ps.; yet when they treat of its relation to the Ap., they are constantly confounding the two, and sometimes even invent an altogether ney signification for Ps., making it equivalent to certain {more or less pure Skr.) styles of Ap. (e g., R T. in Ls. 23. & Exc. 6) — The chronological succession of the Pr. gramm is still far from settled (see PI Diss.), but Hemachandra in the 12 th century A. D., is probably the earliest grammarian , who mentions the Ap , while the first who notices the Ps. is Yararuchi in the 1 st cent. B C. (see Cw. VI), if not earlier. From this fact, however, it must not be concluded, that no Ap. existed in the time of Vararuchi. For the Ap. Pr. (even as known by H. C) has some older formg than the Mh. Pr , and the latter is already treated of by Yararuchi. The reason of his omitting all mention of any Ap was pro- bably, that he intended to treat merely of the high or literary Pr. varie- ties; and, of course, there would be a literary Ps. Pr. variety, whenever the aborigines had to deal with High-Prakrit. 8) Pais, or Pal. or Anc. Ap kathito , Ap. Pr. kadhido or kahido , W. Gd kahio or kahyo said) Ps ruiito, Anc Ap. rudito , Ap. roido } W. Gd. roto or royo wept) Pal. gamito ) Ap. Mg. gamide or Ap. Sr. gamido , E. Gd gail or geld or W. Gd. gato or gayo. INTRODUCTION. t* XXI I have spoken of the Apabhramsa or Aryan vernacular. But ■<* it must not be supposed that it was everywhere identical. The Aryan immigration gradually extended over an area, too wide to remain the home of one single form of speech. Accordingly the term Apabhramsa must be understood to be the collective name of several Aryan vernaculars, spoken in various parts of North India. It is invariably used m this sense by Pr. grammarians. They always define it to mean the language of JJie AbMras and other similar people'*'), i. e., briefly, of the lower orders, which constitute the mass of t*he population everywhere. In their enu- meration of the various Ap. , each of the provincial languages (as we now call them) occurs; e. g., Abhirl (Sindhi , Marwari), Avantf (E. Rajputanl), Gaurjari (Gujarati), Bahlika (Panjabi), Sauraseni (W. Hindi), Magadhi or Prachya (E. Hindi), Odri (Oriya), Gaudi (Bangali), Dakshinatya or Yaidarbhika (Marathi) and Saippali (Naipali?) 2 ). It will be noticed that in the above list the same Saura- seni and Magadhi Prakrits are enumerated by the Pr. grammarians as Apabhramsas or vernaculars, which they elsewhere treat of as literary or High-Prakrits. On the other hand, it will be noted that the (so-called) Maharashtri Prakrit does not occur in this list at all; nor, indeed, is it found in any list of Apabhramsas or vernaculars. This shows plainly that the Mh. Pr. was not looked upon as the vernacular of any people, and that it did not take its name from the Maharashtra (or Maratha) country.' In- deed, it is doubtful, by what right that name is given to the particular form pf Pr., which commonly bears it. In the oldest Pr. grammar of Yararuchi it is never so called, except once in- 1) Thus L Dh. m the Sh. Ch : apabhramsas tu bhdsha sydd abhird- digirdm chayah (Ls 12). The Abhirs, or Ahirs as they are now called, are a tribe, members of which are found m every part of North-India. They are cowherds hy profession, but are considered by the natives to be a „good u (Aryan) caste, a sort of inferior Rajputs. 2) See the lists of K I and R. T. in Ls. 18. & Exc. 5. 7. XXII INTRODUCTION. cidentally at the end of the chapter on Sauraseni 1 ). Again it is to be remarked that the great grammarians of the West and South, * Hemachandra, Trivikrama and Subhachandra, who must have been familiar with the living Marathi vernacular, avoid the name alto- gether. The dialect m question is called by them simply the Prakrit. They, probably, felt that the name was misleading. It is only in the Pr. grammarians of the East, Kramadesvara, Markandeya, Lakshmidhara, Ramatarkavagisa, etc., that the name Maharashtri is distinctly given to the dialect and connected with the Maharashtra country 2 ). This goes far beyond what is justified by Yararuchi’s incidental use of the term. The probability is that they misunder- stood his meaning. For he seems to use the term not as a proper name, but as a laudatory or descriptive expression, meaning „the Prakrit of the great kingdom “ (i. e., of the famed country of the Doab and Rajputana, see note 1 on p. XXY) and therefore the principal Prakrit. According to this view the term Maharashtri is not far from synonymous with what we now call Western Hindi. At all events, whatever interpretation may be given to the term, there can be no doubt that, as a matter of fact, the dialect so called is Western Hindi, and has no one point in c&mmon with Marathi, in which the latter differs from Western Hindi (or W. Gaudian generally). Thus the Mh. Pr. past participle is made with ia (or yd) as in W. H., not with al as in M., the future is made with iha as in W. H., not with the auxiliary participle la as iif M. ; and the same is true, as will be shown afterwards (p. XXYII), m regard to the termination of masculine nouns with an a-lase and to the oblique form or genitive singular. Thus in 1) After finishing his remarks on the Sr , he says * „the rest of that dialect is like the Maharashtri 44 (sesham mdhar&shtrwat Yr. 12, 20); whence it is rightly concluded that by the name Mh. he refers to that Pr. dialect, which he had' before treated of simply as the Prakrit. 2) Thus K. I. or rather his commentator. „the Prakrit of the Ma- harashtra country is the jirincipal Prakrit 44 iprdhrtam maliardshtradesiyam prahrshtahMsMyam)] in Ls 17. INTRODUCTION. four out of the five important morphological points Mh. Pr. agrees with W. H., and not with M. ; the remaining point (the strong form of masculine nouns of an a-base ), being common to both W. H. and M., is of no account m the question. It appears, then, that the Mh. Pr. is merely a particular form of ancient W. H., or rather since W. H. has become a distinct language in more recent times, of W. Grd. And Sr. Pr., as its name indicates (Su- rasena being nearly the same as Braj), is another form of the same. Together they * represent tho old W. Gd. speech. This fact is indicated by the peculiar manner of their use in the Pr. plays. For they are hot employed as the languages of different peoples, but of different kinds of composition, Mh. for poetry, the Sr. for prose 1 ). It has been already remarked that Pr. grammarians enu- merate among the Apabhramsas or vernaculars a Magadhi and a Sauraseni Apabhramsa. The two great Pr. varieties, the Magadhi and the Sauxasem-Maharaslitri , are simply the high or literary forms of these two low or Apabhramsa ones. They are, probably, to some extent artificial , yet there can hardly he a doubt — as the following comparison will show — that they have retained the leading peculiarities of the two vernaculars, of which they are the refinements. The fact that these two vernaculars, the Mg. Ap. and. the Sr. Ap., have furnished both the substratum and the name for the two great High-Pr. varieties, proves that they were the two leading vernaculars of North-India, typical of all the others. Ac- cordingly we find that Pr. grammarians (as Markandeya, etc.) arrange the eastern dialects in a great group around the Mg. Pr. as their type. Among those which they name as its members, the following are the most important: the Magadhi, Arddhama- 1) Thus Visvanatha Kaviraja in the Sahityadarpana says. „noble and educated women, speaking in prose, are to use Sr., but Mh. m speaking m verse f ‘ (see Ls. 35). XXJ,Y INTRODUCTION. gadhi, Dakshinatya, Utkali, and Sabari 1 ). Magadhi is the speech of modern Bihar and (western) Bangal, and corresponds generally to the present Bangali (inch of the E. H. dialects, the Magadh and Mai- thili). Arddhamagadhf is described as a mixture of Magadhi and Sauraseni (or Maharashtri) 2 ) ; it follows that it must have been spoken to the west of Magadhi, that is. m the Banaras district; it corresponds, therefore, to the Bhojpuri or the E. H. proper. Dakshinatya is the speech of Vidarbha, the modern Berar 3 ) and adjoining districts. It corresponds, therefore, to the Dakhani, one of the principal dialects of the present Marathi, and thus to this language generally 4 ). Utkali is the speech of what is now called Orissa, and corresponds to the modern Oriya Sabari is the name of the dialect spoken m the country lying between that occupied by Dakshmatya on the one side and Magadhi and Utkali on the other (about the town of Ratnapur and the Mohar mountains). It will be seen, then, that the Mg. group of the Pr. grammarians consists of wbat we call now the Bangali, Eastern Hindi, Oriya and Marathi languages, at a time when, probably, they were still dialects only of one great speech. Or, in other words, the ol<;l Mg. group includes both (what I call) the eastern and southern Grau- dian speeches. Accordingly I have given to the two combined the name of the Magadhi Prakrit tongue . r In like manner, the same grammarians arrange the western dialects in a great group around the Sr.-Mh. Pr. as their type. 1) So R. T. m the Prakrit Kalpataru, see Ls. 21. 2) Md. quotes a saying of Bharata, that it is like Sr. ( saurasenya aduratvad igam eva arddhamdgadlii iti bharata; 12 th pada, fol 49), and K. I. 12 (see Ls. 17. 398) connects it with the Mh (mdhdrdshtrmisrarddha- magadhi). The description of E. H as Arddhamagadhi, l. e half magadhi, is a very good one, for E. H has affinities with both Bangali (== Magadhi) and Western Hindi (= Maharashtri-Sauraseni) 8) So m the S. D . dakshinatya vaidarbln (see L. 86. 20). 4) Dakshmatya is used to the present day in North India as a syno- nym for Marathi; e. g. ? Marathi Brahmans are generally known only as Dakshinatya Brahmans. INTRODUCTION. ixv The most important members of this group are the Maharashtri, Sauraseni, Avanti, Prachya, and Sakki. The Maharashtri and 'Sau- raseni together represent W. Hindi; out as the future in xh is peculiar to Mh., and the fut. in is to Sr. (see Ls. 35 3, 4.), and on the other hand the Br. and Kn. have the fut. in ill, but Mw. the fut. m cis (or is), it appears that Mh. corresponds to Br. and Kn., to which may be added Eastern Panjabi, while Sr. corresponds to Mw., and also to G. as having the same future m as (or is ) *). Avanti is the speech of Ujjain and Eastern Rajputana. Prachya, as its name indicates, is the most eastern member of the group and, probably, corresponds to Baiswari 2 ). Sakkf is, probably, the speech of Sindh and the Western Panjab 3 ). Thus it appears that the Mh.-Sr. group consists of what we now call Western Hindi, Gujarati, Panjabi and Smdhi. To these, for reasons previously ■seated, Naipali must be added. In other words, the Mh.-Sr. group represents the Western and Northern Gaudian speeches; and accor- dingly I have called the two combined the Sciurasent Prcihrit tongue . 1) Surasena is the name of the country about Mathura or of the Yraj ; but it must be remembered that Sr. and Mh are with the Pr. gram- marians not exactly the names of local, but of prose and poetic dialects Vararuchi ipr Katyayana, the author of the Yartikason Pamm, see PI 12), m whose Pr. grammar the term Mh. first occurs, lived according to Hindu tradition about 55 B 0 at the court of the „great kmg“ Yikramaditya (see Cw. YI), whose dominions included the whole of N W. India. The principal „speech of that great country* 1 or Maharashtri, as Vr calls it, was taken by him, and after him by all Pr. grammarians, as the standard Prakrit # 2) Prachya is explained m the S. D as being equivalent to Gaudi (prctcliya gaudiyd , see Ls 36) or, apparently, Bangalf But, on the other hand, Md makes Prachya to be an offshoot of Sauraseni (prdchydsiddhih saurasenydh 10 th pada, fol. 47), while, aecoidmg to Dandi (seeLs.JSS), the Gaudi follows the Mg type Besides, in another place, in a list of Apabh- ramsas, both Md and R. T (see Ls. Exc. 7) distinguish the Pracha from the Gaudi If, then, the Gaudi is or the Sr. type, it can hardly be anything else than the Baiswari, the intermediate dialect between E. Gd. and W. Gd. 3) Sakki is apparently the language of the Sakas (Iat sacae, Scythians) who overran W. India and were defeated in a great battle by Vikrama- ditya. In Sindh, many names of villages and towns contain the name Saka; e. g., the town Sakkar on the Indus. INTRODUCTION. XXVI Mg. Pr., then, coincides with S.-E. Grd. and Sr. Pr. with N.-W. Gd. in their geographical limits. It remains to he shown that they do so philologically also. It must be remarked m limine, 1) that the particulars noted by the Pr. grammarians with respect to the va- rious Apabhramsas are extremely scanty and, for the most part, only phonological. From this it may be justly concluded — wh^t, indeed, is probable a priori — that the Aps. did not materially differ from their respective High-Pr forms in their great mor- phological and phonological featuies, 2) that the silence of the Pr. grammarians as to any particular pesuliarity, now found in modern vernaculars, does not necessarily prove its non-existence in their time; fpr they note only those peculiarities of Pr., which they could, satisfactorily to themselves, trace to a Skr. origin; all others they simply left unnoticed as being desya (see p. XXXVII); 3) that the dialect which is treated of by Pr gramm., such as Hemachandra, simply as Apabhramsa , probably occupied m the western division a position analogous to that of the other which is spoken of simply as Prakrit; i. e., one is the Apabhramsa as the other is the Prakrit 1 ). But, as m the case of the Pr., so also in the case of the Ap. it must, no doubt, be understood, that its rules, unless where the contrary is expressly stated, extend to all other Aps. also. We now proceed to the examination. Of the already men- tioned six important characteristics, the syntactical one (regarding the construction of the past tense) must be at once set aside. The Pr. grammarians never refer to this point at all; and from Pr. writings very little evidence is to be obtained on the subject; 1) With Md. this chief Ap. is called Nagarapabhramsa; he expressly connects it with the Mh-Sr., the Pr. of the western division (ndgaram tu mahardshtrisaurasenyoh pratishthtam ) ; e. g., respecting conjugation: atra cha karei dharei ityadau tasya svaraseshatvam mahdrdshtrydsrayenci laredi dharedi ity adau datvam sawrasenydsrciyena mantavyam (17 th pada, fol 53. 55); its identity with W Gd is shown by the fact, that Md. gives the characteristic W. Gd. possess, pronouns mera, Ufa , to the Nag. Ap. ( tvadiye teram , madiye meram 17 th pada, fob 56). INTRODUCTION. XXVII though what little there is makes in favour of my theory (see % § 3 71). There remain, then, the five morphological points. In regard to these, there is a striking coincidence between Ike evi- dence of Pr. gramm. and plays on the one hand, and the result of our enquiry concerning the difference of Mg. and Sr., on the other. Thus, firstly: Pr. gramm. state that nouns with an a-base end in o in Sr. P., but in c in Mg.; our enquiry shows that in W. Gd. and N. Gd. they end in o (or au) , but in S. Gd. and E. Gd. in d, which vowel appears to be a modification of the Mg. e (see §§ 47. 4^3). Secondly: according to the Pr. gramm., the Western (cf. note on pg. XXVI) Ap. Pr. has a genitive singular (= oblique form, § 3 66) m ake , the Mg. Pr. in dha\ according to our enquiry W. and N. Gd. have an oblique form in e, the S. and E. Gd. in d; here e is a modification of ahe and d of dim (see § 3 65, 1.6). Thirdly ; from our enquiry it appears that \Y. and N. Gd. use almost exclusively the strong form (m o ) for a-bases, while as to S. and E. Gd , it is used almost exclusively m M., much less in E. H. and very little m B. and 0. (see § 205). Now the existence of special rules in Pr. gramm ~ about the use of the •strong form (in ao = Skr. ah ah) in the Mh. and Ap. Pr., and its common occurrence in Pr. literature (see Ls. 288. 4 60. 475. VYb. 69) prove its extreme frequency in the great Mk.-Sr. vernacular. As to the other great vernacular, the Mg., there is only the scanty evidence of Pr. literature; and from this it would appear that the strong form was very frequent" m the* southern Mg. vernaculars, the Sakarf, Sabarf and, by analogy, Dakshinatya (cf. Ls. 431), but rare in the northern, the Arddhamagadhr (cf. Ls. 413, 7) There is, then, a sufficiently close agreement in this case also. ’Fourthly ; in Gd. the past participle passive is used to make the past tense active. According to our enquiry, the N. and W. Gd. use the past participle in ia or ya, and the E. and S. Gd. a past participle in al> Now Pr. gramm. state that the past par- ticiple in ia is peculiar to the Mh.-Pr. (Yr. 7, 3 2. Ls. 3 63). As to the Mg. Pr. they give no general rule; but in the few cases, XXYiII INTRODUCTION. where the past participle is expressly quoted, it ends in da (see Yr. 11, 15), and from another rule on the nominative it would % appear incidentally, that generally the past participle ended in ida (Yr. 11, 11. cf. Ls. 396, 4. 6. 400, 3 and H. C. 4, 260. 302). From Pr. literature it appears further, that in the Low-Magadhls d and d were apt to he changed into l (see Ls. 412. 423). Here again, considering the scanty evidence, the agreement is sufficiently striking 1 ). Fifthly, our enquiry shows that N. and W. Gd. use a future in ill or as , but E. Gd. m ah or zb. The latter is simply the future participle passive used in an active sense, precisely as E. Gd. employs the participle past passive to form an active past tense (see § 487). The W. Gd. future in ill, however, is also used in E. H. (see § 5 09); and it is to be noted that both future forms are promiscuously used in it in the sense of the impera- tive (or precative) and the future (§§ 4 98. 508, note). Now according to the Pr. gramm., the future in zli or iss is peculiar to the Mh.-Sr. Pr. (H. C. 3, 166 — 170. 4, 27 5), and from Pr. lite- rature it appears that the Mb. form in ih was used in Mg. also (see Ls. 413. 434); while the future in ab was confined to the lowest kinds of Mg. (Ls. 4 22; you will give). The letter fu- ture form was evidently considered very low. I know, indeed, only of that one instance of its admission into Pr. literature ; but under the circumstances, it is sufficient to establish the agreement in question 2 ). 1) It is quite possible that while the High-Mg had the termination ida (or ida) the Low-Mg vernaculars generally changed it into ila (or ala), but, that the latter was considered by the Pr. Pandits (supposing that the change of d oi rd to l had already taken place m their time) altogether too vulgar to be frankly admitted into literature, excepting a few rare cases, such as kale for hade or hade „done‘. Though it is also possible that the universal change of the termination ida into ila may have taken place after their time. 2) The compound forms of tenses (e. g., the M. future) which con- stitute another morpholog. character, afford us no help here. These cu- rious formations are neither found in the Pr. gramm. nor m Pr. liter. Either they were considered too vulgar to be noticed, or more probably INTRODUCTION. XXIX As regards the morphological characters, then, my contention that E. and S. Grd. together correspond to the old Mg. Pr., and W. and N. Grd. together to the old Sr. Pr. appears to be fully borne out, considering the kind and amount of evidence, that is available on the subject. It now remains to examine the phono- logical characters which, according to the Pr. grammarians, distin- guish the Mg. Pr. from the Sr.-Mh. Of these the following four are the most important. Mg. changes 1) s into s (Vr. 11, 3. H. C. 4, 288); 2) r into l (H. C. 4, 288); 3) j into y (Vr. 11, 4. H.C. 4,292), and 4} Jcsh into sJc (Vr. 11, 8. H. C. 4, 296). As to the change of s, r, j into s , l, y lespectively see §§ 16. 18. 20. As to the change of Ish into sic , according to the Pr. gramm., Ish changes in Mh.-Sr. Pr. into llh (Vr. 3, 29. H. C. 2, 4), but ex- ceptionally also into chchh (Vr. 3, 30. H. C. 2, 17) Now accor- ding to the analogy of all similar changes (e. g., of si into till or till Vr. 3, 11. 12), kick presupposes a form si , and chchh a form sch. It follows of necessity that at some period of the Indo- aryan \ernacular Jcsh must have been pronounced sometimes as si, sometimes as sch. But the link between these two forms sic and sch is s&; for the Mg. speaking peojile, according to their custom of turning s into s, would pronounce sic as si , and the palatal s of the latter would gradually palatalize the conjoint l into ch , making sch\ finally sch would change into chchh . Now in the change of Jcsh into Jclch there are two steps; viz. 1) Ish into si, 2) si into HJr, but in the change of Ish into chchh there are four steps, viz. 1) Ish into si, 2) si into si, 3) s7c into sch , 4) sch into chchh. It is plain that if these changes proceeded, on the whole, pan passu, the Mg. speaking people would have got only as far as si, when the Mh.-Sr. speakers had already arrived at Jclh. Now this is almost exactly what Vararuchi states they did not exist at all at that time, i. e. 6 or 7 centuries ago. It appears that the verb as „to be tt was the only verb used enelitically m Pr. times, and that the employment of the verb achh 3/ to be u and the participle gd „gone u and Id „come w m this manner is of later date. XXX- INTRODUCTION. to have been the case in his time; viz. Mh.-Sr. had Jckh, but Mg. had sk. Here sic must be, probably, interpreted as sic by the general rule regarding the change of sibilants in Mg. *) (cf. Ls. 3 98). But the form sk was only a passing step in the phonetic evolu- tion, the end of which has been reached long since, and now for some centuries already ksli is pronounced clichh or clih (see § 3 6). As the change of s into s is general in B. , partial in M., and rare m E. H. (see § 20), it is, accordingly, found that in most old tadbhava words B and M. have clih for ksh, but E. H. has kh or even h 1 2 ). The rule is not quite strict; nor, indeed, has it ever been so ; for many instances exhibiting the Mg. change of ksli to clichh occur already m the Mh.-Sr. Pr. (see Yr. 3, 3 0). Thus it appears from philological considerations not less than geographical ones, that, at some former period of its history, North India was divided between two great forms of speech, which I call respectively the Sauraseni tongue and the MdgcidM tongue . Roughly speaking, their areas occupied, one the northwestern, the other the southeastern half of North-India. Their boundary line coincided with that which now divides the areas of the N. and W. Grd. from those of the S. and E. Gd. speeches. But^there is reason to believe that at a still earlier period the limits of the Mg. area extended further towards the North West. For 1) the following morphological characters of the Mg. tongue are found in different parts of the Sr. area; a) the termination d of the strong masculine nouns with an a-base in P. and, to a certain extent, in Br. and Kn. ; b) the termination d of the obli- 1) Pr. literature, apparently, has no example of sk or sk (cf. Ls. 408- 428); but it has numerous examples of st, where H.C. gives st (see Cw. 181) H. C. and T. Y. have the conjunct hk with the jihvamuMya insarga for s , except m the case of preksh ,J;o see", where, curiously enough, all the steps are actually given: viz. prekbhate and peskadi (or peskadi) m T Y. 3, 2 84 and peschadi or pechchhai m T. Y. 3, 2 82 (cf. H. C. 4, 295. 297). 2) e. g,, B. kdclihe , near'* f ,,at u , E H kdhi (Skr. kakshe ); orB. mdchln> M. mdsi, E. H. mdkln (or mdchhi) „fly tt (Skr. makshikd ); or B. dachhin , M dasni , E. FI. daklun (or dachhin) ,, south'* or ddhm % right (Skr. dakshi^ah). INTRODUCTION. XXXI 1 que form singular in G., M., E. R. and, again to some extent, in Br. and Kn ; c) the genitive affix, which is not only in E. Gd. (hai, hat, er, ar ), but also in Br. and Kn. ( hau ) and probably in M. (did or old M. clnya) a modification of the Pr. harlo (Skr. krtah ), while G., P. S., and, probably, Mw. use one of a different origin (see § 877); d) the compound future in Id (or lo) which is possessed by N. and E. R. by the side of the Sr. future in ill (see § 509, 4); e) the past participle m al which is found in E. R., in as much as it is contained m the enclitic Id of the compound future, which is a curtailment of the past participle mid „come u (see § 509, 4). Again 2) there occur in the Sr. area th£ follow- ing phonological characters of the Mg.: a) the change of l to n is found m N. (m the compound future see § 509, 4) and in G. and P. (m the active affix non, num, see § 375); b) the change of l to r is found also in S (see § 16, also § 14 on m ). It is also worth noting that the Pr. writers themselves supply indications of the partially Mg. character of E. R. and G.; the latter (called Abhiri), though generally classed with the Sr. group, is once included by R. T. m the Mg. (see Ls. Exc. 3); and as to E. R. or *Avanti see Ls. 417. 419 *). Generally speaking, it wilJ be observed, that the Mg. characte- ristics, beginning with a very few and isolated traces in the far West, increase in number, as we proceed towards the East, till at last at the present frontier of the E. and S. Gd. areas they pre- dominate so as to constitute the Mg. tongue. These circumstances seem to disclose the fact that sometime m the remote past the Mg. must have reached up to the extreme western frontiers and been the only language of North India; but that in course of time it gradually receded more and more towards the South and East 1) Still the general character of the Avanti or E. R is Saurasem; thus Md, calls it expressly „a mixture of Mh. and Sr 1 ( avanti sydn maha- rdshtrisaurasenyos tu samhardt , anaydh samhardd avanti dhdshd siddha sydt 11 th pada fol. 47 b ); and afterwards he says that Bahliki is allied to it (i dvaniydm eva vahliki ibid. fol. 48 a ); see also Ls. 435.436. Xi-Xll INTRODUCTION. before the advancing tide of the Sr. tongue, leaving, however, here and there in the deserted territories traces of its former presence. What the eastern and southern frontiers of the Mg. may have been in those early times, when it reached to the far West of India, it is impossible to say. Very probably, as it receded before the Sr., it may have conquered fresh territories in the' South and East which had uot been before occupied by any Aryan tongue. The head- quarters of the Sr. tongue, whence it gradually spread toward the North-East and East, appear to have been in western Bajpu- tana. It is possible, in some measure, to trace the direction and extent of its advancing tide. Thus a) traces of its past participle in ici are found as far east as m B. and 0. (see §§ 305. 508), but not in M. ; b) traces of its oblique form m e are found as far east as m the Bh. and M. ; c) traces of its future in ih are found as far east as in Bh. It will be seen, that the tide is fullest in the West (especially in Sindh, the Panjab and Western Rajputana), but gradually grows weaker and narrower as it ad- vances eastward, mainly following the course of the broad valley of the Granges, and working itself like a wedge into the Mg. area, which overlaps it on its southern and northern banks, m the E. R., Gr. and N., in which the Mg. relics are most noticeable. ' From these indications it would appear that the Mg. tongue is the older of the two; that is, that its occupation of North India preceded the developement and extension of the Sr. Perhaps this may be taken to point to the fact that two great immigrations of people of the Aryan stock into India took place at different periods, both speaking essentially the same language, though in two dif- ferent varieties. For there can be no doubt that the two varie- ties, the Mg. and the Sr., whatever their differences may be, are essentially the same language, of which the Sanskrit variety, being its literary or high form, preserves on the whole the oldest phase. Thus one of the most striking points of identity is the ancient Skr. present tense active, which is preserved to the present day INTRODUCTION. XXXIII • in all Gd. languages of North-India alike (see § 474) 1 ). Even in those cases where the outward shape or grammatical use of a particular form widely diverged, the original unity can be traced by easy and natural steps. Thus as to outward shape, the E. Gd. future in ab or ib can be traced back (see § 314) to the ancient participle future passive in tavyci (or itavya ), and the E. and S. Gd, past tense in al or il to the ancient past participle passive in ta (or ita\ which, m an other direction, has given rise to the N. and W. Gd. participle in ia. These two instances are also examples of a change 'in grammatical use. For in E. Gd. the two participles, which had originally a passive sense and indeed have it still in S. and W. Gd., are used to form active tenses, viz. the participle future passive m Itavya to form the future active in ah or tb , and the participle past passive in it a to make the past ‘active in al or tl. Here the intransitive verbs, the „ passive “ of which naturally becomes a „ middle voice afford the connecting link (see §§ 303, note. 309. 371. 487). We'have traced the Mg. tongue back to the extreme western frontiers of North India. Beyond that line lie the areas of the Pashtu and Kafiri languages. They immediately adjoin that of the present Panjabi. Trumpp m his essays on those two languages 2 ) has called attention to their many affinities with the Gaudians. Among these there are some with both of the principal varieties of Gd., the N.-W. Gd. or Sr. and the S.-E. Gd. or Mg. But what is, perhaps, more remarkable than the mere fact of their affinity is that, in some of the oft-mentioned great test-points, they — and more especially the Pashtu — exhibit decided Mg. characteri- stics. Thus a) the masculine strong form of a-bascs ends in Pashtu with ai, '*■,■■■■ -j to E. and S. Gd. d, Mg. Pr. ad; b) the past participle ends with cdai (strong form) or al (weak form) 1) Modern M. is an exception in using this old pres tense as a habitual past; but old M. retains it as a present tense. 2) See J. G. 0. S. vol. 20 pg. 377 and vol. 21 pp. 10 ff. 28. c XXXIV INTRODUCTION. corresponding to (strong form) ala in M. and (weak form) al in E. H. 1 ); c) the Kafiri has a compound future made with the enclitic participle la, just like the M. future and the E. H. pre- sent 2 3 ); d) the auxiliary verb has in Pashtu an initial $ , like the initial s of M., which is a modification of the E. Gd. chh^); e) Pashtu like M. has a double set of palatals, viz. ch and is, j and dz. Lastly f) Pashtu has the dative affix lah , like the M. Id, and the dative affix vatah , like the E. H. bate or bare . It would appear from this, that the Mg. Pr. and the Pashtu and Kafiri were once in close connection, "perhaps one language; and that, at some time in the remote past, they became separated by the Sr. Pr. tongue, like a wedge, cleaving them asunder and gradually pushing the Mg. farther and farther away towards the east. Accordingly four periods may be distinguished in the lin- guistic history of India. First, when the Mg. tongue, in some ^orm, was the only Aryan vernacular in North India. Secondly, when the Sr. tongue existed there beside the Mg. Thirdly, when these were broken up, each into two speeches, the W. and N. Gd. and the E. and S. Gd. Fourthly, when these four speeches were subdivided into the several Gd. languages. The last period is that now prevailing. As to the date of the first period we know nothing. The earliest Pr. grammar of Yararuchi (1 st cent. B. C. or earlier) already discloses, in the second period, the two great 1) e. g., weak form Psh. bred = E. H. bayal , B. Jcaril = Ap. Mg. ''hande, Skr. brtah ; and strong form Psh. bar alcu = M. held (for haild = hanla) = Ap. Mg. + haridae , Skr brtabah. — The other, i. e. the Sr., form of the past part also occurs m Psh It ends m a Quiescent (weak form) or m ai (strong form), precisely as in W. and N. Gd.; e. g. , weak form Psh. bar or brah „done a , 0. H. bar or ban = Ap Pr. barm , Mh. Pr. * bario , Skr. brtali; strong form Psh. barai — Bs bard or Br. barau or baryau = Ap. Pr. bariau , Mh. Pr. *hariao , Skr. brtabah. But it should be remembered that the E. Gd., too, has both part., to make the first and second preterites, see §§ 503. 505. 2) e. g., Kf. 3. sg. baldle , ; he will say l ‘ = M. bole\ E. H. bolaila. 3) e. g., Kf. si „he is“ = M. ase , 0. chhe or achhe , B. chhe or dchlie. INTRODUCTION. XXXV divisions of the Sr. and Mg. m occupation of North India. The earliest Gd. literature exhibits the third period already existing; for in the Western Gaudian poet Chand (end of 12 th cent. A. D.) W. H., P. and G. are indistinguishable; in the Southern Gaudian poets Namdeva and Dnandeva (end of 1 3 th cent. A. D.) M. is see- mingly separate; in the Eastern Gaudian poet Bidyapati (middle of 14 th cent. A. D. 1 ) B. and E. PI. are as yet one language. The later Gd. writers of the 15 th , 16 th and 17 th cent, (as the W* Hindi Kabir, the E. Hindi Tulsi Das, the Bangali Kabi Kankan, the Oriya Upendro Bh!inj , the Marathi Tukaram, the Gujarati Narsingh Mehta; see Bs. I, 82 — 9 6) show the modern division of the Gd. languages already existing. Note. I believe, it will be found on closer examination of the W. TI. that its two dialects, the Mw. and Bi\, must, in * reality, be classed as two diffeient languages of the W. Gd. group, in the same sense as P. and G. For Mw. and Br. differ from each other m the same degree, as either of those two from P. and G. Thus in declension: 1) the termm. of the obi. form sg. of strong masc. nouns of the a-hasc is d in Mw., but e in Br.; here Mw.* agrees with G., but Br. with P. ; e. g., Mw. ghord ro, G. gliodd no „of a horse “ ; Br. ghore kail , P. ghore del ; 2) Mw., like S., uses no active case-affix; but Br. has mm, corresponding to P. nai ; e. g., Mw. ghorcii , G. ghodde, „by a horse “; Br. ghore nem, P. ghore nai. In conjugation: 1) Mw., like G., forms the fut. ind. with the suff. as , but Br. with ih ; e. g., Mw. lamsi , G. Icarase but Br., bar that „ he will do“; 2) the auxiliary verb has chh m Mw. and G., but h in Br. and P. ; c. g., Mw. chluti, G. chhe „he is“; Br. and P. hat ; etc. 1) Or, according to Beames (Ind. Antiquary Febr. 1873), middle of the 15 th cent. XXXVI INTRODUCTION. Literary. Class. Skr. Table of Affinities. High = Vernaculars = Low Ancient Sansk. Pali Mh.-Sr., Mg. Anc Ap. Ap. Mg. Ap. Sr. E Gd. S Gd. W Gd. N.Gd | ‘ | ' H B., H. H., etc. 0 ,B., E.H. M. W.H , P.,G.,S. N. Semi- aryan Pais Urdu. EASTERN HINDI LITERATURE. As regards E. H. literature, there is 'very little to be said. In the E. H. proper or the Bhojpuri there is, apparently, no lite- rature whatever, either prose or poetry. All my inquiries on this subject have been alike fruitless. I have heard people say, that there are a few poems in the more easterly dialects of the E. II., as the MaithiK. But I suspect the reference was to the well known religious songs of Bidyapati and others of the Vaishnata school. These, however, belong to the earlier period, in which E. H. was not yet separate from B. The only specimens of literature of the strictly E. H. period are the writings of Tulsi Das, especially his great work, the Ramayan, a Hindi version of the well known story of Rama, though not by any means a translation of Val- miki’s famous Sanskrit work of the same name. The language of Tulsi Das, however, is not E. H. proper or Bhojpuri, but the Baiswari, which is a dialect formed by a mixture of W. and E. II. (see pp. V. VI). Tulsi Das was a native of Hajipur, a village near the celebrated hill of Chitrakuta in the state of Riwa, about 50 miles S. E, of the town of Banda in Bandelkhand, He lived from 1541 to 1624, Once he made a journey to Brindaban (and Delhi?); but for the most part he lived in Benares as mi- nister of the Raja of that town. For some more, mainly legem* INTRODUCTION. XXNVII dary particulars of liis life, see Garcm de Tassy’s histoire de la litterature Hindouie vol. 3, pp, 23 5 — 244, where also some other less known works of his are enumerated. All the other celebrated Hindi poets wrote m some dialect of W, H., generally Br. or Kn. The oldest of them is Chand Bardai, who was a native of Lahore, but lived at the court of Prithiraj, the last Hindu ruler of Delhi, at the end of the 12 tlA cent. He is the author of the Prithiraj Rasau, an epic poem re- counting the exploits of that monarch. He belongs , however, strictly speaking, to the pre-Hindi period, when W. H. was not as yet separate from P. and G. Next to him come Kabir of Benares in the second half of the 1 5 t]i cent., the author of the Ramamis and Sabd&s. After him are Sur Das of Mathura , Nabhaji and Keshava Das of Bijapur, the authors respectively of the Sursagar, * * the Bhaktamala and the Ramchandrika, etc. They flourished in the 16 th cent., during the reigns of Akbar and Shah Jehan, the Augustan age of North India. Then follow Bihari Lai of Ambir near Jaipur, the author of the Satsai, and Lai Kavi from Bandel- ldiand, the author of the Chhatra Prakas, in the 17 th cent. For further particulars as to the lives and works of all these poets, see the respective articles in Garcin de Tassy’s hist, de la litt. Hind. They all were natives of "Western Hindustan, except Kabir, whose sect (the Kabir-panthis) still numbers most of its adherents in the E. H. area. He was born in or near Benares, and died and is buried in Magahar near Gorakhpur in the Benares district.' Yet his writings are certainly not in E. H,, but in W. H, The fact is strange and has not, I think, been sufficiently noticed. Though he afterwards became a Hindu and even the founder of a Hindu sect, he was brought up originally by his Muhammedan foster- father in his own religion; and apparently he spent some part of his life m or near Delhi at the time of the emperor Sikandar Lodi, Perhaps one or both of these facts may be the reason of the peculiarity. XXXVIII INTRODUCTION. THE TERMS TATSAMA, TADBHAVA, etc. The term tatsama means lit. „the same as it“ or Sanskntic. It denotes properly those Gaudian words which have retained exactly the same form as they wore in Sanskrit; e g , E.H. bhrdtd „ brother “, rdjd „king“. But practically it includes all words which have been reintroduced into the Gd. directly from the Skr. , though in the process they have undergone slight phonetic changes, analogous to, but not so thorough as those which have been suffered by the tadbhava words (see§§4Gff); e. g., E. H. clihamd „ forgiveness for Skr kshamd; E. H. cigyti ,, command", for Skr. djnci ; E H. Vmiu „Vishnu“, for Skr. visJimth; E. H. kripd „ mercy", for Skr krpd; E. Ii. Icaram „work", for Skr. karma; E. H. putar „son", for Skr. putuih These might be called semdatsamas. « The term facTbhava means lit. „ having the same nature as it“ r or Prdkntic *). It denotes those Gd. words which, though the same in substance as in Skr., are considerably different in form. Practi- cally it includes all those words which have come into Gd. from the Prakrit, and not from the Skr. In the E. H. these 1) Pr. Gramm, distinguish two kinds of tadbhavas; thus $ R. (fol. l a ) 6 amshrtdbhav as cha dvidhd , sdddhyamdnasaniskrtabhavds siddhasanish'tabha- vds cheti ; i. e. „there are two kinds of words which have the same nature as in Sanskrit; viz. those which must be shown to be so, and those which are admittedly so." It is not quite clear, however, wherein the distinction exactly consists, as no examples are given Probably such forms are re- ferred to, as rat and ratti , night" (H. C. 2, 88), both for Skr. rdtrih. The latter (ratti) is a siddha tadbhava , for its identity with the Skr. rdtrih is evident and follows from the general rules (viz. H. G 2, 79. 1, 84); but the for- mer (rat) is a sdddhyanidna tadbhava , because its identity must be established by a special rule (viz. H. C. 2, 88). It will be seen that the distinction is analogous td what m Gd. I have a distinguished as semitatsamas from the proper tadbhavas (as putar and put j,son"), or to Beames’ distinction of late and early tadbhavas (see Bs. 1,18—17). But our „semitatsamas" or .late tadbhavas" are not identical with the Pr. Gramm, siddha tadbhavas , for the former ex hypothesi have not come through the Pr. at all, but are directly resuscitated from the Skr. at various periods. For this reason, and because they are clearly nearer in form to the pure tats, than to the pure tadbh., I have preferred to class them as a subdivision of tats, rather than (as Bs.) of tadbh. INTRODUCTION. XXXIX words are generally obtained from the A . Mg ; but sometimes from the Sr. Thus compare the following prakritic words with the above list of sanskritic ones: E. H. blu'd „ brother a for A. Mg. blidte; E. H. ray „king“ for A. Mg. Idyd or lad; E. H. khet „field c ‘ for A. Mg. Jchcttam (Skr. Jcshetram); E. H. ddlun „ right w for Pr. ddlimam (Cw. 100. Skr. ddJcshmam ) ; E. H an „ order a for Mg. anna (H. C. 4, 293); E. II. Icdnh „krishna <£ for A. Mg. Jcanhe (Skr. krishnalt ) ; E. H hsdn „ husbandman “ for A. Mg. kisdne (Skr Irshdnali ) ; E. H. kdm „work“ for A. Mg. hamme; E. H .piit „son“ for A. Mg putfe; e tc. It should be remembered that the Gds. are not descended from the high or literary (Mh.-Sr. and Mg ) Pr., but from the low verna- cular i or Ap (Sr. and Mg.) Pr. This fact explains, why some Gd. tadbhava words show a higher state of preservation than that ob- served in the corresponding words of the High-Pr ; for, in some ’instances, the latter had suffered a greater amount of decay than those of the Low-Pr. Generally speaking, the Low-Pr. is more tenacious of medial consonants than High-Pr. (see Ls. 396. 457). Thus E. H. rati „night“, Ap. (Mg.) Pr. latti (cf. H. C. 4, 330), but Iligh-Mh. Pr. rat (V r. 3, 58, but also ratti ) ; E. H. khdtl „eaten ££ , Ap. (Mg.^ Pr, Jch&tda , but Mh. Pr. Icluuo . Sometimes the more and the less perfect forms exist side by side; as E. H .gats (= gat + s „thou wentest 8 *), for Ap. (Sr.) Pr. gam si or gait do si or gamido si (Pall gamito si, High-Mh. Pr. gao si or gado si) and E. H. gaiUs or ga'des „thou wentest“, for Ap. (Mg,) Pr. gaida si or ganiide sl Hence, in some cases, it will always be doubtful whether a particular form must be considered as prakritic or sanskritic. Thus E. H. has both nair (or nayar) and nagar „town“ ; the former is clearly a tad- bhava for A. Mg. ngyalam or naalam ; but the latter may be either a tatsama for Skr. nagar am or a tadbhava for Ap. Mg. nagalam . Hative grammarians add the desya, as a third division, to the tatsama and tadbhava *). The term desya means lit. „ belonging 1) Thus S. R. (fol. l a ) ilia prdkrtasabdds tridhd , samslcrtasamds set- mskrtabhavd desyas cheti; i. e. „there are three kinds of Prakrit words, viz. the same as Skr., of like nature as Skr., and provincial (or country born). a INTKODUCTIO N. XL k to the country C£ , i. e , provincial or perhaps aboriginal. They designate by this name all those words which they are unable to derive satisfactorily ~ to themselves from some Skr. word and, therefore, consider to have had their origin in the country (i e., rnre or j provincut). In what way exactly they suppose them to have ori- ginated is not clear; namely whether borrowed from the abori- gines, or invented by the rustic Aryans themselves in post-sanskri- tic times (Beanies I, 1 2), or so corrupted by their common parlance from a Skr. original *as to make them unrecognisable, The last seems to me the most probable, to judge from the sentiment of modern Pandits on the subject. The results of modern research tend towards diminishing the number of these desya words, by disco venng< through means unknown ’ to native grammarians, their real origin and tracing them back to Pr. hnd Skr. In so far, they make m support of .the opinion of those grammarians. But the question, as to 'whether they are or are not Aryan, -is by no means decided thereby. A word may be Prakritic or Sanskritic, and yet- may not be Aryan; Whatever non-Aryan elements there may be in the Indo-aryan languages, they must have been incorporated in the earliest times; i. e., at the period, when Paisach^and the. Ancient Apabhramsa were spoken by the subject aborgines and their Aryan conquerors respectively, -and when old Sanskrit was the Aryan high language; a period which was anterior to that af what is now commonly called (classical) Sanskrit. Natives distinguish between the theth or gdmvdri and the khari or ndgari bhdshd. Theth means genuine or pure and gam vari means rustic or vulgar (from gdd = grdma „ village ££ ); again kh ari means standard and nagari urban or cultivated (from nagar „town tt ). The relation of these two bhashas is analogous to that of English or rather of the South-German dialects as spoken in the towns or by the educated and the same as in the mouth of the village peasantry. The difference exist mainly in the pronunciation and in the vocabulary. Thus, in the theth bhasha the auxiliary verb is pronounced bdrai or bdrai , but in the khari bhasha bdtai. Again in the latter, tatsama and even Urdu words arc much more fre- quently employed than in the former which is almost entirely desti- tute of them. The specimens of E. H. appended to this grammar, being written by a Pandit, are rather in the khari than in the theth bhasha. ALPHABET. FIRST SECTION. ON LETTERS AND SOUNDS. 1. GHAPTEB. THE ALPHABET. 1. The E. H. is commonly written in the Kaithi or SFTjpri’) alphabet. Its name is derived from Kayath (Skr. cpnnw), 'the designation of the writer-caste among the Hindus. Though it has a general resemblance to the modern Devanagarl, there are 'but few of its letters, which do not exhibit some points of dif- ference; indeed, as will be seen by a reference to the table, all the vowels, and the consonants M, ch, jh , bh, d, dh and r differ entirely in the two alphabets; and the horizontal top-line is omitted by the Kaithi in all letters alike 1 ). It will be further noticed, t^at in Kaithi the consonants Jc and ph , p and dh , r and l very closely resemble each other, being distinguished in each case merely by the addition of a hook or curve to the latter; again, that there is only one sign for each of the following groups of Nagarl letters: 1) A (properly = n) for the nasals 3 h, or HT n, ^ n ; 2) Si (a combination of $ and s) for the sibilants 3ST s , ST s, cr sh; 3) 3 for the labials sr b and or v\ 4) ?T (properly ~§) for the palatals ?r j and *7 y\ and also that of the two forms of ch one is very much like to one of the two forms «of dh , the other to one of the two forms of y. For the vowels Kaithi has only four fundamental signs: ^ 4 i, 6 $ e. The others 1) Sometimes a series of lines is first ruled across the page, and the letters are afterwards hung on to them. These lines must not be con- founded with the top-line of the Devanagari, and m native writing the two are easy to distinguish. 1 2 ALPHABET. § 2 .] are distinguished by diacritical marks, as shown in the table. In Manuscripts the initial % and u are rarely distinguished from i and u or the medial u from u. It will be seen that altogether the Kaithi alphabet has only twenty nine distinct signs. It is used in printing as well as in writing ; but owing to the preponde- rance of H. H., which ha§ adopted the Devanagari, the latter is much more common in books. I shall adopt it in this work also, as the more generally known of the two. 2. Affinities. Four principal types of alphabet are used in North-India; the Kaithi, the Bangali, the Oriya and the Gur- mukhi. The Kaithi is the most widely spread; it is used in wri- ting not only in Eastern, but also, slightly modified, in ‘Western Hindustan, Maratha and Gujarat. In G. and sometimes in E. H. it is adopted also in print. The Bangali, Oriya and Gurmukhi are used in Bangal, Orissa and the Panjab respectively, in wfi- r ting and printing. The Gurmukhi probably takes its name from being originally used in committing to writing the oral traditions of the Sikh Gurus (Hanak, etc.). The general likeness of these four types to one another as well as to the older Kutila and Gupta is unmistakeable, though their exact relation arming them- selves, their origin and age are matters not as yet fully elucida- ted. For some account of them see Bs. I, 54 ff. Besides these, there are two sub-types much in use in the area occupied by the Kaithi, to which they are the most nearly related. These are the' Hagari, or Devanagari and the Mahajani or Kothival. The first is an improvement, the second a corruption of the Kaithi or of its more ancient original. The exact meaning of the term Deva- nagari (divine city alphabet) is uncertain ; but it suggests its being, as it certainly is, a caligraphic (polished or sacred) wri- ting. The Mahajani (mercantile) is, as its name implies, the short- hand writing of the merchants and bankers, their Kothwdl or of- fiee-writing ; and is still commonly used by them. The Devanagari, on the other hand, is the type adopted for printing in Hindi and Marathi ; and as it is exclusively taught in the schools, it VOWELS. 3 § 3.] will probably in course of time entirely supersede the Eaithf; perhaps not altogether an advantage, as it can be written with less rapidity and ease than its rival. '1. TOWELS. 3. The E. H. possesses fifteen vowels; a neutral and four- f teen distinct ones, The latter consist of seven pairs, each con- taining a short and a long one. They are _L, a, d\ i, f, d, d] e , e; o, 6; ai, ai , ad, au. Five of these, the neutral vowel and the short e, o , ai , •are, according to the usual view u unknown to the Sanskrit phonetic System, and therefore have no place in the native grammatical scheme of sounds and characters. But in order to avoid the inconvenience of two different sounds being denoted by the same sign, I have ventured to introduce into the E*. H. alphabet, used in this treatise, five new characters. For the short e, o, ai, au I shall adopt the Gurmukhi or Bangali forms of the ordinary Nagari* signs, which differ from the latter merely in having a serpentine form ( s and *) instead of a slightly curved one and ^). For the neutral vowel I shall adopt a dot (*) placed after the consonant in the same manner as a stroke (i) is placed after it to denote the long a, in translitera- ting I shall use the apostrophe. Accordingly the signs of the fif- teen E. H. vowels are as follows: Initial: — %Td 3d 3iu $e %To & \6 \ai £ \au Noninit: v — t F si is Note : The neutral vowel requires no initial form, as it never occurs in the The short d has no non-initial form, as it is inherent in the consonant, which (tjII *i.ot be pro- nounced without it. When it is necessary to indicate the mere consonant, an oblique stroke, called the virdma or stoppage , is appended to the consonantal sign; thus apT kd, but sr 7c. The manner of writing the non-initial signs may be seen from the following examples ; h\ led , M, f % ki, 3Frt ki, eff kd, M, cfe he, zk Ice, kd, mt M, Sr kai, 3T ka% cprr Icau, kau . 4 VOWELS. I 4—6.] 4. The neutral vowel is the shortest possible vocal ut- terance, and very obscure in its character. It may be compared to the English u in but\ but it is shorter and more indistinct; like the vowel in the final syllables ble or tre, as in amiable, centre . It resembles the Hebrew Sh’va mobile ; just as e is like the Hebrew Khateph Segol , and o like the Hebrew Khateph Qamez. 5. The five special N E. H. vowels are principally met with in the following places: a) the neutral vowel is pronounced: 1 ) often in rustic speech, at the nnd of a word, instead of the quiescent a (see § 24), as ghar ’ house , for sqr ghar; and 2 ) in the penultimate of any word having more than two syllables and ending in a heavy one ; as sq"”5TT ghar’vd house ; srYs^oTT ghofvd horse ; sffprf har’ to if I did\ parh’lb I read , etc. A compound consisting of two poly- syllabic words is treated as if the words were distinct. b) the short o, at, ati occur 1 ) always in the antepenul- timate; e. g., sMot* betiyd daughter ; q^Yferr parbsiyd neighbouring ; crfe-cTT Ibfva vessel ; siWrsrr^ boldvai calling ; 2 ) optionally in the genitive affixes £FT he and hat as ghar he of the house (see § 3 72); 3) in the short pronominal forms in f (see $f433), as ^ jeh har of which (but ?r je har ) ; 4) in the conjuga- tional suffixes es , en and ^ ai (see §§ 504. 506); as GR^b^har’tes (if) thou didst ; parities he read ; j^j^^ratiles thou remamedsi ; har’ ten (if)- they did ; ^^‘^^parh , len they read ; har’tM (if) they did ; partild/i they read ; 5)_in the suffix 7 e .of the conjunctive participle (§ 490), as 5F? hahe he having said ; 6 ) in some frequently used words, as adr or £rr au and -(see § 26). 6 ., Affinities . The short vowels (they are not diph- thongs) e and b must have existed in Pr. already; thus before conjuncts, as in trip (or fSrr^T for f^nr Yr. 1, 12), t 3 T| (for Yr. 1 , 19), (for ifef Yr, 1 , 3 5), ferT (for SJETT Yr. 1 , 5), %T, (for ^ranr, Yr. 3, 58), etc.; and zfm (for gsRT Yr. 1 , 20 ), srYftri (for mcFf Yr. 1 , 41), fT^Yg} (for icrtesi Yr. 3 , 58), etc. VOWELS. 5 § 6 .] See Ls. 145. 149. Cw. XVIII. Their existence, however, is, I be- lieve, nowhere distinctly noticed by Pr. Gramm., except m the Ap. Pr. by H. C. (4, 410) and T. Y. (3, 4. 68), SRTf^^TfTq- i. e., after consonants e and o are usually pronounced short. — Both the short vowels e, o, at ) ati and the neutral vowel are peculiar to E. Gd. The subject, however, has been as yet little attended to by Gd. Grammarians. As regards the short vowels, B. shows the short e , e. g., in ek one , and short o in XTtq^ gum wheat , sri^r hole he speaks , etc. Oriya, generally, follows the example of B. (see Bs. I, 69). ?t is usual, apparently, to substitute a for o in ivrihng ; thus B. rr^, ; the same as occasionally m*E. H. (see § 26). It is probable, that originally all Gd. languages pos- sessed e and o ; S. has still preserved the e in some cases, but ordinarily it reduces e to % and always o to it (see Tr. X — XIII). The other W. Gd. languages always substitute i and u for e and o (as to e and 6 m P. see Ld. 4) ; even the E. Gels. do so occa- sionally, see § 26 (cf. S. Oh 330). The Psh. has both e and o (see Tr. J. G. 0. S. XXI, 33, — 35). — In B. the final of the weak ad- jectives, is pronounced like o, e. g., sra boro great ; but it must not be confounded with the real d which is a shortening of Wt d, while this o is a modification of ^ a ; as shown by 0., which pronounces a\ e. g., ST3 bard. E. H. agrees with the W. and S. Gds. in dropping the vowel a at the end of all words; see § 24. On the other hand, both the Psh. and Kf. still retain it (see Tr. J. G. 0. S. XXI, 33. XX, 393). — In tatsamas with a conjunct ? or before the final ^r, the latter is commonly pronounced, as wtm yogya worthy , error tatva substance . Note: The elision of a medial neutral vowel produces a con- junct consonant. Consequently in H. H. and in M. a conj. cons, is sometimes written, as H. H. fSr^rTT bmtl for binHi petition , H. H. cT^T dulhci for duVhd bridegroom , M. rdmyd for ^FF~£rr rdm’ya Ram , or siitut ghodyd for ghocVyd of a horse (obi. form). It would be well, if this system of phonetic spel- ling were carried out uniformly. 6 VOWELS. §7-10.] 7. The E. H. does not possess the four vowels ri , sf£ n, ofT Zn, ZH of the Skr. phonetic system. Even in Skr. they occur rarely and are more or* less artificial. In Pr. they had already disappeared; consequently they could not well survive in the modern Grd. In Hindi certainly, whether E. or W., they are never pronounced . In H. H. it is customary to write n in tats, words; but in speaking the syllable ri or even ir is always substituted ; thus Skr. ambrosia is always pronounced amrit (srfipO or amirt (^f^rf ); Skr. 3p e. Note : Both the true reading and the true meaning of the Pr. Gramm, rule, however, are doubtful. Vr. 11, 5 (MS., see Cw. 89) has horror STOTT rTqWr^CTr:, which is explained by Bhamaha "sromr OTT ri^D^ ijrnt Uorf?r i. e. ,,thc palatal- arc -o pronounced as to be d ist inct My MS. of Md. (1 2 tb pada, fol. 48 b ) reads : JSTTrn mxjjm : I f?^ t ii If the examples can be trusted, tlie true reading would seem to be 3^f\ U' ^JTr^ i. e. „ya is to be written above (i. e., as first part of a conjunct) the pala- tals and labials; this ya is an (inorganic) addition; e. g., ychiram long, ymaa (?)’ 51 ). My MS, is a Nagari copy of one in Oriya characters, in which ^ and and again ^ and would closely resemble each other. K. I. 3 (in Ls. 3 93) reads sq^mroFTT ^TT5T^T3T:, which would yield a sense similar to that of Md fe . rule : „the labials perhaps, rather: „ya in conj. with 1. and p. is slightly pron.” This is € confirmed by the example given in the rule on the Voca- tive (Md. 12, 22, fol. 49 a ); see § 48, note. 12. The cerebrals are pronounced by striking the tip of the tongue against the centre of the hard palate, the dentals by striking it against the edge of the upper teeth. It has been a matter of much controversy, whether or not the former are ori- ginally Aryan sounds. They constitute a prominent feature of the Dravidian languages, whilst among the Aryans they are peculiar 1) ymaa mother (mata) or illusion may a? CONSONANTS. 9 § 12 .] to India. Hence it has 'been commonly assumed that they are an importation from the former. This, however, is by no means cer- tain. I am inclined to agree with the opinion of Beames (I, 232 — 234), that cerebrals of some kind belong to the original stock of the Aryan phonetic system. If is a well known fact that the (so-called) dentals of all the Aryan languages of Europe, especially of England, when referred to the standard of the Indo-aryan (true) dentals are not real dentals at all, but cerebrals of more or less purity. They are formed by striking the tip of the tongue against the anterior part of tHe hard palate or the gum of the upper teeth ; and therefore are semi-cerebrals. To natives of India, whose ears are quick m detecting differences of pronunciation, they sound like real cerebrals and m transliterating English words, they al- ways represent our dentals by cerebrals, as director , certificate (cf. § 2l). The pure dentals, therefore, are as peculiar to the Indoaryan languages as the pure 'cerebrals and might with equal reason be adjugded non-aryan. It is far more probable that the original Aryan sound was a semicerebral (if not a pure ce- rebral) which has m India only, for reasons peculiar to that country, varied in two directions so as to become the true cere- bral and the true dental respectively. It is deserving of notice as making for this view, that the old Indoaryan (Sanskrit) cere- bral T and have also been dentalised in various parts of India. The truth seems to be, that the whole class of original Aryan cerebrals has been undergoing in India a process of gradual de- cerebralisation. The first to be affected were the consonants pro- per and ^ which had already in Skr. times become to a great extent dentals 1 ). The next was the semivowel t which was den- talised in the times of Mg. Pr. Finally the nasal became dental in the comparatively modern times of Grd. As the dentals 1) The old (Vedic) Skr. still preserves the old Aryan cerebral gs. Cp. vedic ST3 - gracious with Skr. TT gentle : also R. UJ or with STS’; R"2T With 'TrTJ 'TcT with Ref, etc. 10 CONSONANTS. § 13 .] are softer and smoother sounds than the cerebrals, it may be supposed that the enervating climate of the great North Indian plain was, at least, one of the causes determining that process. On the other hand, it is quite natural also, that in those forms of the Indoaryan languages which were current among the com- mon people, i. e., the Prakrits and Graudians, the original Aryan cerebrals should to a great extent have not only stood' their ground, hut even been more intensely cerebralized. For most of those people belonged to or, at all events, were most in contact with the aboriginal lira vidian population whose language, like their own, possessed the cerebrals. It is noticeable, that just as in Skr. times the old Aryan semicerebral consonants were often made fully cerebral, so in Pr. times in many cases the old (se- midental) iT 1 ) is cerebralized to UT^ and in Grd. times by the side of the old semicerebral ■j a fully cerebral ^ has been formed. — It may be added as some evidence against the Dravidian theory of the cerebrals, that though the Grd. languages have now been for centuries under the influence of Arabic and Persian, yet none of the sounds peculiar to the latter have been imported into them (see § 21). i r 18. The nasal 3F w, I believe, never occurs in E. H., ex- cept in conjunction with a following consonant of its own class, as ahgiya bodice. The others may occur by themselves. The oT _ n and both initial and medial, are occasionally heard in the njore vulgar (theth) forms of E. H.; thus orrfT ndhi no , ^rfiTorr agihd fire , narsingh manhon , unjtrr ndrain N dray an, ’TUTTl pani water . But in the higher forms of E. H. they are always changed to ^ n, as ^ T ^ nah% narsingh , etc. ; even in tatsama words with an original ut n ) as hdran cause for Skr. ^jTJC!T Tear ana. Hence the Kaithl alphabet has no special signs for and and following its practise, I also shall limit myself in this work to the use of, ^ n. When any of the five 1) The Europeo-aryan r and n are semicerebral or semidental. 14.] CONSONANTS. 11 •nasals are used as the first part of a conjunct, they are always indicated by a dot placed over the preceding consonant; as tfcfi pank mire , ant end . This dot is commonly called amisvdra , but it must not be confounded with the real Skr. anusvara which does not exist in E. H. (see § 23). 14. Affinities. The two nasals j and ^ (as non-con- juncts) had already been lost in the Mb. -Sr. Pr. (T. Y. 1, 1. 1. H. C. 1, 1). The latter (or), however, is expressly mentioned by Pr. Grammarians (Yr. 10, 9. 10. T. Y. 3, 2. 37. 3, 4. 61. H. C. 4, 293, 294. 392), as bccurring in Mg. Pr. (and also in Ap. and Ps. Pr.), where the Skr. conjuncts 3T ny and ny change to oop mi. Agreeably with this, oj occurs in E. Gd. (especially in the respective theth bhdshds) before or after the palatal vowel (^) or semivowel (sr ) ; thus E. H. ^fffoTT fire for ^ffrnur, Mg. Pr. ^rfrrftr^* (see Ls. 244 ^firnrl), Skr. • ; orTfT not for -arrft = ^ + (^r for rj or qr, as m B., see S. Ch. 3 3 1) ; B. ^TntofT order ( see S. Ch. 1 0) for (0. H.) SttferT (Skr. ^TtTT). So also in N. errfe at ,' by S. Lk. 10, 29 40 (H. n*) for Ap. Pr. errfhr or rut, Skr. ^rnr ; fersrr taken (S. Lk. 19, 8) for W. H. ^rbrr (=t^^rr) 1 ). S. which generally fol- lows E. (?d. phonological practices (cf. §§ 16. 18) keeps even more closely to the Mg. precedents; thus S. ), and, in fact, are the E. H. (Kaithi) signs of those tw^o sounds. To avoid misunderstanding, however, I shall employ m this w r ork the usual Devanagarf characters ^ s and ^ Jch. § 20 . 21 .] CONSONANTS. 25 20. Affinities The sound of had been already lost in all Prs. ; that of ST^ in the Mh.-Sr. and that of in the Mg. (Yr. 2, 43. 11, 3). Accordingly none of the Gds. have q^, the E. Gd. (exc. E. H.) has no W. and N. Gd. no S^. S. Gd. and E. H., follow, like their prototypes (the A. Mg. and Dk. Pr.), the example of the Mh.-Sr. and have, as a rule, no ST^. In other words, like their respective originals, E. Gd. (excl. E. H.) pronounces all three Skr. sibilants alike as s ; W., N., S. Gd. and E. H. as s , In H. II., however, and in the other literary forms of W. Gd. both q^ and are sounded m tatsama^, but alike as palatal s ; thus fsisr and T&cirr are Siva and visnn. — In writing, the character a , more or less modified in the different alphabets (see the table), is preserved in all Gds., and used as a symbol of ^ kk. Similarly E. Gd. uses 3^, and W. and N. Gd. and S. Gd. ^ and sp indifferently, as •a symbol for their one sibilant. In the literary or high forms of the various Gds., the use of all three characters ST, gt (not of their sounds), has been reintroduced ; chiefly in tatsamas ; in tadbhavas, owing to an imperfect knowledge of their derivation, they are sometimes wrongly employed by native writers. t 21. % Such foreign sounds as do not occur in the E. H. phonetic system, are assimilated in the following manner: 1 ) The semigutturals (arabic) Jf, ^ Jcji, £ gh and g or * h become respectively the pure gutturals a*, an d as spnraj for agreement , only or empty ; nffs^ pom", jl s> state ; tqr J? every . 2) The semipalatals (arabic) s and u& sh become pure dental fT^ and respectively ; as ready ; srrf§FrT^ proved ; master , sir; happy. 26 VISARGA. § 22 .] 5) The semilab lal o f becomes pure labial pronounced ph, not f as m W. H. ; e. g., or>2 (Den. R.), Mg. smq$ (H. C. 4, 13 6), E. H. qfq ' or’sTU ; Skr. £rqfq>* bee, Ap. U5T73, E. H. jjnr^nr , Skr. lotus, Ap. cFmr^f, E. H. q»sri. 48. Affinities . The' term. is Mg.; the Mh.-Sr. is #$rr, and Ap. ^3 ; the latter contracts in the W. and N. Gel. to OT or (Bi\)ot; thus Br. STift, H^, stitt ; Mw., G., S., N. sflrit, Hcrft/’zrrr; only P. forms an exception in having the E. H. term. 3TT, and hence it has got into Urdu and H. H. ; thus P., U., H. H. sffcrr, HOT, 5T3T. Again M., B. and O. have OT like E. H. It will be seen, then, that while E. and S. Gd. have OT, W. and N. Gd. have Wf or OT, again f Mg. Pr. has ^7, Mh.-Sr. Pr. has Wi*; hence it may be concluded, that 'the E. and S. Gd. termin. OT is a modification of the Mg. Pr. while the W. and N. Gd. 5Tf or is a modi- fication of r the Mh.-Sr. wf. The Ap. Pr. has both and ^3 (H. C. 4, 33 2). Probably the Br. is a contraction of the Ap. ^3; as Ap. H^T3, Br. HOT good; while the Mw., G., S., N. sft is a* 1 contraction of the Ap. wr, by the quiescence of as Ap. HoT^t, Mw., G., S. HOT (i. e. HOTTf). The Ap. Mg. form, corresponding to the Ap. Sr. W3, would be ^ (cf. § 46); this is still preser- ved in the Psh. ^ (Tr. J. G. 0. S. XXI, 37), as Psh. total bottom, CHANGES OF FINAL SOUNDS. 39 § 48 .] E. H. rT^T or ra?T, S. raft, Ap. Mg. rTcFT^ or rafl?, Ap. Sr. or Skr. (Terror: ; but the Psh. has also occasionally the E. Gd. form m; as Psh. applied, P. ^ffn=rr, Bs. and H. H. stitt, Ap. Mg. srfnra^ or ^rfrng^, Skr. eurefi: (lit. ^mrart)* Ap. ^firras, Br. vrrirr, Sr. ccTfTrasrT, S. or STOTT. The Psh. yr at, then, corresponds to Sr. #T aa ; being contractions of (Ap.) Mg. 3Tq al and Ap. (Sr.) V3 an respectively; on the other hand, E. and S. Gd. corresponds to W. and N. Gd. 3T, being contractions of the Mg. ^ and Sr. respectively, by the quiescence of sr. It appears, then, that thq, termin. is distinctly Mg., and merely a (comparatively modern) modification of the old Mg. and' not, as it is usually assumed, of the old Sr. ^T. There are, however, some traces of the term. 3TT in Pr. ; moreover, they seem to be distinctly connected with Mg. Pr. Firstly: Vr. (11, 17) * expressly gives fSr^T^TT as a Mg. by-form of jackal (E. II. fraT^). Secondly: Yr. (11, 13) and K. I. (Ls. 393) state that the Mg. vocative ends m ^T, and Md. (12, 21. 22. fol49 a ) adds also as or (E. H. %|T) oh! disciple 1 ). That is, the nom. 1) \v. 11, 17 ^TTTorTW fWo?TT fgr^TcrTcUT: II and Md. 12, 21 p^erm wzftufc r era: i dfu htstHth i f orsrir i % sr wr i mm % rfriuspiT i ^ ufrSTcrrar 11 1 . e , the voc of masc nouns in a ends m e or o, as, he voamse , hevoamso (Skr. cfsra); and Md 12, 22 ^T£T5TT i dfe ranr mrz %twi i m i i tkmy \ » i. e., the voc. of masc. nouns in m the sense of rebuke, ends m d; also m e and o. Neither H. C nor T. Y give these rules m their chapter on Mg; but they have an allusion to the voc. in m in their chapt. on *the Ap. (H C 4, 330. T. Y. 3, 4. 1); e. g., OTgT *rf ijf arrf^TT UT flfT STUTT; this is Bs. sran rTjir mjJ ra ^ rar i. e, lit. boy! I have forbidden you, do not make long sulkiness ! ; again fsnpi^r ^df uftrr^ rpf EFT <^3RT f$fj, = Bs. ra 3^7 BIT c#t sj?T i.e., lit daughter! I have told you, do not make a coquettish look. It is to be noted, that K. I. (16. 18. cf Ls. 450) gives both 33T and ^ as the termin. of the voc. m Ap. Pr. In the present day, E. H. has a voc. in 3TF, but W. H. in as E. H. ^ %pr, W. H. % oh disciple. This, perhaps, explains the silence of H. C. and T. Y. as to the Mg nom. and voc. in ^T; they have relegated it into their chapt. on Ap., in which as, perhaps, indicated in H. C. 4, 447 40 CHANGES OF FINAL SOUNDS. § 49. 50.] sing, in is used in Mg. as voc., and the form in is but a. slightly worn down by-form of the nom. (as usual with Pr. voc., cf. H. C. 3, 38. T. Y. 2, 2. 42 1 ). The latter form, which was at first (in Mg.) confined to the voc.-nom., is in Gd. extended to the nom. generally. Thirdly : H. C. gives several instances of a nom. in in the Ap. Pr. ; e. g\, HOT JOT g HTijOT H^TJT cfigl (4, 3 51); this is A. Mg. Ap.; the corresponding Sr. Ap. is in cfig STOi (4, 358); the former is Bs. (a kind of semi E. Gd., see Introd.) HOT ^OT fT HTJT JTT^T 5RT7T, i. e., it has happened well, sister, that my husband has killed; the other is Br. (W. H.) OTH nff St|*OT fn^r sTPg i. e. surely friend! with whom my husband is angry 2 ). 49. Pr. masc. and 3\ become J and 3> respectively; thus E. H. oilman , Mg. Frfigj (ef. H. C. 2, 98), Skr. PT%qF»: ; E. H. HTcfl gardener , Mg. HTfid^r, Skr. HTfOTF?: ; E. H. (WfTL HTHli) sister's husband , Mg. srf|f&Tor^7, Skr. ; E. H. hot! grandchild , Pr. nfiOT (H. C. 1, 137), Skr. Hcgcfi:; E. H. HT^ brother, Pr. (cf. H. C. 1, 13 7), Skr. hot*?.; again E. H. fsr^ scorpion, Mg. fsffg^r (Yr. 1, 15. 3, 41, T. Y. 1, 4. 18), Skr. OTsrqr. ; E. H. ot a hind of sweetmeat, Mg. Skr. 3 T| q?. ; S. H. jttj wheat (H. H. rtf), Ap. Mg. mzk (cf. H. C. 4, 3 97), Mg. tfijn, Skr. ittot:. s5 50. Affinities . These contractions into ^ and 3? are com- mon to all Gds. ; but in W. and N. Gd. they arise from the Mh.- Sr. termin. ssft and 3OT respectively ; as W. H. cOTf, Sr. Frf§T$rt ; W. H. htot, Sr. HTTOTif; W. H. htht^;, Sr. nift-fuTo^r! (cf. H. C. I, 190); W. H. %, Skr. firjOT; W. H. «T|, Sr. , Skr. sriyf:; W. H. aaa trouble, Pr. fsOTT (H. 0. 2, 106), Skr. asr:; W. H. fpq J°y> Pr. ffrHT (H. C. 2, 105), Skr. ; W. H. sifH rain, year, Pr. srf^r, Skr. stott ; W. H. own touch, Pr. afprl (cf. H. 0. 4, 182), Skr. via:. But E. H. rrf|£, srff^, faaa, ,.srf|M, qif^r,. The Pr. form i^fwa or (in some MSS.) (/Ryj is probably a curtailment of praaa, composed of and pleon. suff. a (or a), and curtailed just as Ap. from Mh.-Sr. Is if cl, e. g., Ap. qf^sr for Sr. qfegef. oi >- cj 59. 3 or J becomes S or 3; very rarely and optionally; E. H. qfTc- or qvft or qf~T ivatchman, Mg. q^ar. Skr. envt; E. H. sr^f or fstfl or si^r or arj; drop, Pr. fMr (cf. H. C. 1, 34), Skr. Note: Compare Pr. qaTV (H. C. 1, 44) for Skr. qsnvrr sojourner. 60. 3 becomes 5 ; rarely; thus E. H. VTq^p or vrqq^ own, Pr. vma (H. C. 2, 163), Skr. VTrqtqq (or fgqfJWg^), cf. M. aivai, § 61 — 63 .] CHANGES OF MEDIAL SINGLE VOWELS. 45 G. otttttt; E. H. VHtw son's wife , Pr. g33rg\ Skr. g^HU: ; E IP. 337 th stars. Mg. 3jrnfr (cf. H. C. 1, 202), Skr. 3jrrcrr: ; E. H. gF337f a fond of medicine, Pr. t 3FTj1%5rr, Skr. chjt%cFiT, E. H. srar hoop, Pr. x sTr?ra, Skr. ggcFR ; E. H. HTHg; or qqj[ in front of, Ap. Skr. (H. H. qTc^yr) ; optionally torpor ggrT bud son, Mg Skr. cfpp: ; also E. EL srj or drop, Mg. fcfe^? Skr. FF337:. Note : Also W. H. znmt finger, Pr. 5m%5rT, Skr. #jf§Tt3T; W. H. fef#, Pr. fztssff^wt (Yr. 4, 26), Skr. Sgq ; W. PI. zggqr dog , Pr. Skr. gjgfjp: *, W. IP. jffeqL roseappletree, Pr. jrg^TT. Skr. srracfr: ; W. H. ?frr$r 7;e understands, Pr. Skr. sprain ; Mw. cRirr or mUT who ( see § 438, 2); but E. II. snft, ferfr, ?pgqr, siTgq , Hg$T, . As regards E. PL m : ; also in semitats. as E. H. q^rr^ stone, Skr. qrsmrr: ; E. H. q?rr^ hades, Skr. qTHT^r^; E. H. swoon , Skr. qgjf; and see also § 25, as E. H. J'srpT weak fromgsqf, Mg.Jgp^, Skr.Jsfercfr, etc.; and § 146, as E. H. qsr^ all for Mg. Skr. H5T:, etc. 67. Vowels are nasalised; often optionally before f[ and H*, as E. H. ^5 or 4% or q^ mouth, face, Mg. 55 (H. C. 4, 300), 47 § 68. 69.] CHANGES OF VOWELS IN CONTACT. Skr. JpPT/, E. H. or thr rain, Mg. Hf (of. PI. C. 1, 187), Skr. if et: (lit. cloud, ?); E. H. ?rrf or HTf oath (fem.), A. Mg. HcTf (of. H. C. 1, 179), Skr. srqer ; E. H. shade, Pr. fifr,(H. C. 1, 2491 or fTfT (Yr. 2, 18), Skr. fWT; E. H.,5Tth; or mw (fem.) arm, Pr. STTf or STTfT (H. C. 4, 3 29), Skr. oTTfT (fem., but VTJ: masc.), E. H. ntf"’ or ETTfP' or rafT' -within. Ap. ETftrrff, Skr. vnr; E. H. WTHT or cough, Pr. «rrfv5n (cf. H. C. 1, 181), Skr. gjlRlchi; E. H. frat or fra) laughter, Pr. fTravT (cf. H. C. 3, 105), Skr. fTfefiT; E. H. 5Tra_ or arr^ (fem.) grass, A. Mg. srra, Skr. ara: (masc.), etc. ; rarely otherwise ; as E. H. T Ta_ or tfra_ foot, Ap. aT3, Sr. qTVT, Skr. qtf. ; E. H. vraT or araT or ttett or cHctT ivell, Ap. 3?5rj or (cf. H. C. 4, 397), Skr. f am - ; some- times er is elided after nasalization, as E. H. sfftr or sTTj they go (for wfff), Ap. irrff (cf. H. C. 4, 382), Pr. sifff (H. C. 4, 388), Skr. "JTlfra. Note : In Ap. Pr., too, sr is sometimes nasalized ; as Ap. fM or sicT how (see H. C. 4, 397), E. H. Ap. fM or fist thus, E. H. 7 $. C ^ P) YCiWELS IN CONTACT. 68. The hiatus of vowels is treated in three ways: 1) the two contiguous vowels may be contracted or expanded partly by the ordinary Skr. rules of sandhi, partly by special Gd. rules given below §§ 71 if. Or 2) they may be separated by an euphonic semivowel (§ 28), and the dissyllable, formed thereby, sometimes again contracted (§ 34). Or 3) they may be left in hiatus. On the whole, the third case is less usual, than the two others; even in E. H. ; but certainly in Gd. generally; /or some- times, when E. H. preserves the hiatus of the Pr., other Gds. make sandhi ; thus E. H. of what hind, but W. H. SFftTT, M. TOTT, for Ap. Pr. (H. C. 4, 403) ; or E. H. JT^ he went , but M. rr^rr, Mg. ; or E. H. eaten, but M. Mg. 69. The semivowels, which may separate contiguous vowels, 48 CHANGES OF VOWELS IN CONTACT. § 70 — 72.J are generally or rarely About the use of zr^ and see §28. Examples of an inserted euphonic ^ are probably; E. H. srfefT or srf&UT inferior ; E. H. gi; or sa' or g^r he touches ; E. H. S lien f°r ^ (probably by analogy to /atoa, cf. § 807); E. H. he gave for 4- and he did for f§=? 4- ^ (analogous to f§rft^ he tool, see § 307); E. H. Q%5rT^ cognizance for (Pr. crf^smm, Skr. qf^Eroqpr?) ; E. H. °$rf^q a suffix of agency , Ap. Pr. ^firararit (see § 321); E. IT. a pleon. suff Mg. Skr. *^<* 7 : (§ 208); E. H. or W a suffix of abstract nouns, Pr. ^arrt (:*ee § 288). There is, ap- parently, one instance of an euphonic 5T ; viz. E. II. f^ftfr^TV or f^crtcTfHf one hundred and two (made analogously to 103, 104, 106); see §§ 3 94. 3 9 7 . 70. Affinities . All three semivowels a^ and ?r are already used in this way in Prakrit. Thus 2T is especially^men- tioned by H. C. 1, 180. T. Y. 1, 3. 10. S. C. 1, 3. 5 and apparently both and by K. I. 1, 45. 46 (in Ls. Ap. 41). About f[ there is no rule ; but it occurs apparently m the words fT^T, etc. (for sniTST, f^TCT, ^TUT) mentioned in Vr. 2, 4. 18. H. C. 1,186. 249. They not unfrequently occur in Pr. literature ; especially in Mg. ; thus in the Bhagavati (see Wb. Bh. 397.409 411.415); also in the Saptasataka (see Wb. Spt. 28. 29.45); see also Ps. X. 71. Gd. sandhi is made in two ways; 1) by contracting the two vowels, or 2) by expanding the second. By * expansion I mean the change of ^ or ^ to n ya, and of or 3 to of va. Peculiar Gd. contractions are : n or with ^ to \ ; Sf or with 3 to $rr; ^ with % to Tf or ^ or ^ or ^ ; 3 with ^ to or or 3; ^ with 9 or ^ or 3 or ^ to A with ^ to itt. See in detail § 73, etc. 72. Expansion - sandhi is not unknown in Skr.; but it affects the first vowel; thus srf, become respectively ^rra^, and in certain cases ^ or ^ and 3 or 37 become ^and 3^ (see M. M. 53) ; e. g., gen. sing. jm ; § 73.] CHANGES OF VOWELS IN CONTACT. ' 49 TToT; ; fSzr: ; = 3T©r:. In Pr. there are traces of the Gd. expansion ; thus or 3 to 5T in q5?TT or qsrtrr or q3TT = Skr. (Vr. 1 , 40); ^rra^sT for * a I WT??r or ^tiW = Skr. % TFTKT*7 (H. C. 1, 156) ; 3 or 3 to 5T in HTOTcrT for * HToR^ for **rf3zm = Skr. HTcFriTTifjT (Yr. 1, 22 ); sw for *soT5?r or ;r375T = Skr. (Vr. 1 , 25); for *35^ (cf. H. C. 1 , 173) for 33 ^t = Skr. 3JJeTc?T: (H. C. 1 , 171); Hhrr^rf for ^Hsrqwf for HOTT^ft = Skr. gc^TT^: (H. C. 1 , 171). I do not recollect any example of ^ or 3 to n. Also the contraction of ^ # to ^ and 3 4- % to ??T is found in Skr. ; as in gers. sg. = W: ; sfcj-fp^= qyT:. Here the change is commonly explained as a guna of the final $ or 3; but it may be, as in Pr. and Gd. it undoubtedly must be, ex- plained as an expansion of ^ and 3 to and and contraction of the resultant dissyllable and $F5T to ^ and ?Tf ; as * ^XTcT: = svr: ; ***qyop. = Wh. Instances of this change in Pr. are not un- common, thus STSoJ for for = Skr. firefecrfqJH. C. 1 , 166); cFHH-fr for * mrmjt for = Skr. ^fuTSRTf: (H. C. 1 , 168); for *m f%f for ^srrfqT = Skr. (H. C. 2 , 134. Ls. 129); ^firsr for for *^rtmr = Skr. for for = Skr. fermctfq (H. C. 2, 157); for for *^sr^f = Skr. (i. e. * 3 ^ 1 + ZW or f 3ST; cf. Wb. Spt. 59); for *cFF?r§^r for = Skr. (or cfi^sr) H. C. 2, 157. Again for for 3 ^ == Skr. 3 rT (H. C. 2,172); cf. for = Skr * sraf ffpr (H. C. 1,17 2 ) ; qrfr for *qcTfT for *qy^t=Skr. qfTf: (H. G. 1,17 0 ); qVcqR^T* for *q 5 rcq^rf for *q#ofi of (lit. done by) = 0. H. srrff, Ap. or or 5F»pV (H. C. 4, 422), Skr. 37rT:. In the oblique form of the singu- lar and in postpositional locatives ^ becomes generally ^ or f ; as E. H. obi. form of HcrTT good, 0. H. ^f|, Ap. Pr. Skr. (See § 365, 6. 367, 4); E. H. or or zc (see § 7 7); E. II. ytrr. The latter are those which have arisen either from the simplification (§148) of a conjunct consonant by eliding one, as in the tadbh. E. H. qTrff letter, Pr. -crf^rarT, Skr. qficET; E. H. head, Mg. skr. q^rTcF:, or in the semitats. E. H. Skr. wt; E. H. $F?ryT, Skr. sjrfte rr; or from the dissolution (§ 13 8) of a conjunct by inserting a vowel; ^as in the tadbh. USTH devoted, Ap. *UcFirT, Skr. il3T;, or in the semitats. sTrl^T. effort, Skr. £TH:. Tatsama single consonants, whe- ther original or resultant, may, of course (as in Skr.), be of any kind, whether surd or sonant, aspirate or unaspirate ; they never suffer any further change in E. H. ; for sone doubtful ex- ceptions s^e §§ 102. 129. Tadbhava resultant single consonants, too, as may be seen from the examples in §§ 138, 143, may be of any kind; but the tadbh. original can only be sonants, never surds, because already in Pr. every original single surd cons, has been made sonant, if it be not wholly elided (cf. § 101). Both tad- bhava classes, the resultant and the original, are liable to fur- ther changes in E. H. These may be of five kinds: l) sonant consonants proper (i. e. cerebrals and dentals) are softened to se- mivowels (3 or £ or and ^ or or ^) cf. §§ 102 — 115; 2) aspirate consonants proper (except palatals and cerebrals) may be reduced to the simple aspirate (f[), cf. §§116 — 120; 3) semi- vowels (viz. a^and off) and the nasal Oj.) may be vocalized (^ and 3 ), cf. §§ 121. 122 ; 4) semivowels (viz. 3T, f) and nasals (viz. 3 . and and occasionally double consonants (viz. fg, 5’ f } **0 may be elided, cf. §§ 123— *128 and 151 — 157; and 5) semi- 58 CHANGES OF SINGLE CONSONANTS. § 100 .] vowels (viz. and aj may be hardened, cf. § 129. Besides, there are isolated instances of changes of a miscellaneous kind. See in detail § 97, etc. 100. Affinities . All these five kinds of changes exist in Pr. already ; but modified partly in character, partly in frequency. Thus in Pr. they affect as a rule (exceptions see § 116, note. § 145, exc. 2. and § 142) only original single consonants; in E. H. also resultant ones. Again l) in Pr. surds are softened to sonants, in E. H. sonants to semivowels; e. g., ong., Skr. 3^737; cloths , Mg. E. H. cRqfT; Skr. cjvf&rr: said r Mg. 37?^, E. H. or 37537 ; result., Skr. Mg. gosrffuT (cf. H. C. 2, 3 6), E. H. 37rffr, W. H. qrrih This rule refers only to cerebrals and dentals/ which alone are capable of the change. But something analogous takes place in the case of the other classes ; thus in Pr., labials (5, or sQ are softened to (H. C. 1, 2 31., 2 3 7); in E. H., *©Ms r vocalized ; e. g., Skr. gtTO octih, A, Mg. SToi^r or E. H. (for ST 3W); in Mg. Pr. for gutturals ($7, 3 t) and palatals (^, ?[) is substituted the euphonic 3^ (cf. Wb. Bh. 3 97); in E. H., 3_ is vocalized ; e. g., Skr. town, Mg. 333T, E. H. ^ ; Skr. night, Mg. 373tiri', E. H. There are, however, traces of these changes in Pr. already, see §§ 35. 105. 109, note, etc. Then 2) in Pr., aspirate consonants are changed to sonant aspirates or redu- ced to the simple aspirate er (see H. C. 4, 267. 302. Wb. Bh. 41 0) ; E. H. allows only the simple aspirate and occasionally extends the rule to resultant aspirates; e. g., Skr. V ou ma %e, Mg. 37373 or , E. H. cf rffr; Skr. trar, Ap. q^rPf , E. H._*rrfr (for Ap. Mg. Skr. =TO ; E. H. or calf, Ap. cFZsfSZ, Skr. 5 to: ; E. H. tojt or HcTOT a hundred , Ap. Mg. Skr. TOero ; E. H. ira JT eZtfesf, Ap. Mg. srpjj, Skr. sire; ; E. H. qf^cnr or q ff oTO or 0 srrfT hindmost, Ap. Mg. *qf^oit& or °oTTO^ or qf ^mz or Skr. qfilTO>: ; E. H. qgjr^ ’ or qfTTT (scl. JWl) hind-rope (for tying horses’ hind-legs), Ap. q^tffS^T, Skr. n^T°; E. H. or srmTt fore-rope, Ap. TOT^fz^T, Skr. TOcp?°, etc. — 2) resultant ; thus E. H. or cowrie , Pr. (H. C. 2, 36), Skr. c^qf^cFiT, etc. 105. Z^ becomes vr, only original ; very rarely; thus the E. H. pleonastic suffix ar or ^TT, Ap. Mg. Z or 3ijr (cf. H. C. 4, 429), e. g., E. H. q-^r or °TO ulterior, Ap. Mg. qdr or °3£, Skr. q7:; E. h. A P* or *3F> skr * 3 ?? :; * E * H * *woflier, Ap. Mg. *qT3fJ^T, Skr. TOrqnr, etc.; also otherwise, as 62 CHANGES OF SINGLE CONSONANTS. § 106—109.] E. H. or °hV, Ap. Mg. or (cf. Wb. Bh. 426), Ap. Sr. Skr. yj^(W?* Note: This change is not uncommon in Pr., see Yr. 2,23. H. C. 1 , 202; in such cases E. H. optionally, but usually changes to as Skr. trfisr sixteen . A. Mg. (Wb. Bh. 426), E H. or ; Skr. rTSOTi: tank Ap. rre??T3 (cf. II. C. 1, 202 ), E. H. rr^T 3 or rTpTa^ or rTcrTTc[j Skr. a fond of reed , Pr. HZ or H3T (H. C. 1 , 202 ), E. H. HJ or or Hz; Skr. HTTZcffT strdJc, Pr. htIzot or hthhot (H. C. 1 , 2 02 ), E. H. Hrfr or ht^tt or nrSt. 106. 5 becomes H ; only original ; r \e ry rarely; thus E. H. cTcR" or rTZH or ftth that (lit* of that kind), Ap. Frag (H. C. 4, 407) or *HcTST, Pr. Frr^T (cf. H. C. 2 , 157), Skr. m^r: (see § 43 8 , 2); E. H. or sTZH or sfW uhicJi (lit. of winch fond), Ap. irsrj (H. C. 4 , 407), Pr. ing^T, Skr. , E. H. cficFT or or (lit. of what fond), Ap. cfiaTUT (II. C. 4, 3 9 5) or sfrcij (44. C: 4,408), Mg. fermrr 0 (Wb.'Bh. 422), Pr. W>Z$, Skr. sSfc[sr: (see § 26. note); cf. also E. H. yyzT or mouth (of a horse, etc.) from moatli. 107. _ ft ^becomes \ or very rarely, always resultant; as E. H. HfHTZ or HZHrz or HFrafz sixty seven , Pr. (cf. Wb. Bh. 426), Skr. frgrarfes. 108. ^ becomes Jj, very rarely’, always original; thus ttht^ waterpot, Pr. JTmf^T (cf. Yr. 2 , 13), Skr. nsfiJsfT; E. H. 56- flewfy, Pr, (H. C. 1 , 210 . Wb. Bh. 248) for Skr. HjjfFT: : E.H v \s ten, Pr. (Yr. 2 , 14) or °j* (Wb. Bh. 426), Skr. ^r; e. g., E. H. twelve, Pr. crr^; (H. C. 1 , 219) or (Wb. Bh. 425), Skr. gj"Tc[ST. Note: This change, also, is old Pr. ; I know no strictly mo- dern example. 109. ^ becomes only original ; always in the E. H. suffix of past part. ^?T,or Mg. ^ (of. H. C. 4, 2 60. 802. Yr. 11 , 11 ), Skr. ; e. g., E. H. rr^ or or gone (see §77); E. H. or or ^ em ( see § 77); E. H. y<[$7 or tremor yy^ put, Mg. yfet; (cf. H. C. 1 , S 6 . yf^?T Spt. 241), Skr. sot ; E. H. § 110. 111.] CHANGES OF SINGLE CONSONANTS. 63 or or efizm done, Mg. * Skr. ®fT. (see § 307); E. H. or iprratfp eaten (see § 8 2. exc.) ; E. H. 'TTrra^ found (cf. §§ 33. 123), Mg. trrrat; (of. H. C. 4, 387. mrsru), Skr. ma : ; E. H. UTjTEfL. or come, Mg. grfsRT, Skr. OTT: ; E. H or read, Mg. crfSHT, Skr. ufer. ; E. H. =sqw[_ or walked. Mg. =gf§r^, Skr. yf^Trl:, etc.; rarely otherwise; e. g., E. H. hundred, A. Mg. *^3", Skr. StrPT . Note • This change is especially Mg., e. g , 37%, xt^T or 3%;, n?; (in Md. 12, 28. optional with ef it, nr, Vr. 11, 15), Skr. iTrT; ; Mg. §T5T# (Sak. 37, 13) for Skr. ERFraw; A. Mg. |rasr for *§T3%r, Skr. ^ST: (cf. Lss. 417. 423); rarely in Pr. generally, as Pr. crf§=r?f (H. C. 1, 221), Skr. srcfcpT , E. H. U5 t(h_ a light, candle ; Pr. uf$T 157 ) or A P’ ( cf - H - c - 64 CHANGES OF SINGLE CONSONANTS. § 112—114.] 4, 408), Skr. ; E. H. rFFtr so many, Mg. or Skr. rn orfaraF?: ; E. H. IteHT as many, Mg. £rf^7 or irwcrr^ (H. C. 4, 407), Skr. snorfrrsi: ; E. H. how many, Mg. or Skr. E. H. or sjtjt or smT or own, Mg. spsref or^or^rsr (cf. H. C. 2, 163), Skr. ^Trjfl'OT or °Ucf7ZT; E. H. or of that hind, Ap. Mg. (cf. H. C. 4, 403. 2, 164. Wb. BE 437) or (cf. H. C. 4, 429), Skr. ; E. H. S#T, Skr. ^67: (a post round which the mill stone moves). Note : E. H. bridegroom , or bride (spelled H. H. JT^TT, see § 6, note) are Mg. J^f^T (cf. H. C. 4, 338. Ls. 227. 228). Sir. (lit. difficult to obtain . 7 ' ' \S ^ ), not Skr 3^teT, (as Bs. I, 271. 245). And E. H. RfcFnr^r is Pr. R'cfiTTr^ or Rriprr^rj, Skr. RuhwSjtH (of R. TkT;. perhaps cans, or denom. of eft), not Pr. Skr. T^rc^TcifH (as Bs. I, 354). As to cfflW } the Mg. 3J65T might he %rgm in Ap. Mg. (cf. vulgar B .cfi&s^axe for Mg. see Bs. I, 270), and thence (eliding^) 5?£ or ( c ^ §§ 49. 125); there is Skr. TOT^:, Mg. tree (post?), which might also produce An instance of this change in Pr. is for (H. C. 1, 200; cf. and > 7^r^^ H C. 4, 200), Skr. 1 6°. hh) Reduction. 116. ^ and sr^ become §[; generally when original; as E. H. 35 or ipF mouth, Pr. jp[ (H. C. 2, 164), Skr. E. H. *Tfr or £r\ ram, Mg. £r| (cf. H. C. 1, 187), Skr. m:, etc.; sometimes when initial in a compound; as E. H. £ tongue , Pr. Hfr or mcHT (H. C. 2, 57), Skr. %r. Note: Words with original H are tats, or semitats., as E. H. HHTH or HHT3 disposition, Skr. g"HToT:. Pr. (H. C. 1, 187). cc) Yocalisation. 121. u becomes z and combines with the adjacent voicels ; «» thus 1) 5T get to as E. H. fknrp individual, Skr. ctT^: (semitats.); 2) m ay a to \ or as E. H. £r or H hundred, A. Mg. Her, Skr. STcR; E. H. HH or hh time, A. Mg. HHff, Skr. hhh: : E. H. or 3^ rising, Skr. 3<^T: (semitats.) ; E. H. ^ or ^ town. Mg. h?Tcft (cf. H. C. 1, ISO), Skr. nrrjiT , E. H. hh or hh eye, Mg. Htfur (H. C. 1, 180), Skr. E. H. or night , Mg. ^TOTrf (cf. H. C. 4, 401), Skr. ifFTh E. H. qnrr foot of a bed, Mg. cTTeirT^ (cf. H. C. 3, 134) or udT^r, Skr. crT^Prf^: or qgTrfcFf: ; 3) ^5T hja to as E. H. vi^zibackyard, Ap* Mg. *crf^drr or signer, Skr. q&HHrTi, etc.; cf. § 77. 68 CHANGES OF SINGLE CONSONANTS. 122 .] 12 2. ©c becomes 3 and combines with the adjacent vowels ; thus 1) ©T va to 3, as E. II. i%3 or fsrsr Siva , A. Mg. v$k, Skr. ffer; ; E. H. £3 or $ct god, , Mg. (cf. H. C. 1, 177), Skr. £oT: ; E.H. :T3 or ^rsr foundation , Mg ?rar, Skr. ; 2) fsr tv to S’ as E. H RT3 he will low for Pr. qf§rf|^ or qfqfi|s (cf. H. C. 4, 158), Skr. qfwrfpr, E. H ^TsrT or I am for Ap. Pr. ^f©r^ , Skr. ijfftefer; E H. qrsrr or barber , see §96; E.H. ?R3 or x sFTr3 sacrificial thread , Pr. *sRf^T5ra : (seep. 2 Band H. C. 1, 101), Skr. u^ifcrgfpr^; 3) ^5f ava optionally to srf ; as E.H. or ^3^ Mg. ^5T^T, Skr E II. q?PT or 5F3^r or cFsrq who, see § 106 : E. II. qrrfr a hind of shell (see § 103) , E. H. sfrFrr wife, Pr. ^icrm^T (cf. Spt. 78), Skr.OTffTOT; E II humble-bee, Ap. H5T^3 (cf. II C. 4, 3 97), Skr. ; E. H. q^TcfT or tnram* 'if I send, Ap. x groirrj. Pr qpfcTSFf or (cf. H C. 4^, 3 7), Skr. q^Tqnqfer , sometimes to 5TT : as E. H. ^TT~eT Oath, see §100; E. H a hind of gourd, see § 114; sometimes to ~S ; as E. H. or ^TT'T^ or ^ or (see § 3 1 ) salt, Pr. 5TTQT or ^srerf, Skr. ^Torur^; E. H. ijfr oi ijj he forgets, Ap. Mg. X +T3c?r^ or 14 Skr. 5^rjufpr; 4) ^5T iva to m, as E. II. STT^TT^, se# §49, or to g:, as E. II. qgrT^ back-yard: Ap. qfeof?T, Skr. qfeiTT^T:; E.H. stststt or srrpT leader , guide, Ap. Mg. ^nrrerar^, Skr. srf&qsTcF: ; 5) or $5T to A, as E. H. neighbourhood, see § 104 , E. H. qfr& he distributes. A. Mg. qf§T§rsr^, Skr. qOOTdH : 6j ava optionally to $rr, as E. H. crfTrT or q^T3r^ or q^TSTr^ elephant- driver, Ap. Skr. qirRT^., etc.; cf. § 34.78. Note * It will be seen from some of the above examples, that Skr. q^ is in Pr. (H. C. 1, 23 1), in Gd. 3; and Skr. in Ap. Pr. sr or 5T (H. C. 4, 3 97), in Gd, 3 or 3. Traces of these changes are found in Pr, ; as Pr. smrf or QFrsrnT, Skr. (Vr. 1, 7), E. II. orfiR salt , Pr. or. 35R5KTST, Skr. OTTKTTzr:, E. H. srtorr magician ; Ap. q£3 (cf. H. C. 4, 385) for * q&PoT, Pr. q^fq or q^rfq, Skr. qsrfq, E. H. q^T or I read . see § 497. 2. 123 . 124 .] CHANGES OF SINGLE CONSONANTS. 69 dd) Elision. 123. cl before ^ (or z) is elided ; as a rule (cf. § 33) ; only original ; thus E. H. twenty one (W. H. A. Mg. ^.arai (Wb. Bh. 426. H. C. 1, 28), Skr. ^"aFrfofsTf^r: ; E. H. twenty two, A. Mg. OTRi (Wb. Bh. 425) or arafaT (Wb. Bh. 426. T. Y. 1. 4.79), Skr gnrUfsjfa:; E. H. twenty thee, A. Mg. ftstth (Wb. Bh. 425) or crafar (H. C. 1, 165), Skr. yotfasriH: ; E. H qyTa twenty five for *qy^, A. Mg * qaater or °crr (cf. Wb. Bh. 425), Skr. trerfsfsrfar: ; E. H. mxz^Jiventy seven, A. Mg. aVrsrraT (H. C. 1, 4), Skr. yqfasifH: ; E. H. twenty eight, A. Mg. srTsrtaT (Wb. Bh. 426), Skr. sreifawfa: ; E. H. tfcrz^nmeteen (W. H. ), A. Mg. tOTaTOT or (Wb. Bh. 426), Skr. tsyrfasriTT: or ^hrrasrfTT. ; E. H. been, qr^T found, come, see § 1 09 ; E. H. q?rjcfr" or unstT I shall send, Ap. *qrfayt or *qrTfyyj, Pr, qaTfawysfe, Skr. jcranfqaartsfsrr ; E. H. qyrf he shall send, Pr. qjTfaf^c, Skr. qwqfsrrafH ; E. H. qs^arf or qjhfrT I have sent, Mg. qpfa^sf*^, Skr. ncTrfqfTt'Sfer, etc. The resultant a, being always hardened (see § 1 2 9) is never elided. Exception. A few exceptions, see § 122. Not O': In the numerals all Gds. elide a, exc. M., G. and S. ; thus 21 M. ^yrarNr, G. ^spary (S. 7=atf); 22 M. snara or srata, G. snrahq, S. aratf ; 23. M. aara , G. aater, S. rati;; 25 M. qaata, G. qara , S. q?ratf or qyif. etc. 124. J (= Mg. ?t) before Z is elided \ sometimes ; only ori- ginal ; thus E. H. qa having done for * 0. H. cfrff, Mg. fdara (H. C. 4, 302) or Mh. qrffa (H. C. 4, 27 2), Skr. fray; E. H. yn having placed for 0. H. yfr, Mg. yfara, Skr. yrar ; E. H. a? suffix of genitive for * ezz, 0. H. qrfj. Mg. or * aRTSTy", Skr. qfH: ; E. H. q upon, Ap. Mg. qf§T, Mg. qqr, Skr. URT ; E. H. q however, Mg. qf§r or qqr, Skr. qqq ; E. H. q75j_ placed and done, see § 109 ; E. H. or such (see § 111), Ap. Mg. (cf. H. C. 4, 403), A. Mg. ffmzt 0 or Mh. (H. C. 1, 142), Skr. f^ST 0 ; E. H. qi^aa_or ekirrof what hind, Ap. Mg. (cf. H. C. 4, 403), A. Mg. or Mh. £f^r° (H. C. 1, 142), Skr. 5R^ST°; TO CHANGES OF SINGLE CONSONANTS. § 125. 126.] E. H. rfqq of tins kind, Ap. Mg. *FT3fq^T, A. Mg. mf§=TH° or rTTijH 0 (H. C. 4, 287), Skr. rTT^SI 0 ; E. H. sl^FT or qqq^ of which land, Ap. Mg. A. Mg. fTTHTO 0 or sTTf^r 0 (Wb. Bb 422), Skr. aiTSF:; E. H. HT like, A. Mg. or qfbr^, Skr. srrgrsR: (see § 292). Note: Pr. has an instance of the elision of 3T before ^ m sr^V lull (H. C. 2, 174), Skr. 5rf§ra£:. 125. c?r after 3 is elided ; lately, only original; thus E. H. jratST straw, Pr. *q^nw, Skr. Q^TTorTt (cf. Skr. qwqr) ; but perhaps for qaT^I or qTaTcr^= Pr. qrasnw, Skr. qT^qTcfi litter, led of straw, E. H. cF^aar or qr^^orr earth-worm . Mg. firg^, Skr. fSraprsfi: ; E. H. cirtcrg^ sugat -mill, see § 115. 126. ^before or after 3 'is elided ; sometimes ; thus in the E. H. suffix of 3. pers. sg. fut. 3 (for 51 33), Pr. 3^t or Skr. e. g., E. H. he will be, Pr. ^Tift (H. C. 2, 18.0) or ^rfi|3 (H. C. 4, 388), Skr. qfasqfq; E. H. fnf or (§ 6 7) he will laugh. Pr (H. C. 3, 157), Skr. ; E. H. ^ (for *5^) suffix of 3. pers. pi. pres., Ap. Pr. Pr. afcT, Skr aPcT ; e. g., E. H. gpr^" they do, Ap. (H. C. 4, 3 82), Pr. cfiffq (H. C. 4, 37 6), Skr. upwrf; E H. or ^3* they dan gh, Ap. faff, Pr. C. 3, 142), Skr. fsfqr; E. H . or ^ or ^ suffix of locative (see § 77. exc.), Ap. (K. I. 12, 27), Skr. $7, e. g., E. H. or qrT^f behind, Ap. q^f^, Skr. qir; E. H V suff. of the obi. form sing, of adj. (see §386), 0. H. aRr, Ap. Pr. Skr. e. g., E. H. sweet, 0. PI. qteff, Ap. Rt|, Skr. fq^ar , E. H. ^ suffix of 1. pers. pi. pres., Pr. 3q, Skr. aTq: (§ 497,4); e. g., E. H. . we laugh, Pr. ^fqq, “ Skr. ^arq: ; E. H. he takes, Pr. (H. C. 4, 238) for or (H. C. 4, 335), "Skr. crUFT ; E. H. sr" they take . Pr. (H. C. 4, 387) for or 6T^frr (H. C. 4, 34l), Skr. tfTqqr; E. H. fsroi or f§h?$ thursday, Pr. firfprr^ (H. C. 1, 138), Skr. ST^qfq;, see also § 32. Sometimes otherwise ; as E. H. qt (g^) of me, Ajd. Pr. qj (H. C. 4, 379), see § 430, 1. Note: In W. H., ht or at suffix of 2. pers. pi. pres., Ap. § 127.] CHANGES OF SINGLE CONSONANTS. * 71 (II. C. 4, 384), Skr. m., see § 497, 5; e. g., W. H. zrirfr or q-frrt you ask , Ap. qrnjr (H. C. 4, 387), Skr. ; also W. Gd. or sjt'* or or ^ suff. of the obi. form pi., Ap. Pr. 13W or a? or srff, Skr. fTRTJT , see § 365, 7 ; e. g., Br. qfT, H. H. qff, S. or Ap. rn"Tf or or tnrff, Skr. ^rpTOTFT ; S. "3 suffix of 1. pers. pi. pres., Ap. (H. C. 4, 386), Pr. ^r(H. C. 3,155), Skr. see § 497,4; e. g., S. we go (Tr. 314), Ap. =er^Tjr, Pr. Skr. : 3RrrPT:. About the elision of in Ap. Pr. see Ls. 484; also Pr. (H. C. 4, 300) for Skr. ^STTUTT^, E. II. HT, see § 124. 127. before g (semitats.) ; E. H. fgr^ or our (H. H. ^TTfr), Ap. Pr. stfqr (H. C. 4, 34 5), see § 73; E. H. g?srr fathers sister for Pr. fg^T or fgsfgsg (H. C. 2, 142), Skr. fggggT; also E. H. graft; E. H. grg flower , Pr. guf? (H. C. 2, 53), Skr. gtgg; E. H. or he plucks up for *3§TO, Pr. 3gfn?^ (cf. H. C. 4, 187), Skr. E.. H. fggT^r or fen|; he accomplishes, Pr. fgsrT^, Skr. E. H. r buffalo, cf. § 177. Note: There are instances m Pr. ; as crf^tlft or ^Tift sister (H. C. 2, 126), Skr. gfrot, E. H. ©rf|fg; Pr. JTS^ or ST3^ fte fashions (H. G. 4, 112), Skr. stzh, E. H. to or jto or TO or rro (§'13Q). It is frequent in S. ; as ^T, $r to for *apri[ (§ 375); ^T^irfr forty for * ; gif or gpfsit own for sfr (§451). 133. Consonants are transposed ; in E. H. gfff he puts on (clothes) for *gfp|, Mg. *gf§Tff or *qf§r&Tf or *gf&ryf (cf. Gw. 99,21), Skr. gfr^uftt; E. H. and gflr 7*e arrives, Pr. gy^f (H. G. 4, 3 9 0, 419), Skr. ggrgfSTT (Mg. mznciws)-, also cfhg or cffteqr and ^tsp or : gtg>J mud (Skr. r^TOf) ; g<3^TT and ^T or ^(see § 405). — Perhaps E. H. and stand for ^rrm 0 and Skr. ^ 37 °. — Occasionally ^ is interpolated in Ap. Pr , see H. C. 4 , 399; as 5 TTH or oTTg, Skr. TO: Vydsa. § 136 .] CHANGES OF CONJUNCT CONSONANTS. 75 6) CONJUNCT CONSONANTS. 13(5. Medial conjunct consonants m E. IJ. are of two kinds, original and resultant. The former are those which have passed as such into E. H. from the Pr., as in the tadbh. ripe, A. Mg. Skr. ; E. H. stone, A. Mg. < 7 ?^, Skr. cfftt: ; E. H. snqr seventy, A. Mg. Skr. mfn: ; E. H. tcsr»tt worthless, A. Mg. fu^T^r, Skr. E. H. hnshna, Mg. Skr. OTIT: ; or from the Skr., as in the semitats. fsrepT. belief, Skr. foTSTO:, E. H. householder , Skr. The latter are those which have resulted either a) from the contraction of con- tiguous vowels, as in the tadbh. I walked, Ap. *xiM$rj, Pr. : srf?rasf^;, Skr. ^f^rfhsfer, or in the semitats. znrm order , P. ^rfrr^T, 0. H. mfrRT, Skr. ^TfTT; or b) from the suppression of an intermediate vowel, as in the tadbh. f§FcTf petition for f&PTrTt Pr. fsrsrfw^T, Skr. ; E. H. bndepoom for jwffT, Mg. Skr. E. H. f§?|TT a measure of land (the 20. part.), Ap. Mg. cnuor^ or Skr. ras^cF r: ; E. II. irar ass for u^r, Mg. 3T£^7, Skr. ; E. H. hog for cTffcrrr, Ap. Mg. Skr. etc. These latter are not uncommon in the hhari E. TI., though very rare in the theth (e. g., in the numerals seventy one , seventy seven, etc., see § 131, note) ; in H. H. they are the rule (see § 6, note). Of the resul- tant conjuncts, those arising from the suppression of a vowel may be of any kind, strong, mixed or weak *), homogeneous or 4 heterogeneous , but those arising from the contraction of vowels must be heterogenous and either mixed or weak. Neither kind of resultant suffers any further change m E. H. As to the ori- ginal conjuncts, the tatsamas may be of any kind, but the tad- bhavas can only be either homogeneous (as r^, EI U, etc.) or such 1 as consist of a consonant proper preceded by a nasal (as g, J, J, etc.) or of ©“ following a nasal or semivowel (as 1) These useful terms of classification I have adopted from Beames I, 281. 76 CHANGES OF CONJUNCT CONSONANTS. 137.] -ef , *§[, vff , = sg); for these are the only eonjuncts to- lerated in Pr. (see § 13 7). Both original classes, the tadbh. and tats., are, as a rule, liable to further change m E. H. This may take place in three ways: 1) they may be dissolved by the in- terpolation of a vowel (^, he can, Pr. (H. C. 4, 86), Skr. srpTm ; E. H. hwt or BBT dry, A. Mg. HcFST^r or (cf. H. C. 2, 5. Wb. Bh. 2S9 — 29 1) ; u in E. H* snip road (see § 45) ; E. H. BTsp tiger, Mg. Brsr (cf. H. C. 2, 90), Skr. BTTsr: ; Bpn E. H. OB it is digested, Pr. ?¥$, Skr. qram; JS. H. Biff fly, Pr. (IT. C. 2, 17), Skr. ; sp in E. H. Blip to-day, Pr. (H. C. 1 , 3 3), Skr. m ; E. H. he under- stands, Pr. (H. C. 4, 217), Skr. mzm; B in E. H. BB it breaks, Pr. B|p (H. 0. 4, 230), Skr. B2grTB; E. H. qffs - bark, Pr. fqff (H. C. 1, 3 5), Skr. TOB or Yed. ; S in E. II. a Bt?T or qfirft, see §104 ; E. H. oTi it grouts, see § 114; b m E. H. sub event, word, Pr. oTtTT (H. C. 2, 30), Skr. btbt; E. H. fT ^hand, A. Mg. fBf, Skr. ^bt:; h; in E. H. ass, see § 136; E. Hnjb milk, Pr. cT5 (H. C. 2, 89), Skr. BIBB; ? in E. H. or $3r a kind of verse, Mg. gjtcrtf (cf. H. C. 2, 7 7), Skr. crprp; ; E. H. BTO steam , Mg. (cf. H. C. 2, 70), Skr. bub.; b or B in E. H. 1) and Bp? seem to be correct readings; as shown by the E. H,, which has B for B, not for B (cf. § 129). 80 CHANGES OF CONJUNCT CONSONANTS. § 144.] ^ dll, A. Mg. (cf. H. 0. 3, 58), Skr. usF:; E. H. KTH tongue, Pr. UTSUT (H. C. 2, 57), Skr. finp, 5 m E. H. a palan- quin, Pr. (ef. H. C. 2, 68), Skr. qtffjSFTT or , see note. §161 — 166.] CHANGES OF CONJUNCT CONSONANTS. 89 TUTT salt (obtained from sea-mud). Mg. 173. 3 is elided; sometimes; thus E. H. he desires, see § 145, exc. 2 ; E. H. Ire or he sits , Pr. Scjfsrys, Skr. *3trf5TgiH §174.175.] CHANGES OF INITIAL CONSONANTS 91 ' (denom. of 3C|fsr 7 5 r , cf. Ap. Pr. sqrs H. C, 4, 444, see § 352); E. H. t upon, see § 124; E. H. TINT teachei, see § 144. Note For such elisions m Ap. Mg. see Wb. Bh. 406 ; e. g., qr^, Skr. OT5TTO, etc.' fi) SINGLE CONSONANTS. 174. H and ^ become e~ and s, rarely ; thus h m E. H. rt or crt ‘it breaks, Pr. rTZT (H. C. 4, 230), Skr. NOTf H; E. H. ZT or TO Mg. *TO£ (cf. H. C. 3, 44. 1, 131), Skr. rnfeff: (of O s_», B. FT; cf. hot horse); E. ]?. or fr^T (fem.) sectarian mark on the forehead , Skr. frorgr: (masc.), cf. § 125; E. H. TOTT or zij beak for *rqr, Pr. FT ft (Yr. 1, 20), Skr. TOOT . Again ^ in E. H. Ife or ft* or see § 43 ; E. H. otIt or zjZt beard , Pr. FTTf&^T (cf. H. C. 2, 13 9), Skr. HTOTiT (also F-rffecfiT) ; E. H. OT | or 373 Pr. TT^T (H. C. 2, 139), Skr. E. H. TTJ or OTT or branch (fem.), A. Mg. f-tsTt, Skr. ^rfr, E. H. JTJl or OTOT branch A. Mg. or x TTc7^ (cf. H. C. 4, 445. Ap. OTTt), Skr. 5TT77T:; E. H. Trfr or TTTO branch, A. Mg ^TTHTO, Skr, ^rrjcFiT; E. H. or ^ or or ^ong a half, see § 1 14. White ; Instances m Pr. are ; Pr. TOTT M or Skr. STOTT, E. H. or rfcf cord, whence E. H. TTOT or 2TTOT, #1^ or gTcTF « swing* a dooly, Pr. iroraT or TlTOTET or Skr. ^TcHcFT: or ; Pr. Zjt or Frft, Skr. 3TN', E H. ST^T burnt fire (Skr. ?) ; Pr. 3ff or Z.N, Skr. E. H. or ^jr fern ; Pr. 3TfT os ^Tft, Skr. FCTfb E. H. TTF malice , jealousy and 5OT burning ; Pr. OTTT or £OTf (Wb. Bh. 29 3), Skr, 3>T:, E. H. OT+L knsa-grass ; Pr. OT^, Skr. he bites, E. H. OT : Pr. 3TT or 5TT, Skr. ZJ: bitten, opptessed, whence perhaps E, H. TT77 threat, OTT or 11T he threatens ; see H. C. 1, 217. 21 S, but E. H. zy[ it burns, Mg. Z^Z (cf. Wb. Bh. 155), Pr. (H. C. 1, 218). Skr. E. H. arrogance , Pr. OTT or Skr. 5OT:. 175. 3T, F, T become , respectively ; rarely \ thus 37 in E. H. ^TOtt ccw#/?, Pr. gnfroT (or ^rfroT ? cf. H. C. 1, 181), CHANGES OF INITIAL CONSONANTS 92 176 — 181.] Skr. cfirfqqrr; E. H. STjr beak for see §174; E. H. bug, Pr. tqrurqV (S. C. 1, 3. 13 0), Skr. qfcpTcq:. Note: Pr. examples are* ; very tcirely; E H. or ^Hsr he sp? inkles, see § 149. Note. In Pr. fWcrsrr (Yr. 2, 41), Skr. sgtrar:; E. H. deest. 183. f is prefixed , very rarely; E. H. fTf hp, see § 149. Note * Frequently m S. ; as ^fx or fif so large , frTXT or frit so large , f r?r^Y or ffnfr # so many (Tr. 224), ^5F> or fg one (Tr. 157), f fpt or ffm hete (§ 468, a). Sometimes m B. and M., as B. or f 3T here, srterr or fm (§ 46 8, a); M. or ffSRj hither (§ 468, b). 184. Consonants are elided , only m alliterative phrases; thus ^ in frff srfri meal (lit. bread, etc.): or ^ m mxm ^FtT dinner; very commonly q^, as urfr ^lifr wafer; crr^ dose by; „ ^ * TOf topsy-turvy; qsRTsr he repents deeply; etc. y) CONJUNCT CONSONANTS. 185. % ^ ?s interpolated; often; thus E. H. :tfFr bathing, Ap. Pr. ufTirr (H. C. 4,3 99), Skr. E. H. ^rfTT he bathes , Pr. trfT$ (H. C. 4, 14), Skr. mm: E. H. ^Tf rt he flees, Pr. Skr. * (denom. of part, ?TO); E. H. carnage, Ap. qoTfrri (cf H. C. 4, 3 98) or Pr. OcTf^JT (Mchh. 109, 18), Skr. qoTftrrf ; E. H. tfEJT or qjrt z manifest, see § 102: E. H. qfrrTH clearness , Ap. Pr. srrrFT (cf. H. C. 4, 3 98), Skr. cmsj: ; E. H. gpriro he dis- plays, Ap. Pr. UTTHTJ or q-JTTerf, Skr. crsrnEsrzrft ; E. H. tr^PT pleased, Ap. Pr. omsr, Skr. TOT ; E. H. gftfr leathei n wate /'bucket Ap. Pr. STcTfS or HcTTf? (cf H C. 1, 68), Skr. gcTfctf 1 , or TOTf m : ; * E* H. ^fTf he praises, Pr. JTOTff (cf. H. C. 2, 101), Skr. sttsth ; E. H. srfTfr praise, Pr. ^Tftrr, Skr. srTTOTy E. H. glue (lit. adhesion), A. Mg. TWrir (cf. H. C. 2, 106), Skr. m: (or Pers. sirish ?); E. H. faded, Pr. f^mrf (H. C^2 ir 4 06), Skr. TOfy and in semitats; as E. H. t;cm, Skr. ; (Pr, f^TTlt; BL C. ,2,^0^ 94 CHANGES OF INITIAL CONSONANTS. §'186—188] Ls. 188); E. H. necessity , qpTJT Allahabad, penance, see § 144. Note: In Pr. HorTT^T (H. C. 2, 101), Skr. STWT, E H. srjiir praise 18 6. ^ is interpolated; soynetimes; thus E H. fifty three , Ap. Pr. + flcnsr (ef. H. C. 4, 3 98); Skr. f^n^TSTfr ; E. H. irrp^fs* sixty three , Ap. Pr. Ski\ ; E. H flr^T or fsr^rr triad , see § 408: E. H. m^r eclipse, Ap. Pr. sr^rrr, Skr. sr^rnr/, E. H. ftfarfr spleen; Pr. 914 rg^rfl^T, Skr. srir|cF7T, E. H. m^rr^r fatigue , Pr. *fn^rairt (cf. H. C. 2, 106), Skr. Jwfq-.; E. H. woman, Ap. Pr. Skr. %cfiT. Note * In Pr ftnr^r (Wb. Bh. 4 05. Ls. 182) or or (H. C. 2,102), Skr. gf:, E. H. f§r5ir^ or hSts or Is; love , Pr. fefr (H. c. 2, 104), Skr. sft, E. H. rafp - / V Pr. (H. C. 2, 104), Skr. feu r, E. H. oath; Pr. TWHt. (H. C. 2, 106) trouble, see § 5 8, note. 187. 3 is interpolated, rarely; thus E. H. or recollection, Ap. Pr. H^rptir (H. C. 4, 426 cf. 4, 74), Skr. 188. The first conso/iant is elided; always ; thus E H. irtcT^ within for A. Mg. (§17 2), Skr. WFcfprj E. H. ajtsr, 37T3, 3TJTT, 37fcrr, for 5*111, 537T3, 5377TT. s^fnm, see § 172; E. H. fcrr forgiveness for *^TT, Skr. vPTT, see §§ 36. 191; E. H. fTf lie • desires for *^Ti|, see § 173. Exception r?r remains, as E. H. ronr^ knowledge, Skr. fn^PT , see r § 1 9 1 ; in the khari bhdshd optionally also ^ following a cons., as crrrr or Tprrr manifest , § 185. Note: In Pr. also; as a rule, see II. C. 2, 89. Yr. 3, 50; thus Pr. smrf (H. C. 2. 26), Skr. I3T ; Pr. or yraf for *537FEjV or 3T5?f ^H. C. 2, 27.), Skr. im :; Pr. gpr or ^FTT for * S 5^7T or (H. C. 2, 18 gives in the sense of earth and W*TT as patience or forgivenes; but m E. H., the latter does not exist, and the former means forgiveness or patience), Skr. ^TT; Pr. £Ttrf or emit for *rmi or (H. C. 4, 16), Skr. ssiTW ; etc.; but A. Mg. apparently has occasionally 537; as 537TUT 0 (Wb. Bh. 315. 319), § 189-192. SUFFIXES. 95 SJcr. «rru°; or ffTOWT (Wb.Bh. 29 5), Skr. mnfSrfoTT, etc.; see Wb. Bb. 389. 390. 189. The second consonant is elided: only o; thus E. H. bailer, A. Mg. u^tth^ or (cf. H. C. 1, 230), Skr. urfirr: (or v mmi:). Note: In Pr. (H. C. 2, 102) for UffT (not for "UfTas mH. C. 2, 77), Skr. Uf:, E. H. love, oil , Pr. (H. C. 2, 109) for Skr. , E. H. deest. H jt 190. % or \ ' is prefixed to ^ preceding any consonant; only in semitats; thus E H. ^rrf?T or jsjfn praise, Skr. ^^r:; E. H. bathing, Skr. E. H. tow love . Skr. £[f;; E. H. ^rp*fr woman, Skr. ; or in foreign words, as E. H. or ^3^ school ; E. H. sponger etc. Note. A curiosity is the E. H. $rsP7c cliliofku etc. 199. The fourth set may be added 1) to any subst. of the weak form, 2) to any adj. of the weak long form; in the latter case resulting in the fifth set. The forms thus made will be called, in the case of subst., their long. in the case of adj., their redundant forms. The suff. (m.), (f.) are added to nouns in and the suff. ^trr and X3T (both gen. com.) to nouns in ^ and 3 "respectively. Thus, subst., m. srj or ST^BTT house; f. STTr^or cirrm event; m. mjr (wk. f. sfr^) or sn~ar horse: f. sit ft (wk. f. srqr) or sfrfnrr mate; m. mm (wk. f. qr#r) or qraur gardener; f. crr^ (wk. f. ^cTT^) or siyrar sand; f. ^rfft or srfrnrr fire; m. rr^r or TC^srr teacher , etc. Again adj . m. fspr or light; f. or ^fferr: m. (wk. f. or ^T“3?i5rT small; f. (wk. f. ^fclfj) or ^6f|FpT. Note: Bs. II, 40 and Bates H. Diet. 6 7 give the form 3m for 3FoiT; and Bates 58. for zm. If these be not mere- ly inaccurate spellings, they must be considered as local pecu- liarities. 200. The sixth set can only be added to subst. of the weak form. The forms thus made, I shall call their redundant forms. The suff. m. ?rterr, f. ysHT (or isrr) are added to subst. hi % and c. g. ^EfoTT and 3^cTF (or 3^nr) to subst. in ^ and 3 respectively. Thus m. sr^r or srfterr house; f. STT by retaining 37; 3) 5T37£, ^T, 337^ or ^T37g, 3:aPi^ by reduplicating the suff. and retaining 37; 4)^^, by reduplicating the suff. and eliding eg. In E. H., the first Pr. set is either contracted to ^T, g, 3C (cf. §§ 47. 49. 98, esc.), or separated (by inserting Eg or og § 6 9) into ^oTT, geTT, ScU 1 ); the result being the 1 st and 4 th E. H. sets. Exceptionally the Pr. hiatus is retained in E. H. if, which is apparently the same as the Ap. Pr. termination if. The second Pr. set becomes in E. H. either ^37, gcg, leg (cf. § 45) or ^T|g, g gj7, 3 eg by doubling eg and shortening the preceding vowel; thus forming the E. H. 2 nd set. The third Pr. set again is in E. H. either contracted to ^3?T, g37T, 33iT and ^§gT, gegr, 3|gT, or separated into 3T37cn, ^orr, 3375TT and ^ggerr, gggsrr, 3<§gortY thus' producing the E. H. 3 d and 5 th sets. Finally the fourth Pr. set be- comes m E. H. sncTT (contracted for *^oP“orT, of. § 34), gUoiT (or g^ToTT or contr. gcTT § 83, exc.), 3SHT (or 3SIHT or contr. 375TT § 84, exc.) by inserting Eg or og; thus constituting the E. H. 6 th set. E. g., Skr. sni37: horse, Mg. srrig or (gen.) (§ 3 69,2), E H. sfiTfr or STTpcTT; Skr. *srtecF>cF»:. Mg. (gen.) ateeraTs, E. H. srtften* (for ^sfrgcm); or Skr. fq337: sweet, Mg. ftrg or fep37 or fro, E. H. JTteT or ftscg or fecg: Skr. Mg. m737g or fqjTSF^, E. H. f^cPT or UT6"|gT or f&6cF>srT or ; etc. Similarly in the feminine: 1) Pr. gSTT and 3 *tt = H. H. g and 37 (§51) or ^TT and 3cTT ; 2) Pr. *wr, 3 ) or sbtcrV, I3tt, = E. H. 5Tcg, geg, 337 or $T<^, 3|g (§ 43); 3) Pr. 3t3tHT, IT375JT, ifeETT or $TTf375TT, giWT, 3^&^T = E. H. 3737T, 33RT or STfgt, gcgT, 3$ or $ff373T, griftST, 3T373T or SjfigUT, I%3T, 3%m; 4) Pr. *^OTT, *3WT 2 ), (= *g3i3rr, *33737T) = E. H. ^ToTT, 3^T (or 35TolT). Thus Skr. 1) For an explanation of the final 3JT of these forms see §§ 365,1. 369, 2 2) When 37 is retained or the suff reduplicated, the fem. appears to have been formed irregularly. § 204. 205.] PLEONASTIC SUFFIXES. 103 irftaFiT earth, Mg. srfprr (cf. H. C. 2, 29), E. H. rut or qferT; Skr. *ufeFTcf?T, Mg. RT*RT, E. H. RTRcTT ; or Skr. RUT or RTUcfiT weef, Mg. fer or Rfm, E. H. ru or rut or RTUR; Skr. Mg. RT 37 T or fuTT37T, E. H. RUcFf or fcrUcg ; Skr. *fuu%5|7T, Mg. RTfesrr or RTTt%R, E. H. RUcfr or RU^t or RRott or ftufigsn ; etc. 204. Origin . The original of the suff. 5F7 I am inclined to believe to be the past part. pass. 37TT done for the following reason. There are two main elements 37 and 3 or m. Each of them exists in a twofold use, as a pleonastic or a derivative suffix. It will be shown, that the latter (j or 3T) in its two uses is essentially the same element and has the same origin (Skr. 2“Sl), see §§ 218. 244. 248. 251. The same, probably, is true of the former (3?) also. It will be shown m §§ 280. 338 that the suff. 37 — as a derivative one, at least — has originated from the part. 3R; and in § 3 77, that the genitive affix 37 has the same origin. 205, Origin of the pleonastic forms. Skr. possesses bases m and 3. The declension of the bases m ^ and 3 is intricate; at least, as they form a very small minority, it was much less familiar, than that of the abases. Hence the custom sprang up in Pr., of adding the suff. 37 to the and 3-bases, m order to turn them into ^r-bases; and from habit, it was extended to the abases themselves; thus tending to produce a uniform kind of declension. We shall observe (§ 347) a similar levelling tendency of Pr. in regard to the treatment of the verbal roots whereby * the diversity of the Skr. conjugation was reduced to a uniform pattern. In E. H., this uniformity of declension has become an established fact. In the meanwhile, however, the result of the Pr. habit of adding the suff. 37 was, to produce a double set of forms of the same meaning; the iveab forms in 3, and the strong in (Mg.) ^7, 3^. This must have been felt to be inconvenient. In Gd., therefore, the custom grew up of using only one set; and in the struggle for existence, thus ensuing between the two 104 PLEONASTIC SUFFIXES § 206. 207.] sets, the hardier one (i. e., that of the strong forms), will natu- rally survive. The tendency to extinction of the weak forms is, indeed, umnistakeable in Gd. In E. and W. H., the weak forms in ^ and 3 (probably from having suffered longest the addition of the suff. cpr) are altogether extinct m adj., and, to a considerable extent, in subst. also. The case of the weak form m sr, in W. H., is not very different from this. But the E. H. has more nearly pre- served the older, i. e. Pr., stage, particularly in regard to adj.; though it also shows signs of the same general tendency, in preferring strong fern, in ^ and strong long forms in^ofiT, (see §§ 196. 198). — Another reason for the frequent addition of the suff. ^ in Pr. was its preference (common to ail popular languages) for the use of diminutives. This habit continued m Gd., in whose more uncultivated forms, like the E. H., it is very marked. But as the Pr. strong (or diminutive) forms m 3^, 3^, m their contracted' Gd. forms ST, 3T, had been generally substituted m Gd. in the place of the (more or less) extinct Pr. weak (or non-diminutive) forms, Gd. was obliged to distinguish its diminutive (but, in vulgar speech, pleonastic) forms by some new device. Accordingly , i. e., doubling we have Mg. m. E. H. ^nrr, Mg. f. E. H. In Mg. the vowel, preceding spj , may be lengthened, m. f. or (eliding cF[) srT^r, 3HT; whence, inserting eT, arises E. H. m. f. (== srr^f). E. g., Skr. rru^’, Mg. rrpr or TTjp, E. H. or JTj ; Skr. STTrprcFr:, Mg. or 5 rt3^, E. H. ofZjTg- ; or Mg. m. srum^m or crr3vT5r$r, E. H. srHJfr, f. Mg. STT3vT^9T, E. II. 5T37lft. By way of illustration compare E. H. sriZfT inferior, low-priced, Mg. arr^, Skr. srirrTUT:. Third Group. Set. Com. \ Ejen. Masc. Fem. i) a. nj or SJ or ^fr or srit b. — — or 3T7 cv or £>- 2) or u w or ^ T or o, F3T 3) or U17! srrp- or mix ST7T or srrirr 4) % or wm or «3?t or « ft 5) a. or U ^TT or w or b. or k t or r W l^t or tf* c. or JvTT or W or # ' 6) a. ^13^ or ■ ^TVrfT or ■ itjT imt 01 • 9>fT b. 3^ or 3vTT or 3T7T or 3rft c. or 31 or 3U 3cit or 3fT 7) a. ^TT ait b. 3^ 3^t The forms with 3 are properly W. H., and are rarely used in E. H. (see § 29). Most of the forms with maybe, and commonly are pronounced with "jr (see § 30); some, however, have always others always All forms of com. gen. are weak, the others con- 106 PLEONASTIC SUFFIXES §210—213.] taining the pleon. suff. of the 1 st set 1 st group are strong. The forms or #7^, contracted from Ap. Pr. #33“ = *#337:, are properly W. H., and occur only exceptionally m E. H. As to the manner of adding them, see § 195, note. 210. The first set occurs in subst. and adj.; often; thus m. nzj or nrjT, f. °ff t of iTTo (or stst) bundle ; =erq^T, of =5TPT leather; (or rfNnf), of (or elra) mud (cf. § 13 3); fH3?T, Pr. E. H. *3%^; etc. This derivation is § 224—227.] SECONDARY DERIYAIIVE SUFFIXES. 113 illustrated by E. H. two and a half \ which is eontr. from Mg. 0psr$$rT (cf. Wb. Bh. 425. H. C. 1,101 and §416), Skr. ^yHrTt^rr. Second Group. 224. Set. 1. Masc. ^T3 or Set 2. Masc. Both sets are weak forms. As to the manner of adding them, see § 19 5, note. 225. These suff. are used to derive abstract nouns from a very small number of adj., expressive of dimension; viz., 37373 or or height, of 3r3T high; 3Tf%rT3* or nf^ua^or rri%ruT depth , of m%|7 deep, srT3T3 or 3T3Tc[ or 3T~3T^ depth, of sfrjT deep ; ^ttts or ^rfra or 3TpT breadth, width , of ^tjt (H. H. ot) broad , wide; W3T3 or or length , of ^arr The forms m are properly and generally masc. ; but are some- times used as fem. l$ote. There aie also the ordinary forms m (§ 229): as i'-cfTA? JTF^T^, cWTs, etc. 226. Aff Duties. These suff. are not strictly E.H., but in- 1 troduced from the W. II. ; and occur m all W. Grds. See Bs. II, SO. 81. Tr. 5 9. 1^ S. they are fern., m G. neuter, and in P. masc. The^ fem. gender m S. is a Gd. formation, like that of the suff. g, Ap. cjjtqqift, E. H. rg-^jggT or ©[J&igft : etc. The yT in the E. H. forms yiqT, ^Tgg^ might be the usual result of the simplification of the con- junct but is more likely to be the strong termination of the base, as shown by the M., which changes that m to as goodness (Man. 112) for E. H. ggrrgg; i. e., M. adds gg to the strong form gft = ugrsr = Pr. ggrST = Skr. ggefi. In the B. and 0. ft the has been apparently softened to g. Fourth Group. 232. Set. Com. gen. Fem. 1) eft or cTrT^ cim or ©rft 2) or gnf^ ftrr or gft The forms of com. gen. are weak, the others are strong. Strong masc. forms (ac cTrTT, etc.) do not exist. 233. The weak suff*. are used to derive possessional adj. from subst. of the weak form. Thus oft or 37T in ygsft or ygarT (m. f.) wealthy, of yg wealth; grrg©r^ or °ai faithful, of mru faiih; or °oTr^ sorroivful , of sorrow; ggsrn^ or ©nr virtuous, of 116 SECONDARY DERIVATIVE SUFFIXES. §234—236.] ^virtue; sTOofn^or %c^victorious : of sT ^victory; qr^ofr^ or 0 oTfT proud, of ztpc gride; 47iHrT^ or °sr?T^ fortunate , excellent , of 4JT^ fortune , e#- cellence , etc. Again 4rT^ or 4cp in TVrrpTrT^ or fufplr^ (m. f.) cxceZ- lent , of fuf^r excellence , or ° 4 r^ monkey , of ^ftrfrT^ or °3TU devoted , of 4% devotion; or °4rT virtuous , of w- ^e; etc. 234. The strong fem. suff. are commonly used to derive abstract nouns from their respective possessional adj., as yUcrut wealthiness, of OTofu wealthy, m^omf thoughtfulness, ofsrrac ^thought- ful, of thought, etc.; see §§ 256. 257 235. Affinities. These suff. exist in all Gds., exc. S. See Bs. II, 106. As to M. see Man. 114. H. H. and the H. Gds. generally are fond of using the tats, forms, m. STT^, f. 5 RTt; as jp^v^heautifid, f. pronft; vRzr^wealthy, f .vrol; syriHUh wera- f. Y^'iyUT, etc. In E. H., however, as distinguished from H. H., the tats, forms do not occur, except in a few proper names, as mToTPT God , uiicTrft the goddess Gaudi, etc. ; ^4414 the monkey-god , etc. S. has the suff. 3T4 m., srnrf f. (Tr. 7 6. 99), asm. ut^Tcrnr, f. g te roTP fh E.H. m. f. UMoffT^ or °cJrTj H. H. rn. UTcrfoTT^^f. UT^ffr amiable. This S, form has in exceptional cases crept into the other Gds.; as H., M., G. irrifcrr^ or nrflcrPT coachman (see Man. 113. Ed. 14). 23 6. Denv at ion. The originals of these suff. are the [ Skr. taddh. STr^and JTtT,, which become in Pr. ofrT and 4rT (Yr. 4, 35. ; H. C.“2, 159). "Whence in the Mg. nom. sg. m. sn=r and *TFT, f. ofrft and 4fff; m E. H. m. f. 5TU and 4U (§§ 43.45) or aH and (§§ 143. 146). Or with pleon. added, in Mg f. ofTH^fT and 4fu^T. E,. H. oTffr and 4fTT or cTUT and 4rft (§ 51). Thus Skr. m. ^RoTFT , Mg. yuTcfu, E. H. SRcffT or 0 oirC; Skr. f. yUoTcft, Mg. OTToifff, E. H. 6R33 or °£irTj again Skr. f. Mg. E. H. y^cirtl or °orrfr (scl. condition). The S. oTPT, f. oTTRT, though, probably, ultimately connected with the Skr. suff., are independent of the Pr. m. oTUT, f. cirTT; for they exist also in Pers., and 'there are no forms 4PF, quit in S., corresponding to Pr. *TcTt. §237—240,] SECONDARY DERIVATIVE SUFFIXES, 117 Fifth Group. 23 7. Set. 1) Com. gen. 3nr$?T (§ 82). Masc. ^rTT or ^rTT. Fern, or ^fTt (§§ 25. 77) The suit, of com. gen. is a weak, the others are strong forms. 238. These suff. occur only with a very few subst. from which they are used to derive possessional adj. ; and from the latter abstract nouns are derived by means of the fem. strong form (see § 2 57). Thus shield-bearer , or ttkm office of $h.° , from shield; spear snum , of 5T[gjr spear; SFiWl^T war r tor-hard. , of W7WT toap-^nug: (f h ng-icor shipper , of f^frr phallus: ^(*41 Arp father, of ^T^talk; ^TrTTArp kinsman , of TiTTT fow; ST^lTfT. or or cF^rTT o/* a m*// poisonous snake, of gFiTTT or !HT^T Wr/r7i ; WTcnf rofr&Pr and TcFrycff or jmm profession of rabbet g . of ST5FT robbing: ^rfrTTcrr (fem.) abundance, of 5Tfrpm?. As to the origin of the suff. 3?TFT and 3TTFT, they are probably derivatives of the Skr. suff. 3ST like; see § 251. Seventh Group. ' 245. Set. Com. gen. Masc. Fem. 1) 3^ or sqif rrcnT or vm or 2) or ^f 3FTT or 7 tax, etc. 251. Affinities and Der ivation. I believe these suff. and their derivatives are, stiictly, W. Gd. , and only introduced into the E. H. from the AY. H. To this group belong the suff., 8 . 31 ^ (Tr. 70) and M. ^T73T (Man. 113); e. g,, S. qffijqT walker , of q^r or foot , STUTTYpT guide , of cHZ wag. — On comparing 122 SECONDARY DERIVATIVE SUFFIXES § 252, 253.] this group with the sixth and seventh, it will he seen ? that there are, in each, identical suff. containing ^ or ^ or ID, thus, sixth group, E. H. or ^T3T, M. or mz, S. mj or M. mi ; seventh and eighth groups, E IT. or or ^r?T, M.^3ET; E. H. ^TUT, W, H. ^TorTT or ^THT, M. srf£T. Further, on comparing these with the third pleonastic group (§ 209), it will he seen that the suffixes in the two classes are identical. Hence it appears pro- bable, that they Ime the same origin and are derived from the Skr suff. as explained in § 218. Skr. <£S[P*>: would, in Ap. Pr., become whence, eliding and contracting the hiatus-vowels, the forms lift and 3JTT would arise, as contained in S, and M. ^T3JTT. The initial vowels of the latter must be accounted for by the addition of the pleon ^ to the base, just as in pleon. ^rr, ^mr, c^TT, etc (see § 2 1 8). — That the Skr. suff. FTST like would easily lend itself to derive possess, adj., may be seen from the German pemlich, i. e., painful, or from the English lively, prickly, sprightly = full of life, pricks, spirit. Ninth Group . 252. Set. Com. gen. Masc. Fern. 1) r — ^cKT 2) . ^rr or The suff. 537 and are weak, the others strong forms. As to the manner of adding them, see §195, note. 253. These suff. are used to derive adj. expressing, in a general way, possession or relation from subst. The first set is the one commonly used; sometimes in its long form ^TT (s^e § 199). Thus, 1 st set in tTSTT or sram friend, companion , of of companionship; wtft or enemy, of m^orsprf? enmity; 5T3toTT^ or smtftraT or smuitrr a talkative person , of srgTonrj or srnwr talk; wt happy, of w happiness; jrwi miserable , of fp^pam ; surf wealthy . of yyp wealth; oilman , of oil; ^TTcfr gardener , of jtt^ or *TIW garland; washerman , of (§ 3 1 1) washing; ^qrrrf or fdrfFQT craftsman , of fpfrft handicraft; huntsman , of suit shooting; iTsfpJT shepherd , of UT fold, etc. And belonging to 12S §254—257.] SECONDARY DERIVATIVE SUFFIXES a HincU of Hindu ; qjTVt bel. to a MardtJid of UTTST Alardthd (man or country) ; mrerl English of ^3TsT Englishman or England. etc. Again the 2 nd set in or fcfferT, f. °qRT wealthy, of wealth, etc. 254. Derivatives in 3 are gen com., when used adjectively; but when used as subst., they form a fem. in T& or on which see the next group (§ 2 5 6). Thus chiTrrff Ban gall language; ©rf|ft foreign woman , but sm ifef^r or onrrfwfi' a woman of Bangui , srfffTut or srf%fpft a woman of a foreign country. 255. Affinities and Derivation. These suff. exist in all Gds.; see Bs. IT, 83 — 89., where examples will be found. — The original is the Skr. taddh. suff. in Mg. (in the nom. sg.) or Zf* (or am, 7?e^, of cock; e tc. Occassionally the corresponding masc. m is not in use (cf § 196); as URrff fem. goldsmith, of *urttt or utuT^ m. ; ^mff f leather- worker, of *xj3TT^T or ^-qr m. ; cjft-frff, f. potter, of *5RT^TfT or qfr^q- m. ; cF^rff, f. portey , of or q^q- m. ; gruff, f. car- penter, of ^UrHTT or UrTT^ m. Note: In a few cases the long form m (see § 199) is exclusively used; as in cftferT fem., of cFtfCT dog; fjferr small box, of feu boo:, $jug?XT old teaman, of spq old man; but the short forms cFnfT, ferr, also occur. 25 9. The second set can be added only to subst. in % or § or 3, expressing animate objects ; never to adj., except when used substantively. Thus m ¥ ; persons : uVrrfffu or °f^UT f. gold- smith, of ufef m., or°fqrtf leather- worker, of xTur^ m.; msrrferu or ua^ or n° f. cowherd, of tttcTT^ m. , ururfefe ferry- woman, of STZoFT^m., etc. Or animals; quffRT f. moth, of qTU^ m. ; sufirfu or 5 u£rt tigress, of ©rru tiger \ urrirfu or refer lioness, of ufe lion. Again in f; persons; qfrferr or f. neighbour, of qftur m.; §7Tfirf3r or °fttuf f. ascetic, of TUT; mfeu or °uf f. gardener, of ufe m. ; fcJrfsrfu or 0 uf washerwoman, of m. ; cfiTrau or °ut f. leper, of qfeT, etc. Or animals; or ijfzRt f. elephant , offer! m. Again in or ufefr f. barber, of §260—262.] SECONDARY DERIVATIVE SUFFIXES. 125 ^13: m.; or 0 ^ watchman’ s Wife, of , etc.*, see § 256. Occasionally the masc. is not in use, as or sritp^ or sri%TT sisto (masc. UT$ brother). 260 The third and fourth sets are confined to some par- ticular words, as cranpr or ° Jr icife of a QTTT a hnd of brahman ; =cTT5rT^T iv oman of the r caste ; woman of the gjr (m .) caste; 6 j^TcTL tody °f tord, chief , ^JtyyT^FL wife of a ^ryff head- man ; wife of a re? shoulder ; 'cprq', f. °p or or °iX ; rr leather-worker, of leather-, f.°fr or °fjnr or Q fpft carpenter, of pp thread ; 5T-JTJ or #fym£ or #JTp, f. °ft, or #nrsrrfT m., 9 130 SECONDARY DERIVATIVE SUFFIXES. § 277—280.] f. °ft dark or darkness , of wr dark. The 2 nd set in jsrrfi’, f. QsTTfffri or 0 ffrir worshipper, of ogrr worship . The 3 d set in |>£3rrqr or °^r or °ft deliverance , of WZJ delivered. 277. Affinities and Derivation. The original of these suffixes is the Skr. noun ZRTJ or cFrrfpb; e. g., Skr. <5OTcfrrp or °ft, Mg. cgwsnte or or ctente or E. H. ter^r (cf. §120); Skr. cgrrqiTf fw (i. e., °fpr + w). Mg. q?mfte$r, E. H. qsnft, N. (S. Lk. 1, 5). These and similar words occur in all Gds. As to the fem., see § 25 9. r Fifteenth Group. 278. Set. Com. gen. Masc. Fem. 1) c£ CRT cl 2 ) £ — — The forms of com. gen. are weak, the others strong. 279. These suff. are used to derive adj. expressing relation from a subst. Thus cKT 6c£ or cfiT or SHOTTr, f. °cr! wooden , of cfhtt wood ; or f. °^T domestic, of sqr house ; srsfj or oRcfiT, f. wifcZ, of /oresf; etc. 280. Affinities and Derivation. These sufff are iden- tical with the common genitive affixes; and their derivatives are really genitives of the respective bases. This can be seen from the fact that all the various Gd. gen. aff. may be used in this way; thus M. xTT in M. £Tf3T domestic (Man. 113. Bs. II, 110), in S. nft^rf of the same village , of rite ; araterr of the jungle , of srft (Tr. 91); again Konkanf ^tt in M. FfTOrr of that place, of m* there (Man. 113); again G. urt in S. =aV^TTTrr thievish, of thief, or cTT) or (c) f^f^r (in the past tense, for *zjk) or Bs. (d) 55TT (Kl. 224) or ^?TT or T^TT. B. (a) (in the past tense and cond. part.. S. Ch. 190) or(d)p-7TT (S. Ch. 19 0), 0. (a) t*T or (b) or (d) (Sn. 3 6), M. (b) f^nr (Man. 80). PI. II. (d) prn, P. (perhaps for Skr. or formed like falcn, cf. Ld. 6 6); again Ap Pr. (b) or (d) ^ ^^3 ; W. II. (b) Mw. or vrvr or ^FTT or or (dj^T or Bs. (d) ^cfr or f^zrr, G. (b) £Hrr (Ed. 59j. — 4) R. y place ; Skr. ypr:, Gd. deesf; or Skr. 'srfpi:, Mg. (a) yfnnr or (b) yf^p or A. Mg. (c) yf&T^ (cf. II C. 1, 3 6. yr^^fr) or (d) E. II (a) y^sr or yf^T or (b*) y^?TT or yfp^TT or (c) y^ or yf^r or Bs. (c) y^ or (a) y^T, B. and 0. (a) yfpr or (b) iri^T or (d) yjT, M. (b) ypyTT, II. II (d) ypT, P. (d) yr^T ; again Ap. Pr. (b) yf^3 or (d) yfps, W. II. (d) yyr or ynf, G. (d) tot, S (d) yij^T or yyf. — 5) R. cft do ; Skr. (a) or (d) SjTOT:, Ap. (a) fej (II. C. 4, 446) or (/3) feys (II. C. 4, 3 7 1 ), S. {p) (Tr. 277); again Skr. *3nf^cn, Mg. (a) or (b) cFTP^ or A. Mg. (c) or (d) yrfSra^ or Ap. (d) TcfiSTT (PI. C. 4, 3 9 6 ; see II. II. below), E. II. (a) (§§ 109. 124) or (b) ST^TT or (c) (in the pret. tense, § 502 esc., with euph. q;, for ^ ■= formed after f&if^ taken, r^t% given) § 307.] PRIMARY DERIVATIVE SUFFIXES. 143 or Bs. or (d) mjX, B. and 0. (a) or (b) grfpTT (in the past tense and condit. part., S. Ch. 144. 148. Sn. 27) or (d) mjx (S. Oh. 148. Sn. 39), M. (b) km (for *q?r*prr, Man. 80). II, II. (d) %3T (for *OTT — 3T^TT, see S. below, formed after T^ZTr given, f mn taken, ffTTT gone), P. (d)cfiTcTT (perhaps for *37^7, like rnnx taken, q. v., Ld. 66); again Ap. Pr. (b) TOTHS' or (d) or (H. C. 4,378 = 3?JTO, see below W. H.), W. II. (b) Mw. cRT^T or cF?hfr or 3TOT or (formed like c?TTVr, etc,, q. v., Kl. 2 1 3), or (d) TOT or (d) Br. TOT or ferr (for * TOT = see below S.}, G. (b) 3FTOT (Ed. 50) or (d) TiTT, S (d) tot (for *TO^T, Tr. 277) or (b) gftriV (see above P.). — 6) R. rrq^go: Skr. (a) TO: or (/)) TOcfi:, Mg. («) or TO or (/5) it^ or TOF, 0. («) 37^ or (J) TOTT (in the pret. tense and condit. part, Sn. 34); or Skr. (a) *nTTO'. , Pali (a) 3rfrot (Ms. 131). Mg. (a) nutv or (b) or (0) ITT% or (d) nTro^r (cf. Wb. Bh. 405 = *t\ mmx% = *nTTOTOT), or Ap. (d) nrrr (II. C. 4, 376. see II. II. below), E. II. (a) or (b) U*prT or (c) TO (in the pret. tense, § 502 exc.) or Bs. (d) TOT (= TT^T, see below P.) or contr. nr (Kl. 225), B. (a) iW (in prefr tense and eond. part, S. Ch. 144. 148) or Id) frftn (S. Ch. 148, for TOT, see below P.), M. (b) riTOT (Alan. 80), H. H. TOT (=7 st^Tt), P. TO^T orfttm (Ld. 66); again Ap. Pr. (d) nfqTO or TOTO or contr. ms (II. C. 4, 422. 20., see W. II. and above P.), W.IL (d) Br. TO* or Mw. TO or TOTT (Kl. 213.? TTOT?), G. (d) TOT (Ed. 50 or TOTOT Ed. S3., see § 216), N. TOT. — 7) R. u lc\ Skr. TO:, Pr. (II. C. 4, 64), Gd deest; or Skr, Mg. (a) ufsrrr or (b) or (c) jTsr: (cf. II. 0. 1, 60) or (d) nf§r^ or (e) or (f) or (g) or (h) §r^ (cf. H. C. 4, 401 — qffTO c ) or (1) or £k) or (1) ffsrsnj or (m) Ap. (m) JTO (II. C. 4, 3 51, forTfprr, see below H. H., and compare Ap. TOT and *t^t). E. II. (a) iT^r^ or (d) si^yTT or (g) TO or TO (§ 123) or (h) or e, and ^ after Rs. in ^ ; 2) that before the suff. of the second and fourth sets, the termin. of caus. and den. Rs. is elided, and final radicals and ^ are shortened. For the rest see § 298, note. 309. Me a n ing. These suff. are used to derive 1) part, fut., both pass, and act., and 2) verbal nouns, both of act and agency, from any root. Originally their derivatives were* part, fut. passive only ; but in the neuter gender they naturally came to express verbal nouns of act and thus were used as the (so- called) infinitive ; for the “ It is to he done " of a thing fis equal to the “doing’ of a thing . Next the pass, sense was dropped, as in the case of the past part. pass. (§301, note), and the part, used actively (e. g., in the formation of the fut. tense act. cf. § 509,3): and thus it came to express verbal nouns of agency. The latter process was facilitated by the addition of pleon. suff., see §314. With some intrans. verbs, as to he , the part. fut. pass, ne- 10 PRIMARY DERIVATIVE SUFFIXES. 146 §310.311.] cessarily has an active sense; and this may have led the way to the general practice of using this part, actively. 310. The first set is used to form the part. fut. or the inf. Thus or what is to he laughed qt or to laugh, of R. laugh ; or what is to he read or to read, of R. ^read; what is to he done or to do, of R. ^ do; or or what is to he touched or to touch, of R. g? touch; or sfjrsrs^ or what is to he sown or to soiv, of R. srl sow. But or what is to he eaten or to eat , of R. eat ; §7{T3©j^ or what is to he caused to, he done or to cause to do, of C. R. cause to do; or qW what is to he drunk or to drink, of R. m drink ; ^sr or what is to he given, debt or to give , of R. £ give; or what is to he, future, possible or to he, of R. he. Thus *rr or *fr ir 3T snS" by me that is to he done, or actively (= ^rsr + f) J shall do. The fem. in ^ is used only as a component part of the fut. tense act., as (fem.) thou wilt do for CR^fSr 4* cf. § 509, 3. 311. The second set is used to form nouns of ^^r^hus srErrf coming, of R. come; srsrur going, of R. ?rr go; eating, of R. m eat ; g^rio^ or gsur or gsHoiT seeing, of R. ggr see; fegor m=srr^ or raxTTH£ irrigation, of R. jfre irrigate ; tmxc^ or or Tr^ToTT movement , of R. move ; or ^Tcrr fighting, of R. or fight; xr^rrs^ dispatch, of C. R. x^rr^ cause to go. Very commonly the fem. expresses the wages or price paid for doing a thing, as or tvages for keeping, of R. pw keep ; zRzmz wages for cutting , of R. srrs ; swan^ or sr^ or SMTdT making or price for making of C. R. SFrr ^jmake ; fS^oi i ^ or wages for ivriting or dictation, of R. or G. R. dictate. The masc. strong form is very rarely used and, as a rule, has some special meaning; thus ^X^JTS^: dress (lit., ivhat is to he put on), of R. put on, wear ; gWon a call, of C. R. srcsn ZfcaU, but cpfTdz calling : fq^rsn mixture, ofR. fw^wix; =TOF^T sacrifice . of C. R. ^rsr sacrifice (lit., cause to ascend). 312 . 313 .] PRIMARY DERIVATIVE SUFFIXES. 147 312. The third, fourth, fifth and sixth sets are used to form nouns of agency . The fourth set is the one commonly em- ployed. Thus or glutton or WoT^rr or tstott eater , of R. *prr cat ; or or TITTcF^ or or ZJ^cr^XT timid coward, of R. fear ; prarq[ or ^fcrr^T or profit or ^w^tTT guardian, of R. J&keep; ; E. H. recognize, cf. Skr. qf^qa-iq^ (§ 69); E. H. peep. cf. Skr. wrt q? : E. H. qT~cH flow#, cf. Skr. srq qy; E. II. qr^q? cw/dt, nimble, cf. Skr. q?^ q> ; E. II. yfcg fr/oztf, cf. Skr. $p qr, etc. The first class of roots I shall designate primary , the other secondary . 1. PRIMARY ROOTS. 343. The phonetic a disguises which affect the primary roots and make them differ more or less from their -Skr. originals, are i ( / generally owing to the following causes* 1 5 phonetic permutation of the radical consonant or vowel; 2) the incorporation of the Sanskiitic n class-suffix “ into the root; 4 3) the change of the Sanskritie „ class a of tlie ro<»t ; 4) the addition of the pleonastic radical suff. ^Tfq. Not unfrequently several of these causes act- together. On the other hand a few roots, favored by peculiar phonetic circumstances, remain altogether unchanged so as to be m E. II. and in Skr. 344. Phonetic permutation. 1) Final radical consonants are principally exposed to this cause of change, because through the accretion of the (so-called) „ class-suffix they generally be- come medial, and then, in their progress through Pr. and accor- ding to its laws, liable to permutation or elision. Thus E. II. WT cat for Pr. <3T, Skr. WIT; as 3 d sing. pres. Skr. Pr. or (Yr. 8, 27), E. H. Sometimes, however, a root contains a final consonant which Pr. tolerates, and thus identical roots arise; e. g., E. H. =3 qF[_ for Pr. Skr. j as Skr. win, Pr. xT^r, E. II. xT5?r. Hence, when the E. H. exhibits an (apparently) identical root with Skr. (as E, H. qq be hot), containing a final consonant, which would ordinarily be liable to change in Pr., the identity is open to suspicion, and is, probably, to be accoun- ted for in a different way, namely by the incorporation of „the class-suffix tt , see § 345. — 2) Initial radical consonants are rarely 11 162 PRIMARY ROOTS. § 345 .] liable to change, and, indeed, never change, unless they are com- pound consonants or a prefix is added, when the initial cons., being now medial, is either changed or elided in Pr. ; but such roots are of unfrequent occurrence in E. H. ; thus E. H. =et_ leak for Pr. (gf), Skr. sgrfT or =53fT ; as Skr. rfvrfft, Pr. (H. C. 2, 77) or E. H. or E. H. offer food for Pr. crfyira , Skr. qf^ira (caus. of qTf-fsrqJ ; as Skr. ctffirwfH, Pr. ofjcfyy or qfjfirqy, E. I-I. qfra (§ 122,5). Very exceptionally a real single initial cons, is changed; e. g., E. H. be for Pr. JH, Skr. (§ 176, note), as Skr. ^Torfw, Pr. or ^ (Yr. 8, 1), E. H. lie is ; hut the original ^ is preserved in the E. H. past part. Xl^lbeen. — 3) Ptadical vowels occasionally suffer a change; some- times through the vocalisation of an adjoining semivowel (^or a^, §§ 121. 122); thus E. H. fT be for Pr. |cT or ^sr, Skr. Jjj E. H. i moisten for Skr. (§ 172); sometimes by the ordinary phonetic laws; thus E. H. rub for Pr. Skr. as Skr. E^fer, Pr. (H. C. 4, 126), E. H. q|r (§ 109); or E. H. a? or ST break for Pr. gj, Skr. 3T, see §§ 143. 147. 1 74 ; E. II. ^tq be angry for Pr. Skr. see §§ 143. 148. — ceptionally the initial vowel of the prefix of a compound root is elided; as E. H. wish for Pr. *3=^Tf\ see § 173;” or E. H. sweep for Pr. BSSR|, see § 172. 345. Incorporation of the „clas$~$uffix“. Skr. roots are divided into ten classes, according to the suffix which they assume for the purpose of forming the conjugational base for the four principal tenses or moods (pres., imperf., potent., imper.). In all other tenses these „ class-suffixes u are rejected and the root used alone. Already in Pr., however, it had become the custom, sometimes to incorporate the class-suff. and to use the root, thus amended, as the eonjug. base in all tenses (or moods) and derivative verbs (passive, causal, etc.). In Gd. this usage has been still more extended. Thus E. H. has R. 5TPT. knot# for Pr. and 5TT, Skr. through incorporating the suff. ?rT of the IX th class, as Skr. ^TCRTfH, Pr. ?msTT<[ (cf. H. C. 3, 154. Ls. § 345 .] PRIMARY ROOTS. 163 348 = 5TT 4- tnr + 3 -) or wrmj (Yr. 8 , 23 — ?miT 4 - + 3 ); E. H. sTPT; or E. H. gather for Pr. or f%HT^ or f%. Skr. fir. through incorporating the suff. JT of the Y tb cl. ; as Skr. Pr. fecirr^ (cf. Ls. 347 = {%-qft-^) or f%trr^ or ^ruTy (Yr. 8. 29. II. C. 4, 238 = finjT or * 4- ^), E. H. or E. H. ^ r dance for Pr. xttw^ Skr. through incorporating the suff. ^ of the IV th cl., as Skr. ^TrUTH, Pr. (Yr. 8, 47 = UTW + w 4* £), E. H. ^rrg', etc. It should be noticed, that the incorporation of the class-suif. is more or less optional in Pr. and, indeed, ex- ceptional as regards the j»so-called „ general a tenses and derivat. verbs (cf. "Wb. Spt 59); but in Gd. it is absolute. It may be surmised that, while this was the case in the literary Pr., in the more vulgar Ap. dialects, from which the Gd. took its immediate origin, incorporation was the usual, perhaps the general, practice. That it was a real incorporation of the suff. into the root, even in Pr., can be seen clearly from those forms in which according to Skr. usage the class-sufF. could have no place; such as srrftnrar Jjht, Skr. * srrfftrTJT ) known , but also regularly UTTU (II. G. 4, 7). for SkiVrinT 5 ^; or Pr. srrfirr^xrr (lit., Skr. * sTTFTrcTF) or regularly umnr (H. C. 4, 7), for Skr. fTTroTT having known:, or Pr. sTTOnsr^ (II. C. 3, 149), for Skr. fftqxrfd (lit. *§TRmf?r) he caused to know] or Pr. or (II. C. 4, 243), for Skr. irarfar (lit. or * f%rfer.um, i. e., r% or he will gather ; or Pr. (H. C. 4, 242), for Skr. (lit., Skr. * 1%-cOW or Pr. *T%xrrf^$) it is gathered ; or Pr. make low , degrade, m make long, delay, etc. (see more examples in M. W. Skr. Lex. under Art. ^). In fact, any suitable noun might be thus turned into a verb. But it is not of these, that I speak here, but of a special and small class from among them, in which the construction of the noun with the R. has become so firmly established by more or less obscure causes, as to produce, through constant usage, a coalescence of its two component parts (N. + R.) into one single simple form, and the recognition and treatment of this compound fprm as a simple root. Such roots I designate compound roots. Thus there is in Skr. a paraphrased verb + cf> or 4- ^ bloiv, whence he blows ; this appears in Pr. as or and in E. H. as 9?5ff. In Skr. the two eom- ponenf parts, N. tfirT and R. cp, are still separate and clearly re- cognisable, but they have already in Pr. and still more in E. H. coalesced into one form, Pr. Orgr, E. H. QT37 which is now re- cognised *in E. H. as a simple root; in reality it is compound. This process of amalgamation must have been already at work in old times, for among the recognised simple roots of Skr. are found several, which are clearly compound ; as ©Teg bark (cf. H. C. 4, 169) = or 5 RT + cff; y^g destroy = urn + w or 4- (acc. sg. neut. of N. or *sw); swell = 9T5T 4- f pain = -j- f; bind == FPJ + m, etc. There can hardly SECONDARY ROOTS. 175 § 353 .] be a doubt as to the compound character (as above explained) of such roots; though the exact phonetic process, by which it was produced, may be obscure. The following may be found a probable explanation. It has been shown in § 348 , that in Pr. passive roots are often employed in an active sense; and that sometimes they are recognisable by the termination which is occasionally reduced to It is probable, therefore, that the Pr. form $7^ or 5F7^r (as in or tffr§pr Spt. 173= Skr. Wcfi jrf?r) is a passive-active form, or identical with the Skr. pass. ffeuH, used actively. There are i^ E. H. a few forms which support this view. Thus it has the form which is both active ( lie wears) and passive or intrans. (it is worn or it wears ) ; the correspon- ding Pr. forms would be or and in Skr. we find the form 3QfJrarT which is both pass, and act. (YI th class). In fact, iff this particular case, the properly passive form has already in Skr. assumed an active sense; for the usual active form of the R. s* is y^"f?r, of the I st class. Similarly the R. *3 die is said to be in classic Skr. an active belonging to the VI tu class (felrr). It is, however, really passive with an active sense 1 ); for the proper active voice, which has been lost in the classic Skr., but preserved in the Yedic and also in Pr. and E. H., is (like that of R. $£) of the I st cl. (JT^fcT). It is precisely the same with the R. 37 do. Its Skr. pass, form has come to be occasio- nally (i. e., in compound roots) used in Pr. as an active (of the YI t]l cl.). Its corresponding proper active form is (like that of the Rs. and y) of the I st class, and, though lost in classic Skr*, still preserved in the Yedic and in Pr. (37^) and E. H. (cF7^“). But although the Pr. 37^ or 37^ and the E. H.^ have generally assumed an active meaning, their original passive signi- fication is still apparent enough in some cases. Thus E. H. oT^, 1) The change, in this case, was facilitated by the R. being in- trans. Besides, as both the YF 1 el. and the pass accentuate the suffixal vowel, there is absolutely no difference, externally, between the act. YI ^ cl. fiJUrT wriycite and the pass. fijUcf mriyate . 176 SECONDARY ROOTS. § 853 .] from E. H. R. stray (i. e., lit. be turned out , scl., of the right path) represents the Pr. srf^Ifi^ or &ad Skr. ^ ; or E. H. 3=cT^, of the E. H. root 3^3? be raised , rise , representing the Pr. or 3^%^ and Skr. (Vedic) 3WTTWrT he is carried on high , etc. *). It has been stated already that in such compositions the R. c ft was usually constructed with some simple derivative noun. The simplest form of a noun, derived from the simple root, is the root itself; as Skr. R. ^ hinder , N. ^ hindrance . The next simplest is a noun, formed by one of the krit-suffixes or ^ 5 as Skr. R. cense, N. ceasing ; or R. 37^ N. 3W pain. In constructing such a noun with the R. 9FT, it is, if it has the form of the simple root or is formed with the krit-suff. rT., im- mediately joined with the R. 37 ; as N. ^ hindrance, acc. sg. neut. whence Cp. R. ^ = E. H. ^37 hinder ; or N. =S£r crv unused C. R. 337, Pr. 3 cg, Skr. degrade = f3-#3-37. c 3 54. It remains briefly to notice a small number of E. H. roots, which probably belong to the one or the other of the above mentioned two principal classes, but which I am not able satisfactorily to trace to a Skr. origin. They must have been subject to extreme phonetic deterioration. They may be divi- ded into : 1) such as are, probably, primary roots; e. g., £3 hurst, £3, vex, p shout, remove, £3; sharpen, ft handle, grope, £13; cram, ft carry, cm; siich, H3; be parched, T33 be congealed, fngx or or eft x bend, 337[ or fte rcjpose, 33T sharpen, ft or fta; or fte make bread or thread, 33 s7mf, 3^r acquire a taste, 33; bend, 3£ 5e Me??, f§r? or 3 T 3 ; swallow, recline, 3t£ o#er, return, 33; mixed, be soiled and tr. 3T3; mix , so?‘7, 3T^ review, &e perverse, f|73; loathe, etc. 2) such as are, probably, secondary roots, and divisible into: a) denominative; as XTT^rrqr call, f3n; be handled, etc. ; — h) com- pound; as srt% scold, prevent, challenge, vzmgo astray, etc. ; c) to these may be added a class of roots which end in 3^ or 12 178 SECONDARY ROOTS. § 354 .] (or £) or e; as or EfJ walk to and fro (cf. N. Ef^T. f - ser ~ vice , drudgery); or s7op, remain (cf. E^r or ETS ^ a place) ; or y^sr or ycET^r (cf. or y|gT & shove); ^^rn^pass agreeably, be amused (cf. R ste /to) ; be daggled (cf. Pr. R. ft<=r H. C. 4, 203 = Skr. yre ) ; cFn^ quarrel; be draggled or draggle; ^nT 7 or (lit. £?c&) insult, exhaust by labour (cf. criTr^ or < 5 ^ a 7 j^ 7 and ^Tcq an old shoe ) , spring or cTOE attack suddenly (cf. tficfqmcJc); ^yE be flattened or = 307 : flatten (cf. R. or ^ry and N. ^Ty a &o 53. The termin. ^ and 3 must be uncertain, because they are con- tractions of the Mg. Pr. termin. masc. H. snff; but Mg. Pr. masc. <=rf^r oilman is likewise = E. H. Ff^T; again Mg. Pr. fem. sand = E. H. sn^, but Mg. masc. scorpion is also = E. H. — The E. H. termin. ^ and 3 must be uncertain, because they were so even in Pr. and Skr., where "their nom. sg. in f and 3; (Pr.) or 3: (Skr.) may be of either gender. — On the other hand, since the Pr. termin. whether masc. or 182 GENDER. § 359 .] fem., always becomes $r in E. H. (e. g., Pi*, masc. 1[T^T or ^T^TT king, E. H. jrq_ or Pr. fem. sr^rT word, E. H. mqj, no E. H. short form m can be fem. (always excepting tats., which have not passed through Pr.) ; and since every final E. H. of a short form stands for a Mg. masc sr$r, therefore all E. H. short f orms m ffT must be masc. Similarly, since every final E. H. ^ of a short form, which corresponds to a synonymous masc. short form in m, stands for a Pr. fem. ^T, all such E. H. short forms in ^ must be fem. — Finally the termm. of E. H. long and redundant forms must be uncertain, because it is a contraction of r the Mg. Pr. gen. termin. masc -ur^, fem. (§§369,2.365,1); e. g., E. H TfPiJTT grandchild = Mg. (Skr. H. C. l. 137); but E. H. srferT old woman is also = Mg. ejfjET#. — The number of words, which are masc. or neut. in Skr., but fem. in E. H., is limited; and in the case of most of them the * change had already taken place m Pr. Thus (see Yr. 4, 26. H. C. 1,3 5. U—"' S. C. 1, 1. 53) Skr. n. $rf% eye , Pr. n. or f. ^x^t or E. H. f. frtftr, Skr. m. [&r; cord, Pr. m. or f. E. H. f. IfWl 1 ); Skr. m. handful , Pr. m. or f. ^sT^rr, E. H. f. (also m. ) 5F?rf%T; Skr. sr% i_ offeri ng , Pr. m. or^f. OT , E. H. f. ^Skr. m. firfir {good) conduct, Pr. m. or f. fsrff, E. H. f. firft; Skr. ^n. lad, Pr. n. mj or f. fqft, E. H. f. ofc Skr. m. crf%: /belly, Pr. m. or f. cfixft, E. PI. f. cF?T|[ or ; Skr. n Pr. n. (Yr. 3, 20) or f. ^jfjm (Spt. 210), E. H. f. ^ft 1 ). Agaim Skr. m. srf^T: knot, Pr. m. or f. rf^f (H. C. 1, 3 5), E. H. (also m.); Skr.^Tgr^ arm, Pr. m. £TT|r or f. crrfT (H. 0. 1, 36. S. C. 1, 1. 54), E. H. f. or srffr: ; Skr. n. m- Aestmes, Pr. f. && (in Ap. sNrf) H. C. 4, 445. T. Y. 3, 4. 69), E. H. f. $r%; Skr. n. «rfer or bone, Pr. n. $rfpr (cf. Spt. 100) or f. (H. C. 2, 32 ^eTh. f. To these may 1) The Pr. fem, xfTt^T is really a different word, i. e , = Skr. (cf. Wb. Spt. 45); so also the E H. fem. is really derived from the masc, jmr; see §§ 257. 262. § 359 .] GENDER. 183 be added, as examples of what seem to be purely E. H. changes, E. H. f. STTfiT fire. Skr. m. srfrr:, Pr. m. grnT- (Yr. 5, 18. S. K. fol. 9 b ) ; E. H. f. body (but S. m. Tj), Skr. in Pr. m. (Spt. A, 63); E. H. f. oath , Skr. m. sm; or n. siwq, Pr. m. ^ToT^t (Yr. 2, 15) or n. (Spt. 361); E. H. f. fsf^ or ftf ^ or srj or spft drop , Skr. m. f§Rp,' Pr. in. tlrj; or n. fcfj (H. C. 1, 34 S. C. 1, 1. 52); E. H. snf twwrf, Skr. m. eng;;, Pr. m. 5TT3\ (Yr. 5, 18) *)• The strong E. H. forms (or sfjr) and zr\Z seem to be diminutives (Pr. *f%rf^7T, *oTT^n) and to presuppose Pr. fern, forms *f^T3T, * SFT7T ; just as Pr. fem. oTT^T and masc. srrg arm. Curious anomalies are, E. H. specF thing (S. regularly tadbh. oTg fem. Tr. 105) and UTcT metal (also and yTrlJ, which are masc., but are sometimes used as fem., though they ai;e tats , which always keep their original gender, m this case n. and m. respec- tively' in Skr. Of words m which the gender has changed from fem. in Skr. to masc in E. II., there is, I believe, only one ; and the change took place in Pr.; viz., Skr. fem. CfcT^ ? a mg season, Pr. m. mzm (Yr. 4, 18. H. C. 1, 31. S. C. 1, 1. 50), E. II. m. or OToiH 1 2 ). As regards the change of Skr. neut to E. H. masc., it had already taken place in Pr., in the case of all neut. ending in the rons. ^ and (Yr. 4, 18. H. C. 3 2. Wb. Bh. 4 04. 4 20); thus Skr. n. *§FffT (base worh , A. Mg. m. cfi^T (Bh. 163.167) or Mb. ciTwft, E. H. m. cF?q ; Skr. n. m: renown , A. Mg. m. stir (Bh. 420) or Mh. s=rar, E. H. m. Skr n. breast, A. Mg. m. zf, E. H. 3^; Skr. n. crnra. milk, A. Mg. m. u>7, E. H, m. or O’; Skr. n. eye, Pr. m. (H. C. 1, 33. S. C. 1, 1. 51, also n. ^^q), E. H. m. =3^, etc. Sometimes also the change took 1) E. H. f. rTTrT string is not = Skr. in FT“rp (as Bs II, 174 after cv C Tr. 89 says), but — Skr. f. — The E. H wind, however, is more probably = Skr. f. crrfFf:. ^ 2) The other word mentioned by the Pr. Gramm., m = Skr. f. occurs in E. H. only as a fem. semitats. — There is, however, also a Skr. m. 5TOT:. 184 GENDER. § 360 .] place in the case of neut. in sr (Skr. nom. sing. ^27 , see H. C. l, 33. S C. 1, 1. 51), especially in Mg. (Wb. Bh. 416. Ls 399. 408 429) and m Ap. (II C. 4, 445. Ls. 461 476); thus Skr. n. family. Pr. n. ^ or m. epft, Ap. m. ^ (H. C. 4, 3 61), E. H. m. Skr. n cT.eriT. A. Mg. n. JW or m. (Bh. 190. 191), E H m. 57^, Skr. n eye. Pr. n. trnsrui or m mwr or utuott, E H. m. or Skr. n. 5F : 37rx tear cl , Pr. n. srmrr or m stwt or oTtftrir, Ap. 5RJHT (H. C. 4, 3 87), E. H. srax or ^5 Skr. n cffrsRiT eye . Pr. n. rfmrrr or m. or ^VcTtrif, E. H. m. cpfapr; Skr. n. heart, Pr. n f|5rsr (Vr. 1,28) or Mg. m. %r^r (Bh. 3 94. also f^) or Mh. (Urv. 23, 10 in PI. Diss. 5). E. H. m. %TT, Skr. n. ^nr wealth Mg. m erat (Vr. 1 1, 1 1 ) or Ap. &rorT (H. C. 4, 3 5 8). E II m w; Skr. n T%EX. Mh n - fat (H. C. 1, 3 2), but Ap m. f^7 (H. C. 4, 445), E. H. m fiqr. In Gd. (exc. M , G. and exceptionally W H.) the Pr. tendency to change neut. into masc. is extended to all neut. , thus Skr. n. 5727 (base 37PXO stfiny , Pr. n (H. C. 1,32), but E. II. m e t X (sometimes even fern.); Skr. n. house , Pr. n. STf, M. n. ST^, but E. H m. Skr. n. 3rR danfied lutier, Pr n fsrer, M. n srT, but E H. m. srr, Skr n. ^f3cff.7 S0lir m ilk. Pr. n. M. n but E H. m pT, Skr. n. water Pr. n. qTTtrrer (Yr. 1, 18), M/ n. qr^rT, but E. II m qprr; Skr. n. crrffefiX poarl, Pr. n. =rff?r^ (Spt 314), M. n *TTrif A but E H. m. srtrff ; Skr. n. ^f?rTcFX heach Pr. n. qf?zr#, M. n. JTTrTf, but E H. m merf, Skr. n gcTCT^iT 9°ld, Pr. n. srterer or htwt (c£. Spt. 194), 0 H OT7ET, M. n. but E. H. m. ; Skr n. tear Pr n. M n. , but E. H. m. s'fa (0. H. srefsr m Chand Devagiri 2 2); Skr. n. yoke. Pr. n. srer, M. n. but E. H. m. X or strong form g^T: Skr. (st f.) n. doing* Pr. n. cfTTE^sfa, Ap. n crews’ (II. C. 4, 43 8) or ^^3, W. H n. or m. 0. m. ^f^T, E. H. (wk. f.) m. cFT^X or TEX- 3 60 Affinities. As regards the gender of nouns, E. H. occupies an intermediate position. The M. and G. have preserved the three genders of the Skr. and Pr. Again B. and 0. distinguish § 361 . 362 .] NUMBER. 185 no gender at all. But E. H. has at least two genders, masc. and fem. Generally speaking it agrees in that respect with W. H., P., S. and N. , though traces of the old neut. survive in W. H. in the infinitives in and or wT, as indicated by the final anunasika. — All the above mentioned E. H. instances of change of gender are common to W. H. 'and, as a rule, to the other Gds. also. 3. NUMBER. 3 61. There are only two numbers, the singular and the plural. The plur. of nouns, which signify rational beings , is for- med 1) generally by adding the noun people , without any change m the sing, noun , or 2) less commonly by using the same form of the noun as in the smg. Thus disciples may be either or less frequently from smg. =^TT; or daugh- ters or inri, from sg. Sruh The plur. of any other being or thing can, generally, be formed only in the second way. Thus horses is srT{T but not ivords is snn , not 5UrT^TJT, from the smg. zftjT and STTrT^. In such cases, if the noun be in the nom. case, the context must decide its number. The plural, for- med with* ^TTJT , I shall call the compound , the other the simple . Exception. A few nouns optionally form anomalous plurals, as man, pi. ?ur ; man , pi. 362. The termination of the subst. suffers no change in the sing, nor in the nom. and acc. proper of the plur., hut m the oblique cases of the plur. the suff. are added to subst. in ^ or fIT, ^ or "3 or 3 respectively. In the case of the comp. plur. they may be added either to the noun itself or, as is more common, to the plur. sign The form thus made, I shall call the oblique plural ; that of the obi. cases of the sing, and of the nom. and acc. proper of the (simple) plur., the oblique smg. ; and that of the nom. sing., the direct form. See examples in § 3 79. Exception . Subst. in signifying inanimate objects, do NUMBER. 186 368.] not make the oblique plur. (with m the short, but only in the long and red. forms; see examples in § 3 79. 3 63. Affinities. 1) In E. H. the nom. and acc. proper of the simple plur. of all subst. arc identical with the obi. form of the sing.: the reason of which will be explained in § 3 69. The same, in principle, is the case m all Gds., except m 0. and, partially, M. In the latter the fem. and neut. subst. have a special dir. form of the plur , whilst m 0. there is no simple plur. at all (exc. m the plur. sign qur, see below Nro. 2. 3). But the B. and N. are peculiar m adding to the obi. sg. a spe- cial case-affix to denote its nom.-plur.-application ; viz., B. fT, hi. and N has the further peculiarity of using an archaic obi. sg. in ^ or ^ (see §§ 3 6 4, 3. 3 6 5, 6). Thus E. II. ob. sg. T, nom. pi. disciples , W. H. obi. sg. nom. pi. ; B. obi. sg. %c?TT, nom. pi. ir^T-TT, N. old obi sg. or nom. pi. =§Tc N. B., in B., 0., N. <#ees£ throughout. §364] NUMBER. 189 c3 r& a o u in in 3: in ^ cS o3 O in 3“ in 3 P.^Tm, S.srfor^or^m., G. $Tc^(or ^T^rT) m., sf n., M. zrf or m. n. Br. or ^T^or or or ^r, P. 3^f, G. ^r>, M. zr? or i". Br. 3m" or 3?R or 3^m or 3^ or 3fx P. 3PTT, S. 3^ f or 3^7 or 3^ft or 3R, M. eTT or X the rest as in the weak bases. Obi. forms used as nom. plar. B. n-jr or ^T, N.3^r or E H. % H. H. n m., f f., Br., 0. H. sr m., ^ f., Mw. 3r m., $r’T f., P. * m., ^srT f., S.^m., fTorif., M. ^m., G. u m , $rr c. g. B ^-^t, N. or E. H. H. H., Br. 3 m., ^tt f., Mw.^ro., ?IT f,, P.^m., 3^7 f., S.^m., ^£, G.^m., c. g., M.^c. g. B. 3-pT, N. 3f-£ or 35 -^, E. H. 3 , H. H., W. H., P. 3 m. 3V T f., S. 3 m., 3 f., G. 3 m. or 3??> c. g., M. 3. N. B., in 0 deest throughout. o3 rO bo } a o £ in m | B. m~jT, N.STTf-^ or E.H., Mw., S. m ra., H.H., P. ^ m., Br. $TT or ^ m., G. STT or mc[m., «r? or n., M. ^ or 3 T m. in 3 | B 3 -fT, N.^-^or E.H. G.^ETT, ^TTf., Br. ^ m., 03- ^srf f., Mw. ^ m., err f., P. ^ m., f., &. ^ m., ^fff., M. ^ m. in 3 : | B. 3^fT, N. 3%-^T or 3^-^T, E. H., S. X H. H., W. H. 3 m., 3STT f., P. 3: m., 3^7 f., G. or 3 : c. g., M. 3 m. N. B., in 0. deest throughout. c Note : It will be observed, that in W. Gd. the obi. plur. of weak nouns in ^ and 3 generally adopts the obi. termin. of strong nouns in ^ and 3>, and vice versa in E. H. the obi. plur. of strong nouns in m, 3 ; the obi. termin. of the weak nouns in 3. 364. Derivation of the plural signs . 1) The 0. *TPT or, shortened, £TR is, probably, identical with the E. H. plur. men (§ 8 61 , exc.; from Skr. strst man ; not measure , as Bs. II, 199), and is a plur. noun with the old termination JF, obi. 190 ISTUMBER. § 364 .] 5 ^ (see § 3 63, 2). The E. H. sitjT men (Skr. § 102 ) is also a plur. noun, as shown by its obi. f. crftn^ (§ 3 63, 2), and, like iTR, is shortened for crftrr. The shortened form *TR is not used with rational beings (see Sn. 11). — 2) The B. is generally said to form a comp. plur. with the pi. sign which is sometimes (see Bs. II, 200 ) believed to be none other than the Skr. ftq? region , side . But there can be little doubt, that this identification is a mistake. For a) the B. f|jT ends m (quiescent) $T, while the Skr. f^q? does not; b) a final Skr. 3 ? would not become rr^ in either Pr. or Gd. ; c) the Skr. f^q? is merely the nom. sg. of the base while the B. ftTT , if anything, is an obi. f., i. e., equal to the Skr. gen. sg. (see § 366) which is ftsr: (Pr. ftRt or rather cf. H. C, 1, 19. 3, 3 0 ) ; d) the sg. (or nom. f^qj) is not a collective noun and, therefore, could not serve to form a plur.; on the other hand e) in the plur. (like JTFT, ccfrrr) it would be Skr. f^art, Pr. f^TTWT, which would not produce the B. ftrr. I am inclined to believe, that ftxr is not a real word, but me- rely a compound of two case-affixes. The ordinary )B. gen. pi. ends in This I divide into \ (base) and ^ (case-afi.), just as in the gen. sg.; thus of gods = just as of a god = (see § 3 65, 6 ). Here like zk, is an obi. f.; its dir. f. would be (or |ofcC); and, in fact, the two forms, thus deduced, are the same as the P. gen. sg. 5[5r-^T and its obi. f. It should be observed that the B. uses the gen. sg. to serve a plur. base (see § 3 69); its nom. pi. £5 T~T t d°^ s * s but the st. f. of its gen. sg. of a god. Similarly it uses an other (now obsolete) gen. sg, ^oT- 5 T, to serve as the pi. base of the obi. cases, which are made by adding certain case-affixes. Before the latter, as usual, the base is inflected, i. e., |oT- 5 ;t becomes c?;sr~^, and with the gen. afi, ^ it is With the dat. afi. ir it ought to be but $? has a tendency to change to rr (just as in W. H. among the Mairs the gen. affi are fit, JTT, etc. for eft, g*3T; in N. to do for apqr) and 5 ; to become ft; ( 311 st as the B. and E. H. dat. afi. ft is in O. ft?) ; hence it is HoT-ft-JT § 364 .] NUMBER. 191 (or ^crf^nT, as it is commonly spelled, see S. CL 58, with two rn^ 5 to compensate for the shortening of ^). Similarly with the loc.- aff. rT or &>-b, it is Scr-f^-rr-flT (just as, e. g., in H H dat.-acc. to him , lit. up to him). In course of time this origin was forgotten and an imaginary noun T^jt formed, and henceforth treated like a real noun. Thus a dat. and a gen. f^rqr was made. The form fsyqr, however, is, according to S. Oh. 50 not commonly used m speaking, which points to a surviving con- sciousness on the part of the people of the unfitness of the for- mation. The occurrence of the ordinary P. gen.- aff. in B., at the two furthest extremities of the Gd. area, is no doubt remarc- able; but it is by no means the only fact of its kind. Thus there is the same peculiar auxil. past tense in the 0. he was and in S. T§rdr, P. VT; and indeed the ordinary B. and 0. gen.- aff. Ijr occurs also in the distant Mw. fV (see § 3 77, 1). In each case, these words are almost entirely absent in the intermediate Gds. ; though occasionally m and 3T are met with in W. H. (see Kl. 7 0. 157), and err and edt are the regular forms in H. H. and N. respectively, and 57 occurs m the plur. of N. (see Nro. 3). It will be shown also in § 3 77, 3, that the B. instr.-aff. is connected *with the gen.-aff. 3T. — 3) There is a close analogy between the N! and B. plur. The former is made by adding 557 or 557 to the sing. But these plur. signs are* not, as it has been sup- posed, nouns, but are compounded of the old gen. or obi. termin. 5 or 5 (see § 3 65, 6) and the gen.-aff. which is identical* with the B. gen.-aff. IJT, but has preserved the old termin. 3. In fact, the N. plur. termin. 557 is identical with the B. gen. termin. ^ and the B. plur. termin. ^T; the latter being the st. f., the other two wk. forms. Thus N. 50*5-^ or H~5r5“?r gods — B. ^oT-^T (or gen. £5T-^). The B. ^ is but a contraction of the older form ^5 or In the 0. Gd. the gen. or obi. sg. in ^5 or $rff or ^5 or (shortened) ^ was used as a nom. plur. (see § 369); e. g., men — SRfij lit. of man scl. multitude ; and in order to make it a plur. base capable of declension, the declinable 192 NUMBER. § 365 .] gen.-aff. ^ or (st. f.) JT (a curtailed nomin. base, § 377) was added. Thus the K (originally a gen. sg., — Ap. Pr. ?TT^V is now a plur. base, which can be regularly declined; e. g., gen. of men, dat. to men, etc. Similarly in B. ; only instead of declining the plur. base ?TT-^T, it substitutes in the obi. cases an other plur. base 5TT-5T or 5TT-£, which was also originally a gen. sg. Thus gen. of men, dat. ?TT-f2>n to men, etc. But, as in the case of the B. the true nature of the N. or ^7 is now forgotten, and it is supposed to be a real noun; see also § 369, 1. 3 65. Derivation of the obi. terminations. It will be seen from the table of obi. termin. (§ 3 63), that they are divi- sible into two great types, of which those of the M. and S. are respectively most characteristic, and which can be best distin- guished in the sing. In M. the sg. obi. forms end in a long, in S, in a short vowel. Thus M. obi. sg. (wk. f.) m. m, f. m. f. m. f. 3?, and (st. f.) m. ?TT, oTT, f. sr, £r; again obi. pi. (wk. f.) m. f. ^7, , 3?, and (st. f.) m. f. HTT, oTT. But in B. obi. sg. (wk. f.) m. f. s, 3, and (st. f.) m. f. ST or ^ (= m), ^sbt, OT (or in the other Gds. contracted 3;); again obi. pi. (wk. f.) m. f. ^"7 or ^ (in W. H. sT, nY), and (st. f.) m. f. or OTT or (in W. H. zm" or OTt" or wf). To the S. type belong the W. and N. Gds.; to the M. type, of course, the S. Gd. (i. e. M.), though exceptionally, a few forms of the S. type have found ad- mittance into M.; viz., the M. strong obi. forms in m, X The E. Gds. again are a mixture of both; for their short (inch weak and strong) forms are of the S. type, and their long forms of the M. This double character can be best seen in E. H. — The original of the Gd. oblique form is the Pr. genitive (see § 3 66). The obi. f. of the M. type goes back to the M. gen.; that of the S. type to the Ap. gen. — 1) Deriv. of the Mg. type. The suE. of the gen. sg. are in Mg. Pr. m (or S$r = Skr. m) or f (Yr. 11,12. H. G. 4, 299), which are added indifferently to all three kinds of bases in sr, $ and 3 of whatever gender (see § 3 67). § 365 .] NUMBER. 193 Before ^ tlie final of tlie base is lengthened. Thus there are two sets of Mg. gen. termin.: 1) 3^T and 2) 3TT^, or, with strong, bases, 1) and 2) WT^, 3^T^> In M. (representing the old Dk. Pr. of the Mg. Pr. type, see Introd.) the 1 st set becomes (§§ 143. 147) 3^ or (st. f.) (for mv=^ or ^TU), cTT^ (for 350^), and the 2 nd set (dropping f^ 1 )) srr, 3, 3 or (st. f.) m (for or arc (for 3 ^t). In the E. H. (— old A. Mg. Pr.) only the 2 ud set occurs; viz., (lg. f.) SToTT, ^UT, 3oTT (with euph. ^ and oTj. Both sets are preserved i& the M. dat., which is identical with the old gen. (see Yr. 6, 64); thus M. or |on to a God = Dk. Pr. ^oiw or 33 rr^, Skr. ^sr^T. But, in M., the first set is also pre- served in its proper gen. sense in the so-called jpost-position which is really a compound of the gen. termin. and the post- position (= Ap. Pr. Skr. ot for the sake' of); thus * M. lit. for the sake of God , i. e. i[crTU wT — Dk. Pr. ^oT^T Skr. |oTW The 2 nd set is used as the termin. of the ordinary M. and E. H. obi. form, and as such retains its old gen. sense. Thus M. dat. lit. for the benefit of God = Dk. ^cnff crnrfff, Skr. $erar ^mr; or (lg. f.) M. = Dk. SoTUTf crTTfff , Skr. STO l; or E. H. dat. £cTciT lit. at the side of God , A. Mg. ^orsn^; cni%, Skr. cpiir. — 2) The sufi\ of the gen. sg. of fern, nouns in ^T, 3 and 3 is in Pr. ^ (= Skr. UFlJ or, shortened, ^ or n (Yr. 5, 22. 23. H. C. 3, 29. 30). The form n is, evidently, the latest, whence it passed into Grd. Thus the latest Mg. Pr. gen. termin. are: ^ST, 3^ or, with strong bases, 3^m In M., these become ^ (for with euph. f and 3 (dropping ^), and (st. f.) rc, 5T (for TOT, cTTTC);*and in E. H., (lg. f.) ^zrr, 33T or 3oTT (dropping ^ and inserting euph. 1 ) As to the Gd. tendency to drop a final 5 , see § 32. In the 0. H. of Chand shah king is often spelled SfT, and sih lion e. g., cFT^t STTfTSr 53T srfer Bevatata 43; or =5tf33 ^cWl' Devagin 51 for W and STfT^s. 13 194 NUMBER. § 365 .] and aQ. These M. and E. H. termin. occur in their obi. forms. Thus M. obi. f. of a tongue , contr. for l)k. ^hTTHT or f^cUT^ or ferr^ or femq' = Skr. fsteRTTt, of M. , Bk. firloUT (H. C. 2, 5 7), Skr. §|T. — 3) There are some M. strong masc. and fem. nouns in ^ and 3:, the obi. form of which ends also in ^ and instead of in UT m. (et f.) and SIT m. (sr f.). Thus m. has obi. f. fsTcToTT or fspf/, m. ^#1 elephant has obi. f. (not ^kTt) ; f. srrft mare has obi. f. srlil, (not sfisjr), f. mother-in-law has obi. f. UTuir and UT3N It is just possible, that here ^ and 3 ; may be contractions oBUT, & and stt, 5T respecti- vely; but it is much more probable that they are Ap. Pr. forms which have been mixed up in M. with Bk. Pr. forms (see Nro 6) *). The same remarks apply to the E. Grd. obi. forms in ^T, 3 ; of short-form nouns in ^T, 3>. Thus E. II. obi. f. 5TT^"T of a horse might be contracted from A. Mg. gen. ; but it is much more probably a contraction of the Ap. Pr. — 4) The suff. of the gen. pi. are in Mg. Pr. tjr or rrr (Vr. 5-, 4. 4, 16. H. C. 3, 6. 1, 29 = Skr. RJ?) and ^ (H. C. 4, 300), which are added indifferently to bases in 3f, ^ and 3 of whatever gen- der (see § 367), and before which the final of the base is leng- thened. Thus there are two sets of Mg. Pr. termin.: l) ^TUT, ^trr, OTT and 2) $nf, or, with strong bases, 1) ^Tcrr, ^Errur, 3STPTT and 2) wrf, 35TTf. In M. the 1 st set be- comes sriuT, frr, cSr 1 2 ) or (st. f.) uttt (for otr or ^str), oTtr 1) That both the Mg. and Ap. gen. have contributed to the M. obi. forms, can be clearly seen from the following example: Skr. nom. STR^?., gen. becomes, in M., nom. SUTT, obi. sff^JTT; analogously Skr. should be, in M., nom. on6U”(T, obi. oTURUT, but it becomes obi. oTTOT^T* The reason is, that the former represent Mg. forms: nom. £Tf3^r, gen. the latter Ap. forms: nom. ©ITU^3, gen. 5T|^T^^ or °^t. 2) These forms are usually divided into ^ + UT, ^ + UT, and JTT is considered to be an aff., and the rest to be the ordinary obi. f. This is possible, as SJT might be a modification of the ordinary M. dat. aff. OT, analogous to the G-. sg. and pi. dat. aff. 3r. gut in that case, 365.] NUMBER. 195 (for 3^R), and the 2 nd set becomes (by elision of ^ and con- traction of the hiatus- vowels) 3TT, 3T or (st. f.) srf (for ^5TT or ^t), off (for 3 ^*t). In E. H. the first set becomes (by shorten- ing the initial vowel) ^7^, 37^, or (ig. f.) 3^37 and the 2 nd set (ig. f.) SToTT, ^srf, 3^7 (with euph. 5T and u). In 0. H. (Chand and Kabir). however, examples of the 1 st set with a long vowel still occur; e. g., qftprTR of women, 5© STR of riches, to teachers (Bs. II, 219. 207. 282). In M., the 1 st set is, just as in the sing., preserved in the dat. (= old gen.); thus M. SIcTRT to Gods — Dk. loTTof, Skr. . In E. H. the 1 st set forms the terrain, of the ordinary obi. pi., with the sense of the gen.; e. g., lo'c, |oFT ir lit. in the midst of Gods = A. Mg. |omxr Skr. ^oTRT qw. The 2 nd set forms the termin. of the or- dinary pbl. pi. in M. and obi. sg. in E. H. *), also retaining the sense of the gen ; e. g., loc. M. £srr lit. in the place of Gods = Dk. £srTf snxrff, Skr. ^7, or (lg. f.) M. §cHrf 373 = Dk. oTcnff, Skr. ^oTcFRt r°; or (lg. f.) E. II. toicrf *r in a God — A. Mg. tcTRf qfir, Skr. ^oTcFjRr qwr. 5) The masc. nouns in ^ and 3 1 , mentioned in Nro. 3 as having an obi. sg. in ^ and 3? for 77, cTT, similarly have an obi. pi. in ^ and which might be contractions % of 7"f and erf, but more probably are Ap. forms (see Nro. 7). Thus elephant has obi. pi. (not ^rf), fspq scorpion has obi. pi. fspcforf or fsnaN — 6) Deriv . of the 8 . type. The suff. of the gen. sg. are, in the Ap. Pr., and ^ or, shor- tened, j or f| (H. 0. 4, 338. 336. 351 and 4, 350 341. 352. K.I. 30. 34. 3 6. 35. 29 in Ls. 451. 462), which are added alike to bases in 3 of whatever gender (see § 367). Thus there are two sets of Ap. termin.; viz. 1) ^T, 3^V or ^J", one would expect 7T to he used also in the sg., which is not the case. On the whole, I think it more probable, that the whole is one suff., to which, however, a mistaken popular etymology has given an anomalous final 37; the forms ought to be ^T7, Tpf, 3R. 1) This confusion of sg. and pi. forms may be also otherwise ob- served m Gd,, see § 367, 5. 196 NUMBER. 365.] and 2) 3f or ^ff, 3f| or, with strong bases, 1) TO^, or TOj, ^Tf, 3^J and 2) TO%, or ^srf|;, 35rf%. In old Gd. (0. H., 0. P.) the 1 st set becomes srf, 3^ or (dropping f) sr, 3, and the 2 nd set or ^ (contr. for = SJf), 3f|, or in strong bases, 1) TOf, 33r^ or (for to), 33T, and 2) TOf| or ma (for TO^) or ^ or ^r, 3^% The 1 st set (in f) is still found in the G. W. H. of Chand, the 2 nd set (in ff) in the 0. P. of the Granth (see Tr. A. Gr. CXXYI), in the 0. H. of Kabir, Tulsi Das, etc. and in the 0. B. of Yidyapati, etc., in their proper sense of the gen. sg. ; e. g., irrarp qpr ^rp u rrfp \ a herdsman tends the cattle of an other (Chand 28, 62), or sricfi sfterjr srfsrarpf I you speak a speech of inconsiderateness (Ch. 28, 5 0), or ^rgror^ i by the side of the Chahuvdn (Ch. 28,33). Again pUT ^ kjmjT s uf U *farpf|’ mpm i. e., so thou mayest reach the farther shore of the world (Kabir Earn. 75, 3), or crpR ^ ^ n i. e., of the soul there is no dying (Kabir Earn. 2 2, 6). Again STtIT3? ^3, Skr. ^?TSF: scl. qjs (see § 3 64,2). N. * has preserved even the full old form (in ^ or f) in its nom. pi. ; thus N. or Gods , 0. Gd. srjr, Ap. |oTf or °^r $r^T, Skr. ftjqr gjrf; (scl. q-p)* The contr. st. f. 2TT occurs in B., 0., Mw. and G.; E. H. has m and Br. m and ^ (i. e* m in subst., ^ or ^ in adj .) ; P. and S. have thus gen. sg., B., 0. srhrr-^, Mw. srter-^t, E. H. dftr £?>, Br. sfftr m, G. srUrr qt, P. %iz 5J, S. sift sft of a horse, 0. Gd. or °f|; or Ap. or $»^3, Skr. srt^qr ; again E. H. vm Br. of good, 0. H. qsjsrff cR°, Ap. ^?°, Skr. q^cfiqr 3?°. The uncontr. st, f. ^ and 3^ are possessed by S. only; the contr. ^ and 3 ; by all other Gds. ; thus loc. sg,, E. H. etc. q, but S, q" lit. in the midst of the elephant, 0. Gd. qq^ u , Ap. Skr. qSr; or E, H. etc. q, hut 198 NOTBEK. 365.] S. fSrg3 m the midst of the scorpion , 0. Gd. f5rg?3i[ *7°, Ap. &5f3^r qf°, Skr. 3T°, etc. The weak forms 3, 3 are common to all Gels; thus dat. s g., 0. B., E. II. ^ §?, Br. 3TT, Mw. R, G. R, P. RJ ^ , N. STf S. Rp $r lit. by the side of the man , Skr. r^rt cFrsr. — 7) The suff. of" the gen. plur. are, in the Ap. Pi\, J and (H. 0. 4, 33 9. 340. 337. cf, 347. 351. K. I. 31. 32. 28 in Ls. 451), which are added indifferently to bases in 3, 3 of whatever gender (§ 3 67). Thus there are three sets of Ap. Pr. termin. : 1) 3^, ^7, 3^, 2) f|, 3^, 3J, 3) 3ff, 3f^ or, with strong bases, 1) 33f, 395, 2) 33J, 33f, 3) 33ff. In 0. H. the 3 d set is still found in the sense of the dat. (= old. gen.); thus mgftrrff jfR ^ RR rtrt this counsel , pleased (her) parents (T. Das. in Kl. 286); or 37^ wter Rsrff R Most of these forms serve as the termin. of the ordinary obi. plur., and, as such, retain their original gen. sense. They are distributed among the various Gds., as follows. The forms 3*T (wk. or st.), or Hr 1 ?, 33R or 37 occur in S., P. and Mw. ; the forms srf or 4hT (wk. or st.), SSrT or ^rV*, 33 t" or 337* in Br. and H. H. ; the forms ijf (wk. or st.), ^r, 3<^ in S., and the st. forms ^ and 3 in M. Thus loc. pi.; S., P., Mw. R^“7 R w lit. in the midst of men , Ap. Skr. R^TUTT qwr; Br. rqrf R*, H. H. Rff r\ Ap. 1 } Also often in the sense of the acc. (= dat. == old gen.); e. g., tW ^"rF^ §r£^f then Vauleld having beheld Bdma (T. Das, Bal.); pRff is here the plur. majestatis; but the pi. f|[ is often used for the s g. % see § 867, 5. § 365 .] NUMBER. 199 *r°; S. St\ Ap. urfff *t°; or in st f., S., P., Mw. Errrf St* m if/^ of horses, Ap. srrssrf ^§grf*f, Skr. srrr^rrqi mi; Br. sfri>" ir", H. H. srriT ir", Ap. mzm jt°; S. snr¥' £r°, Ap. *r°, etc. Again M. dat. pi. frwF oftt lit. for the benefit of elephants, Ap. Skr. ffRcFTRr SrfBT, etc. The rest of the forms are used as ternnn. of the nom. pi.; see § 369 *). — 8) I add a few more examples to illustrate the preceding remarks : Wealc bases m masc, or neut., ?rt wafer; gen. sg.,, Skr. sTsRT, l) Mg. Pr. (a) sTcrTSSr or (b) srettf, M. (a) sTqFTR or (b) sTcFTT; 2) Ap. Pr. (c) sforffT or (d) STqFT f , 0., Gel. (c) or (d) sTcriff , M. Gd. (c) sTc?T (in all) or (d) ?RFr (in B. and 0.). Fern. f?RT tongtie, gen. sg. Skr. fagnranr:, l) Mg. Pr. (a) or f?TOT^ or Frsmsr or (with euph. qj, M. (a) Fftr; 2) Ap. Pr. (b) ffer^T or (c) 0. Gd. (b) rbTf or (c) #hr% M. Gd. (b) ^hr (in all) or (c) dft* (in B.,*0.). Gen.plur., Skr. sfcTRUR Ftjrr, l) Mg. Pr. (a) srarraf, f^cUTerf or (b) sTcfTTf, FrSRf, M. (a) STcPTTTT, frfcTTRT or (b) sT^-T, Ffcrf, E. H. (a) sTcr^, Br. (a) or sTRR, RJRor S. (a) SRR, aWPr; 2) Ap. Pr. (c) sRTf, T?TRf or (d) 3T51J, Frstff or (e) srarff , Frsuff, 0. H. (e) sTcttP^, Ssuff, S., P., Mw. (c) Sf^TT, Fm, Br. (d) aWrT, H. H. (d) sFRf", sfbfr", S. (d) zm', Sir". — Strong baSes in masc. or neut., rTFj^T copper; gen. sg., Skr. cTPJSRr, l) Mg. Pr. (a) FTjraOT or (b) rRZTTf (with euph. q); M. (a) rrfejTTH or (b) rTTS?JT, E. H. (ig. f.) (b) cTRcfT (with euph. qrj ; 2) Ap. Pr. (c) or (d) Rif, 0. Gd. (c) rrisrT^ or (d) rTTSiTft, 0., E. H. (c) rTFTT, W. H., N., G. (c) rTTT^nr, B. (c) rTRT t>r (d) rTPTR , P., H. H. (d) rnir, S. (d) zm. Fern., see fem. strong bases in Gen. pint., Skr. m^chMR , l) Mg. Pr. (a) rrgtnrrr or (b) fTTOT^, M. (a) rTTSETRT or (b) rTTSSTT, E. H. (lg. f.) (a) rTFIcR (with euph. uj or (b) fTRoTT (but used in the sg.) ; E. H. has also the anomalous short form rTPR^, Br. (TT5R^ or rTTerf^, S. £FtFt ; 2) Ap. Pr. (c) rR£Tf or (d) rRSJJT or (e) cR?rf% P., Mw. (c) cf T5TT, S. (e) mrr, Br. (d) rnsrT, H. H. (d) rTTsfF, S. (e) r"., Fem., see fem. strong 1) Some of them are also used to form the loc., instr. and abl. sg. or pi. in S., P. and M.; see §§ 867,2. 376,8. 378,3, 200 NTO1BEE. § 365.] bases in — Weal bases it} \ : masc. or neut., grf§r poet.-, gen. sg.. Skr. cFiir: (lit. arflrsT) ; 1) Mg. Pr. (a) cfifSssr or (b) M. (a) gisn^ or (b) 3KTT ; 2) Ap. Pr. (c) chfc^T or (d) cRT&f, 0. Gd. (c) cFTTSTsT or (d) 3Fi&f%, M. Gd. (c) cfifir (in all). Fem. TUT?r wall', gen. sg., Skr. or Tvr^": (lit. fqft^r), l) Mg. Pr. (a) firftssT or (b) fSrD^, M. (a) or (b) ; 2) Ap. Pr. (c) miwr or (d) 0. Gd. (c) JTTTfT^ or (d) mfM|. P., S. (e) fwm, B., 0., E. H., W. H., G. met. Gen. phtr., Skr. cRSTRW, nmTqFT; l) Mg. Pr. (a) gdrtTf. w^ftrf or (b) Efdrtt, m^tf, M. (a) tdrr^TT, or (b) gdrf , i ?n?f , E. H. (a) cr&t, Br. sFjfsr^T or c&fsrfSr, mirror jfmfSr, S. ^firfSr, ffifm^r or (lg. f.) fqfmrf3r or fqfefq ; 2) Ap. Pr. (c) frfwf or (d) mfiref, fufwf or (e) cjrfsrftf, WTwf^, 0. H. (e) 4tt?rff, in M. Gd. ; only the long forms occur ; viz. Ap. Pr. (c) cfrf&Sff, fafett or (d) efrfaw, fiiferj or (e) (RiStaf^. fitfNfit Mw.,P., S. (c) cFrfsrJTT, Br. (d) eirfaraT, 'kf H. (d) cFrfsRrf, inffrat' 1 ’, S. (e) fvrfwf. — Strong bases m \ : masc. or neut., snf^ref gardener ; gen. sg., Skr. rrrfmaFrai; l) Mg. Pr. (a) mf&rasst or (b) JTTfsraTf, M. (a) m^rra or (b) 4T5tTT, E. H. (lg. f.) (b) irfwr; 2) Ap. Pr. (c) or (d) trrRfrair, 0. Gd. (c) or (d) JTTramf, S. (c) infers, E. H. etc. (c) qraV Fem. arfl'cRT mare ; gen. sg., Skr. snfeRWT:, Ap. Pr. (a) sfrfe&^r or (b) Efrfer?:, 0. Gd. (a) sfrmi^ or (b) S (a) erfh’S, E. H., M., etc. (a) sfrif. The Mg. forms exist only in M. monosyllabic words and E. II. long forms: as f^reiT woman ; gen. sg., Skr. fracFTTOT: , Mg. n futile; or *%37^ or M. %5l, E. H. (tats.); similarly E. H. (lg. f.) srtfpn. Gen.plur., Skr. =TrfeRT4T4 , alTCcrmT^; l) Mg. Pr. (a) mf§=TWTtrf, ETtfjamf or (b) sfrfrmf, M. (a) srrwJrf^T^ atetnraT or (b) m^rl, sfrnrr, E. H. (lg. f.) (a) qf^rtpr, sftf^PT or (b) JT^irf, arf^cTT (but used in the sing.) ; Br. (a) 4Tf??mfq, srrnrJTR, S. (a) qrf§rafq or qT5F!lfq or irfmsfq' or qresrfq', srtfvypr or ylQ.sfq', etc. , E. H. has also the anomalous short forms qTTwp, sftfpA, Br. and S. qrtwq', gfflfq ; 2) Ap. Pr. (c) qrRraf, or (d) qTT§raj, eiffSw or (e) =rm?raff, S. (a) qfm or *rre*rT, arfwr or srrjjrf, Mw. (a) Jrresnr, ertetn, P. (a) qT#rai, ift-ftarr NUMBER. 201 § 365 .] (with anomalous f), Br. (d) JTTf^fsFr®, mferT, H. H. (d) m#T?rr, S. (e) — Weak bases in 3 : masc. or neut., JT£ teaelm ; gen. sg., Skr. rrfb (lit. n^ i~ and abases also. This is born out by the evi- dence of modern Gd. ; and, moreover, it is expressly affirmed by K. I. and Md. Thus H. C. 4, 3 36. 338 gives |rT to' the gen. and abl. of masc. (always incl. neut.) abases; and ^ to the^abl. of masc. i- and abases (4, 341) 1 ). Again K. I. (30. 34 in Ls. 451. 462) gives to the gen. of all masc. bases and to the abl. of masc. i - and %-bases; and 5 (29. 3 6) to the abl. of all masc. bases and to the gen, of masc. a-bases. Again both H. C. (4, 350) and K, I. (3 5) give 5 to the gen. and abl. of all fern, bases. Lastly Md. gives both ^fr and if to the abl. of all masc. and fern, bases 2 ). These conflicting statements really supplement each other' as shown by modern Gd. It should be remembered, 1) that the abl. and gen. are identical in Ap, Pr. (as, indeed, they ge~ 1) H. C. 4, 836 gives j” as the abl. suff. of a-bases, but this is mere- ly a shortening of which is given by Md. (see next footnote). As to the gen. of 1 - and ^-bases, H. C. is silent; which seems to indicate, that it may be by the analogy of a-bases, and ^ by the usual identity of the gen. and abl. of cases. 2) Md. says: SUwT if =ST 11 ^r: WPT ^ =5f sqTcFT tl qflj I 11 (srmTf ) 1 srfrrr^V II 5 rTvn% I sn^Ttfl u i. e., the abl. sg. has f or as „he is fallen from a tree , from fire : from a girl u . On the gen., I cannot find any rme, which would seem to show that it is identical with the abl. § 367 .] NUMBER. 205 nerally are even in Skr.), and 2) that the Ap., no doubt, varied slightly in the localities of the different grammarians. The ge- neral result is, that in the Ap, Pr. both fTt and were used to form both the gen. and abl. of all bases in a , i, u, whether mase., fem., or neut. — The case of the Ap. plur. suff. ^ and f is similar. In H. C. 4, 3 3 9. 340 ^ is ascribed to the gen. and jr to the abl. (4, 337. 341) of all masc. bases, and jr (4, 340) also to the gen. of masc. bases in i and u. Again ILL (31.3 2) gives ^ to the gen. of all masc. bases and to tbe abl. (33) of masc. bases in i and u, mnd jf to the abl. (28) of masc. bases in a. Lastly Md. allows both and U to all masc., both in the gen. and abl. 1 ). As regards the fem. bases, both K. I. and Md. are silent, which really means, that their gen. and abl. do not differ ^from those of the masc. (and neut.). This is confirmed by H. C. 4, 851, who gives to the fem. gen. and abl. the suff. jr, which is either the same as the sg. gen. and abl. suff. jr or (H. C. 4, 336. 338), or identical with the pi. gen. and abl. suff. # dropping the anuswara. The general result again is, that in the Ap. Pr. both ^ and jf are used to form both the gen. and abl. pi. of all bases in a, i, u, whether masc., fem., or neut. And this is born put by the state of the modern Grds. — 2) As to the Ap. pi. suff. both H. C. (4, 347) and Md. 2 ) ascribe it to the loc. and instr plur. K. I., by his silence (Ls. 46 3), pro- bably implies the same thing ; since ft[ was already the instr. pi. suff. in the Mb. Pr. (Yr. 5, 18). But it appears to have been used also for the gen. plur. This is, perhaps, the true reading 1) Md. says: fg IZKU u ^TTflt i« £3^ H ii srrjwm i i ^grfr u gqV sm stftV sit \ t 11 oWtxrt » WW I ^TfrtFTRTfer^f \ ^imnuf II i. e., the abl. pi. takes ^ or #; as „it fell from the trees”, „he came from foreign (countries)”; also the loc. and gen. pi. take ^ and as „of Brahmans”. 2) Md. says. n f^STT ff WTH I sf^Frff t srarf^ I STgft « i. e., all bases in a, i, u take ft[ in the loc. and instr. plur., as „m or by men, m or by forests, in or By wifes”. 206 HUMBER. § 367 .] in ILL 32 (Ls. 451. 464), where is given for the gen. plur. Again both H. C. (4, 340) and Md. (see footnote 1 , p. 205) allow the gen. suff. f and W to the loc. plur. also ; vice versa, the loc. stiff, may have been allowed to the gen. At all events, in 0. Gd., is found as a suff. of the dat. (~ old gen.); and in M. Gd. (S.) it appears as the obi. pi. suff. ^ (contr. for ^f^) ; see examples m § 3 65, 7. Indeed the term, seems to occur in the contracted form ^ even in the Ap. Pr. ; though as a term, of the instr. sing . (see H. C. 4, 343. IL I. 23. 24). The examples in Md. are: 3UrT^ by a forest, awnj by ft girl, by fire, srreq' by wind', they would be equal to * oTQT^f^, *crToc7T^i%. * Here z can hardl y ~ Skr. term - Zf* ( as ^ s ‘ ^6i) ; f° r the latter would not be added to fern, bases in ^T. Moreover, as will be shown m Nro. 3, the sing. term. is similarly con- tracted to ^7. It may, also, be added that the pi. term, is similarly used as a term, of the loc. sing, (see K. I. 26. 27. Ls. 451. 463), as or VJ or srf^r m a house . In Gd., this practise of using the pi. suff. for the sing, is sometimes extended to all plur. suff. #, n| ; see Nro. 5. — 3) The Ap. sing. suff. fU is sometimes shortened to J" (H. 0. 4, 336. 351); thus H. G. has but Md. (see footnote 2, p. 204) front a tree or of a tree ; sometimes even to according to Ls’. conjecture of K. I. 34 (Ls. 462); e. g., ^TJTT^t or OTTTf of fire ; sometimes even is dropped (H. 0. 4, 345). In the form f it still occurs in the 0. P. of the Granth (Tr. A. Gr. CXXYI) and expresses the abl. In the form ^ it is often found in the 0. W. H. of Chand, and ex- presses the gen., abl., loc., act., acc.-dat. ; thus gen. m ^ 3 % I i- e., the herdsman tends the cows of an other (28, 62), or iR iffaf WJ i i. e., he dispersed the Army of Bhima (38, 41), or = 5 ^it 333 1 L e *> be marched at the rise of mighty Saturn (27, 47), or ©re 3% mrs fwq ^ 3TrT I i. e., in the forest is plenty of deer , lions and elephants (27, 13); abl in having adorned the body with flotvers (38, 3 7) or cm grfrT . Gr. CXXYI). — 2 ) The Skr. ^T, however, also changes in Pr. to ^ or T^r, with the length- ening of the preceding vowel (of. Ls. 3 9 8 ); the con], beco- ming 5 , as in the fut. suff. fTffr, for ^TTUT, H (Yr. 7, 12. 13), and the vowel being lengthened by way of compensation. The form ^ is limited to the Mg. Pr. (Yr 11 , 12 ), and to the abl. case (Yr. 5, 6 ), which is identical with the gen. *). Thus Pr. abl. from a calf (lit. gen. of a calf). Mg. Pr. gen. of a calf, Pr. frrfrfl; from a mountain, from a teacher (II. C. 3, 124). The Ap. Pr. gen. suff. ^ is, probably, an other modifi- cation of the Skr. (cf. Ls. 462), which, because of its final ^ being heavy, does not lengthen the preceding vowel as 5Fe^, TTtff^, JT^T 2 ). In 0. Gd. it is shortened to f^f (as 5F^f|f. the gen. character of which is shown by its being especially used for the dat (== old gen., see examples in §§ 3 6 5, 6 . 267, 4) or generally for the obi. in connexion with case-aff. which require the gen. (see § 366, l.b). In that particular kind of Apabhramsa (probably Gujarati or Manvari) which is treated by II. C. 4, 3 50, this shortened obi. or gen. suff. fir was, in the case of masc. and neut. nouns, confined to the loc. sing., probably because the alternative gen. suff. or W (see Nro. 3) were used in the gen. 1) It may he observed that even m Skr. the abl. takes tho gen. suff. 5TST in the case of all bases, exc. those in 2 ) Exceptionally the vowel is lengthened m Mh. Pr., e. g., from that (H. C, 3, 82), but Ap. Pr (H. C. 4 , 420) = Skr. ^FT: or £rIfT:. § 368.] NUMBER. 211 (mcl. dat. and abl.). — 3) There is an other Ap. Pr. gen. suff. or shortened J* (H. 0. 4, 33 6. 338) 1 ), which, however, has no connection with the Skr. ^T. Its origin is obscure. Ls. 462 iden- tifies it with an assumed Skr. suff. It seems more probably to be identical with the Skr. abl. plur. suff. which in Pr. would regularly change to sa-fV or (cf. Pr. or feilT tongue in H. C. 2, 57 and § 120) and easily serve as a gen. suff. also. In the Ap. of H. C. 4, 351 s’ actually occurs as an abl. and gen. plur. suff. The change of „ number “ would be analogous to that in the case of the Pr. abl. pi* suff. fffrff which is used in the sing, also (see H. C. 3, 8. 9, see also § 367, 5). — 4) The Skr. gen. plur. suff. TW becomes in Pr. trf or UT (Vr. 5, 4) with the lengthening of the preceding vowel; as Skr. SrUFTFT, Pr. of cdlfs. This form has survived in M., E. 33., Br. and S., see § 365, 4. — 5) The Skr. gen. pi. suff. ^tt*t , however, also changes in Pr. to or U|r, ^ and ^f, the last with, the former two without the lengthening of the preceding vowel. The process is quite regular ; a) Skr. ^ is doubled, and the preceding long vo- wel shortened, as in Pr. = Skr. ^Ttrr:, Pr. 2^0?^ ~ ^ r * flwter;, Pr. — Skr. 3?jc?r:, etc. (H. C. 2, 99, see Ls. 143. 276); b) the Pr. 'nr is changed to (see § 1 6 1 and Ls. 2 7 1 ) ; c) Pr. tnf nhct is changed to ir ham (projecting the anusvdra , for mho), or to prolonging, in the latter case, the preceding vowel, to compensate for the loss of the anusvdra (see §§ 143. 149). Thus, e. g., Skr. is in Pr. *3^1 = srttf = ^ The form tr^ is added in Pr. to numerals only, as d^rr^r of five = Skr. (H. C. 3,123), and exceptionally to pronouns, as of how many — Skr. gFTffbTPT (H. C. 3, 123). The form f is added also to nouns, especially in Mg. Pr. (H. C. 4, 300). The form ^ is used only in the Ap. Pr. (H. C. 4, 339). In Gd. all three forms are used 1) Observe that in the Ap. of H. C. the gen. suff. (H. C. 4, 338) becomes & when used for the abl. (H. C. 4, 336); just as the gen. suff. ^ (H. C.'4, 350) becomes when used for the loc. (H. C. 4, 352). 212 NUMBER. § 369.] with nouns (see § 3 65, 4. 7); though or is limited to E. H., Br. and S. — 6) There is also an Ap. Pr. gen. pi. suff. € (H. C. 4, 340), the origin of which is obscure. Ls. 463, 11 derives it from the Pr. abl. pi. suff. spTT (Yr. 5, 7). It may possibly be identical with the Ap. Pr. gen. and abl. suff. jr (see Nro. 3), to which, being both plur. and sing., perhaps an inorganic anusvdra was added, to distinguish better its plur. character by making a pair jr, ^ ana- logous to the other two pairs of Ap. suff., sg. ^T, pi. if, and sg. % pi. f|r, — 7) There is, lastly, an Ap. plur. suff. (H. C. 4, 347) or (K. I. 32 in Ls. 451). Ls. 310, 3 identifies it with the Skr. pi. instr. suff. It is more probably identical with the Skr. abl. suff. mpr/), which would regularly change in Pr. to IT or (for sir or f©ii), and easily come to be used in the Ap. Pr. for the gen. (K. I. 32) and instr. or loc. (H. 0. 4, 347) of the plur. Its gen. character is shown by its being still used in 0. Grd. for the dat. (= old gen., see examples in §§ 365, 7. 3 67, 2.5), and in S. for the act. (= old instr.) and obi. generally; thus 0. H. dat. i to men, S. act. by men or obi. w to men. 369. Derivation of the direct terminations . l) A com- parison of the various Grd. terminations of the obi. sing, and plur. with those of the dir. or nom. plur. will show at once that the latter are always identical with the former. Sometimes it is some obi. form of the sg., sometimes (apparently) of the pi. ; again some- times it is an obi. form of the same Grd., sometimes of an other, which is thus used for the nom. plur.; but in every case it is some one obi. form. To this rule the M. fern, and neut. nouns form the only exception. For example compare the following weak forms : a) masc ., the S. non# pi. sFT men with the S. obi. sg. man (nom. sg. ?rg), and the E. H. nom. pi. sPT (§3 61, exc.) 1) Even in Skr. the suff. wtpu is used for the instr. and dat. also, similarly the pi. abl. suff. for the dat. and, in the modified form fep, for the instr.; there is also a dat. sg. suff. WTJT in Skr., as thee. — i If # be rightly identified with grTf, ff might be derived from the Pr. abl. pi. suff. f^rft (Vr. 5, 7). § 369 .] NUMBER. 213 with the B. obi. sg. §pt; b) fern., the Br. nom. pi. or sfftr' 4 ’ tongues with the S. obi. pi. the Mw., P. and S. nom. pi. or fim with the S. obi. pi. flhrr ; the S. nom. pi. with the abl. sg. (really obi pi., § 3 67, 5) fsbjy, the W. H., P. nom. pi. fufferf walls with the S. obi. pi. firimrf ; the S. nom. pi. fmhs with the S. abh sg. (really obi. pi.) ftfro (or etc. Again strong forms : a) masc., P., H. H., M. nom. pi. sr& horses with the P., H. H. and S. obi. sg. 3T3*; the B., 0., E. H., W. H., S., G-. nom. pi. sft^T horses with the B., 0.. E. H., W. H., Gr. obi. sg. srlrt ; b) neut , the G-. nom. pi. ^rf goldpieces with the*G. obi. sg. sffcrf; c) fem., the W. H. and P. nom. pi. sfrferr mares with the S. obi. pi. sfrferf ; the S. nom, pi. snfes with the S. abl. sg. (really obi. pi.) srtfrf; the W. H. nom. pi. boohs (Kl. 64, 130) with the P. loc. pi. in books 1 ) i theW. H. and P. nom.pl. mwsi mothers-in-law with the S. obi. pi. snwf, etc. It will be observed, that in the case of fem. nouns the dir. pi. is identical with the obi. pi., but in the case of masc. and neut. it is the same as the obi. sg. The diffe- rence, however, is probably in appearance only. For, no doubt, the pi. obi. forms when employed as dir. pi. are used as sing., just as in the S. abl. and M. loc. (see § 367, 5). There can be no doubt, that these so-palled nom. plur. forms are elliptic phrases, which must be filled up by supplying some collective noun, as ^rftiT people , IFF troup, etc. The E. H. practice of forming the plur. by the addition of such a collective noun, illustrates this theory (§ 3 61). * Such nouns would require the principal word to be in the gen . case; and this explains the use of the obi. form, which is the same as the old gen. (§ 366). In B. it is actually the gen. sg. (not merely the obi. f.), which is used to form the plui^ ; e. g., B. obi. f. ^sr, gen. sg. of a god, nom. pi. s^r-*£T gods ; here 77 is merely the strong form of see § 364, 2. Similarly in N. the plur. is an archaic form of the gen. sg., composed of the 1) The form both in the nom. and loc. pi., is a contraction for = Ap. tfrfeetfi?. 214 NUMBER. § 369 .] gen. -affix £ (for 3^ or T (of a) horse, oh horse, or horses', ; H. H. and P. obi. sg., voc. sg. and nom. pi. alike srR; voc. pi. H. H. suit, P. sftfj3 (= or *SU33); S. nom. pi. and voc. sg. STT3T, voc. pi. STT3T or si fe or sftfr; G. obi. sg. and voc. sg. 2U3T, nom. pi. and voc. pi. sfV3T3 or STT3T5T (or STTIT^t); M. obi. sg. UT3UT, 216 OTMBEK. § 370 .] nom. pi sits, voc. sg. Vtim or srte. So also in fem. nouns 1 ). The identity of the voc. sg. and pi. with the obi. sg. and nom. pi. is expressly taught by Pr. Gramm., who ascribe the two suff. of the gen. sg. and 5 to the voc. Thus Mel. states: WZF 5 1 f =3T II ffTSTTC ^5T II STTSTT^ I H s amj^ =ET II i. e., the voc. sg. of fem. only takes he . The Mh. Pr. forms would be cTT^r, tu^. The latter forms alone are enjoined by K. I. 17, 18 (in Ls. 45 0), who does not identify them with the Mh. Pr. forms. In this he is correct; for sn^r is a mere contraction for or crr^ff; and has dropped^ the suff. ^ or just as in the obi. or gen. sg (cf. H. C. 4, 845). The form ^ is pre- served in P. fem. nouns; as fair oh tongue, moT w oh mother, oh daughter ; but also extended to mase. sg. ; as srtr oh horse, P and to masc. pi., as £§r oh gods. Again Md. continues: %rftsTSr: 11 T3Tg sRTt SOTfT II ^cRof^)' I oTCET^T I TFT^ft II i. e., the VOC. pi. of all bases in a , i, u takes 'ho. So also H. 0. 4, 346 and K. I. 2 9 (in Ls. 450). In M. Gd. the suff. becomes 3 (for jr) or ^ (for ^), which are contracted with a preceding ^ to m or m respectively; e. g., P. voc. pi. Ertft3 oh marcs = srrfSw (with ^ for ^sr) = Ap. srrfe^r; or S. sift or oh men for * 3^*3 or or Ap. ur^t. Gd. extends the contr. form even to the sing. ; e. g., P. voc. sg. oh god. , but voc. pi. ^ oh gods\ the former being derived from Ap. 30 r^t, the latter from Ap. . Indeed, as such it is noticed by 3L I. 26 (in Ls. 450) as already occur- ring m the Ap. Pr, The general result seems to be, that in the Ap. Pr. both ^ and or its modifications are used to form both the voc. sing, and the voc. pi. of all bases in a , i, u whether masc., fem. or neut, 4. CASE. 370. There are seven cases, viz. nominative (inch vocative), accusative, instrumental, dative, ablative, genitive and locative. 1) Exceptionally, the voc. pi. is the same as the obi. pi.; e. g., Mw. nom. pi. and voc. pi. srtef oh horses or (of) horses. 217 § 871 .] CASE. The nom. serves also as the voc., and in that case some inter- jection, as%, p or is generally prefixed; e. g., nom. Rama, voc. \jm^oh f Mmcr, nom. voc. srp ifZl oh! son ; nom. JOT, voc. r JTTTT oh f JDurgd, etc. The E. H. has no (eighth) case of the ' o „ agent “, or (as I shall call it) active case . 371. The active case. The absence of the act. case in E. H. is a point of great importance, as it helps to determine its affiliation or position with regard to the other Gd. languages. This case is one of the main features that distinguish the W. and S. Gds. from the E.^Gds. The latter are without it; the former possess it. E. H., therefore, as not having the act. case, belongs to the E. Gd. group, and is more nearly allied to B. and 0., than to W. H. — The rationale of the act. case is as A follows. The old organic past tenses active of the Skr., mostly very complicated forms, were in Pr. already disused (cf. Wb. Spt. 63) with a few fragmentary and rare exceptions (cf. Yr. 7, 23. 24. H. C. 3, 162. 163). The inconvenience of this want was ob- viated by the simple expedient of giving to the sentence the passive construction ; thereby turning the subject or nom. case into the instr. case and the past tense act. into the past part, pass. This"* method of expressing the past act. was already much used in Skr. ; and in Pr. it has become the common one ; thus „they have not devoured that w may be in Skr. rT or in pass, constr. tRTOhnJT ; but in Pr. only the latter crff WTJsf (cf. H. C. 3, 134). But there is yet a simpleb way of using the pass, constr. ; viz., by employing the past part. pass, in an act sense , whereby the change of the nom. case into the instr. in the subj. becomes unnecessary. This practise may have originated from the use of the past part. pass, of intrans. verbs in an act. sense, which is very common in Skr. ; as ^ OTT! I went for ^ sUTWT. In Pr. it is already found occasionally extended to trans. verbs (cf. Gl. in J. Gr. 0. S. XXVII, 492), as Setub. 6, ol the shadows of the night-walkers began to be seen (Skr. and intrans., ibid*. 8, 30 218 CASE. § 371 .] sT# the head of the bridge began to he seen, or ibid. 7,71 Mary dofm the monkeys began to be taken , etc. Now of these two methods of using the past part. pass, to supply the past tense act., the former, i. e., the real pass, constr . with the subj. in the instr. case , was adopted by the W. and S. Gds., while the other, i. e., (what I may call) the pass.-aet . constr . ivith the subj . in the mm. case , was chosen by the E. and N. Gds., and, of course, these latter make the past part. pass, to agree in number and gender with the subj. Thus Jliey have not eaten that' is in E. H. f vfriT^ 3 R WcFR, in W. H. R srf R Here is the 3 d plur. masc. 2 nd pret. (formed from the past part. pass. or see § 307), agreeing with the nom. ^ffiR and governing the acc. while WHTt is the nom. sg. masc. (of the past part. pass, <37£Tr) agreeing with srsr and governed by the instr. or rather act. R. — It has been stated already (§ 366, 1. d) that the tendency of the later Pr. was to substi- tute the gen. for every other case. Thus the example of the gen. in the place of the instr., given by H. G. 3, 134, is frfR ^ ^UTT^tjf, where Mr is the gen. plur. (= Skr. Mnyr) for the instr. rrfli (= Skr. Mr:) *). It has also been stated (ibid.) that this Pr. tendency has become in Gd. an absolute law, and also, that the Gd. so-called obi. form is identical with the old Pr. gen. Hence, as regards the W. Gd. and S. Gd., their method of ex- pressing the past tense act. by means of the real pass, constr. with the siibj. in the mstr. case, may now be stated thus, that they express it by means of the past part. pass, with the subj. in the obi. form (= old gen. -instr.). Now there is every reason to believe, that this was once the universal usage in the whole of the W. and S. Gd. ; that is, that in the pass, constr. the mere obi. form was used without the addition of any affix (r or 1) His other examples are. yrtTRR for yTJTTTT acquired with money , or Rep for firRTT long delivered ; here the gen. -instr. has not the sense of the act. § 371 .] CASE. 219 iq*' 1 '). Thus in the 0. H. (of Chand, Kahir, Behan Lai, etc.) the aff. never or very rarely occurs l). In 0. S. it cannot have been used ; for it does not exist even in the M. S. Nor was it used in 0. P. (see Tr. A. Gr. CXXVI) ; nor, as far as I can ascertain, in 0. M. (see Man. 138) and 0. Gr. Even in the modern S. (Tr. 113,3) and Mw. (Kl. 66 , 132. a) it is always omitted; also, as a rule, in Gr. (Ed. 87) and not, unfrequently, in Br. (Kl. 287, 543) and P. (Ld. 7, 22. 73, 119). Indeed, it may be said to be really confined to the literary forms of the Gd. languages and, therefore, to be comparatwely modern. Such, at all events, is the case with Hindi, where it is confined «to the H. H. (or Urdu) and originated at the same time with the literary cultivation of the language. The latter took place in the sixteenth century around the centre of the Moghul empire in Western Hindustan. In the low dialects of those parts the following dat. aff. are in use, G. Mw. ^r u , P. and it so happens that in G. the same aff. ^T u is also used as an aff. of the act, case in the pass, constr. It may be concluded, therefore, that the founders of the H, H. adopted what they found current as a dat. aff. in their regions for the act. case also. It should be remembered, that the mere obi. f. which originally was the act. case was often outwardly not to be distinguished from the nom. This was too inconvenient for a literary language which necessarily aims at grammatical precision. Seeing, then, two dat. aff. current in different parts of their neighbourhood (viz., or 3?T in Br., or qr in Mw.) they assumed one (Sr) for the act., while they reserved the other (OT) for the dat.; and thus, as will be seen, any confusion be- tween the act. and the dat. in H. II. was avoided. Possibly, the dat. aff. Sr was already employed, in some cases, by the common people (as in G.) to signify the act., and thus a precedent was 1) It must be remembered, that in many cases the obi. f. happens not to differ from the dir. or nom. ; thus in Pr. R. 1, 49 (in Bs. II, 267) £?T and psf are not nom., but obi. f., just as and in the other cited verses. 220 CASE. § 372 . 373 .] afforded. The choice of the dat. aff. to supply an affix of the act. must have been felt to be natural; for it has merely the ge- neral sense of „ referring to“. An affix, having such a vague and general meaning, might well be employed to express any relation in which a noun may stand in a sentence. — This theory of the identity of the act. aff. with that of the dat., with which I entirely agree, was, I believe, first propounded by Beames (II, 2*7 0). The common theory of its identity with the Skr. instr. termin. or ITT can hardly be seriously maintained, and has been well refuted by the same writer (ibid. 266). — It should be mentioned, that G. and Mw. employ a v special obi. f. in ^ or ^ for the act. case sing., their general obi. f. ending in ^T, see § 8 66, 2; while S. uses its genera] obi. f. for the act. case also. — The various act. case-aff. are: H. H. it, Br. Sr 1 *, M. sg. ^ or pi. itT, P. r*, G. it or ffr, N. ^T. The aff. fit * m G. and ft", or srT in M. do not belong to the act., but to the instr. or abl., just as ir in E. H. (see §§ 872. 376). — N. alone has the curious anomaly of using the act. case with together with the act. -pass, constr. ; i. e., of constructing the subj. like the W. Gds., but the verb like the E. Gds. (see § 487). Note : On the derivation of the act.-dat. affixes see § 3 75. 372. All cases, exc. the nom. and acc. (proper) are formed by adding to the obi. form of the noun certain affixes which are the same for both numbers. These are the following: instr. or abl! % by, with or from ; dat. m to, gen. sft or cFqr, of, loc. it in. The acc. proper is identical with the nom. ; but com- monly, as in all Gds., the dat. is substituted for the acc. See paradigms in § 379. Note: The following aff. are also sometimes used: dat. abl. or or ir or fit *, loc. or it or irf or JTTO or JTTfT. 373. For the gen., there are two sets of aff.: 1) ^ and 3T, 2) cfqr and $rij. Of these two sets, nouns (i. e., subst., adj., and numer.) may affix only the former (§», §>), while pron. may § 874.] CASE. 221 take either pair at pleasure. Of the two members of each pair the former (el, 3q) are used when the governing word is in the nom. or acc. proper; the latter (el, cfif) when it is in any obi. case. The number and gender of the governing word make no difference in this respect. Thus sq el OTTl - ^TcTr^ stt the master of the house is coming ; sqr ^ tell ye the master of the house ; sqr el the people of the house are coming ; sq ST^ToTir call ye the women of the house. Again f or $rtel aqjstrf this is his house ; r 3:q c|f or ^ el sq h* mz he is in his house ; 3;^3Fq or ^rsl qtsft those are his boohs ; 3T or fl qtrl Ir q^cf * , see ^ 3 65, 1) is — Ap. Pr. loc. Skr. m lit. in the interest of, — 5) The B. grg? (for 5f or grrOT (lit. at the ear or belonging to the ear, i. e., side), — 7) The forms, B., E. H., W. H. rT5ff or rwreg, W. H. rrf" or P. rTtf" or % or or Fri) (Ld. 76. 126), S. or rfdf 1 * or rTtff or rflnfi' (Tr. 399) meaning up to, till, to, I believe, form one set, -together with the abl. aff., W. H. if, if, P. if, 3rff, 3rff (Ld. 77), S. rTT, ?T f (Tr. 400), meaning from up to, and the loc. aff., B., P„ S. ?T 1) The 0. M, ^rTnfwr or ^TrftfSr is the conj. part, of the same verb, = Pr. grfrrKSTET; so also might be the G. guff = Pr. ctf ; but not (as Bs. II, 260. 261) the M. gruff, on account of the final ammdsika . 15 226 CASE. § 375 .] on, upon (S. Oh. 49. Ld. 77. Tr. 400). I am inclined to connect them with the Skr. past. part. rrf^TT (or of the R. rT) passed to, hence up-io, upon, from-upon. The loc. rif^TT would be- come Ap. rrf^r or *rT^r (see § 124) and contract to Gd. rT, just as Gd. 3T arises from 3rf|^r, etc. (see above Nro. 2). The elements 37, 3i I take to be the dat. aff. fsfr, 37 (as in 0.), and the ele- ments "if, nfl to be pleon. suff. (see § 209). — 8) The set, Mw. STfcs or S. G. which mean lit. conformable to (Tr. 400) and thence for the sake of, I connect with the Skr. like, Ap. obi. (or loc.) or (cf. § 292). — 9) The dat. aff., W. H. STfnrr (Km., see Kl. 69), S. wxh (Tr. 407), meaning on account of, for, together with the abl. aff., E. H. or ^R or £r or £r! with, from, P. w ivith (Ld. 74), S. ^fnxr or itR with (Tr. 401), N. hit from, S. *Tm f on account of (Tr. 407), I connect with the Skr. which may mean m company with (from R. RT 4- tr) or in attachment to (from R. The conj. ^ would readily pass into UT or =T, cf. TOT for ^ (H. C. 2, 43. Wb. Bh. 403, see also p. 21). — 10) The W. H. (Kl. 69) up-to, till and S. RTT along ivith (Tr. 401), the former a loc., the latter an abl., I would connect with some derivative of the R. RTT3T (Ap. or fe), meaning collected, adjusted, whence with or up-to. — 11) The dat. aff., E. H. snr, S. oR (Tr. 402), G. STcf (Ed. 115), meaning for or instead, and the abl. aff., N. ^T£\ r S. ^rf from (Tr. 402), I connect with the Skr. 5TTW (or op?f or ctyt) welfare, Pr. stj or cr?r (cf. H. C. 2, 29. 30), loc. stir lit. in favor of, for, whence in place of, instead . — 1 2) The dat. aff. E. H. 5^ and the abl. aff. M. sqpT are derived from the Skr. 5T1[ boon, advantage . — 13) The E. H. 37R is the Pr. loc. 3>?ir, Skr. for the work or sake of — 14) The S. 3^ or 3rij is con- tracted for *3rf^ = Skr. stft for the sake of, and the correspon- ding abl. aff. is the M. similar is the M. dat. aff. 3?f{rrf which is apparently a loc. sg. of the pres. part, (see §§ 300. 307). — 15) As to the relics, in M., of the organic dat. in 5TR, 3R sg. and rranr, r^T, ott plnr., see § 365, 1.4. § 376 .] CASE. 227 Note : I think the identification of the S. W with * cF% more consonant with Gd. analogy (see § 13 2, note) than Trumpp’s theory that $T == Skr. 3pT, by the loss of ^ and consequent aspiration of 37 (i. e., = W Tr. 115). For this process there is, I believe, no analogy in Gd. The examples, to which Tr. refers (niyrVr tabor, heart , for Skr. sj ^ a drum, WZJT heart Tr. Y.), are not analogons. For 1) £ has not disappeared, and 2) it has aspirated the following, not the preceding cons.; whereas, in the case of W, it is the preceding cons., and ijT has disappeared. According to the adduced ' analogy, Skr. 37rF would become f&^T, not $r. There is one really analogous case in Pr. in the adverbial suff. 5T, for which Pr. has ?zr (e. g., Pr. or ^Trq here = Skr. ^w), but the case is unique, and the identification of r£T with 3" (Ls. 251) is, to my mind, doubtful, see § 469. — Beanies’ remarks on my theory (II, 258) are founded on a misunderstanding. I hold that both the W. H. and the B 37 T^ are the same words, in as much as both are various modifications of the same Skr. words ; and that the H. form represents a later phase of phonetic development than the B. form, in as much as B. has preserved the aspirate cons, of the Pr., while H. has worn it down to the simple aspirate JT (in cRw) and even dropped it altogether (in 3?!) ; but not, that the one is actually derived from the other. The H. form comes after the B. phonetically, though not historically ; only in this sense can one be said to be derived from the other. 376. Derivation of the ahl, and instr . affixes. 1) Pr. has the instr. suff. f|rTt and gfft (Tr. 5, 7), both in the plur. (H. C. 3, 7), but ffrft also in the sing. (H. 0. 3, 8). Of these the former contracts to M. ^rr u , the latter to E. H., W. ,H. STt u , Mw. sr, G. STj similarly as the 3. pi. pres, termin. Skr. ^f^T, Pr. contracts in Gd. or or ^ (see § 497, 2 f.). In the J Ap. Pr., there is an abl. aff. or Iff? iS (H. C. 4, 3 55), which appears in 0. H. (Chand) as Ifrit or gcT 1 ). These forms 1) gflyis a wk. f. = Ap. Pr. ^TH or #rF* 228 CASS. § 376 .] are really part. pres, of the verb ^to be (cf. H. C. 3, 180). The modern B. has still an abl. aff. and N. which are part, pres. (cf. S. Ch. 148, and see § 300), representing the Pr. forms f|offr° and ^oTrf or 4rT (cf. H. C. 4, 60 ^orffr and H. C. 4, 3 65 kfk = Skr. ^ToffH' they are). The rationale of this usage may be explained (as Bs. II, 23 7) „by supposing the idea to be that of haying previously been at a place, but not being there now, which in- volves the idea of having come away from it“ ; thus Ap. rH|T 3UTTHJ (H. C. 4, 3 55), 0. H. rT^T frft srcft, N. (TT^T STOTT, B. srtaT from there (lit. beifcg there) he has come . The Ap. and O. H. forms are direct, i. e., he tvho is there (lit. the there being) has come ; the B. and N. forms are oblique and may be taken as loc., i. e., in being there he has come . Possibly the or- dinary Pr. suff. ffrrT and grff may be also pres. part, of the B,s. be and be respectively, slightly modified for ^rfr (cf. H. C. 4, 406 ffn) and ^frfY (cf. H. C. 1, 3 7). Just as frft or #frt (H. 0. 4, 61) have become f^HT, so or jjrTT may become f^f rft ; and this form appears to exist in the N. f%rj^ 2 ), and in the S. (Tr. 401), E. H. and H. H. SF, Gr. Sr and M. or sTT 3 ). The 5. 3 TOT (Tr. 401) I would similarly derive from which is still used by S., in the form as a gen. aff. (Tr.^129), or from which is still used in E. H. as an adv. part, on being (see § 488, note). — The Pr. suff. ff^rfT and gftt are used for the f 1) Pr. has a tendency to change 3? to ^ in the suff. sifk of the 3. pi. and of the part, pres., see Wb. Bh. 404. 428, and B. has ^cT in the pres. part, for E. H. ^rf (§ 300). 2) ^ With rj^for ^rT, as m the M. 3. pi pres, ^for Pr. and in the E. H. pres. part, in B. for Pr. (§ 800). 3) The M. or SJT u cannot be divided (as Bs. II, 272) into H-f- ^ the former being the termm. of the (Pr.) gen. sg., the latter the Pr, mstr. plur. suff. f^; thus M. e(ofT^j' u = 3[©rrer or -|- ft*. No doubt, modern M. case aff. (like in rUTSTT by him) may be added to a gen. ; for they are relics of what were formerly full nouns. But ^ is not an aff., but the relic of an old suff.; see at the end of this paragraph. § 376 .] CASE. 229 instr. only, but tbe Ap. aff. ^frrs for the abl. also ; similarly ft' 4 ’ and are confined, in M., to the instr., but in the other Grds. the corresponding s aff. express both the instr. and abl. Thus instr. in E. H. ftfr 37 XT^c^ done by him or with it, but abl. in rfftr £r come from there. They never have in E. H. strictly the sense of „in company with“ ; thus gone tviih him is not ft§r gr but ^ but they appear to be used so oc- casionally in S. (Tr. 403), e. g., ^ return with Pu- naMt a moment ; and, of course, the instr. easily admits of this sense. — The Pr. F^rTl (R. C. 3, 7. 8) and the Ap. ftfts (H. C. 4, 372. 373) are used both in the sing, and plur. ; but ft|ft was in Pr. originally confined to the plur. (Vr. 5, 6. 7), and the M. ^ is so still; on the other hand, both M. and all other Gds. extend ft w , ft 141 , 0, etc. to the sing, also, while the corresponding Pr. grn is limited to the plur. — The M. abl. aff. or, curtailed, 3^ can not well be derived from the Pr. f^ft (as Ls. 311. Bs. II, 234. 236); though it may be (like the 0. H. |rT) traced to the Ap. ftfts (or rather the wk. f. ftft) by the change of SrT^ to as in the S. suff. $rft of the 3. plur. pres, for Pr. ^ft. Indeed this derivation would hardly admit of a doubt, but for the fact, that in 0. M. the aff. is gft or |[ft£rT, which points to its being a conj. part., the suff. of which is in 0. M. 3 ft 34 or 3ft and in M. M. 3^ (see § 491). Accordingly it would be equal to having been. Similarly N. uses the conj. part. having seen as an abl. aff.; e. g., FrffT ftsaft he came ont from there* zrfa from the midst But very possibly (as Bs. II, 23 6 suggests) some confusion may have taken place between the abl* aff. |F*T and the conj. part, and, on the whole, the identification of with #ft seems most to commend itself *). — 2) As regards the other groups of abl. and instr. aff. or postpos., the B. ?rft[ 1) With Bs.’ identification (II, 272) of the M. sfl with Pr. and of the H. ft' 4 ’ or with Skr. SFT (II, 274) and with Ls.’ derivation (310) of f^ft from ft[ -{- I cannot agree. 230 CASE. § 377 .] (S. Cii. 229) and 0. 5T-£ or 5T3 or £ (Sn. 13) are derivatives of Skr. vTTh, or 6T (^r is the abl. aff.) being = Ap. loc. *Tfbr, and 5TS or £ — Ap. abl. STOTT. Identical with these, only sub- stituting ^ for K (cf. H. C. 4, 16) is the other set: N. snfsr, P., E. H., W.H. m" (Ld. 7 7), G. eft (Ed. 115), all = Ap. loc. snfftr; and 0. P. ?TTc TW or eft w or eft, M. P. zrt* = Ap. abl. ^TTUrj; in the B. Hreh (S. Ch. 62. 23 0) and G. eraft the aff. §7 and sft are super- added. — 3) The explanation of the set of instr. aff., E. II. 5^, Spt, ircf, S. HTUT or iruT with , and of the abl. aff., E. H. FT, FT^, P. 3^, S. rTT or rTT^, has been gwen in § 375. So also that of the M. abl. aff. cF^-^t and and of the s * Others, as M. STg^, P. qra T, and P. V ff, S. or qff* and S. *T“f or stT or WT and S. ETTT, will be explained in § 378. — 4) There are also some relics of the old organic instr. or abl. Thus M. has an instr. sing. suff. ^ (Man. 17), which is the Ap. instr. sg. suff. ^ (H. C. 4, 342), probably contracted for (see § 3 67, 5); e. g., M. hij a god , Ap. ^sr, for Again M. has an instr. pi. suff. ^ w , which is contracted from the Ap. instr. pi. suff. ^ft[ (H. C. 4, 347); e. g., M. t^ft* gods = Ap. Again there are the abl. sg. suff. and or $ft u or 3 in S. (Tr. 117, 5) or in P. (Ld. 12) which are the same as the Ap. abl. plur. suff. ^ and %W (H. 0. 4, 337. 339, see § 367, 5); e. g., S. from a house = Ap. Pr. or S. srpT or srfT or P. srfr* = Ap. sr^er. r 377. Derivation of the gen . affixes . The 0. H. possesses a gen. aff., which in the weak form, dir. and obi., sing, and pi., is $7^ m., Srff f., and in the strong form, masc, dir. sg. dr^T (E. H.) or 5F>pt (W. H.), obi. sg. and dir. pi. (E. H. and Br.) or (Mw.) ; fem., dir. and obi., sg. and pi. $7pf. The same forms exist also in 0. P. (Tr. A. Gr. CXXYI) and in 0, G., which latter adds the st. form neut. sg. kf, pi. 5F7*^f (see Bs. II, 283). Thus masc. sg. in 3T «g3?tar yTcPT, i. e., it is Suqrwtis little messenger (T. Das, Lanka) or et #7f qr^i^rr the $>am of the creatures is not removed (T. Das in KL 72) ; fem. sg. in efrTT 1 § 377 .] CASE. 231 y^crrfi', i. e., keep a watch of Slid (T. Das in Kl. 72); masc. sg. dir. in ^ ^rrij ^Tcf fgqfH q??rr, i. e., to have one wife is the rule of Baghupati (T. Das, Lanka), or sfift in Vnt cT ^7 qsr Iqm Fj^Tqrft fqm 5 TJT mj), i. e., who %s thy son, tvhose father art thou , (such que- stioning) is a delusion and error of the world (Kabir, Suravali 1 2), or in ^Tf ^ s&r =cnwR iljY blindly ran the elephant of the Chdhuvdn (Chand 20, 141); masc. sg. obi. ^ in iit 5r^ J sf^ §?T §?fT3T at the time of the end, oh friend, to whom unit you look up? (in Kabir’s Rekhtas); masc. pi. dir. $IT in 3 v&ftz ^ these are* the diadems of Bavana (T. Das, Lanka), or §?7T in QnJT cTpT rfsTT Sr JR Jpg his life departs from pain (Chand 26, 2); fem. dir. sg. in gsrj fsRiRUT CR-5fi qhrh hear, 0 VibMshan, the lord’s custom (T. Das, Sundara 298 in Bs. II, 278); masc. dir. sg. in cr-st xnir every one will say (it is) the qualify of love (Yidyapati, Pad. in Bs. II, 281); fem. dir. sg. in arrro ^rsr (to obey) a father’s command is the crown of all virtue (T. Das, Ayodhya 334 in Bs. II, 283); masc. 1) Similarly $frq and is shortened in E. H. to and curtailed in N. to q; e. g., fyR q and they were . 377.] CASE. 238 obl. sg. 37 in ^7 g f^T-37 *rf^ Hari can save in an instant (Chand 1, 60 in Bs. II, 283) or 37£orr sriftfe 37^-37 mr the Mndhidi has flowered with the lotus (Vidyapati in Bs. Ind. Antiq. Febr, 1873). In tbe E. H., as a rule, the weak forms 37 and 37 only are used. The former, however, is now constructed only with dir., the latter with obl. forms (e. g., sTC37 $7 the house of a man , but 5 PT 37 37 ft m the house of a man) ; perhaps by way of assimilation to the W. H. obl. 37, if the E. H. obl. 37 is not actually identical with it. The st. forms 37T or 3?T sometimes occur already in 0, Gd. ; thus efft in 375-^r ^ ^ i 37 ^tt 375 ^ n the name of this verse is truly called Kantasobha (Chand 27, 31); fern. 3 ft in 373T #3 wftFT 37 f% they well told the story of Chaliudn (Chand 27, 22); obl. 37 in *5377 ssrcq 37 srt *177 i sft 37^ 3777 , 1. e., he ivill take the births of a swine and dog who causes the disgrace of his teacher (in Kabir’s Rekhtas). They are the or- dinary gen, aff. in W. H. (exc. Mw.) and H. H. Lastly there is an example of a fern. st. f. feu in 373T sffii wlcjrT feu 1 mx 37^3 37UT ferny feu i sft pTsPT gnu 3jf\3 ii narrating the story of Sasivritta , he now tells the story in detail , which the messengers of the kings had told (Chand 25, 41); and the corresponding masc. occurs, e. g., in the 0, P. abl. aff. few (Tr. A. Gr. CXXY) which is a regular Ap. *Pr. abl. of feut 1 ). There can hardly be a doubt, prima facie , that all these various sets of gen. aff. are merely different modifications of the same original form. Turning to Pr., we find the 1 st set not unfrequently occurring in the foliowing forms: 1) in the wk. f. sg. 37‘^T or fer m,, 37JT f., 377 or 37^ n. ; st. f. sg. 3>7#V m., 3?fp$rT f., 3rp# or 377 ^ n., or (specially in Mg. Pr.) 3773 ft etc. or 373T37 etc. They are treated in every way like adj., i, e., they are fully declined in conformity with the gover- ning subst. Thus masc. 377 ! in H. C. 2, 147. 148; n. iff in H. C. 2, 99. 148 ; masc. zkjwr in 3RJ Srirenr this surely 1) It is quite analogous to the above mentioned 0. abl. aff. 35^, which is a curtailed form of the Ap. abl. or 234 CASE. § 377 .] is the ornament of the lady (Mrchh. act. 4. Skr. OTTTar: .wgT^r:); fern, m m cFrf§T^T cT5cTrf§T5n my turn of slaughter (Mrchh. act. 1 0. Skr. JTJT srsmf^) ; neui m whose is this con- veyance (Mrchh. act. 6. Skr. skf^tift) or UQT your wealth (H. C. 4, 373. Skr. gsqre? if?); masc. instr. sg. in ?TH fcPHT^r gCf *rifH (Tout on account of whose (the lion's) roaring the grass falls from the mouths (of the deer) (H. C. 4, 422. Skr. zrn jf^m) 1 ). It will be observed, that ^ is here used in Pr. as a gen. aff. precisely as in Gd. For 1) it takes its dependent noun in the gen. (= Gd. obi. form) and agrees with its gover- ning noun as an adj. ; thus compare T. Das’ ^loF^ pain of the creatures or Chand’s the army of Bhima with H. C.’s FFff iraT the wealth of you\ 2) it is pleonastic . , i. e., it has no meaning of its own and might be omitted from the passage without affecting the sense; thus OTT and W 2 ) or zrrn and $rpk crsrftrr are absolutely iden- tical in meaning, just as ^foF^ qdfirrf or £ft would be in Gd.; 3) it is added merely to distinguish or emphasise the gen. or, in other words, simply as a gen. aff.; just as in Gd., where it is added only to distinguish the obi. f. in its gen. sense from its other senses; this, indeed, is expressly affirmed by E. G. 4, 422 HsrfeFT: Srproft i. e. j=fst° qj 5Ff° UoTcT; after (or 'in addition to) the gen . her a and tana are used ; and then follows the example etc. (see above). It cannot be doubted, then, but that the Pr. etc. are identical with the Gd. §Tf, etc. and there- fore, prima facie, with the other Gd. sets of gen. aff. Now, ac- cording to old Indian tradition, the Pr. ^ is the same as the Skr. past part. ^rT done, made, of the B. do. I believe, this tradition can be shown to be correct both on intrinsic and pho- netic grounds. In the first place, the phrase done by most easily lends itself to express the gen. sense „of iC ; thus in H. G.’s example 1) More exam, will be found in my Essay I. in J. B. A. S. SLI. 129. 130, and in an article by Pisehel in the Ind Antiq April 1 ! 873. p. 121. 122. 2) H. C. 4, 378. 380 expressly states 'ha. \,\ r^elf is the gen. plur. § 377 .] CASE. 235 the phrase lit. through the roaring made by whom is equivalent to through whose roaring . It may be remarked here, that in the literary Pr. the word ^ is usually not added to the gen., but compounded with its dependent noun ; the gen. construction being confined, as a rule, to the Ap. and the lower Mg. dialects; thus Mh. Pr. royal, mjiit foreign (H. C. 2, 146) or ours , gcfirfV yours (H. C. 2, 147. 1 , 246. 2, 99), but Ap. Pr. ^ 3 “ ours, rjc|[^r yours (H. C. 4, 378. 3 59) or Mg. Pr. m<3J SF^TcFT whose (Mrchchh. 96, 22), nf&SSTQTf^ Jr^rr of an ascetic (Mrchh. 15$, 6), etc. Originally if* cannot have been pleonastic, but must have had a meaning of its own, and supposing the latter to have been the past part. „done“, efrj would naturally be first used in the compounding construction ; thus Mh. jmsfcf = Skr. 7T?r^fT lit. done by a king, Mh. or (H. C. 2, 99) = Skr. done by us 1 ). But the original meaning was soon lost sight of, and 5F>^ looked upon as a mere possessive (gen.) suff. and used in the compound constr., or even as a gen. aff. and, in this case, appended pleonastically to the gen. The former usage is expressly taught by H. C. in his rules on the Mh. Pr. SRp i. e., her a is used as a possessive suff. (H. C. 2, ?47) and ^ i. e., Ma, ilka and her a are used as possessive suff. after para and raja (H. C. 2, 148), i. e., like the Skr. possessive suff. and gfhr. The latter usage is taught by him in his rule on the Ap. Pr. (quoted above) $»|rTqfr (H. G. 4, 422) 2 ). — The identification (by Psch. ’in the 1) E. g., Pr. 5 r?FT = Skr. fTsT^cT oT^f lit. speech made by a king , i. e., a king’s speech. 2) The comp, usage probably preceded the pleon. one; accordingly we find the comp, form Mh. Pr. yours contracted in the later Ap. Pr to (H. C. 4, 434) which occurs in the Ap beside the pleon. form rTJ^f (H C. 4, 357). Probably the Ap/g^fTfT is really = see § 73. — The curtailment of efT^r, to "ft m B., 0. and Mw. may perhaps be traced back to the original compounding usage. — The Skr. suff. 3F&T itself may well be derived from the past part. ^rf. 236 CASE. § 377 .] Ind. Ant. Dec. 1878, p. 868 and Ls. 118. Wb. Spt. 88. 66) of with the Skr. part. fut. pass, is untenable. For 1) the meaning of what 2 S to he done would not produce a gen. without a violent wrench (so rightly Bs. II, 286), and 2) phone- tically, all Pr. analogies are (not, as Ls. thinks for , but) against it. In all the examples mentioned by the Pr. gramm., it is a short which absorbs a following «[; thus Pr. i^Tf, £F?sfrfV or q^rTt, ^fT, cP^irfr are = Skr. orfiq:, qqqr;, ^TPqq:, (Yr. 1, 5. H. C. 1, 57. 58. 59) 1 ). On the other hand Skr. °3rTHT° becomes in Pr. °W or °qrfpsr° (Yr. 3, 17. 10, 8. H. C. 2, 24. 4, 314); e. g,, Pr. q?3T or = Skr. msrf wife ; Pr. ct^sf or gqfpq = Skr. qnqq to he done 2 ). — Secondly, the identification of with ^TrT is supported by Pr. and (3rd. phonetic analogies. Skr. roots in 37, as apr, q, q, etc., become in Pr. qj, q^“, etc. (Yr. 8, 12. H. C. 4, 234) and form their past part, by means of the connecting vowel ^ (Ls. 3 63), as grfpqT, fcrff?r)r (33. C. 1, 36), qf^TT, qfpsV (H. C. 4, 355 qqfpdr = Skr, q^rr^q). etc. By the transfer of 3^ into the preceding syllable, and the 1) H. C. 1, 78 gives Pr. Tlsfir for Skr. qT^d; but even this single case is no real exception; for Skr. has both JT^f and qT^T; and Ike Pr. itefr is clearly the former; just as Skr. JT^TfrT is in Pr. (H. C. 4, 209); that is, Skr. JT^T = *q^T = Pr 5Ts3u — The Pr. q?r or TOT for Skr. qT5T is not an exception; for no ^ has been absorbed; besides the derivation from qiq is doubtful; Ls. 128 suggests an original fiq’q. 2) Md. 19, 4 allows to the Ps Pr. °q1jq 0 also, but not °^ _0 ; viz. ffq: qrrq^t stt i hist f\m ^rrq i qn?» ftmi m n qifp^T i qf^r u qiTq =5 T cTSHIrT I SFIW i \ =5r ii i. e., „ry becomes na and the preceding vowel may be short or long“. — Skr. qTRT never be- comes qTTf m Pr. (as Psch. ibidem); the Skr. is a different word, with an active sense, doing , while cFTTHT is passive, what is to he done. The B. gen. tutMchl^r, ^TTsTSTT^, do not contain a gen. aff. oFTTI^; there is no such B. aff.; but the forms are regular gen. of ^TqqT own , of to-day, cFcdcfiT of yesterday (gen. ^TqqcFiT-^, etc.), which words exist in H. also and may be declined through all cases, both in H. and B.; see S. Ch. 115. CASE. 237 § 377 .] st. f. cFrf^wt become and $T^rT, just as Skr. m WQ wonderful becomes in Pr. or (Yr. 1, 5. H. C. 1, 58). Similarly Pr. S'lfj’iff a heap and ^ a door are, in all probability, modified from the past part. pass. Pr. 3^f^T heaped up and split , of the Rs. and 3“ resp. 1 ). The modified part, forms epr^r and effort are never used in Pr. or Gd. but as gen. aff., while the unmodified forms and serve both as proper part, and as gen. aff. Ko examples, indeed, I believe, of the latter two forms in either usage have been found as yet in Pr. lite- rature. But notwithstandtng this, their existence would be but in accordance with the general rule of the Pr. gramm. (Yr. 8, 12. H. C. 4, 234) that the conjugational base is gq[ (not ^). And what is more, they do actually exist in Gd. as the ordinary past part of the verb ^ to do\ see § 307; which §, moreover, will show, that in Gd. the part, forms of are the same as the gen. aff. Thus the gen. aff. or cpq m., mft or f. occur identically as part, in 0. H. (T. Das) and Bs. and, in the slightly modified form 3?^ m., in Kn., ^2TT m. in Mw. and UFisr? m. inBr., cffflf. in all (see Kl. 205,3. 207,390. 213,405. 216,414. 223, 43 1). The 0. EL gen. aff. or 0. P. abl. aff. occur as the orSinary H. H. part, "ferr m., f. done. The contr. gen. aff. cFTT or 37 do not, I believe, occur as part., but quite analogous contractions are the part, rrr or JT for rrerr or firm gone , m or for UUT been, m for cnraT found in Bs. (see Kl. 225, 438. 230,449) andO. H.; e. g., aqfe SFTrr *$3 i fter ^ it gfefm n i. e., in great passion were all the chiefs, with wrath was filed Prathirdj (— H. H. hut). The E. H. part. 3?^^, M. $»51T, B. 1) Pr. gramm. (H. C. 1, 58. 79) identify them with the Skr. and gT^*, which, of course, can be true as to the meaning only. Ls. 118 derives from a supposed vulgar form 3r^U, which shows that he himself felt, that Pr. analogy requires a short & before U^to produce for according to rule (Pan. 3, 1. 120 124) the part. fut. pass, ought to be 3r3}T?E — The common Skr. past part, is Zr^TUT, but Pr. would form, as usual, 3r^Tf^cT. 238 CASE. 377.] cfif^rF 0 presuppose an original form or chf^ri (§§ 109. 307). Tlie st. form m. (= Ap. is found frequently in the 0. H. of Chand ; thus i cFktt mjw ii of the drops of perspiration made a chain the elephant (Revatata 3); or faff 3^ wMz t fwa etr stfir ii upon this Chdmand made Hussain KJidn ready (Revatata 58); and the st. form Qnfjzx f. (= Ap. in cfrf^r ftjsi the nobles made petition (Revatata 96), or esr ^ rrrff jssfr all assembling made adoration of him (Adiparv. 96); again the wk. form Znlf f. in cfrff ^TTf they (made) took counsel having made an assembly (Revatata 9 6), etc. — Thus the gen. aff. of W. H., E. H., N., B. and 0. form a group by themselves, all being derivatives of the past part. 3?rT. — 2) To this group I would also affiliate the M. aff. =5Tf m., f., ^ n. In the 0. M. the forms f%UT m., n. (Man. 138) occur, from which the modern forms are contracted, just as M. H. 3TT from 0. H. T%sr, In M. the initial ^ has been palatalised by the influence of the succeeding palatal just as in Pr. f%^TTft for Skr. fe^Tr?; (Yr. 2, 33) and in Pr. ours , yours (H. C. 2, 149) beside Pr. and cTKfofr^ (H. G. 2, 99. 2, 147). In fact, in the two last examples we have, in a slightly modified form, the 0. M. gen. aff. f%[UT (cf. E. H. HUT, but B. Tfrur gone). According to Pr. gramm. (H. G. 2, 147. 149) is but an other form of which shows that it is = = *^fifjf^j, the ^ having been transferred into the preceding syllable zrsfi and having palatalised it into — The M. ^ is sometimes identified with the Skr. suff. nx (as Bs. II, 2 8 9 . Man. 132, 3). This theory assumes, that an old suff. has in compara- tively mqdern times changed into an aff.; for the M. is not added to the base (as the Skr. suff.) but to the obi. form, i. e., to the old gen. Such a change' would be, as far as I know, altogether unique, without any analogy or evidence to support it. The word (unlike r) was never a real suff., though some- times it is practically used like one in Pr* ; but it is a real noun with a meaning of its own, viz. made or done; and this accounts § 377 .] CASE. 239 for its peculiar use as an aff. constructed with the obi. f. On the other hand, the change of 37 to ^ through a following ^ is supported by the examples above quoted, to which may be added the S. neut. interrog. pron. what (i. e., child = hind = hihd) corresponding to the P. and W. H. mi for (cf. P. obi. f%f 37 of whom) ; also the G. STT m., it f., sff n. who for *s^, *J? (see § 438, 5) 1 ). — 3) The P. ? S. and possibly G. and Konkani gen. aff., I believe, form a distinct group. The P. gen. aff. are: 57 m., ^t f. The same aff. occurs in B. as a component part of the plur. sign, viz. £ or f^^in (see § 3 84, 2), and as the instr. aff. f^irr with which may be compared the P. obi. plur. masc. f^T, see § 374. I believe them to be identical with the past part. i^TT given of the verb £ to give (see § 3 07), and their origin to be precisely analogous to that of the preceding groups. The past part. given, just like the part, made , would easily produce the gen. sense „of“ ; e. g., the P. ?T 7 ^t crrcrft lit. the sound given by an instrument is the same as the sound of an instrument — The S. gen. aff. are sfV m., it f. Here the original initial ^ has been pala- talised by the following palatal <[. Other examples of the same change are the P. or of such sort (Ld. 1 9) and the S. this (Tr. 198, for idliio — idiho, see § 1 3 2, note) for Skr. ; the S. 337 that (Tr. 202) = Skr. *^or5rsr:; the Ap. Pr. ^ssrr^t (Ls. 455, for = Skr. ; the S. ansnriV zvhat (cf. H, cfisTT where) for Skr. (see § 438, 4). — The 0. P. has a gen. aff. 3T (Tr. A. Gr. CXXYI), where the initial \ has been cerebralised, as in the M. S. to give (Tr. 276. H. H. 3HT). The modern G. gen. aff. it m., it f., 7 n. I am inclined to count with this set by the not uncommon change of or 3 to or ^(§106). They might be, however, as Bs. II, 287 suggests, curtailed forms of the gen. aff. HOTT, rFtnt, cFQT, which occur in 1) In the Romance langua^^th^^eKahge of the guttaral into the palatal is very common, even before tb^bw^llx \ lat. camera, french chambre , engl. chamber ; lat. camifyts, fr. chemwfa etc/ 240 CASE. § 377 .] 0. G. and still earlier in the Ap. Pr. (H. C. 4, 422, e. g., ^ i^HTT rrarr that is the fortune of us). They still occur occa- sionally in Br. (rfaft) and Mw. FrqjT or rTuf^m., FTnft f., Herr! plur. (see Kl. 68, 78). — The Mewari gen. aff. m., it f., 3ST or i obi. (El. 68) and Konkani crft, etc. (Bs. II, 287) I am also in- clined to refer to this group, on account of the cerebral 3S, which appears to be a modification of the T in the 0. P. 3T. They might be, however, identified with the Mw. * ? °3i or 434 r 3 T 4 _$r, °37, etc. c) Redundant form * 435TT or 43577. 4354344 or 43574^44 StToTT 37, °9r, etc. 435T7 37, °37, etc. iWraVn^T W, °37 or 43^7JrTfi7 37, °37, etc, 5. Masculines in 3. a) Short form . rT^ tree . 4^ 37, °37, etc. 4^4 3>, °37, etc. b) Long form : 4^54 or rf^r or 4^5TT or 4^? ,etc. 4<745r4^, 0 3^etc. 6. Masculines in 37 a) Short form * 4T3 barber. 4T3 4T37 4T375T1X or 4T3 37, °37, etc. 4T34 37, °37, etc. 4T3;3TT4X^ or 4T343TT4 • 3, 37, etc. § 379 .] DECLENSION. 245 b) Long form: R3OT or sfter or after or 5735rf etc. Si ng Simple plur. Comp. plur. nom nteT 4te!T ^rteTcfite or gen. rfter EF7. °SF) ; etc ^TToT^Ut, °SFf, etc. ^TTcTTc^frr^ Ur , Ef? or ^TTa'^TwrTJT_eF), eft, etc. c) Redundant form: or or ^rrasTT, etc. nom. ^itecrr sfhErsn rifraorT^te or ^ft?fa^r^frrr_ ,etc. ^ftecrreftirc eft, °9r or =ftecprtete sf, 0 ^ etc. 7. Feminines in a. a) Short form: STIFF word, thing, event. nom. 544 gen sttf^er, °&> etc. srTrT^EfT, °ef, etc. b) Long form, srfterr or sjfrtef. nom STTrPTT ~ , rv N>o^ , gen. ©TTHST 37, 37, etc. 5443 37, etc. c) Redundant form: srf4354 or 5rf435rr. nom 544354 544354 nom a rn4T or 37?44TT4 gen srf3ira7 37, 0 ^,etc. srf475r4 3?, 0 37,etc. 8. Feminines in 73T. a) Short form: J4T Durgd. nom. 77TT " 44T 5“JTT?cftrr or 3?f7^7m v 5 O 'O'' 1 ^ gen 7T3TT 37, °37, etc. etc ‘ g^T^rfrTX^b °3> or gnX^X^ °^> etc b) Long form* ^fjT3T or rfiWf. nom Zfnm 4H73T 2T^3TofTTX or ^f^X^X gen. 0 ^ or 77FrW5TX^lX^°^ etc • or H"f7T3or33nrr 9. Feminines in a) Short form: ^rffr fire nom. ^Tirt ^Tffr gen. 3lfit 3R, °37, etc. ^Tfrrx^ etc. deest. 246 DECLENSION. 379.] nom. gen nom. gen nom gen. nom. gen. nom. gen. nom. gen. nom. gen. nom. gen. b) Long form: ^r?raT or ^frrcrr. Sing. Simple plur. Comp. plur. deest. aTJTETT ^TTTtTT jX o. ^THcTT cfT, cF. etc. cF?,"cFi, etc c) Redundant form* ^TrraETT or wracrr. ^mOETT ufrnrET sff, etc ^frraETT Sr, °^7 J , etc deesi. 10. Feminines m J. a) Short Form* crfToT sfa/f. cTTcff orTT^T Si, °5Ff, etc deest (§ 3 62, exc.) b) Long form* ^rferT or orrferf. deest cm*? IT cFTfg-tTT Si, °#i, etc rtfSEPT Si, S, etc. dees/ c) Redundant form: crTfsTdTsrr or cTfsEETT. deest. ^rsZToFT onTIEEET ^no^oTT^^.etc. ^rtEtTor^p^i^cF.etc. oTs 1 1 . Feminines in X a) Short form: 5T|T daughte? -m-law. 5T5 STo^Ttrr or •-Tg'i l j 5T|T cF», °3», etc. oTf^cFi', °37, etc. 5TpETT3T^T ^7, °SF or oT8' :: JETTJT^cF>, °Si, etc. b) Long form STjcTT or STj^rT or etc. Er^^TT ST^STvftJT or \5 C O O ^ srg^nr Sr, C S, etc. sjj^Sr, °Sr, etc. sTf^^nrur S, °Sr or srf^r^TJT^, °Sf, etc. c) Redundant form: or STeHoTT. oTg^orr olsWT 5r|i=[T^X or^^cFrgTtJT^ sr^^rsrT Sr,°Sr,etc. ^?^cr;rS. 0 Si 7 etc. srf ^snwn^S, °Si or cSrirSi, °St, etc §§ 380 — 382 .] FORMS OF THE ADJECTIVE. 247 SECOND CHAPTER THE ADJECTIVE. 1. FORMS OF THE ADJECTIVE. 380. Every adj. admits of tliree forms: the short, long and redundant. The short is the primary form, which is given in the dictionaries and by which it is generally known. The other two are more or less vulgar. The latter are made by adding to the weak form (see § 3 81) the pleon. suff. of the second, third and fifth sets of the first group, as explained in §§ 198. 19 9. Thus, masc ., sh. f. JTft: thick, lg. f. qtefffT or qt£cr>T, red. f. znz^m or qtafiSTT; fem, sh. f. qte, lg. f. or qtecft, red. f. qT6%Tf or q>r%or ; masc., sh. f. sra T gi eat, lg. f. or sr^rr, red. f. sft^btt or srwsrr; fem., sh. f. srif, lg. f. or red. f. or srefen; com. gen., sh. f. heavy, lg. f. masc. or qfprr, fem. or qffcSf, red. f. masc . or fem. qfff^rr or qfffferr; com. gen., sh. f. heavy, lg. f. masc. or rrpjT, fem. or red. f. masc. or JT^JaT, fem. n^f^uT or rr^fSrar, etc. 381. All adj. of the short form in admit of two forms, a weak and a strong. The weak form ends in ^ and is the original one; 'the strong form is made by adding to this the pleon. suff., m m„ \ f., of the first set of the first group, as explained m § 196. Thus, masc., wk. f. ccTTq long, st. f. sirar; fem, wk. f. 3?Tq, st. f. orruft; or wk. f., com. gen., z&^hiqh, st. f. masc. 3T3T, fem. 3#, etc. Adj. in ^ and 3 exist only in the strong form; their weak forms m ^ and 3 are obsolete. Thus st. f., com. gen., *nft heavy, light ; the wk. f. qrf^, ^ or ^ occur in 0. H. (Tulsi Das). 3 82. The adj. of the strong form in \ admit of two forms, the contracted and uncontracted. The latter is made by adding the pleon. suff. ^3 to the former, see § 19 7. Thus qqrt or heavy. Of the uncontracted a long form uf^foFrr m., f., may be made, but no redundant form. 248 GENDER. §§ 383 — 385 .] 3 8 3. When adj. are used as subst. or parts of proper names their long and redundant forms are made exactly like those of real subst. Thus &6 *=oTT (not ^TRcFrr). lg. f. of ir6 a name of a caste (lit. best, Skr. if 1 ?), or R 65 JT ftT^ the name of a species of mangoe hut R63TT ^R^ any sweet mangoe. 2. GENDER. 3S4. Adj, like subst. have only two genders, masc. and fem. Strong and long adj. change in the fem the final to and redundant adj ftftT to ^TT (see §j$ 2 58 ff.). In other adj. the two genders are identical in form. Thus the wk. f RST sweet grr small, etc. and the st. f. RfT heanj light etc are gen. row.: but st f mast. R5T ^T?7T fem. RST. ^Trr. etc., and lg. f. masc R6$ tt or R-TgKT, fem. RocFrr or Raffr, etc , and red. f. masc. Ro^cTT. fem. RoTcFftTT, etc. 3 85. Affinities and Derivation. All other Gds. have, like the E II . a fem. in ^ for their strong forms in (E. and S. Gd. and P.) or m or ftf (W and X. Gd.). Thus masc. JB., 0., W. H c??TcR, E H. cFiT^T Mach, M., P. arar, G. cFTT^t, S. cFTT^T*, fem. B., 0., W. II. cFTT^ff, M.. P.. G. cFT^T, E. II , S. mfl, etc. But the B. and 0., as a rule, and even the E. H. not unfrequently, dispense with the use of strong adj. in 3TT. In S, the weak forms m 3 (corresp. to ft in the other Gds ) have a fem. m ^ or ^ (Tr. 9 9. 15 2); m all other Gds the fem. ends in ft\ thus S. ft ft half, fem. ftft or ftXft, but E. II., B., 0.. G. masc. or fem. STTyy. In E. H . however the fem. wk. f. in ^ is preserved m the part., when the latter are used to form participial tenses (see §§ 502 ff): thus fem. cFTyffiT, of masc. eE^FT doing, in the 2. sg. pret. conj. SFRRsT. if "thou duht (fem.); or cfT^f^T fem., of cR^st, in the 2. sg. pret. ind. thou didst ; cRyfsr fem . of m the 2. sg. fut. ind. thou ivdt do , etc. In H. H. the weak fem. in ft and ^ cannot properly be used. In Skr., adj in ft generally form their fem. in ^T; but m Pr. they may optionally have a fem. in or f (Yr. 5, 24. H. C. 3, 32), which become or s in Gd. §§ 386 . 387 .] DECLENSION. 249 (see §§ 42. 43). As to the derivation of the fem. term, £ and ^rr see § 262. 3. DECLENSION. 386, Adj. are declined precisely like subst., with the fol- lowing exceptions : 1) strong adj. in change it to ^ in the obi. form sg. and pi. — 2) long adj. in cfiT or gfjT change to 3 in the voc. sg. } and also throughout the plur., if the adj. is used in a derisive sense (i. e. ^r_ 41. 61, ^rsFrsrfg- 81. ^cjarat 2. 22. 5)T5^ 42. srzrrf^e 6 2. ^rra-fgr 82. aaro^ 3.£t£t 23. 43. rrmflra; 63. 83. ffrp^ 4. =srrf£ 24. mflre 44. gtcTTimg; 64. 84. xfqnff 5. tri% 25. 45. q-^mfsw 65. q^fs 85. q^THT 6. f 26. 46. 66. fT^fs 86. %rrat 7. HTH 27. HrTTJFT \ 7 . ?l“rnf§w 67. 87. srwrat 8. ms; 28. srsr^ 48. W3rrrf§=TCT 68. saris’ 88. 9. ^ 29. atofFTtf. 49. sfcraro^ 69. m^rf?rr 89. ^err^ 10. 5^; 30. tffa 50. u?(m 7 0. 90. ^sa - 1 1 . ^njr^r 3 1 . ^FifTO 5 1 . ^mrra'^ 71. 91. 12. STTfg; 32. srfn^ 52. sttst^ 72. sr^iqr 9 2. arrair 3.3. ajs; 3 3 . 53. 73. fftffq' 93. fFTfTqa 14. 34. m-fFT^ 54. tJtoT-t^ 74. =sftf?qr 94. afr^Rsr 15. cR^r 35. q-fFPF[_ 5 5. TOToTT 75. q^w^ 95. qxrr^rir 16. 36. s?f?rer_ 56. * 76. 96. fmir 17. 3 7. 57. srrnmr 77. ^enq 1 97. FT5TTqcT 1 8. 3$. srefro 58. spspT_ 78. 98. srjrasr 19. 3 9. m^rmlyp q 59. ma^rs 79. aVljst 9 9. fqRTqir 20. 40. 60. mfs 80. 100. srr 392. Some of the cardinal numbers admit one or more slightly different forms; but those marked with an asterisk are used only in the multiplication table, and those marked with two asterisks, only in the formation of cardinals above a hundred ; thus: 1.OT7 5.q^[*or ll.^nrrfeTor 38. or 54. : §T$Ror 2 * ^r* xrssrc 3. * or 6. 3J|r* or 15. 44. ^aTfe^or 55. q= 5 rqq^ 24. =38%^ or 67. or 4. ^qr* or 7. 48. tsmfs 8 * ^ 30. 68. srpafs 252 CARDINALS. §§ 393 . 394 .] 7 1 . ^cF^qr 78. ^6^7 or 9 5. 100. £r* :< or 7 5 . n&TZJ x 9 9. PFTFrir or ^ ** or 77. 84 PFJTT^TSr 5=Tc?^ The final syllables c joTH^ , °f^T, may, optionally be spelled °5n7p. °HTTp, °c; E. H. has a form which occurs adso in S. M. and Ksh. (Bs. II, 132) and which represents perhaps the Skr. form Pr. *^F or *^T with final ^ (cf. Ls. 220. H. C. 1, 19. cf. M. TU 10). E. H. has also a form correspon- ding f to B. 0. ^et, W. H. and P. |>, with euphonic or for elided T ; Pr. has also ^ see Ls. 3 20. — 9. jft or TO re- gularly for Pr. TOT, Pr. has also TO (Ls. 320) which does not occur m E. H., but in 0. TO and B. TO; P. and S. TO add an anunasika. — 10. regularly for Mg. Pr. ^ (Wb. Bh. 426. H. C. 1, 262), Skr. Pr. has also ^ (Yr. 2, 44) which is only preserved in P. (also S. M. TfT, Ksh. (Bs. if, 133). — As the latter part of the compound numeials of the second decade, Skr. becomes in Pr. or 3^ or ^ (H. G. I, 219), in Gd. ^ or 5*5 or ^ Thus 11 Skr. Pr. § 397 .] CARDINALS. 257 E. H. or or nrr^. As to its euphonic see §13 5; it is more properly W. Gd. ; for B. 0. 75TT7, M. ?T5?7T have it not; while W. H. nrrpf, P. frraT^T, G. afdraTj have it. The other P. form (Yr. 2, 44) occurs only in S. cTTlf. The Pr. has also 5yr, (Wb. Bh. 426. H. C. 3, 123), which have not survived in Gd. — 12, Skr. STT^ST, Pr. snj^ (Vr. 2, 44), E. H. srr^f, B., 0., G. srTf, M., W. H. stt^t, P. arff, S. sn^f. — 13. Skr. ^5T. Pr- (i- e. ^SJ for m: + zyj cf. H. C. 1, 165) 1 ), E. H. FTJf; other Gds. see § 396. — 14. Skr. ==IH^sr, Pr. ==T3^f (Vr. 2, 14. H. C. 1, 171), E. H. ; other Gds. see § 396. — 15. Skr. Pr. creqf (H. C. 2, 43, but our^d Yr. 3, 44), E. H. (§ 392 and in UN^rad 115, see § 394); so also B- 'PTf (perhaps rather for the Pr. form see Ls. 320. Cw. 24, note) ; the usual Gd. form, however, inserts an euphonic Z (§ 135), as E. H. 0. dgj, W. H. d^T, P. dg^T, S. ds^t or dir, M. diqr, G. dgj. — 16, see § 105, note, E. H. ed^f, B. ?rm, 0. (with a strange metathesis), W. H. gdoTT, M. trter, P. sWt, S. G. tfra. — 1 7. Skr. ^esr, Pr. (T. V. 1, 3. 42), E. H. HfTff ; other Gds. see § 396. — 18. Skr. WTs^r, Pr. spxf (T. Y. 1, 3. 42. cf. H: C. 3, 123), E. H. wr^, G. vztj, S.nzg. (cf. 38. 48 below); other Gds., as in § 396. — 19. Skr. ^rrasjiri:, Mg. ("Wb. Bh. 426), E. H. W. H. yffe, B. , 0. SUtt^st/, Skr. has also ^Wasrfdr:, Mg. ^RErfaT (Wb. Bh. 426), only preserved in M. ^grcifW, 0. H. ^jprrrp and JT^T, G. STTTOtX; the P. has srfdf and^S. 31 % or sfin^with ~f° r ^ (see § 396). — As to 21 etc. see §§ 123. 129. The (apparently anomalous) ST in is probably (as Bs. I, 291) caused by the ancient accent of the oxytone sapid. Of all dissyl- 1) The Pr. form ^ is explained in H. C. 1, 165 as containing a change of the first g together with the following cons, and vowel to that is, m Ski-, irad^the first % together with the following syllable qq, M. =37qq or akq, regu- larly for Pr. *a3cqtnT, Skr. =snT*ngmnH ; but in E. H. araq or a3aq or (with euph. p) 0. B. xfRTFT the conjunct has been elided (see § 154). The unusual Pr. form q=5rtqT 50 is’ pre- served in E. H. 49 stoats, with the syllable q pa elided, pre- cisely as a" cha, in stoclTftotT^ 3 9 (see above); thus Skr. sqq^TUId , Pr. strraaTOT or srerq^rraT, whence B. 3qq=aT^, G. stotnqaTstB, S. sftBferr^, P. JOTcfiTT or OTirTT, 0. 3tosrTq , E. H. StoaTa ;’ but M. regularly Moreover it is used throughout in P. and S., thus S. |sRTTf, P. fitorST or %£TsTT 53; S. =atoisTTf, P. atasTT or ^5TsfT54; S. qfioraT^, P. qrsorerr 55; S. fctoTf, P. %r?rr or f | ' cid i 56, etc. - 60. Skr. qfei, Pr. aft (Wb.Bh. 426), E. H. trrRr, B. stt?, M., G., W. H. SET , P. trr, S. af?T ; the 0. aifs^ adds a pleonastic ^ 7 . 260 CARDINALS. § 397 .] In tlie compounds, M. has tTS", S. ^f5r and P. see § 396. Otherwise they differ little. But 61 is in P. o3TT^~, 62 in 0. srrarafir with st; 63. 0., B. Ntrfs - , 0. frits, W. H. or fitter, M. aw, P. Nfg; or S. 65. B. ttferar, M. TTW, W. H. tHW, P.T* but 0. Gk S. ; 66. 0. M. ?=nw, S. §?T^fe, W. H. , P. B. ^rf&; 67. E. H. STrTSrfS’ or ^rwf& or M. ?3rp=ng; or ?=r5W, W. H. sr^r, see § 107; the others retain ?T, 0. HrTHfi?, B. srTrPtTf^, P. ^oTTfr ; 68. E, H. srwfs' or see § 145, esc. 2, M. or #sprer, W. H. wmz or srp=T£, see § 145, esc. 2; but 0. srof?, S. P. B. ^T5^T&; 69. B. all others regularly 0 ^P?qr, see § 3 96. — In the Bh. the following curtailed forms occur, 62 cTTorfj, 64 ssrterft (but also =5T3^ft), 66 ^T5rfr, and even 61 ^nfr, 67 (Wb. Bh. 42 6), which (if trustworthy) may be explained by the intermediate change of ^to s (as in P. and S.) and sub- sequent elision of f\ — 70. E. H. see § 108; so also in the other (Ms. see § 39 6. In the compounds there is little dif- ference, but 72 is in 0. srraT^rf^ B. S. srr^wf^, M. ; 73. M. or serr^w^, B. Ffirw^, 0. ; 74. M. wniTqr; 75. hi. 7 6. 0. B. fimq;, S. M. siT^?q; or sr^7 (see §55); 77. B. tnrlTW^, M. wr^Tq' of P. FTrFpq; 78. B. JrTaPrTj, P. 55^, M. sr6jnf?qr or — 80. Skr. ssfrm:, but Pr. snotty with m (Wb. Bh. 426), and so in B. UTSTT; but E. H., W. H., P. with double which explains the 3T of B.'; in S. wt and 0. flsfr one has been elided; as to M. iqsfT and G. ^t, see § 148. In the compounds, which differ very little has all Gels. have ^rat, exc. M., which ttiuVFl; thus 81. E. H. pcftTTtft, M. on the euph. see § 135. — 82. B. fsraigit, M. sorasri, P., S. fsrwfr, 0. smsfl, B., E. H., W. H. shitst. — 86. 0. s^Jnsrl, M. sttusit, S. s^nlt ; 83. M. srrasri', G. Frsrnfl or 84. Pr. wqHT (Wb. Bh. 426), M. wrjrr'sf) ; 87. M. tlrsms^; 88. M. sprfusift; 89. M. E. H., W. H. are Skr. ; but M. hks also B. o,HdcTs, 0. 3UIFT3, P. jUTFlof'", S. jcrrrqir = Skr. ^srV^jsith:. — 90. Skr. ^ram:, Pr. (Wb. Bh. CARDINALS. 261 § 397 .] 426), E. H. 0. srsr, B. M. ^3=?^, W. H. S. to, P. ^cir or qsiir; these Gd. forms seem to presuppose a Pr. form * ; the origin of the final ^ is obscure ; so also is that of the connecting Towel which occurs in all the compounds of R®T, and is especially marked in S. and M. ; e. g., 92. S. TolWtoT, M. snrsTor; 93. S, fipnro, M. sarersr ; 94. E. H. ^t^rst, S. ^rpisr, M. xRXmH, etc.; it occurs already in Pr. 97 (Wb. Bh. 426), E. H. totto, S. mrzk, M. sotto. — 9 9 is in S. totto, B. R5TR5TJ, M. TOTTWoT (with euph. see § 135) for Skr. TOTOfcT; ; the E. H. and W. H. f^RRST or apparently exchange sr_ for though it might be also a modification of 3 in the P. or (see § 3 96, 6) which are probably connected with the other S. forms ^T^RST or cryRST ; for these as well as for the P. forjns I know no satisfactory explanation. 0. alone has perhaps for Skr. 3R$[fR^. — 100. E. H., W. H., S., G., P. STT or is the Ap. Pr. *=T3 (cf. H. C. 4, 3 31), Skr STrR^, and E. H., P. §r, B. sr, 0. srar, M. sr w is the Mg. Pr. TO or (Wb. Bh. 426) ; as to E. H. see § 109. — The compounds above 100, formed with StTJ, occur also in M. (Man. 44) and S. (Tr. 165); in the latter they may be formed up to 200; they are also found in Pr. (seeWb. Bji. 427); in the Bh. the original yt is reduced to 3, but Gd. preserves it; e. g., 107 Wttj wi (Bh. 15 a ), S. ^TrTlrT^nr; or Ap. Pr. S. E. H. fq#cT^fr (§55); 106. S. E. H. f&dTH f R or fgpmcqrm (see § 55); 'the latter as well as 104 E. H. (for H<5Tt°, cf. Pr. 84 in Wb. Bh.’ 42 5), S. ^VpTnT^^TT, 103 E. H. frt^l Hindi or frof 0 , S. 102 E. H. f^nn^T or f§hr° (see § 6 9), S. firftrT^fr, M. gorteq-sr' 4 ’ are formed' anomalously; the Skr. would be Grewpsiri, %T3l° . Very anomalous are the E. H. 107 (for *TOfaqyV) and froftaqdir 119; there seems to be here some confusion with the forms of 111 and 117. — The other compounds formed with the connecting vowel occur also in S., which has STt; e. g., 112. E. H. sqr^rat, S. 115. E. H. S. srl, etc. E. H. shortens the first yr by § 2 5, and lengthens 262 CARDINALS. §§ 398 . 399 .] tlie second % probably, for the sake of euphony. The first part of these compounds is* probably a collective or aggregate nume- ral; see §§ 404. 405; e. g., E. H. rffcrr, S. a sum of thirty, whence E. H. rfferT srT, S. f^T^TT 130, i. e., 100 plus the sum of 30, or E. H. S. Frpft sum of thirteen, whence E. H. S. ^FT 113, etc. 398. Declension. All cardinals can be declined, when used as subst., in which case they are inflected like them; thus gen. pi. of five, etc. But two and rftf^ three have a special form in these circumstances; vi£. JJTT or or two and cTbrl three ; thus gen. pi. J-TT ^ or or of two, ffbrt 5F of three. When they are used as adj., they are not in- flected; thus of five men, , etc. When they are used as subst., they are inflected like them; thus gen. sg. qf^wstf of the .first one , pi. qf|wrjff of the first ones ; but qf|^ sT:rq> of the first man, q%?i sT^ft se of the first men, etc. 401. Affinities and Derivation . For the derivation of q%l see §§118. 213. B. and 0. q^TOT or qf|;ccrT (S. Ch. 105. Bs. II, 142), M. qf^TT, W. H. q^^fr or qf|w or °^ft, P. «q%mr, G. S. q%^ w or q^uf u or q^qf u . The first 7 of the G. and S. forms is merely euphonic (see § 57). — The deriv. and affin. of i\?T an ^ see in §§ 270. 271, and for the deriv. of ^TT^, see §78. B. and 0. have ^ r ( chautho) or xffar (S. Ch.'105), M. ^or qr, W. H. =qprr (Br.) or (Mw.), P. ^tWt, G. xfterr, S. — The E. H. fjT, B. and 0. deest, W. H. or fjt, G. are derived from Pr. ^psrT, st. f. of Pr. (H. 0. 1, 265), Skr. qv:, the M. ^TbiT, P. ^oTT, S. are fonned anomalously (as if Skr. *qq*T:) from the Gd. cardinals M, ^T, P. if, S. The E, H* 264 MULTIPLIC ATI VES . §§ 402 . 403 .] forms §^SorT, or srt anomalously contain the suff. or Sfarf, see § 264. The forms *d%HTcFrr, ^THpFiT, fH^U^TT contain the pleon. suff. (see §198). The form ^kfcHT is formed anomal- ously after the analogy of £ ^ SH Si ?HTc7 r #» ^6 Sr ms ?R about thirty. The B. !3T^ dr STW , S. m is, probably, the Skr. SSTCT: stake or post, which becomes in Pr. ettht^ or 37UT^ (H. C. 2, 7) or W (H. C. 2, 99). — The B. riteT or JTT<*rl’ is probably the Skr. or rfriw; assembly , heap, and xris? probably the Skr. a progression . FOURTH OH AFTER. THE PRONOUN. 427. There are six kinds of pronouns, 1) the personal, 2) the correlative, 3) the reflexive, 4) the honorific, 5) pronominal adjectives and 6) pron. adverbs. The genitives of the personal and reflexive pron. serve to express the corresponding possessive pron. . 1. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 1 428. E. H. possesses pron. for the first and second per- son only. For the third pers. the remote demonstr. pron. is used. The "pers. pron. are alike for both genders. The forms of the 1 st pers. are, dir. sg. I , obi. sg. or srt' 4 ’, dir. and obi. pi. those of the 2 nd pers. are, dir. sg. thou , obi. sg. rft or rfU, dir. pi. ^ you, obi. pi. cftef . 429. There is a long form of the pers. pron., which, how- ever, now occurs only in the fem. plur. and is made by adding the suff. (see §§ 209. 214) to the obi. plur., thus we, rfr^Tt you . Note: The weak form occurs in the 0. H. (Kl. 127); the corresponding form of the 2 nd pers. would be *) changes to 3?3 in the Ap. Pr. 2 ) The Ap. Pr. has q £ according to H. C. 4, 377, but q^f according to Md. nTCT&r: q occurs in 0. H. (e. g., TOf TOTO like me , cf, Kl. 121 2 )), and is shortened in M., G., N. to to in 0. TO, in W. H. TO or ^ ; and the Pr. TO#; is in S. TOT. Lastly in the 0. H. and in Br. the obi. suflV is pleonastically super- v added to the obi. form TO, making it TOTf#;. — 2) The second pers. pron . smg. The circumstances here are precisely analogous to those of the 1 st pers. pron., with the exception, that of the old Skr. nom. sg. TTOTO^ Pr. TO or TO or TO or TOT (H. C. 3, 90) no trace has survived in Gel. In all Gds. alike, and even in the Ap. Pr., the old gen. sg. or obi. form has taken the place of the dir. form (cf. § 3 6 9). Thus as dir. forms are used in B. TO^, in 0. TO or TO^f or TOff, E. H. to| or TO (Bs.) or to" (Bh.), N. TO, W. H. TO or nr* 1 or cf (Br.) or ^ or (Mw.), P. TO , S. cf^, M. TO , G. cf; as obi. forms in B. and 0. TOT, E. H. TOT or TOT" (Bh.) or TOT or roTT or rorff (Bs.), N. ^ or cf 3 ), W. H. TOtft or TOT or c^ or or to (Br.) or TOT or to" or TOT or TO (Mw.) or TOT^ or csrT or TO (Gw., Km.) 4 ), P. TO or TO, S. TO or TOJ 6 ), G. TO or TO or to' 5 ' or STt 11 f and in the Ndgara Ap. TOTOcTOTO TO ^ STTTO S TO TO^T TOTOqT ( ^Tpr TO ^ 11 lastly the Ap. has TO^] according to Md. m the above quotations, and the Mh. Pr. has both TO^ and TO# according to H. C. 3, 113. 1) In the 0. H. of Chand TOT occurs as a gen., e. g., TOTTO TOT TOTTO TOc£ Lord 1 my name is Chand (Kl. 121). 2) Or, Chand 25, 28 TO=f TOTOTOTO TO TO TO>TO u how will she make my kinship , etc. 3) to" only in the act. to" or *B|f , with ^ for 3 as in G., S. and P.); G. BB (a), M. Bcft (c), K (f) fBfB ‘(like B. b{b) or (c) fBBT (with ^ for ^ or 3, as in Br. yours ), S. (c) BcfT or B5pT or B^T or Bc^ or (c) *3cfT tfr *srT or srfT or or P. (c) bbT (for Pr. *B*b|). And 2) the fol- lowing obi. forms: B. (d) BTBT or (a) BlB (only in the nom. pi. Bta-pO, 0. (a) B*B or (b) B*BB (only in the dat. Beitj), E. H. (a) fte or Bt\ (Bh.) or (a) be^ (Bs.), W. H. (a) BB or (e) rjEfT or (c) B% w 1) The loc. suff. admits both changes in the pron. of the or- dinary or Mh. Pr. (H. C. 4, 59. 60, e. g., Borfe or BorfEB or Mcjf^ for m all), but only f^T m subst. (H. C. 3, 11, e. g., ^orf^B in god ); on the other hand the Mg, Pr. admits a form BB nisi or f% si even in subst. (Wb. Bh. 417, as or ^orf%). This is noteworthy \ for the P. and S. phonetic system shows also in other points (see §§ 16. 18. 14) an affinity to that of the Mg. class of Prs. and Gds. The Pali admits both fBTB^and ^ in subst. (St. G. 62). PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 430.] 5581 (only in the dat.) or (d) g*fT or iUfT (only in the gen. or iH^TfT), all these in Br., or (e) gg (Gw.) or (b) rpr(Km.) or (d) STT (Mw., for see S.), G. (d) FTCT (in the gen. fWlft) or (a) fPT or (a) FW (only act.), M. (d) FT^T or (c) g*tT (only in the act.) or (i) rTJ^ (only in the gen. g*I_ ^t), N. (f) fdfu or (c) IrHf, S. (d) rTc^f or fToT’f or c^rr or T, RR[T lit. done (see § 377). PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 288 §§ 432 a. 432 b.] * the Ichari bMsJid this is restricted to the loo., *\ *N , m me, q or irq^r q m us, etc. as qr U or jftjq 432a. 1. First personal pron. a) Simple form: I, fq we. Sing. Simple plur. Comp. plur. '"\ ly nom. q ^qqftJT^ a., d. ifmonTt'’#. wu* ^q^TTST cp» or ^q^TTnq^cfT i.,abl.qt q orqf^q fq^q ^qsfftqq or ^qcrftqqq gen. UT.J or iUTT.UTfT,UT7 or fn7T, 0 rr, C Y ip^rtsT^, aq or ^qqrtnq^ §7 loc. qt q orqt* qor *\ *\ •x -\ qt^q ^q n q or zr qqorftrr q or ^qqftlTqjF b) Emphatic form : q fT or q q even I. Singular. Plural. nom. q ft u if f ft 13 £ orq>pT,qtft,qtf rft^PJ or rfff|T, °ft, q^>qjq,^ or rfeVrqj^sfr loc. rftqor qt^qorrrt^q rrtqqorqt^q q^rirnr or g^frsTq^q b) Emphatic form : q ft w or fl | even thou . Singular. Plural. JSl . . ^N- ^ w iy te) C\w tti C vs) i.j (jj iy i»j nom. q ft q $ q^ft or q^t ^ f f or*q^3i a., d. rftg^ ^ (TtfSEf? i.,abl.rrtfi'u ’ fflfs ir gen. FTlf or rTlf ?frfr or ?rrV gr ftt^t or rfl^T ft or m^T W loc. cT^t IT or ri^ it rfte IT or (Ttfl IT <|f rr or rft^J rr ?rVf3; if or ffrf^T ITT or !Tt^ ft Sr orfflf^q orrfrf^ftq orqt^Jp^q 284 CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. §§ 488 — 436 .] Note: % and |f may or may not be spelled also and may be spelled and before and ^ (see § 67 ); e. g., to us, to you . — The gen. pi, may also be rTTsTiJ, etc. 2. THE COEEELATIYE PEONOUNS. 483. By the term. „ correlative pronoun “ I here designate the demonstrative, the relative, the interrogative and the indefi- nite. The demonstrative pron. include the near, the far and the general. The forms of the near clem . aj:e: dir. sg. or pi. ^ (also Uer or emphatic or or obi. sg. £ or (or emph. ^t), pi. (or emph. ; of the far dem . : dir. sg. or pi. 3: (also oTfr or emph. or 3n| or SfJ), obi. sg. ?rV or (or emph. sr^T), pi. (or emph. ; of the general dem.: dir. sg. or pl.‘ rf (or emph. Uf or fnT^); obi. sg. U or fe (or emph. ufO, pi. (or emph. nr“^rT) ; of the relative : dir. sg. or pi. ?T (or emph. 3% or f^^), obi. sg. ir or (or emph. irff), pi. (or emph. ; of the interrog. : dir. sg. or pi. ek (or emph. ^ or obi. sg. sft or eNf (or emph. #rfO, pi. cfFf (or emph. fch?^T) ; of the indef.: dir. sg. or pi. or obi. sg. or pi. or . These forms are alike for the masC. and fern. 434. The interrog. pron. has a peculiar form in the sing.: dir. 3RT, obi. 5 F7T or cpn*|r, when inanimate objects are spoken of. It is, in fact, practically a neuter. The obi. cFn% is used only, when no subst. is expressed. Thus cFTT what do you do, 3JT in what house, ir with what wilt thou eat it ? In the plur., the ordinary forms are used. 435. The general dem. pron. has an alternative dir. form if he, thaf for both, sing, and plur. It is generally used instead of rT, but has no emph. forms to express which cr|r, are used. 436. All correlative pron., exc. the near and far. dem., have long forms, made by adding the pleonastic suff. (see §§ 209. 214). The;y aTe treated like adj., i. e., they may be § 487.] CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. 285 either weak or strong (§ 381), they are alike in the sing, and plur. (§ 386), and they form a strong fem. in Z (§ 384) and a strong masc. obi. in ^ (§ 3 86). Thus weak forms : dir. and obi., sg. and pi., com. gen., rToPi or or St. 2) The far clem. pron.\ dir . sing., B. (a) St or (c) 3fS ; 0. deest ; E. H. (a) 3; or Stir or 5T^ or 3e ; (W. H.) Br. (a) srf; or cpr or 5rn| or or («) St or Mw. (c*) 3 : or ^ (masc.) and cTT (fem.); P. (a) 35 or Ste; S. (a) |r or 3 (com. gen.) or or St (masc.) and jr?r or 3^ (fem.) ; G. (d) St^rt or S^rt (masc.), ^Tsft or q^rt (fem.), StSr or SSr (neut.); M. deest \ N. (a) X Obi. sing., B. (a) St or (a) 3^T or (c) 3 %; 0. deest \ (E. H.) Bh. (a) St or Stg; or Bs. (a) 5rf|; (W. H.) Br. (a) 3f| or aT or 5TTf| or (b) 3^ or or (/j) 3 S or iolS (dat. acc. only) or Mw. (c) 3UT or St° or (y) 3HtT or arrff; P. (a) 3^ or (b) 3^ or (c) 3^T or Si R (only act.) or (f) 3c^; S. (c) or 3^ or 3fSf or 3f^r or 3-f (or jprr or 3TT abl. only); Gr. (d) St^lT or (masc.), etc.; M. deest ; N. (b) 3^ or Gw. (a) S. Dir. plur., B. and 0. deest ; (E. H.) Bh. (a) 3 ; or mw or &W or 3s or Bs. (a) St or 3-f ; W. H. (a) cTl[ or (a) S or S'; P. (a) 3^ or StlF; S. (a) | or fl" or (a) Wg or 3^r or or 3^; G. (d) Slw or Wr (masc.), etc.; M. deest-, N. (c) 3 ^ or 3 ^. Obi. plur., B. and 0. deest ; (E. H.) Bh. (a) or Bs? (a) 3^1 or 3^; (W. H.) Br. (a) 3 ^ or 3^r or (c) 3^ w or (a) far^ or fsrfS or (c) (or or faFf* dat. acc. only) or Mw. (a) oTT or STT or (c) 3UTT or oHirf ; P. 3TT or 3^3 (or 3ST or 3-fT act. only) ; S. (a) wf% or 3f^ or (c) or 3=TR or 3^fS or 3%f^; G. (d) SteiTSr or ^fr or S?£ or (e) ^fnit (all com. gen.) or (a) fT or sftg- or (neut.); GL (a) Sjt (masc.), (fern.), sf(neut.) or (masc.), ^ (fern.), m (neut.) or (c) cffor^ (com. gen.); M. (c) 3?tT!L (com. gen.) or (a) 37RT^ (neut.); N. (a) srV or (c) cSvT^. Obi sing., B. (a) cFTT^T (com. gen.) or (a) fir or (b) (both neut.); 0. (a) gRT or (a) cfjt^t or $rrPf (all com. gen.); (E. H.) Bh. (a) Sr or cfe=r (com. gen.) or (a) cf>T or 3rri[ (neut.) or Bs. (a) ^iTT or mf^ (com. gen.); (W. H.) Br. (a) c?iT or SFTi% or ftrffT or # Mw. (c) OTr or cRUT or c£T or gjtfrl or or H. H. (b) fSrs/or (/?) (dat. acc. only) com. gen., or (neut.); P. (a) or or (b) or (f) fefT^ or (c) fe^(act. only) com. gen., or or (neut.); S. (a)$% or (d) cF^ir or Sift or (e) TOTTS (com. gen.); (j. (a) Sr or (c) (com. gen.); M. (c) effrtrrr or cjfarSTT or ^?txxr (or cfiTsrf instr. only) com. gen., or (b) or cfTSETT or srstT or 37S3JT (all neut.) ; N. (a) 3F> or or (b) apr^ or (c) gR or Grw. (a) 37^ or Dir . plur., B. and 0. deest\ E. H. and W. H. like sing.; P. (a) f5r^ or (c) SnrrTj S. (a) Sr^T or (d) Sr^^T or Sr^ or (e) cfisTTH (com. gen.); G. (a) ^r^T (masc.), (fern.), (neut.) ; M. and N. like sing. Obi plur., B. and 0. deest ; (E. H.) Bh. (a) Sr^T or Bs. (a) m^ or m^ or Sr^ or (W. H.) Br. (a) or fSrft or (c) (or dat. ace. only) ; Mw, (c) cFIET or zfimi ; P. (c) fSvTT or CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. 289 438.] feCT (or feT or act. only); S. (a) at*fsr or (d) or (a)feft or crfu or (c) or fsrf^fu or or feftn; M. (c) cfiftrr? (com. gen.) or (b) 3>STT or 3iSjT (neut.) ; N. (a) or Gw. (a) cf^ or cFR^ or cFkFT^. 6) The indefinite pron. ; dir. sing., B. (a) 0. (a) or (c) gumfu or cfjjtrrra ; (E. H.) Bb. (a) % or (c) a^rt or Bs. (a) ^3 or site; W. H. (a) 3ftT or 5TT3 or (c) ; P. (a)mt^; S. (a) . or a?r^ (masc.), 5iT or (fem.), 37T (neut.); G. (a) 37Ts ; M. (c) EffrOTt or cfitvft; N. (a) gftff. Obi. sing., B. (a)cfrt^T; 0. (a)^TfT; E. H. like dir.; (W. H.) Br. (a) XW or (b) feu or f%^t or (c) or Mw. (a) 3?^ or (c) apart or grofT; P. (b) feir or fSvft; S. (a) effFf or stiff; G. (a) OTU; M. (c) a?WrT or ^TOfT; N. (a) 5fTTfl[ or (b) stret. Dir. plur., B. and 0. deest ; E. H., W. PI., P. like sing.; S. (a) Sfi or cFTJ or cpr^ or grj ; G. (a) Etif ; M. (c) cFJifrr. Oil. plur., B. and 0. deest ; E. H. and W. H. like sing.; P. (b) ran or ram or (c) ; S. (c) fetter or cFtf or gift or M. (c) g?nr^f. 438. Derivation . It will be observed that in the prece- ding list there are Six principal types of forms, which I have severally marked with a, b, c, d, e, f, and the characteristic fea- tures of which are the letters (occasionally elided), ^ (or trr), YL. ( or %. ( or *0? rL respectively. The derivation of these forms is involved in many difficulties, the explanation of which, however, in most cases (I think) will be found to be the fact, that the forms which are now used as simple pron. were origi- nally those of pron. adj. of quality or quantity. 1) The pron. of quant, are in Skr. (or Yed. ^oirT), rTTSTfT , UT (Yed. criHrTj 50 large or so much , etc. In Pr. these become ^5T, PFoT, stst, fer (cf. H. C. 4, 407. 408) or rTJT, iftr, (K. I. 10. 11. 12 in Ls. 45 0. 451), or slightly modified ^5T, iH5T, f?FcT, fer or ^T, fire, fihr, fer (K. I. 10. 11. 12); some- times they are variously spelled ^oT or fcT, etc. (H. C. 3, 397. 401) or ^sr or ^5T, etc. (cf. H. C. 4, 418); again they may be shortened to H, ir, $r (see Wb. Bh. 422). Thus the Ap. Pr. uses the first set ^oT, etc., with the addition of the pleon. suff. 290 CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. § 488.] as quant, pron., ^©TT, cF oFJ|, etc. (H. C. 4, 407. 408 and see § 218), and S. and P. similarly use the shortened forms ^r, rT, etc. with the pleon. suff. ft or 3T; viz. S. Frit, etc., P. FF3T, etc. Again G. uses the set ^©r, cf©r, etc., itself without adding any pleon. suff., as qual. pron., ^T, FF3T, etc. But already in the Ap. Pr. these quant, (or qual.) pron. had come to "be commonly used as simple pron. ; so especially the bases he or this (If. C. 4, 3 61. 3, 72; it is also so used in Skr. in the obi. cases of ^t) and fer what (K. I. 18 in Ls. 450); again as pron. aclv., viz. <£©r, rUST thus, etc. (H. G. 4, 401; ^cT or ^SPT , an acc. sg., oc- cur even in Skr.), or so, thus (H. C. 4, 420, a loc. sg. cf. H. C. 4, 384) and now (H. C. 4, 420, also a loc. sg., cf. H. C. 4, 357). Again the shortened bases (T% etc.) occur in the Ap. Pr. abl. sg. fuTf (H. C. 4, 3 56, with the abl. suff. ^ of nouns in cf. H. G. 4, 341), and perhaps in the pron. adv. fflir, fs% (H. G. 4, 401, lit. abl. sing, with suff. ^r, shortened for ^;). Again the shortened forms ir (ft?), £r are mentioned by Md. as nom. sg. (ir ir i jjtt ir ?r ^ i £ (?) arof cfr i g- ^0 11). The latter are used in all E. Gds. and in G. as nom. sg. ; thus E. H. ^7, FT or a, ?T, Sr. By adding the regular obi. sing. suff. ^ (shortened for Ap. or see § 365, 6) the E. H. obi. forms ^eT, fe, arir, are derived and by adding the regular obi. plur. suff, (see §§ 365, 4. 368, 5) the plur. obi. forms ^eT, etc. The older form in J* is occasionally metVith, as fag (Kl. 137, e). The corresponding obi. form made with the gen. or obi. suff. (shortened for Ap. |r, see §§ 365, 6. 368, 2) is found in Bs. and Br. ; thus Br. arr% (for *^T%) or or etc., Bs. qf§r (for**^;), rzri^; (for * faff), etc. Again r d' (just as with nouns, see § 3 65, 6) the obi. suff. f or ff may be dropped in E. H. ; thus Bh. ^r, h, etc., Bs. UT, Far (= a), etc., Br. m , rTT, etc. In the obi. pi. of Bs. the suff. ^ usually drops the f (as in E. H. and Br. nouns, see § 368, 5); thus Bs. or or or etc. In Br. it optionally ends in f ; e. g., Br. ^ or f?PT or fata, etc. (cf. 0. H. 3 F?i a~ f or , Br. 291 § 438.] CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. n mf&T or cjrfsriR, obi. pi. of gprfar poet). In P., also, the short obi. sg. forms in f. occur; e. g., ffR, etc.; and, on the other hand, in S. the short obi. pi. forms in f^r; as or (trans- posed for *sf^), i^f^r or rffSr (with $r for see § 26). As re- gards *the S. obi. sg. or f|R , etc. and the Br. obi. pi. etc,, P. ^TT or ^7, etc., see below Nro. 2. — Just as the forms of the near demonstr. pron. have arisen from the shortened form ^ of the old quant, pron., so those of the far dem. pron. have originated from the long form of the quant, pron. Thus the E. H. obi. sg. is 4 contraction of *^oTqr, shortened (see §26) from the Ap. Pr. gen. *^5ry or The other E. H. obi. form has dropped the final ^ . The dir. sing. or is a contraction of the Ap. Pr. nom. sg. or *^7cj. In Gr. the latter contracts to m that (abl. $TT eft from that). There is, also, in H. a" fuller obi. form cTTf (Kl. 137, d) for *% = *?srj; and in Br. there is the obi. form crrf| for *^rf| = Ap. *<7srft or *££r|\ And so forth as to the rest of the forms of the far dem. pron. and their derivatives; they are exactly analogous to those of the near dem. pron., as explained above. Here, also, must be mentioned the S. neut. interrog. pron. urtjr or grj' what, why (Tr. 208); it is an obi. form and contracted form *gF?oR for Ap. *£Fiorj or 2) Among the Ap. Pr. quant, pron. £ori, 7oT3, STST^, fenj (H. G. 4, 407. 408, see Nro 1) the last one is already used in the Ap. as a simple pron. But it shortens to (cf. § 26 and Nro 1, p. 291) and changes 3 to rrr (cf. § 106), and thus"' be- comes cfTcRj (H. 0. 4, 867). In E. H. it appears as cffoR or or cf&r , in W. H. or , P. Gr. and M. Mw. SFprr^ or cRUT^, N. 3R. Similarly Ap. irsiT becomes in Gr. , in E. H. sToR or or TR^, W. H. sTfcj^, N. ?R ; and Ap. 7oT| becomes in E. H. rfcR or cTR or ffiR , N. cR . E. H. makes a regular obi. form c&R^or representing the Ap. gen. sg. cFisrtrr or (H. C. 4, 425) with or without the gen. sufi. The Ap. gives rise to the B. 3fR that ; the intermediate forms Gr. P, or 37 , Mw. 3tn^ occur only as obi. forms sing. ; 292 CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. § 438 .] Mw. lias also the alternative obi. sg, 3 rrrf or ©rurr beside 3 TIT^ ? just like E. H. §?TR and cRR. Mw. possesses also the correspon- ding plnr. obi. forms OTTT or cPTTT; and similarly in the other pron., as obi. sg. or or grtrrr or ^FTort, obi. pi. ^nrf or §7m"T. The latter are regularly contracted from the Ap. Pr. gen. pi. STOTUT, etc. These obi. pi. occur, also, in P. 3R“T or Br. (= Ap. gen. = ^£T3#), S. 3RTR or 3^fR or (with U transposed) jR-r. The Br. possesses also as plur. obi. forms 3 ^ (used only in the sense of the dat. and acc.), in 0 . H. 3 htF^ which are made by the Ap. obi. pi. suff. r|[ (see § 367, 2). Corresponding to the Ap. quant, pron. ^cT3, etc., S. has the shorter forms ^TT, FT 3 T, fT 3 T, eR 3 t. Just as the Ap. ^oTJ becomes in B< a simple pron. 3R, so ^3T, cf3T, ?T3T by changing 3 to tjt^ give rise to the B. simple pron. irrfu, T&R (read (ufr) 1 ). This set exists also in P. ^ or 3 ^, Mw. S. -R, etc., which, however, oc- cur only as obi. forms sing. There are, also, the fuller obi. sg. forms. Mw. ^rrft or srnft, S. (also spelled or or ^ (for N. or 3 R^r (in the plur. ^Re?-^ or also spelled 37 %-^, retaining the obi. suff. ^ or see § 3 64, 3) 2 ). There are, also, the corresponding obi. pi. forms Mw. or STITT, Km. 3 ^ or ^RT, P. or or ^RR or ^R, Br. S. or ^RTR or or fpIR (probably with an anomalously transposed l^, for ^Rf%, cf. § 3 68 , 5). Mo- reover, Br. has a dat, 0. H. 3 Rp|r, and P. an act. or The obi. forms in -^7, contain the Ap. Pr. gen. pi. or obi. suff. fit respectively (see § 365, 7, being contractions of *Rs|, *RJ, These remarks apply,, mutatis mutandis, also to the analogous forms of the relat., interrog., and gen. dem. pron. in Mw., P. and S. — Even the original forms ^ 3 T, R 3 T, etc. occur in S. as simple pronom. adv. ; viz, in 1 ) It should be noticed that here, again, the far dem. 3 fR is foun- ded on the longer form ^5T3, but the near dem. on the shorter ^3. 2) S., also, has an obi. sg. %T which stands for — ^R^. CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. 293 § 488 .] the obi. form ft or fti or hither, TO or TO|%r hzi thither , or feN? or whither *). Some of these exist, also, in E. H. (with the usual change of ? to * ), ft hither, TO thither , in* whither- soever, iter whither . 3) The Ap. Pr. quantit. pron. TO or fro or TO, TO or f^rsr or if*T, etc. (see Nro 1) seem to have also produced the following Gd. simple pron. ; viz. 0. TO, TO, G. sToT 5 TO (also spelled in?, ir 3 or ir^t, Mt) or iter, TO which, however, appear to be used only as obi. plur. forms (see Ed. 41. 43) ; also G. sjsfr m. (ft f., C kS n.), probably for *3ic fT, shortened from the strong form STOt, which occurs in Gr. as a qualit. pron. ; S. has irat m. (ft f., Tr. 209); the corresponding weak form *TO oe- curs in Br. m or cfft, N. 3fit, and is used alike for masc. and fern., sing, and plur. (just like Ap. see Nro 6). Similarly N. has fit tfor*fircfr) and sit, Mw. Wt or sit, Br. sit, P. sit; M. also has masc. sit, but makes a regular fern, i?t and neut. sr°, and obi. sg. sSTT or ir, obi. pi. sTO, dir. pi. ir, m, at*; a fact which points to their origin from the strong forms *TOf, *sf^, *TO. To the M. obi. pi. sTO corresponds the Mw. obi. pi. s£TT, Gw. The S. has m. it, but a rather anomalous f. 5TT, pi. i c. g. Exactly analogous are M. sg. eft, fit, it'*’, pi. ir, rSTT, irf u ; obi. sg. rHTT, in, pi. rfTT, "Mw. TOT, Gw. r^. The G. neut. TO was used already in the Ap. Pr. as pronom. adv. TO why (H. C. 4, 416). Also TO, TO are mentioned as Ap. Pr. acc. (= nom.) and gen. sg. forms by Md. in the following two sdtras : TOvTO 1 tot Utts to to mrffj to iimi% to » i. e., yat tad become jau tau in the acc. sg. ; e. g., what thou askest, that I give ; and sfTOHTOT TO TO 1 ^TO^ 1 TOSE'qTH mTOolrni i. e., yat tad become jail tau in the abl. and gen. sg. or they have the regular Pr. forms 2 ). I believe, N. is the only Gd., which 1) The forms in jr are, properly, obi. plur., but used as sing, 2) My MS. reads *n TO qfffs 1 TOT ^ STW^TTO TO TOtei TO 37° TO ^°; there can be little doubt, that 33, TO (or perhaps TO. TO) is the true reading as shown by the succeeding sutra, where the MS. reads TO, 294 CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. § 438 .] admits sTT, nf as ohl. forms ; viz. in the abl. sg. sfV sn T or sfr U5T from which , nt 5TT£ or ut €fr from him . — In GL, arr thus, etc. occur also as pron. adv. (Bs. II, 33 6, 337); so also in 0. H. fer or fef 7ao^, etc. x ). B. adds the pleon. suff. (§§ 209. 214); thus ^PT or Vnfu or or FTqfvr cr thus , etc. (see S. Ch. 216). 4) From the Ap. Pr. quant it. pron. ^ST3, floRf, etc. are also derived the Gr. far dem. pron. or UcTT lie, that and the pro- nom. adv. or now , rT^ - or there , etc. by the change of 3 to Thus Ap. ^oT3T becomes *3J5r3T, *^oiW or contr. ^Vc?Tt or sr^fir (for ir^Tt with an anomalous hardening of ^ to ). The N. or (for * V^T<) is a loc. (or obi. form) sing, made with the obi. suff. f and is = Ap. Pr. (see § 469). The Pr. loc. sg. mw there, sTTwft where , StTsfit ivhere (H. G. 3, 65) are probably to be explained in a similar manner. Possibly the S. interrog. ^ who may be identified with the short quant, pron. by the change of j to !j[; but it may be also (as Tr. 206) the curtailment of the Ap. qual. pron. *chF^g, a slight modifi- cation of the ordinary Pr. Skr. ctffcrSL. The Ap. strong form becomes in S. the simple pron. what (usually spelled with transposed f;). Substituting in the long Ap. form fer° for 5fi°, and the original ^ for we obtain (cf. Pr. cRTf^ Ls. 116); and similarly ^orf^t or for the ordinary Pr. or *^VTT, Skr. Here the palatal vowel ^ changes ^ to sT^, and thus in S. the Ap. and *i£ori^t become the simple pron. this (for just as S. for iif^t) and 33?T that respectively; the one being the near, the other the far dem. pron., corresponding to the short and long cT3. In the original MS., which was in the Oriya characters 3 (or 3) would be hardly distinguishable from 3. 1) E. g., Ghand Pr. Kaj 25, 28 ^ ?Tt ^fr“ sq tr*T i ^ WTW STT » i. e., says the king to the actor, full of affection, how will she make kinship with me? or 1,82 sf^T^rTni i. I ^am hot with fever; how can I remove it, oh Lord? § 438 .] CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. 295 qual. pronominal forms. Similarly the S. c^siiiY fflJi'cit stands for the Ap. * 5 F»srfi£i|;$re 3 (with the pleon. su£P. WJS, see § 217, H. 0, 4 , 429). In H. there is a pron. adv. cfrsTT where. In the Ap. there is a qualit. prom such-like (K. I. 5, see Ls. 449, 455) = Skr. ^rTTr^r:. In P, there is the qual. pron. or of this sort (Ld. 19, 56). 5) The pron. of qual. are in Skr. cfT 2 [Sr: such-like, etc. They become in the Ap. Pr. $rg*, nj, iTj", (H. C. 4, 402) or (in the st. form) etc. The first of these or ^rg- or ^ was already used in Pr. as a simple pron. he or this (H. C. 4 , 362) *), and it occurs "’in most Grds. as the dir. form of the near dem.; thus P. ^TfF or ^eT, Br. or HTf or £FfT, E. H. ^ or ^ (for dropping s) or ^|r. 0 . has which appears to be founded on the form mentioned by K. I. 8 in Ls. 449, and is*' Ap. Mg. (see § 46). The S. # or | or f ^3* (for 3 ~j) transposes the f;; and the S. (for ^^ir) elides it; so does also the N. HTT (for ^V) and Mw. Ut ; and the Mw. drops the initial ^ of UT. In M. the initial ^ or ^ is dropped ; thus f[T m., f., ^ n. (for Ap. all st. forms) with a regular obi. sg. ^TT, pi. ^rf, and dir. pi. 5 m., ^TT f., n. The Ap. Pr. qu$l. pron. occurs in S. as the adjectival simple pron. (fern*, i^t) or (eliding fr) sk&f which (Tr. 209); so also in Gr., where, however, ^ is shortened to thus Gr. cFTsrf (fern, n. But perhaps these S. and Gr. forms are rather to 1) H. C. limits all three forms to the nom. and acc. sg., but Md. only and while he appears to allow ^ for all cases; thus rT^ST ^ hot i §or 5 ETTfT 1 snort crrsrr snxr stt 1 i. e., tad in declension becomes eha or (ma) as before men- tioned. The reading m brackets is doubtful; perhaps it is to include the pron. as in the succeeding rule . i SSrqjqt ^ ^J^STTrlTI ?fr|5 SW -TT i £CT STtUFT I ^fT I ^5T I OcTTcR =£r ti i. e., m the nom. and acc. sg., tad and adas become eho or ehu or as before mentioned (eha). Md. is correct ; for eha, being a pure base, may serve as an obi. form, while ^fTf and ^ J are proper nominatives. 296 CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. § 438 .] be connected with the base era (see Nro 3). In P. the pleon. suff. 3T is added, thus which , whichsoever (fem. °Tr). — Connected with the Ap. Pr. is also the W. H. (so-called) neut. interrog. pron. or P. ivhcit, with ^ shortened to ^ and $r. They are really obi. forms. The P. stands for and is contracted in H. H. to cFSIT. S. transposes (i. e., khid, § 13 2. note) and changes T&7 hhi to ^ chh by the influence of the palatal o', thus making ©T (Tr. 208). Similarly GL changes *TCKft, into sfr, srf, sr (for ft, ft, f, see § 11, for *Tcrar, *rers). — Here is also to be men- tioned the peculiar E. and W. Gd. (exc. G.) general dem. pron. H or HT, 0. also that , which I am inclined to derive from the Skr. SftTST: like . It would become in the Ap. Pr. or *UeT or just as Ap. for fesr: ; and it would easily acquire the meaning of such-like in correlation with the relat. pron. H or 5 it. It is commonly (Bs. II, 314) identified with the Pr. nom. sg. UT (H. C. 3, 3) or the Pr. gen. sg. H (H. C. 3, 81). But the Gd. u is never an obi. form; and both the Gd. ur and ut are used indifferently in the nom. sg. and plur. Besides the S. forms a fem. UT and plur. H ; and the 0. seems to be an analogous form to 0. Possibly the E. H, nom. sg. and pi. H, H, ef may be identified 'with- the Ap. qual. pron. HJ - , sfg, sfjt (H. C. 4, 402) or H!?, by dropping the final for a form etc. appears in the emphatic forms nTf, etc. 6) The same Skr. qual. pron. ^rsr:, etc. also become rT^TT, "sT^TT, (H. C. 4, 403) 01 * 3^T, cT<[H, etc. (cf. H. C. 4, 331. 33 2) in the Ap. Pr. In Gd. is changed to ^ or *or J or ^ ; thus strong forms : W. H. ^urt, HUT. P. and H. H. iWr, N. rot (for or *^HT, see §§ 71. 171), huV M. OTT, HUT, etc. But the weak forms ro or STO , HUT or (TO , etc. also occur in Br. (see Bates' Hindi Diet.) and 0. H. Thus Chand in Pr. Raj 24,52 HTH srtn 3 I i ^ h i. e., from place to place men fly up (i. e., like birds), such a simile has Chand devised . In modern Gd., however, the weak forms have become CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. 297 § 438 .] simple pron. Thus P. or or N. rTH, he or this , etc. They are found only as obL forms. The corresponding fuller obi. forms in ^ also occur; thus H. H. has ^T, fHST (as dat. acc. to him or him) besides ^7^, fcra^, etc,, (just as E. H. g?fc3\,and see Nro. 2 ; contr. for Ap. or see § 365, 6). B. has the gen. sg. of what , dat. loc. %£r to or in what (S. Ch. 122; just as B. of god, ^ to or in god of ^5[J. M. has not only the sing. obL 3>3=rr or (= Ap, Mg. gen. cFT^TTf or Skr. or e^sraFOT, see § 3 65, 1), but also the pi. obi. srcrf or 5R35TT (= Ap. Mg. gen. sf^fT f, etc., § 365, 4) of whomsoever (see Man. 54; just like M. obi. sg. <£5TT, pi. of 5^ god). The existence of these fuller obi. forms shows that the shorter ones (Ih^, etc.) cannot, probably, be identified with the Pr. gen. rT^T, sT^T, Skr. rfW, TOT, etc, (as Bs. II,- 315). 7) Again the before mentioned (see Nro. 1) Skr. quant, pron, ^Trj^, HTaTf^, etc. are changed in the Ap. Pr. to (H. C. 4, 341), rrfrrs, ir fws, (cf. H. C. 4, 383) or, in the strong form, to sft, mw, etc. (H. G. 4, 39 5, cf. 2, 157, for etc.). The latter become in W. H. ^TT, f^rr, etc., H. H. ^^nr, fH^T, 0. ^rT, HFT, etc. (Bs^II, 332); the former in S. $rffif°, cffcr 0 , etc., Gr. ^Z° , TC°, etc., W. H. and P. ^fr°, fHrT 0 , etc., E. H. ^cT°, F7cT°, etc., B. ^H, FTH, etc. (S. Ch. 85). As a rule, these weak forms add some pleon. suff. (^T or fV or c?n) ; thus P. ^rFTT, frTrRT, etc., S. yfnjf, etc., Gr. ^Tcrft, etc. (see §§ 452.453). But the plain weak form is used in P, as a simple pron. ; thus fflTT he or that, fit?? which, who (Ld. 22, 66); it occurs, however, only in the obi. sing. (e. g., gen. zj of this). Both these shorter obi. sg. and the corresponding fuller obi. sg. forms are used as pron. adv. ; thus Br. ^?? or ^i? here, fffi? or fm there, etc., P. ^r, fir?*?, etc., S. or or or firr?? or {hh or f^frer or fHPsr, etc. The forms ^f?zr, ^r, etc. are contracted from or £1% or etc. These are loc. sg., made with the Ap. Pr. obi, fluff. ^ (see § 365, 6), and occur even in the Ap. Pr, 298 CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. § 438 .] itself, as tere, there , etc. (H. C. 4, 436) 1 ). By the side of the shorter forms etc., Pr. uses also the longer forms ^5rf%s , J SKorfin?, etc. (see Wb. Bh. 422); and as Pr. originates the W. H. near quant, pron. *^T, so Pr. (shor- tened *^crf?n37, becomes the far quant. W. H. 33TT « that much, H. H. 3^T. The corresponding weak forms are S. Gr. STT°, W. H. and P. 3rT°, E. H. qtfT 0 , B. (S. Oh. 85, see §§ 452. 453); and the pron. adv. are, Br. 3f[^ or 3H, P. 3c?r, S. 3TH or 3rt or 3f^T or 3r&; and P. uses 3.s. — It may be observed, that the so-called neut. interrog. pron. is, m reality, merely some obi. form of the common interrog. pron.; thus M. has (for *9FTrf^r *5bTf); Bs. has OTf and Bh. cRT (for 5RTf;) what , 300 CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. i§ 440.441.] sing, and plur. (§ 386); but 3rf may be used, though anoma- lously, as a fern. obi. The strong forms are not commonly used in the nom., nor the weak forms in the obi. cases. Practically, therefore, the aff. are ; dir. form c?qr c. g., obi. 3rf m. or 3?ft f.*; just like £F and 5F. It should be observed also that the latter aff. only (but not 37X> a Ff) can be used with the full pron. obi. forms in sf (viz. mw, rfW, $>W ) and with the emph. obi. forms in ft (as ^ft, srrft, etc. § 433). Thus dir. form sg. or pi. 37 sqr or £Fef_ 37 or rarely 37 37l[T sr^* whose house or houses ; sf? cfr^ or 37?r sf jt° or rarely 37 ^ft^rr 0 whose wife or wives ; obi. sg. 37 3?f or cNr 37 sr^ & or rarely 37 *r in whose house ; 37 ^ift u or 37f; 37 st or rarely 37 37^ or 37 3if *T° ^ from whose wife ; obi. pi. §7 cprf or 37 in whose houses ; §7 3?ft ^ or ^ *r° ^ or rare ty 3> 37f =r° sr from whose wives ; etc. — 2) There is no acc. proper, identical** with the nom., but only the (improper) acc. formed with the dat. aff. Sr. Thus whom is 37 37 or 37^[ 37 or 373^ $7 or 3?tar 37, but not simply 37 or 37oR\ 440. Optionally a sort of pleon. declension may be made, by adding the case-aff. to the ordinary obi. form of the gen. in In the Tehari Ihdshd, however, this is not comihonly done, exc. in the loc. ; e. g., sg. 37^ in him, pi. 37^ *T in them, etc. 441. 1. Short form. a) Simple form : f he, this . Bing. Simple plur. Comp. plur. nom. r r ivfTJT acc., dat. O' g> or gi ^irg> 3 Ttrn ^37 instr., abl. S *\ 7? *3 or ir gen. *$1 *\ S -V 37 , 37 or 37 , 37 ^fr^gr grrjrqg?, g> or^ 3 q;, 3 »ft,cR 7 loc. ^or^rJr ^frsfrnq *r or ^ or ^ g^ - q § 442 .] CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. 301 b) Emphatic form: ^ or even he, even this . Singular. nom. 31 or 3^3: ^gr or sgs; acc.^ dat* ^gt m instr., abl. gen. ^Tgt m or ^|t gqr yw&or^l or p or g gi or ^ efifr or qp - |T loc. ^rgt q or ^ Sit ^ q or ^ qjft q or ^ off - gt it or ? ■ Plural. nom. 31 °r 3^ ^1# acc. ? dat. - ^g; ft 18 ir S li> *N instr., abl. ftu f q gen. ft” m or ft” ** ^l^or^fqqr or^g cFipor^g af'gt” or^gqrftor^geRpg; loc. ^g ft” q or ^g ag q gg f it or gg mft q or ^g af- ft” q or^f f q Note : Like ^ are declined 3 that, ?r he, ?r which, iff who; only substituting 3», rft, 3, and q, in, q, etc. for i, p, f respectively. — All forms with V or at may, optionally, be spelled with | or 3 ; e. g., ^ ^ or jpg TFT to these, and sVg 5> or 3 ^ to those, etc. 442. 2. Long form : rT5TT^ or ?T3q or riup he, this. Sing, and simple plur. Com. gen. Fern. nom. fT3R qsft acc., dat. rfffT 3FT rTHTi instr., abl. cf^T & tftqt q gen. tflq 3>, f? tftft ^ loc. ?TPT *T iftqt q Compound pluraL Com. gen. Fem. nom. * m qsfrsT -ft. Tv -i- rrRT^TST^ ace., dat. tftqSTripeR or crtqwTtrtqffi fTtfreTtu sr or cTtqtwTtrrq m 302 REFLEXIVE PRONOUN. §§ 442a— 445.] Com. gen. Fem. instr., abl. orrTT^tn^ or rTT^r^Tn^ir gen. cTR^rtrreF, $r or rTM^'n«-n?f> 37 or riVTi^ftrpr^ ? ^ loe. rTPT^TIT ET or rTT^WT ^ rrVfr^fm- Sr or rfprr^Trr^r 5r Note : Like rfciR are declined 5TcpT^ which and who ; also Oivn (§ 449). — Their forms may, optionally, be spelled with ^oT or or 3?T according to §34; e. g., rT3R $? or fTPT to this . 442a. % Short form: §» or fer . Long form: q?RT any one . Sing, and simple plur. Cpmponnd plural. nom. §* 3T3" SRRT c^r^TTTp % cItRT ^fiTp a., d. &§r$» c?trV J$r SRcTlTTcfT chVlt^VjT^ i. 3 abl.efi *\ -V cTRtir lor^ormR^ ^©yfnrr^T ap? *\ ^ % gen. cF?eF> 7 cF? O' 7 cfrpft efi, etc. etc. etc. loc. ir c^krT q* 0 Note : Like &|r is declined iriigr tvhosoever . 3. THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUN. 443. The reflexive pron. self is It is alike for both genders, and is declined regularly like a subst., but has no plur. ; the sing, form being used for both numbers; dat. 'sg. and pi. to himself and to themselves . 444. Affinities . W. H. and P. use the same refl. pron. $tptj 0. has sritf or ottut, B. (with obi. otrt), M. mrorj while in S. it is Rtrr; H. H. has in the dir. form but in the obi. or The M., B. and 0. forms smtrr and H. H. obi. are properly the corresponding possess, pron. (own), see § 449 ; it is in fact a sort of pV- .n^tv dcr^n^on. see §§ 440. 432. 44 5f Derivation . The original of the refl. pron. is the Skr. subst. #TRT (nom. sg. of ^TR^) soul or self. In Pr. it be- comes $?ccnr or 3TfTT (H. C. 2, 51. Vr. 3, 48) or srccft (H. C. 3, 56) or Ap. Pr. (or st. f. H. C. 4, 422). In Grd. it is srctr/, in 0. H. and Br., also, * The Pr. form ^?rr, I believe, has left no trace in Gd. In Pr. the pron. also assumes a long form HONORIFIC PRONOUN. 803 §§ 446 - 449 .] aomriV (H. C. 2, 51. 8, 56), Ap. Pr. gaum (H. C. 4, 3 96), which survives in the S. UTOT with the loss of the initial 8 ; 0. H., also, has it as m. gp and sq, on the derivation of which see § 377. The former appears in the ordinary Pr. possess, pron. of the pirn*. our , your (H. C. 2, 147); in the sing., however, the ordinary Skr. forms seem to have been used, thus Pr. UpEf mine = Skr. upfu (H. C. 2, 147). The aff. 3>p always elides 37 , and coalesces with the base; thus in the Ap. Pr. UffTpU (H. C. 4, 3 58) or UfipT (H. C. 4, 434) mine (for *Uf37ps or *U^37pT, qf being the gen. of !,• cf. H. C. 3, 113), or contracted in the Nagara Ap. qpY (Md. rsr up t up ii) ; so also in Br. qfr or in Mw. UTpV or iqipY. The E. H. qtp is founded on a form *uj^F?pT (from gen. UJ*, H. C. 4, 3 79) or has been assimilated to rTtp thine. Again Ap. Pr. u^Tp (cf. H. C. 4, 434) tlime stands for *rT^SF»p (from gen. ?p>, H. C. 3, 9 9) and is contracted in E. H. to rftp. The Br. rrpr and Mw. UTpt presuppose an original form * rT^37pT (from gen. U^, see § 430, 2) or have been assimilated to upt, Uprpl. Again Ap. Pr. u^TpT (H. C. 4, 434) our (= *^Ef37pT, from gen. or base H. C. 3, 113. 114) becomes, by transposition of W , H. H. fUTpT, W. H. ^rrpf; or, by elision of B. snqq, Gr. STUTpY; or, by elision of % Mw. *f7 p>; or, by shortening wt, 0. 3Wp, E. H. ^qpr. ~ Similarly Ap. Pr. FPqrpT ^ or whence H. H. u*frpr, E. H. rftfpr, etc. — The P. form (or UT-UT with loss of % just as in Mw. jqfpf), Uprr-'sr or jpTT-’St are made with the old gen. aff. TT (= M. P. pT, see § 3 77, 3); as to the q of ^renr, UUT see § 430, 3. 4. It will be observed that in P. and M. the plur. only, but in S. both the plur. and sing, are made by a separate gen. aff. As regards the M. forms UT3TT, rtfHT see § 430, 5, — As to^TUU or SfUUT, see §§ 60. 111. The Mw. «nupT contains either the gen. aff. pY, or the p is a modification of the Pr. of srjiejY (H. C. 2, 163). — The S. UTf-sTT appears to contain the old gen. (Ap. srUTOT^t). contracted to UFqT = UTf (see § 132, note). b) Correl. pron. of quantity and quality. 452. The pron. of quant, are: pm or puur this much 20 PRONOUNS OF QUANTITY. 30C §§ 458. 454.] FfcTT or nTFRT that much, FTrTT or as much, efirTT or cftrRT hoiv much. They are strong forms, and consequently are treated pre- ^ cisely as adj. of a like form; that is, they have a fem. in ^ (§ 384, as or pcP?t, etc.), and an obi. form in ^ (§ 386, as gen. ?7?r zk or 5F? of so much, etc.). Sometimes also the forms or $^5^ or ^rTcFT or ^TcTciT or or etc.; 3^cF[ 01 * 3TrTcJT , ^JFTcg or fcfrrlicfi or cfrrTq? or or f§F»frfcf[ or fiRriq?, and so forth of ?rT°, FKT°, are met with (see Bs. in J. R. A. S. vol. Ill, 490 and Kl. 141), see § 26. I have also met with the forms 33T or stun as much, how much. e 453. Affinities. Nearly the same forms are used in all Gds. : thus B. ^r, m, fru, urr, cHrT or ^TTqr, ^TcUft, etc, (S. Ch. 84); ^■fT, etc. are sounded eta, etc., but etak\ hence gen. but 0 pft, Ff?r, UFT, #FFT, W. H. (Br.) ^#T or ^FTCT, 3?ft or 3rUTT, m^T or T?TrTqT, etc. or (Mw.) 3rTfr, f^rffT, etc., P. ^rFTT, 3r T^TT, mcRT, etc., G. mzwt, FT3, TOT (Br.) or ^it, 3Wt, fUTO (Mw.), etc.; M. TOT or TOTO or TOTOTO, TOT , or TOTO or TOTOTO, etc, (Man. 52); and 308 PRONOUNS OP QUALITY. 458.] N. JJFTT, 3FTT, mfr, etc. Of the second or f -type are: P. or or Stra^T or SSTfT, UfT or m^T, etc., S. ^Tf or f|5r?f, TFr^TT, etc. Of the third or sr-type are : 0. (jut, STcTt, Fra 5 !, etc., B. or fjeih^ or fwu , etc., 0. ^*Urf_, FFFrT_, etc. Of the fourth or if-type are : Mw. or ^77T, 5TTF or oTpT, Frit or nfi, etc., Gw. $-ur or ^ or SFTT or SR , FRT or FTU_, etc. (Kl. 141). 458. Derivation. The qual. pron. in the Ap. Pr. are either *t-ftt, FT^at, iquV, QFruurr (H. C. 4, 403) or i£f, Uf, %, % (H. C. 4,402) or in the strong form, -^3 or (contr.) sr^T, etc., (K. I. 9, in Ls. 449). The former set produces the FT-type, the latter the ^-type. M. 5JFRTT, etc. and E. H. pTPT , etc. add the pleon. suff. ft or see §§ 111 . 214. M. even reduplicates the suff. oT in SFUFtraT, etc. The S. etc. add the pleon. suff. 3. The P. aflr^T preserves the type in ’ a more complete form ; for it stands for a Pr. form ^fi^?rr = Skr. f^ST: (see § 438, 4). — The Skr. qual. pron. are fcTST;, FTt^ST'.', FTTTSr:, est^ST:, which be- come in Pr. Fnf^UTT, srrfjFrT, SKf^Fft (H. C. 1 , 142) or ^FtT, FTT f? f FTT, etc. (see Ls. 115). As a rule ^ (or 5 ) is elided (see § 124), whence the Ap. Pr. a^FTf, etc. (see § 25, note); and FJ^ (orsij is changed to U, whence Ap. ft^T contracted for *Frjf?T, etc. (see Ls. 455). It may he observed, that the P. and S., which alone have the FT - type, similarly change the U (or sr) of Pr. sttftt 20, (TtUT 30 (Skr. rsrsTUt, 'firstF^) into f_, P. SHU, mK, S. sn%, rtf. — The forms of the sr- and 3-types were originally quant, pron. The Skr. I-TFp (Ved. JSTFL), FTTcTU , etc. become in Pr. ^ar, FT5T, etc. or rFU, etc. (cf. Wb. Bh. 422. Ls. 458), whence G. ^srr, FToFT, etc. and B. etc. (with pleon. suff. OT, see §§ 209. 214); and the 0. B. , etc., perhaps, are based on the Skr. ^rFrar., etc., Pr. * ^SFFraf, and probably con- tain the suff. Skr. au, JR, Pr. sri, srt (see §§ 232. 236). — The Mw. or ^ft, etc. are identical with the S. quant, pron. E 73 T, P. q-3T, etc. ; and so also the Gw. where 3 has been chan- ged to ft (see §§ 106. 438, 2) — The forms, Br. 5 FFTT and Gw. UUr INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 309 §§ - 459 — 462 .] are founded on the Ap. Pr. forms *^©T^3T (-— - S£r. x jrsTTs sr) and porft respectively. c) Indefinite pronouns. 459. The indef. pron. all, every one is 33^ or 33 or emph. 35T nr 33. It is the same in both genders, and is declined re- gularly like any other adj. of the weak form. But when plurality is to be emphasised, it has an obi. form 333^ or 33^yrj thus gen. 33^ or 33 ^ of all taken as a whole , but 333 or 3ST![3 37 of all taken severally . 460. Affinities, ^ The forms of this indef. pron. are nearly alike in all Gds. Thus B. 33^, 0. 33, W. H. 33h or P. 33, G. 33 or 33 (Ed. 44, 1), S. 33 m., 33 f., or 33cf?T m., f., M. 33, N. 33 . S. has the emph. forms 33lrf and or fqitf. — E. H. also uses 33q* or 3Jr:j“ and 3T^T all, whole . 461. Derivation, The original is the Skr. 35?:, which becomes in Pr. 3^1, in the Ap. Pr. 353 (H. C. 4, 3 66) or *33 (cf. H. G. 4, 3 99, see § 135, note). The former becomes 0. 33, E. H., N., Br. 33^, the latter Br. 3^ (emph. 33^). The form 33 has an anomalous aspirate (see §131), perhaps analogous to N. 3TCR self for 3T3, mfzr before for mffr, etc. — The S. 33 cfT adds the pleon. suff. — The G. and M, 35? is a semitats. - — The strange S. or I believe, to be merely a curtailment of the emph. 33^ or 33^. The final ^ is the emph. particle; the initial 3^ of the remainder f33T stands for 3 (see § 134); the final or is a pleon. suff., the same as in S.«q%rP or first (see §§ 118. 213), sftf^jr very little (Tr. 79), so small (§ 455). In S., 3^ often changes to ^ (see Tr. XXX); hence 33° may have become ^3° or ^3°, next ?p° (by suppressing 3), next 3° (cf. Mw. Eftfr or 3*tft our for Br. ^rrftj. — The*E. H. 3rqr is the Skr. 33?^?° (see § 102); and 3T^T is, perhaps, really the past part, of 3JJ3 to complete , the .causal of the R. 3 (== Skr. part. 3Tijcr;), or it may be the Skr. 3T5?:. 462. The indef. pron. whoever is ire^r which is both masc. and fefn. ; and whatever, 'which is used with things only. 310 PRONOMINAL ADVERBS. §§ 463 — 467 .] They are compound forms, made of 5T and % or f*W, and are declined regularly like their component parts; thus gen. sing. ^ of whomsoever . " 463 . Affinities and Derivation. This pron. is formed in the same way in all Gds. by compounding the relat. with 'the indef. pron. Thus S. «u, f, n. (Tr. 213); B. or Mm n. (S. Oh. 127), etc. As to its derivation, see § 438. 464. The indef. pron. some is £aaT or *$ which is masc. and fern., and or KS or Sg which refers to things only. They are declined Regularly like adj. Thus gen. WW eftnqjR of some men, ^ of some horses, smi * of some thing When efcRT is used mdependantly, it forms the obi. and to =f>§ the pleon. aff. (§ 289) is added; -thus gen. or 5fi^73TSFi of some. 465. Affinities and Derivation. The impersonal indef. pron. is in B. %, 0. feff, Br. H. H. W, M. « Mw. cRff'“ or 5Fr|“, P- • 1 know n0 satisfactory derivation for f§®, perhaps it is PrT = Skr. f»«. Tee. Here may be added the E. H. W*. or Jtq or *5* or another, and one another. me: mrr is the Mg. ^ (cf. H. C. 3, 58),-8kr. — ml is the Mg. Skr. TO ; - seems to be C °™T C with the Skr. tq^ghr.; it also occurs in the Ap. Pr. ^ (H. . 4,350) or (H. C. 4, 376). On see § 271. 6. PRONOMINAL ADVERBS. 467 The E. H. pron. adv. are the following: a) of place, or T*if or or j? or & or or or^f here ; ir.or at or mi or a^T or fcrl or there ; 3T or « of o, %. ,«1 « «* « The same id eoph. form ^ ^ ffl , even here ; a#" or of rrfteT even there ; or ^ or even where ; or ° r eyc» ichcie. PRONOMINAL ADVERBS, 311 § 468 .] b) of direction, or hither ; o\ qr thither ; or a-^oT,j thither ; ^7 or fT^sqr wifter ; sfcfljr or ^sqr «w$er ? c) of time, sfcT now, cr^ then, when, ivhen ? In empb. form: ^5n|T u or rf^^T 0 or rrsrf^J etw ihen\ srsrfT or ez;e^ when ; cHcTfT or cf)Srf|;^ isl when ? d) of manner or cause : ^ or ^3 or ^rV* 1 or or in this manner or for oowso ; or to or merT or rT^vr or ^ z7w/,s or therefore, also then ; ^ or inf or ?rrf' i! or sr^r or ^ in which manner or for lohich cause, also when ; or §»3 or 5fi?rc u or 37^ or how or or why, epq or cFTT^ st^ what fore, cHTf w ivhy not ? 468. Affinities . Forms of the same origin are designated by tbe same letter. — a) JU7& of place ; B. (a) ^tztt or ^erT, 3 ?Wt or ^FJT, rT^TT or ^r^TT, *TOT (i. e. sferr), 5FtoT or’ (b) ^ WT^r, W°, Sr w°, $r W°, sfrr fq or fm or ferer (Tr. 3 92. 393); G. (b) %T, 5Tff a , rOT or fffT or rTTfT, jJIT or srfT or sTTff, cm or cFjfT or •fj* iv'fT) &v pf/' 0 ) Ad, of tmr, B. (.) TO, TO •* • (S. Ck. 2071 op (li) 3-<33 , jt-vpt, =R-VT3 ; 0. (c) $rar, fer, vsr, avir, E. H. (c)st^, wj, a®; W.H. (c) v& or air, ?rar or m (= mj, jtlr or 3T, fesr, or (d) 3y or its; or 3s3 or fTJ , etc. ; analogously to the change in the pron. adj., Gr. ^T^tY so many for E. H. ^rPTT, S. etc. It appears, that some confusion originated at an early period between the terminations 37 and 37, 3* u and 5*^, er and 5* and the nouns (loc.) 3"R^ or 37^ or 57^ in a place. The E. H. emph. forms ^-57^ or etc., and the 0. can hardly be explained on any other theory. Indeed, the real phrases, E. H. ^ 3T^ in this place, ?r etpt in that place , etc., B. ^ ft (with w^for ^as in Pr. for Skr. S3TOT:, H. C. 2, 7) are not unfrequently used. — Again 2) Ap. Pr. uses the loc. sg. in or ^ of the quant, pron. be cut comes the trans. cut ; similarly iraw to he hurled, m t^to hury; to die, "^Tfsr to MU; to u laden ’ to lmd U mixid, *0 mix ; to he seen, to ? ^ t0 le seen ’ to see; rausr. to he smeared, to smear; tfSWL to he opened, wtm&.to open; to he loosed, &*%.*> loose; m^to U plaited, to plait Again from the trans. to pluc up comes the intr. 3319 to he plucked up; likewise r^,ym_to hothe. ^ to flow, etc., see also §351. Trans'- and intr. verbs are con- jugated alike, except in the 3. sg. 2 nd pret. md., where they lave different forms (see § 504); e. g., tr. did, but intr. wmt DEGREE. 317 §§ 472 - 474 ] 472. Affinities. In all Gds. these sets* of trans. and intr. verbs occur; but in M. and S. tbe trans. root may option- ally end in ^ ; thus M. g£ to get loose, but to loose ; S. to die, but tnfx to Ml (see Tr. 48); e. g., M. gem* I get loose, but ?Ttf3'rTT* I loose or (in Konkani, see Man. 68, note) macTI* ; again gsmT it got loose, but mT3W he loosed ; again getting loose, but mrtfT_ loosing, etc. ; again S. mruj to die, but (or in Lari) *TT^nT to Mil; again q^T die thou, but mff MU thou; again dying, but mfijr hilling ; again S. gfq or gg hear thou, gqgr or hearing, etc. But E. H. jem*, sewTT*, SZrf , ; JT^sr., *qr, Rgn ; and so also f'rasrf, *ngsr., *rq;, mgq ; gq , gqq.. 473. Derivation. As a rule, tire E. H. interns, and its respective trans. verb correspond to tbe simple verb and its resp. causal in Skr., where the causal is made by lengthening the ra- dical vowel of the simple verb with guna or vrddhi. In some cases, however, the E. H. trans. and intr. verbs correspond to the Skr. act. and pass, verbs; see § 351. The originally causal character of such Grd. trans. verbs is shown by their possessing the Skr. causal suff. ^ in M. and S. * 2. DEGREES. 474. The causal is formed from the simple verb by adding the suff. WToT^ to the root (see §§ 33 9. 349). To the causal root, thus formed, the infin. suff. ^57 or ^57 is reattached. If the simple root contains a long vowel it is shortened; viz. to t, ^ and £ to ^ (or ^), 3 ; and to 3 (or SfY). Thus S. V. ^ 7 ®^ or to do, S. R. Spqr, whence G. R. inf. (eliding sr^ by §33) to cause to do ; or S. Y. f&cra to mix , S. R. fe?r, whence G. R. fstcrnH , inf. to cause to mix ; similarly S. % Ys. crtelsT to drink , to take, to turn, to speak, whence G. Vs* f&srr^i to cause to drink, f&rcn^sr^ or to cause to take , spr^ to cause to turn, or to call, etc. Exception. or to eat, R. m, forms its causal cause to eat for * (cf. § 55). 318 DEGREE. § 475.] No te: Observe that, according to §§ 25. 33. 34, the suff. STTH may, in certain positions, undergo various changes, viz. ST is elided before s or f ; m, when nniopt-nulthratc. is shortened to *, and vocalised to 3, while Tf + 5 may change to £ and g + 3 to sgT. Thus ^c^riT he mil cause to walk (for * =a5lTsrr) ; or I Shall cause to walk (for *^renfasT) ; or I cause to walk (for *TOram' J ); but wrraij. he causes to walk (not 475. Affinities. The causal is formed nearly in the same way in all Gels.; but B., 0., H. H. and S. use the cans. suff. at, as C. R. TO teach of S. R . ^ read', E H. and G. have TO, as creisr ; W. H. has TOT. or TO, as TOS[_ or q:sT3 5 P - and N ’ taYe TO, 'Is TO3; M. hal «fST, as TOST. The shortening of TO to m (as in M.) also occurs occasionally in Hindi (poetry)^ as for q?TT (see Kl. 207) and for 3 ^ fi U ( K1 - 228 ) - ’ 80 also "the" contraction of TOT. to sfr, as f^T for ffTO he angry (Rl. 228); and H. H. optionally contracts TO^ to m in or 35 TT immerse of R. 3*T, and 6riV or firm (forftroj moisten of E. 4m; also in P. fro (Ld. 67); M. accasionally changes TO to ^5T in trans. verbs, as r or TORT loose (Man. 78, note. 110), and sometimes retains TO , as or HTtTO call (IVEan. 109). - Monosyllabic roots, ending in a vowel, form in most ^Gds. irre- gular cans.; thus the C. Rs. of R. WT eat are in B. OTTOT (S. Ch. 129), 0. MT (Sn. 37), E. H. 1 %to, W. H. TOra (or TOT Kl. 207: 217)," P. TOTS (Ld. 67), M. TOTO (Man. 77), G^TOTJ (Ed, 114) S. (Tr. 257), H. H. frorT. Again of R. f give they are in B. fcftaT (S. Oh. 129), 0. (Sn. 37), E. H. (also Bs. f^TOj, W. H. 5TO or (Kl. 214), M. or (Man. 1 1 8), G. 3oTT3, S. (Tr. 256), H. H. fSTSTT- Exactly analogous are the C. Rs. of the Rs. sTT go and ^ take-, but H. H. has fTOT cause to take, not *fSwiT. Similarly formed ^ are the 0. Rs. of qt drink, 4t sew, #1 live ; thus S. ferq, firatf ( Tr - 256 '’ G. .TOTT (Ed. 114), H. H. vim, fircff, firar; But E. H. regularly from , itro, fawn. Also of the Rs. =5 leak, *t sleep, ft weep, DEGREE. 319 § 476 .] wt wash , carry, sft sow ; thus H. H. ^rr, 5S 5rr » G. oTorr^ (but H. H. siterr), S. mnj (Tr. 256). Some roots which end in consonants, form irregular causals in the same manner; thus R. or learn has in H. H. f^wrr, S. (Tr. 257) teach) but regularly in E. H. and W. H. N. T3T, M. faT^fsr (Man. 78), B. and 0. (also optionally H. H.) fwT; again R. 331 see in H. H. optionally or f^^TT, P. or f£W3TT3 (Ld. 67), S. (Bs. I, 242) show, but regularly E, H. and W. H. N. 3^T3, etc. Again R. speak in H. H. optionally ST^TT or (be called, in pass^ sense, see § 3 54, 2), G. 3F?I>^3T (Bs. I, 243), but regularly in E. H. ^TIH\ Again R. or filer sit (Skr. 3 lit.' to eat a beating, not -ITTT stt^. 480. Affinities. All Gds, form this pass, by composition with the verb sTTfsp, except S. and optionally Mw., ST. and P. In the latter it is made by adding some suffix to the root; viz. 8. nr, Mw.%r (-e.KL 214), N.*r, P. But P., Mw. and, pro- bably, N. also use the comp. pass. The B. and 0. do not use their past part, in ^ but that in m in the formation of the pass, base, after the manner of the W. Gds. The E. H. and M. alonS use the part, in (or ^r) for the pass, (see -§ 303). Thus E. H. cra^or qt^r.?(TU it may be said, M. ufett (or q^T) ;n^r it was wont to be read (Man. 9 9) ; but B. U15T sfTT. (S» Gh 142), 0. waw (Sn. 39), H. H. ^ (or snsr), 'W. H. 9lTO or tOTf'or q^fr srr^, P. inf ‘ t0 U tUrned ’ et °' Th ° Ugl1 this pass^ may be used in the same sense as the comp, pass., yet properly and generally it has a peculiar, viz. a potential, signification. Hence I shall call it the potential passive. Thus turvTT means it can he' read, while qq^TOT means it is read. ■ Exception. The R. wr eat makes its pot. pass. R. fwn le eaten. Note: As the pot. pass, may have the sense of the ordi- nary pass., so the comp. pass, may have that of tie pot. pass. Thus q^vTsiTvTT may mean it can he read, and q^TOT it is read. 483*. Affinities. The pot. pass, also exists in M. and CL I tbink it probable that other Gds. also possess it, but it does not seem to have attracted the attention of grammarians. In M. it is formed by means of the suff. m ov zm, and in G. by the suff. *T or asrr. The longer suff. aasr and ®3T. are used with monosyllabic roots and roots ending in Thus E. H. can he loosed, G. , M.^3sr; again E.H. mgqjt can he said, G. 5%TcT, M. ERlorar. This pass, is called in the Man. 75 „the potential' verb “ and in Ed. 54 „the first potential mood", in %&. 107 „the passive verb“ and in Ed. 51, d apparently „the deponent It is constructed in E.H. and G. with the instr. case of the agent, but in M. either with the, act. (classically) or VOICE. 325 § 484 .] * the acc. (colloquially), see Man. 75, 128. note, where, however, the qase is erroneously called the dative. 484. Derivation . A comparison of the suff. of the pot. pass, with those of the causals (§§ 474. 477) will at once show their identity. Thus the E. H. and Gr. pot. pass. suff. m is iden- tical with the B., 0., H. H. and' S. caus. suff. ,$rr, and the Gr. pot. pass. suff. ^oFT with the H. H. double caus. suff. ^oTT; again the M. pass. pot. suff. and ^©TST are the same as the M. caus. suff, and double caus. ^crfsr, even as regards the shortening of the original «TT of the su{F. srrsr or NOTTS'. Again the pot. pass, suff. and the caus. suff. have precisely the same influence on the root ; thus in E. H. the R. Wt eat becomes fiPrsrr in the pass, and fwnar_ in the caus. (see §§ 474, exc. 482, exc.). Lastly the longer pass. suff. ^ffoTT and ^5F5T and the double caus. suff. and ^oT& are used precisely in the same way; viz. they are added prin- cipally to monosyllabic roots. So far, then, there can be no question as to the identity of the forms of the pot. pass, and the two causals. But the sense and mode of construction of the pot. pass., also, prove that identity. In fact, it is merely a caus. .with a peculiar reflexive sense. Thus E. H. caus. might be translated: I caused (some one) to read the booh , or # briefly, I caused the booh to be read. Similarly the E. H. qtsfi is either the booh caused (some one) to read itself or the booh caused itself to be read (by some one). It will be seen at once that, practically, this is the same as the pass, the booh wa& read l It will also be noticed, that the agent who reads {some one or by some one) may be expressed either by the acc. or the act. case. Accordingly both cases may be used in M., (acc.) or qpEjrpr'* (act.) qtqt by me the booh was read, lif. the booh caused me to read itself or the booh caused itself to be read by me. In E. H. and Gr. the instr. only is employed; thus E. H. & or ^ q^UTt. This pass, is now commonly used in a potential sense, by me the booh could be read\ but that sense is not really inherent in the peculiar form of the verb, 326 MOOD. §§ 485 - 487 .] but only attacked to it conventionally. For^even the ordinary comp. pass, may take that meaning ; thus J?T 0 'TfeSt by me the booh could be read. On the other hand, the pot. pass, may have the ordinary pass, sense; see § 482, note. 4. MO.ODS. 485. Infinitive. The infinitive is made by adding the suff. ssr or , obi. sar or ^sr or \ to the root of the verb, as explained in §§ 308-310. Thus to read of R. «rj.; crs&w or ^0 by reading ; again mm or mzf to eat of R. W, or or Otar or WTar % by eating, etc. Note: For affinities and derivation, see §§ 313. 314. 486. Adjective participles. The pres. part, is made by adding the suff. *c. g., and the past part, by adding the suff. SR* or t^c. g. to the root of the verb, as explained in §§ 298. 299. 302. 303.. Thus q^?T. c. g. reading, 'T^ST c. g. read ; c. g. eating, or wtTOl. c. g. eaten, etc. The fut. part, is identical with the infinitive, see §§ 310. 485. Note: For exceptions see § 304; and for affinities and de- rivation see §§ 300. 301. 305 307. ' 487. Prayogas. The past and fut. park afe used with a pass, sense in the pass, and the infin. respectively, but with, an act. sense in the past and fut. tenses act. ThusE.H.n^ snsft - I am loosed, & wit" I am to be loosed, ^ but^ srfp « (or srrrr) 0“ wc&m*' 1 did loose the horse ’ ^ ^ ^ 1 shaU loose the horse, or (or **) Vwf I did read the booh, u° n" q^srf* I shall read the booh. The latter usage (with the part, in the act. voice and the subj. in the nom. case and the obj. in the acc.) is what I have called (§371) the pass.-act. construction, or the ^ o£ the native grammarians. It is peculiar to all E. Gds. Thus the above sentences are m B.: (or 3 T 4 , but sfhrr w (or arm) mm and sr £ arfii and *r°£ vftf* r; hO ; .g ^rsnf, but (orswftf^) and si°f *r MOOD. 327 § 487 .] (or sr° ^fisn) ; itSt f 3 ft qftfe and q° f q° qf^fsr* On the other hand, the W. and S. Gds. always use these participles in the pass, sense, and, in consequence, where they are employed to ex- press the pret. ind. and pres. conj. (see § 509, 3) tenses act., they 11 take the subj. in the act. case and the obj. in the nom., and agree with the latter in number and gender. This usage I call the pass . constr. ; and it is the UUTJT of the nat. gramm. Thus M. iff sfrxerr I am loosed , but sftrr I did loose the horse (lit. the horse was loosed by me ) or utqt *Tf u art^OT I did read the booh (lit. the booh was read by me ), sfteT I may loose the horse (lit. the horse may be loosed by me), or u° I may read the booh (lit. the booh may be read by me). The same in W. H. yTTcft'*’, but T *r w ^ ^ srfsft; or in S. ufi; sjf Soft but sftet tftert jf qrit; or in H. H. &tir ?ftc nr but srV?T ^ gjtar, jt 1 * ^ qnit. There are, however, a few verbs in M., which take the E. Gd. pass -act constr . ; as to read, UTordt w to obtain, fauf u to drink, STtcffur^ to speak, to take and others (see Man. 32); thus UT cftef \ ft* I did read the booh, not *fT qTert qpssrh — There is a third kind of constr. which is also confined to the W. and S. Gds. It is likewise a pass, constr., but differs from the ordi- nary one, by having the obj. in the acc. case, and the part, in the nom. sing. masc. or neut. It is, in fact, a sort of imper- sonal pass, constr., and is called by nat. gramm. the Thus in this constr. the above sentences would be: M. tftJUT cfTT u lit. as to the horse, it was loosed by me, 3TT jtT oTT{%^ w lit. as to the booh, it was read by me ; W. H. (Br.) srTTr sTraft; S. srnr ft cfrferar ft *¥ — Lastly there is a fourth constr., which, I ^believe to be confined to the N, Gd. (N.). It is pass.-act, but differs from 1 ) Here, the part, is in the pass, voice, hut in the pres., in- stead of the fut. tense, see §313; but S. has also the old pass. fferf qt, see*§ 480. 828 MOOD. §§ 488 - 490 .] that common in E. (3rd. by having the subj. in the act. case, with which, however, the verb (i. e. past part.) agrees in number and gender. Thus the same sentences in N, are : ^rit ^ ftfJdr lit. as to me, I loosed the horse , ^fert lit. as to me, I read the booh; or with a fem. subj. Wtit ^Hrf lit. as to the woman, she loosed the horse. 488. Adverbial ‘participle. This part, is the same as the obi. of the strong form of the adj. part,, and ends, accor- ding to the tense (see § 486), in m, (or ^m), mt (or ^sf). The pres. adv. part, commonly takes ^ the emphatic particle "which coalesces with its termination to ^cT. In order to distinguish more clearly the resp. time, some noun or case-affix is often ad- ded; thus SFT time after ^r, £r from after wr, to or sri: for after’ wk. Thus n^rT or or ^ on reading or during the time of reading ; or e after reading or on condition of reading ; or or wt for reading or for the pur- pose of reading or on the point of reading . Note: The pres. adv. part., as a rule, expresses coincidence ; the past, precedence or condition ; the fut., imminence or object The distinction between the pres, and past, however, is not very strictly observed. — The past adv. part, and the conj. part, may be interchanged, as dVsrt ofe ^TU^ryor effort d^r h he came, having read or from reading the booh. — Instead of ^ on being 5% is sometimes used. £89. Affinities . These adv, part., as a rule, exist in all Grds., and are used in the same manner, as in E. H. Their ter- rain. are: in B. (S. Oh. 148. 184. 185), 0. ^?F, ^r (Sn. 28), M. ^rrf (or emph. OT^ftrr, Man. 63. 64), H. H. nh (emph. ^ m (Kl. 311, 2. 3, 309, d. e), P. fr£, ^ (Ld. 79, 146. 78, 139), S. 5% £ (Tr, 485. 487). See S. Ch., Kl. and Tr. for syntactical observations and examples. They apply equally to E, H. 490. Conjunctive participle . This part, is made by ad- ding the suff. ^ or ^ to the root of the verb. It is, .however, ustially changed to io eai up, to come on, etc. 491. Affinities and Derivation, . The suff. of the conj. part, in Skr. are or coTT. The former is used for comp., the latter for simple roots ; bpt in the Yed. Skr. U may be used for eithei/'kind. In Pr. (both in Sr. and Mg., H. C. 4, 271. 302) they become and OTT respectively. Both are preserved in Gd,; so, however, that ^ is common to the E., W. and N. Gd., while OTT is confined to S. Gd. and, optionally, E. R. Thus B. has fSTT (S. Ch. 148), 0. f (Sn. 28), E. H. ^ or f or quiescent, W. H. f or quiescent (Kl. 202, 378. 209, 394), P. f or quiescent (Ld. 79), G. f (Ed. 113), S. \ or^(Tr. 280. 281), K f ; but M. E. R. (Kl. 209,394). Thus Skr. ^src (orcFru) having clone, Pr. Sr. (H. C. 4, 272), E. H. or or sqr, N. nft, etc., or Pr. qtf^TT, M. cE^T , E. R. cpr^*. Or Skr. UTST having obtained, Pr. qT&sr, E. H. qtf or otu , 3T. CfTf, etc., or Pr. orffeur, M. TO, E. R. OTTO. I know no satisfactory explanation of the final ^ of the E. R. form 3^T. Similar are the 0. M. forms ^tf^r or #rfSRJT (also or 3Rrarr, see Man. 138. 139, as or cfifrfq' having done), and the Mg. Pr. form frftr (Yr. 11, 16, as ^rfrfTftr; also Md. 12, 17) 1 ). ' Ana- logous to the latter, there might have been a Pr. form from which rather than from the Mg. fTfirr the modern M. and E. R. forms appear to be derived. Both Pr. forms ftfur and JJIT (or OTT) are modifications of the Yed. Skr. and Pali coHR, a' by-form of the ordinary Skr. rarr (see Wb. Bh. 435), which occurs in the 1) Md’s siitra seems to be, Wt fT%£T wmj jfefTf&T I <7% q^ST il i. e., having ashed; but both H. C. 4, 272. 302 and T. Y. 3, 2. 10. 27 omit frfSr anfl replace it by gtrr . 330 MOOD. § 492.} Pr of the Bh.*as wrf, just as Skr. «T becomes in Pr. WT (Wb. Bh. 435) or £. (S. 0. 4, 272): If *• C' ”‘ b ^ ^ ^ aee. sg. of . too «!=> (or <*& “» ” a ± ^ might bo . loo. sg. for '<"* « *# ^ f 8 ' 56); ** Gd. UTfirar might be an emphahe form o t o same . th, Pr. form S * (as i« *5* ^ ^ . “ * ” * " tur o, W7 (El. 202); in S. B. it in curtaGed to 7 (to «#. eg., mr-T having lealm formal m-* «*« *» «- „ Kl. 209, 394). Mw. ha. th, aif. A to *! «• toe = *Br. n-* 0°- 2 » 9 - 39 «' Th ,“ 1” *f T w H * each other pre.is'% as the G. gen. a*. * » to the . . or At (see § 377). In H.H. th. aff. is rednpl.toed, **-*;«•*. g—w-* having 5e«fe»; similarly E. B. reduplicates « (Kl. Tog 894) and S. «* (shortened for M)i e. go' »• "fi«l *- . ring toe, en$-*=I homo, eaten, *“•» «* *>• 492. Stows of agency. This is mad. by addmg the sn . nterr o. g. to th. root of th. rerb, a, explained » §1 315. 316 316. Phils a render from E. ** ' from B. m, etc. According to etammtan.es, these no,., _m ay ' hare the sens. of » I™- P** « ‘ «“• *“*'> 'f m may mean one mho is reading or one «*> ss going fo read. •** 2.. Th. raasc. strong form in h also «ed oc- casionally -, lik.wis. th. W. H. suff. «tolT7 (to ton fi h„t th. tan strong form in «S*f> only form. »™». “P"*“* act; .thus • <**•> render, bnt th. to rca(?w<7 (net female reader), see § 319. Note 2: For affinities and derivation see §§ 320.321. 1) Ls. 400 supposes £TT% to have lost a final anuswara (iov^fm) and to have changed the * of - WTOT to * §§ 493 — 495.] TENSE. 331 SECOND GHAPTEB. TENSES. 493. There are three tenses, the present, past and future, each ’of which may be either simple or periphrastic (see § 510). The indicative mood possesses all three; the conjunctive has only two, the pres, and past; the imperative has only one, the present. Every tense possesses two numbers, sing, and plur, ; and three persons, first, second and third ; and also, though with the ex- ception of the pres. conj. and imper., two genders, masc. and* fern. 494. Some of the tenses are formed from the root of the verb, others from the participles. From the root are formed the three pres, tenses of the ind., conj. and imp.; from the part., the past and future tenses, viz. the first and second preterite ind., the past conj. and the fut. ind. Tenses made from the root will be called radical ; those made from the part., participial. A third class, made by adding an auxiliary verb to a \ participle, I shall call periphrastic . 1. RADICAL TENSES. 495. Present conjunctive and imper alive. These are % identical in every respect, and are made by adding to the root the subjoined suff., according to the number and person (but not gender) of the subj. In the 2. sing, the suff. may optionally be omitted. After roots in the forms of the suff. are slightly 1 2 3 modified by coalescence with that letter. Sing. Plur. Sing, Plur. 1. pers. ^ ^ f 2. pers. 3 or quiese. g Worsr g ^ ^ or $TT $rr|r or 3TT 3. pers. yr Note 1: The pres. conj. is occasionally used in the sense of the fut. indie. Note 2: The 2. pi. ends throughout the conjugation either in ^ Si or n a. The latter (^), being the resultant of the drop- SS2 radical tenses. § 496 .] ping of the final * of H*, is always sounded (see § 24, esc.). It u important to observe this circumstance, as, in the future tense, it forms the only difference between the 1. pi. and the 2. pi., anj affects the vowel combination. Thus TOL porhab zee shall read, but ^ parhaba you will read ; mahhdb we shall eat, huxma IMba you will eat, or m^hhdib we shall eat, but ^r^sr cm a or W Jchaiba you will eat (see § 508). So ^ pafha read you, but era park read thou. Again parhaila you read, not parhaU (see § 500). - In Kellogg’s Hindi Grammar (p. 201. . 233 — .241) the forms of the 2. pL ^re given, by mistake, as forms of the 2. sg. Colloquially the plur. is commonly used m the place of the sing. This practice, probably, has been the cause of the misapprehension. 496. Affinities. The E. H., I believe, is the only Gd. language, in which the pres, of the conj. and of the imper are completely identical. In W. Gd. the two tenses are also alike, with the exception of the 2. sg. But in S. Gd., N. Gd. and E. Gd. (exc E. H.) the differences are more numerous; viz. 2. and d. sg. differ in B„ 2. and 3. sg. and pi. in N., and 1., 2. and 3. sg. and 2. and 3. pi. in M. - The tense, which is now the pres, coni, in E. H., exists in all Gds., but in some ^ of them it has slightly modified its original meaning. It was originally the same as the Skr. and Pr. pres, indie. ; and this sense it has preserve in M., though it is now used only in a special case, viz. as a historical present or what practically amounts to a habitual past (see Man. 59, 3, e. g., A f* * sallies forth = he ft sally forth)-, but in 0. M. it is employed for the ordinary pres, indie. (Man. 138). Again in B., 0. and G. it is b °th a pres. * (aaa. Q CVi 1 qfi 142. Sn. 27. 32. Ed. 54). indie, and a pres. conj. (see b. Ob. 10 0. 14Z. on. On the other hand, in E. H„ W. H., P., S. and N. it is only a pres. conj. (see Tr. 284-287. Ld. 23, 74. 53) 1 ). As a natural 11 Even in these languages it may still be heard occasionally as a , j e „ {] h, its frt? ai srRTrir the teacher calls you\ c see s S & nVLIV « «* » o. h. it » -m u. 496.] RADICAL TENSES. 383 consequence the W. and N1 Gd. and E, H. form a new pres, in- die. ^y adding to the old pres, some auxiliary verb (see §§ 500. 501). On the other hand, M. employs, for the purpose of ex- pressing the pres, conj., the part. fut. (called supine in Man. 62, see §§ 313. 509, 3), ending in the sing, in €TarT m., f., 3fT§T u n., in ‘the pi. m^na., mc$T f., ^TsrTn. G. may do the same; there the termin. are ssrlr m., mt f., m n. (called second pres, of the second pot. in Ed. 54, see § 509, 3) 1 ). — In all W. Gds. the pres. conj. (i. e., the old pres, ind.) may be used as a future. Such was the case in 0. M* also (Man. 5 9, 3. note); but it is not so in modern M. In O. M. it was also used in the sense of the habitual past (Man. 59, 3. note), as it is in modern M. (see above); but of this usage theie are traces even in Pr. ; see Wb. Spt. 63; e, g., cT^^rr xxr thou wast not wont to enjoy (Spt. 91), or cr^T urutfe thou wast not wont to direct (Spt. A, 38). — The following table shows the various Gd. termin. of this tense : * Present conjunctive or old pres, indie. M. 2J. B. 0. E.H. H.H. Br. Mw. P. G. S. 1. f 3,? * *" I ^ «rf 2. art r,^ri ^L. 1 3 1 3,Jrq. ^ ^ f 1 3. ^ isq.^r 7 ^ y ^ ^ ^ q- 4. 3 ; st , ^ 3 , ^4 ^ £ ^tt et a - 3 ; 5. srfs at ot fi al st wt 6. #?r 9 f \ wit ^ gfn te) _ t In the pres, irnper. : 1) ^ quiesc. ; 2) ^ or 3; 3) 37; 4) or 3T; 5)«r; 6)^Hor3^; 7) 3 (orB.3eFi); 8 ) 3 ^; 9)^or3cT; 10)sft^. pres. ind. (Kl. 221, 224). — In the various Gd. grammars this tense is called by a great variety of names ; thus second potential or optative by Ed. 54, potential by Tr. 284, indefinite futwe of the pot. mood by Ld. 53, con- tingent future by Kl. 158. 163, p r-, 7 7 ,■/ by Eth. 73; but pres, subjunctive by S. Ch. 136. Sn. d2. 1) With trans. verbs the karmani prayoga must be used (see § 487), because this part, is properly pass.; but with intrans. verbs the kartari prayoga; in the latter case, M. adds in the 2. pers. the suff. ^sg. and FT pi., bit the first and third pers. are alike. Thus M. need for to imped. »d • m C 3 176; e. g., M. *3* you laugh or you may laugh - or Mh. S b.^or^or^0. - a,) The termin. of the 1. sg. is 1 * m n i H85) (H. c. 3, Ul. 1.A- Vr. 7, 3. 30), Ap. Pr. «S> or (H- C. 4. 385). _ — - gTTTcTT tliou mayest loose the horse (lit. by mayest get loose, but fsn j or he m ay get loose, thee the horse may be leased); again * or at 10 J a 11 Analogous is the occasional use in Pr. of the pres . , c * go 82 gives a few examples; thus Sp . (pret.) eonj., of which Wb. Spt. 6U- 2™ BOfc use if <* mere “< (-».<*=■ ^ ”• to „« pres. ind. in tbh — “ 7'“^, S ' of the part. pres, (see §§ 506. 507); thus E. H. * * ** • § 497.] RADIAL TENSES. 335 * 9 The former is preserved in the 0. M. B. ^ ; e. g., Skr, J read, Pr. TOtfq or TOffir, 0. M. ^ , B. and 0- Q fe. The latter becomes in 0. 33. ^3, Br. ^TT U , E. H. , H. H. Mw. 3 or 3, G. !, N. thu^ Ap. Pr. TO3 I read, 0. H. TO3, Br. *csT, E. H. tot", H. H. and Mw. TO , G. 146, note) ; thus Skr. q^f^r they read , Pr. cr&fir, 0. q^fpr, M. TOT. The latter becomes in 0. H. or E. H. and Br. XI \ H. H. $ also Mw. ^ and G. ^ with loss of anunasika; thus ’Ap. Pr. qsff, 0. H. TOPf or TOf, E. H. and Br. to' 4 ', H. H. TO* 51 , Mw. qil, G. TO. The origin of the Ap. form fff is dis- closed by the 0. H. termiu. or ^ (for *^rf^) of the pret. tense (see §503). It appears that s?Pr was changed to then to and finally to (see § 161). The 0. H. ^P^ is preserved in the 8. ?rfq, B. (with transfer of Z into the preceding syl- lable, § 148, note), P. OTT , N. w . Thus S. TOPr, B. TOT , P. q^5T , N. q^q^. The Psh. has ^ and the Pers. (softened for 3R[J. — 3) Pres, imper . : g) The term, of the 1. sg. is in Skr. #tPt, which, however, is a peculiar suff. and does not exist in Pr The latter has the regular suff. SfTq or W (H. C. 3, 173. Vr. 7, 18); in the Ap. Pr. it becomes fS (see § 127) 1 ) and becomes a suff. of the pres. conj. (or indie., H. C. 4, 385, see § 497, 2, a). In M. it contracts to tf, but remains a suff. . of the 1 . sg. imper. ; while in E. H. it contracts to ?TT W and passes to the pres* conj., and so in all W. Gds. and in N. Gd. ‘ On the other hand, B. and 0. have lost it, and use the suff. ^ of the pres. conj. in- stead. Thus (Skr. qsnPr), Pr. q^rq or q^q let me read , Ap. Pr. q^3 J may read or I read, M. q^ let me read , E. H. to)P I may read or I read, etc. — h) The term, of the 2. sg. is in Skr. srftr (suff. i%) or Pr. has preserved the regular termm. W besides and n (H. C. 3, 173. 174. 17 5. Yr. 7, 18), and the Ap. Pr. has, besides ^pr, also ^ ’or ^ or 3 (H. C. 4, 3 87. K. L 62 in Ls. 453). The term. must have existed in the Ap. Pr. ; for it is still found occasionally in 0. H., both in the sense of the imper. and the pres. conj. (see Kl, 21 8, f. 2 20, 1). Similarly the term. is used also for the pres, indie, in the Ap. Pr.* (II. C. 4, 383) and for the pres, conj. in W. Gd. (see 1)#I prefer this explanation of the origin of the Ap. term. ^3 to that previously given m § 122, note. 388 RADICAL TENSES. § 497 .] §497, 2, b), but in the 0. H. is still occurs both for the imper. and the pres. conj. (Kl. 204). The Ap. termin. ? * a contraction of m (of the X th class or causal imper.) and represents the Skr. and Pr. term. 9, while the Ap. term. * is a curtailment of and the term. 3 perhaps a corruption of the a. This is clearly shown by the S., which has preserved both 5 and 3, and uses the former for trans. verbs (which correspond to the old caus. and X th class verbs, see §§ 47 2. 473), while it adds the latter to m trans. verbs (Tr. 251). The term. 3 is preserved also in 0. H. (see Kl. 218, e. 220, 1), E. H. and 0./ but has assumed also the sense of the pres, conj..; while throughout Gd. (esc. S. and optionally 0. H. and E. H.) it becomes quiescent (i. e. 5 qu.) when used in its proper sense of the imper. Thus Pr. 339 read thou, but 0. H. 0^*3 read thou or tliou mayest read’, or Pr. 331% read thou, Ap. Pr. 33f% read thou or thou readest, 0. H. cuff read thou or thou maijest read or thou readest’, .or Skr. 33 read thou, Pr. 33, Ap. 33, 0. H. and E. H. 3^ read thou and thou mayest read, 0. 33 thou mayest read, E. H. v^read thou or thou mayest read, all other Gds (.exc. S.) 33 read thou. Again Pr. 33 (cf. H. C. 3, 158) read thou, Ap. 33 or >3, S. 3ft. - i) The term, of the 3. sg. is in Skr. m, in Pr. 93 (H. 0. 3, 173. Yr. 7, 18) and becomes m M. or 3, "o. 3, B. 3-m, N. 9T-3. (or after vowels sr-H ). The ad- ditions, w in B. and * in N., are pleon. suff. of obscure meaning and origin; perhaps they are enclitic pronouns, viz. indef. 91 or 3. pfers. if (see § 503). Thus 333 let him redd, Pr. 3 33, M. 35T or xa\ 0.3a, B.3**, N.3^9 (or srcsrci. let him go). - k) The termin. of Ere l."pl. is ‘in Skr. 9T9; but Pr. substitutes the termin. 913% or 9* (H. C. 3, 176. Yr. 7, 20) Or 93 and Ap. Pr. 9% (K. I. 64, in Ls. 453) of the pres, indie. The same is also done in all Gels.; thus (Skr. 33m), Pr. 339 V or 333 let us read, Ap. 33J, N. M. 3^, etc,, see § 497, 2, d. 1) The termin. of the 2. pi. is in Skr. 9H; but Pr.’ substi- tutes the termin. (H. G. 3, 176. Yr. 7, 20) of the pres, indie. The Ap. Pr. has 93 '(K. I. 63, in Ls. 453) which is § 498 . 499 .] RADICAL TENSES. 389 the same as gj- of the pres, indie, (see § 497, 2, e), but has drop- ped ST 1 ). It occurs also in all W. Gds., and after vowels in N. ; while the Pr. s? is preserved in the E. Gds. a’nd M., and also, after consonants, in N. Thus (Skr. qjTfr), Pr. read you, E. H. q^T or era (parka), B., 0. and N. q^, M. q^T (for *q^f = q^f); but Ap. q^S, Br. q^t, Mw., G., P., S. q^T, in fact identical with the 2. pi. pres. conj. (see § 497, 2, e). — m) The term, of the 3. pi. is in Skr. Pr. g'ff (H. C. 3, 176. Yr. 7, 20), it is preserved in the 0. drf or 3fT_ (by transfer of 3 into the preceding syllable, § 148, note), M. s\or B. and N. 3^. Thus Skr. qo-FT let them read, Pr. q©T, 0. qiscT or q^FT, M. qsfq or , B. and N. q^sr. The change of 3rT^ to 3^ is analogous to that of to (see § 497, 2, f). The other Gds. substitute the 3^. pi. of the pres, conj. — 4) As regards the contracted E. H. terminations, they will be understood from the following examples: Skr. WTsirr he eats , Pr. or (H. G. 4, 228), E. H. WTtf; Skr. wtzyfq I eat , Pr. wmft or T, Ap. Pr. ^T3, E. H. WTE? , etc. Note: It may be observed, that B. uses the termin. of the 3* pi. for the 2. pi. in respectful address: thus pres. B. you read (lit. they read), pret. q&^hr you read or qf^nriFT you have read, you had read, fut. q&3R you will read, etc. In M. this is always done in the 2. pi. of the pres. conj. (see § 509,3), the termin. of which srrirrT^ m., ^TcJTTfT, f*> ^TTST^ n. really belong to the 3. pi. See also § 501, footnote on p. 342. 498. The pres, imper. may optionally add the following suff. in the 2, person.; viz., sing, and plur. e. g., read thou, qft^ read you. This is a respectful form of the imper., implying request or prayer rather than command, and may he called a precotive. Sometimes it is used m the sense of a simple future. 499. Affinities and Derivation. These suff. are iden- tical with the corresponding suff. of the old Skr. and Pr. future. The use of the fut. to express the imper. is easily intelligible. 1) Ls. reads 3, which is probably a false reading for 3 or 840 RADICAL TENSES. 5 499.] The corresponding Skr. terrain. are: eg- ^9:, ph ^ Ap Pr. sg. Zf!% and phy« or in E.H. eg.?S (for TO- ™), plrslfor-re-'): ia 0. S., and oeceionall, M. S, pi. Sft (for seise ,e (Tr. 266). - The corresponding «*. ill W. H. are- eg f “ d P L *“ "*** “ Jf* and the h.at.e Hied «p by M» «•»"«*“* *“ eg. i, pi. W (Ld. 44); B. hae pi. ^ (BCh.147): and S. h- eg. 5» or TO or or Zm, pi. 161 or TWt or ^13 or S o (Tr. 266. 267): 6. eg. A P>- «*; Mw - J. pl. A or or «* «1. 211. 212): Br eg. « *» » W or rtr or pl 3* or 3* or pit or 3F or 3 *T (K . 204). am inclined to think, that the V. Gd. forme are re.1 V pas.i ve, hut need -actively.. Thus (Skr.rnjA), Ap.Pr.dto* or rffe^or sisiz (H. C. 3. 175), Br. sis or dfiso, B- T3 , or w : ’ s ufify or d». G. ™ : plnr. (Skr. nwi). A. Pr ™«S « ***. Br. rfhft, P. n**, Mw. d», s. 0f» or 02*. The increment g.- 3 t or or ie found aleo in Pr. All ver e m r. nee it in the 2. per), of the imp.. (B. 0. 3, 175) « the veib the Gd. pass, see§48l) already shows itself; for Vv. f Tf , as it were, a compound of » + ^ Ht. U is going to ^ com- pare the real H. H. compound ft ^ he becomes, E. 11 Again in the m,er., Pr. *3 or ifm let hm he = Sk» WQ l7lt is probable, however, that the Skr. pas, and prec. are formed on the same principle, by compounding the auxil. verb OT ogo r root; e. g., 3. sg. mj^may he he — R- *i. and 2nd aons §§ 500 . 501 ,] RADICAL TENSES. 341 (pass.) iglcrf (lit. for the Pr. prefers the parasm. suff.,’ see Ls. 3^33); also Pr. fteTTS (H. C. 3, 178) = + TOJ. Again in the fut, Pr. ftffm or fteTfffe thou wilt be = Skr. or (pass.) tffsrsTO (lit. for Pr. incorporates the pass. suff. zr, see §"346)*, also Pr. (II. C. 3, 1 78) = + zmzrftr. Again in the wiper., Pr. or laugh thou (H. C. 3, 175) = Skr. or (pass.) ^resr; also Pr. or contr. (H. C. 3, 175), whence S. or S. has also a longer form or ^fesTT^ lit. = *^ + anf%. Similarly S. pi. or laugh ye presuppose a Ap. Pr. (not,, mentioned by H. C.) f^TssTJ'. In Pr. all the personal suff. may be dropped, and that, in all tenses alike; thus leaving the mere increment or T as a universal ter- mination; and this curtailed form may be used with* all roots, whether ending in a vowel or consonant; thus* Pr. ^T?§T or may mean: he is or he may be or let him be or he was or he has been or he will be, etc. ; similarly or crfef may mean : he reads, he will read , or let him read, etc. (H. C. 3, 17 7). Of this usage, however, I believe, there is no trace in Gxl. 500. Present indicative . This tense is made by adding the following suff. to the root of the verb according to the gen- der, number* and person of the subj. Sing. Mascf Fern. Plur. Masc. Fem. 1. ^ftT (or^uV) fsrr 2. or or £ 3 ? or (or ^FZIfr ) n ' V, *\ Vs It> ^ S ^ 'fee* 3. jfm or ^FT^ Optionally the initial ^ may be changed to % (§2 6); thus masc. fem. etc. ; but 1 . pi. only ^fft. After roots in or £ and the R. ^t, the initial ^ or ^ (but not §■) is dropped. Thus 1. sg. masc. c?iY u , fem. etc.; but 1. pi. always ^yTT. 501. Affinities and Derivation. 1) It has been stated in §§ 496. 497 that the old pres, indie, has been changed into the pres. conj. in E. H., N. and the W. Grds. Accordingly these languages (exc. P. seelSlro. 2, p. 343) form a new pres, indie, by adding* to the old tense some auxil. verb, viz. m Bh. Mth. RADICAL TENSES. § 501.] 342 A # $ Br. ft* or I (ELI. 206, a), M w. f or i (EL 212, 402), V i‘(Sd. 54), S. * (Tr. 293). The Mth., N., Br., Mw. and G. forms ft | or #, t « *" are tb ° Se ° f ^ P I eS - T °?r 6 auxil. verb to be (see § 514, 4. 6); but while Br., Mw. and G. simply add them to the unchanged termin. of the pre, ooj,., Mth. andN. first reduce the latter to the uniform^ type ? and J respectively. Thus Br. **"*" or 4^ Mw. G. i, but Mth. 4 ft N. n T | or rr T # I *>; B, Mw. 4| or 4|, G. 4f, Mth. 44 N. n T ^ thoudoest, etc. tL S. form A is the past part, of the auxil. verb f ***> * (contr. for Aft Tr. 305, see § 514, 6), and is simply added to the per, termin. of the pres, con]., but agrees in gender and number with the sub,.; thus S. masc. Ido fern. pi. masc. ^ ft fem. «* etc. The E. H. formal is the 2 nd pret. of the auxil. verb ST* to come, curtailed from 4T (see § 509, 4). It is conjugated regularly (see § 504) wit Te exception of the 3. sg. and 1. pL, where it has m tor * and (i- e., 3. sg. H or 1. pi- 4^ and ^ termm. of the pres, conj., to which it is added, are not the or- dinary ones but a uniform type in $ (as m Mth.) or in 3 in N.), with the exception of the 1. pi. which preserves its re- gular term, f 1 )- I* -ay be observed, that in the forms, sg. ft pi- W, are- used as an auxil. verb, in the sense of to s, ley are, etc, by the side of the ordinary W. E . + * (El. J98, 200); e. g., Gw. or or «!** or *** l^The uniform $-type can easily be explained. In Br. the 2. and 3 „ pros conj. ends m *, the 1. pi. in * 0., the 1. eg. ends in «( whmh would easily contract to Lastly m Br. the S. pi. JT. is aho d m the 2. pi. (see S. Gh. 142 and § 497, note; e. g , ft* d ° * do); this is sometimes also done m Bs. (e. g , or ' you are-, but the proper 2. pi. or ft or " . drop _ the E. H. 3. pi- f would mtrude into the 2. pi. Final anuna^a drop ped. According to these analogies every person of the UP ' might ending. The 3-type of the N. is but a shorter for ^ ^ (see | 26). § SOL] RADICAL TENSES. 343 is there any one? In E. H. the forms of the 3 >res. indie, are sometimes used in the sense of a future indie. ; e. g., E. H. i. e. when mother* comes, then we shall eat Now it will he shown in § 509, 4, that the fut. indie, is made pre- cisely dn the same way (by adding the auxil. part, come to the pres, conj.) in Mw. } M. and N. ; and it may he observed, that in the Br. and P. their fut. indie., which is made in an analogous way by adding the auxil. part. JT gone to the pres, conj. (§ 509, 5), is also used as a pres, indie, in the case of the substant. verb to be ; thus compare Br. and P. ^ or i|nT (s|jtt) masc. he is, fem. or with Br. ^turfr, H. H. ifftTr, P. ^tsirn mase., °nt fem. he or she will be; again Br. or masc. we are, fem. i| w or P. masc. ?TT or fffrr, fem. *rf or frfnt^T with Br. ffurr, H. H. ^V~?r, P. ^orm masc. we * shall be, fem. Br. °rrt' s ’, S’. H. °nf, P. °nWf, etc. Again the presence of a long vowel in the antepenultimate, as E. H. I sleep (of R. ^TrQ, proves the composite character of the forms of the pres, indie, (viz. 37 4* cjfTT^) ; for otherwise, if they were single words, such a vowel would be shortened by the rule of § 2 5. Lastly these composite forms naturally yield the sense of a pres, indie. Thus jjtstT which* means lit, J have come (that) I may sleep or I have come to sleep, may easily pass* into I am sleeping or I sleep . Li- terally these forms express, that the action is .the present result of preceding events; e. g., „I have come to be happy C{ is equal to „I am happy “ now. — 2) The H. H. and P. and, optionally, the Bs., Br. are peculiar in adding the auxil. verb gf, ^"T, ^3, *fr u resp., not to the old pres, tense, but to the pres. part, in Hi, £T, FJA 3 resp. Thus sing. Bs. masc., °fft fem. (Kl. 241), Br. cF^rr §f or °rTT fT m., °fH or or f. (Kl. 202 5 a. 204, 283), P. cpr^r ^7 m., °£) ^7 f. (Ld. 29. 37. 46), H. H. cR7*rJT |F m,, °7T |r f. I do; plur. Bs, ^ m., °fct f., Br. 37*7 |%r °7 m., °f?t or °rrr f., P. °^W1 if 7 f., H. H. 3777 m., °rTt ^ f. we do, etc. Sometimes the auxil. Verb is omitted ; but in that case, the forms are properly those of 344 RADICAL TENSES. I 501.] the pret coupe — 3) In M. the old pres, indie, has assumed the sense of a habitual past (§ 496). Hence it forms a new pres, indie, by suffixing the ordinary personal termin. to the pres. part, m a?T (Man. 69.72), in the same way as in the E. H. pret. conj. (§ 506). Thus M. sRffTt* m., 1 do ' 37 ftHTfT f.. arffman. thou doest, etc. — 4) In B., 0- and optionally in G the old pres. mdic. having retained its original indie, sense (S 49 6). is still used as such (S. Oh. 142. Sn. 27. Ed. 54). Thus etc. - 5) I add a compar ative table Singular. B. 0. E.H. Mth. 1. 5 Vs, ^rr 2. CTL 3 * *\ vy 3. ? N. s. M. Bs. ■■ 1. 1 a#', a# jo c ' ax at mrf 2. ! s f*L : 7 at STcTTH 3. ! a f mrr aa a| Plural. i B - I 0. E. H. j Mth. 1. 1 I 3 § 2. 1 a i a 3. 1 ! FL i »er^- 1 =5TTTT | afa !, N. ; s. M. Bs. 1. | ai; 2 ) i , mrr^ aa_a|t 2. * <\ j , mm mTT aaaff; 8 ) 3. i mnn aa a|a s ) In the fem S. changes ?ft anc Br. # ^“.1“ Br. aa^f aa w Mw. IS) (S> W W Sfc.SR *n A V JV Iff. ^ *\ H. H. wnj am| am | Mw. at|t,at^r *\ *V H. H. aal” aa |t an | G. *.*$ P. asa^a asal" 0. -S % *N* V ?r, v at, at ft MW P. a$;ff a|ft to to tort. xi. xx. ii — ^ cv s^ta-i; M. sg. 1. aaf or an", 2. aam or aaa or am^, 3. wit 1) Or, masc. am |T, fem. am |t u , etc. 2) Or, a S. 502. 503.] PARTICIPIAL TENSES. 345 or or sh; pi. fem. like masc. — In the mil, M. has sg. 1. 2. , 3. pi. neut. like masc. v 2. PARTICIPIAL TENSES. > 502. First preterite indicative. A past tense indie., which I shall call the first preterite to distinguish it from the " other form of the past indie. (§ 504), is made by modifying the termination of the past part, in or ^ (see § 302) in the fol- lowing manner according to the number and person (but not the gender) of the subj. Sing. 1. dT, 2. 3. ^ . Plur. 1. m, 2. UT, 3. . There is no difference in meaning between the first and se- cond preterites ; they only differ in usage ; the first pret. is said to be confined to the language of towns ( naguri bhdsha). 'Exception . As to some verbs which use an irregular past part, --see § 304. E. g., SPTjTff to do uses the forms fesr (for fifi^u) in the 1. sg. and I. 2. pi., and f%nf in the 2. 3. sg. and 3. pi.; thus sing. 1. fefT, 2. fe|sp, 3. plur. 1. fen, 2. fefr, 3. Like are conjugated H pl ace > ^ 0 $ ve > take. 5 03. Affinities and Derivation . This tense exists in all Gds., exo. M. ; but it is formed in a variety of ways.- — 1) In 0. H,, E. H. aJnd N. it is made by adding the suff. of the pres, conj. to the weak past participial form m ^ or ^ (§ 3 02). These suff. (after subtracting the initial % of the terminations, see § 497) are: 1. sg. 3? or ^ (as in O. H. mji, O. cFT^ I do)} 2.^s g. m or or ^ (as in 0. H. or zRj or E. H. grp thou doest ); 3. * sg. ^ or (with anomalous (as in 0. H. or he does)} 1. pi. f (a*s in N. we do for *5RJ3 : or N. sTre we go)} 2. pi. w (as in 0. H. cfrpj- you do) ; 3. pi. or, fn (as in S. or §E*fH^r they do } Tr. 287). The part, termin. ^ is ge- nerally contracted to yr and, sometimes, to in 0. H. — a) The 1. sg. suff. f occurs in 0. H. and E. H.; thus qftsr + f = 0. H. and Rs. or Bh. q^tfr* I read} the 1. b£. f in N.; .e. g., 4- f = N. q^ w I read or fer + ^ N. zzt* or fife I was . — 346 PARTICIPIAL TEHSES. § 503 .] Again b) the Sr sg. f|r or 3 occur in 0. H. ; thus — 0. H. or crf^g + 3 = 0. H. or cr:$3 thou readst\ the 2. sg. m m 0. H. and Bs., thus qfer + f% « 0. H. Bs. in E. H., N. and. optionally, in Bs. it is shortened to Bs. Bh. and N. qra3, or fer + f% = N. or f m%4hou wast. — Again c) the 3. sg. suff. ff occurs in 0 H. ; thus + ff = 0. H. qr^f|; he read. The 3. sg. ^ does not exist in this tense. The E. H. adds the aff. which in the longer form f%, occurs also in 0. H. and Bs,; thus ern|g -|- aff. 1% = 0. H. Bs. or Bh, ufee he read. Though these 3. sg. forms outwardly resemble those of the 2. pers., they can scarcely have the same origin 1 ). The same 3. sg. aff. exists also in P. ; e. g., he read , cRTcfT^ he did (Ld. 69); and also in N., though not in the pret. hut the dmper. (see § 497, 3. i, p. 338) ; e. g., ^ him read. It is possibly a shortened form of the 3. pers. pfon. £r, enclitically attached in a manner similar to the more general S. practice of affixing curtailed pron. forms to the verb (see Tr. 345 ff.); thus S. f., G. f xPyJTT m. or =rJvft f., but S. NTS m. or f. _ 5) I add a comparative table of the terminations: 1) It should be recollected that, inW.Gd., trans. verbs admit only of the pass- constr., which converts what, with us, is subj. into the obj. Thus our 1. pers sing' ,1 left him“ becomes, in W.Gd., 3. pers. sg. „by me be uas left 1 -. Accordingly, m W. Gd, there could be a first person onlv we should have the accus. of the 1. pers. pron. as obj.; e. g., our 3. pers. „he left me“ ought to become, m W Gd., 1. pers. „by him I was left“. But even here W. Gd. has no first pers., but employs the impersonal * eonstr. „by him in regard to me it was left“. participial tenses. 349 Singular 2. I 3. I 0. O.H. | E. H. | IT. s. intr. & tr. intr.&tr. mtr. & tr. intr &tr. mtr. ** i V*5 1 i J-*L nt vt- ssnr p. G r. W. H. tr. intr. tr. intr. tr. m dr ITT UT A m B. | 0. intr.&tr. intr &tr. ■&§ i P. Plural. 0. H. E. H. mtr.&tr. intr.&tr. ST N. | intr. & tr. i Vi> sr S' UT 3 ) W. intr. s s. * intr. tr. Cs 14) ^STT h. h.: tr. intr. 1} These B. term, are, ordinarily, pronounced etc.; thus crfrOTfi rs pronounced UrechH, not UriydMii. In fact, tie old way of spelling has been retamed, though the pronunciation has changed; just* as in English we stall write „mght“, but pronounce „mte«. The dd past part. 3TT> is contracted to (just as m E. H. the conj. past wqw becomes see § 491); and «f* curtaded mto % The older forms sUlfe, etc may occasionally be heard in solemn addresses (sermons, etc.). The cons, f chh is always pronounced ts, or even s (as m M. and w., see § 11); e. g, cfjfyrnfe (or rather W^Sf) is P ronounced fcareto ° r eVen toresi. - Similarly the B. term, of the conj. part. ^HT is ordinarily con- tracted into ?; e. g., 5frf?TT having done is pronounced 2) Or csrrra m., jarfe f. ' i) Or ^or ^ com. gen. 350 PARTICfPIAL TENSES. |$ 504 . 505 .] In the fem. sg., N. eft, 8. P. **r, W ' H - * and H.H. ST are changed to and S. has 1. ^rfe, 2. S# or ^ fem. pi., S. at. P. G. ST, W. H. and H. H. ? are changed to ^ u , and S. has 1. ^T, 2. and 3. & Note: The plusperf. is a periphrastic tense in E. H. (see §510, 7). esc. in Mth. which, like the B. and 0. forms it by adding the past tense of the auxil. verb, Mth. B. ST%1TS , 0. Sfe I was. etc. (see § 514, 6) to the past part, in or s- The part, termin. is contiacted in Mth. to Thus 1. sg. Mth. B. afem^TT^, 0. sfesf&r 1 had readme tc. The resp. termin. are: 2. sg. Mth. B. STfffe, 0. TO 3. sg. Mth. ^r, B. sTffcfst, 0. ^rer; 1- pi- Mth. B. st%tts, 0. ^;~2. P l. Mth. ^r, B. sr^, 0. 3. pi. Mth. Pfort T g , B. STf^rs^, 0. ^T5T. ' *504. Second preterite indicative. This tense is made by modifying the termination of the past part, in or (§ 302) in the following manner according to the gender, num her and person of the subj. Sing. Masc. Sing. Fem. 1 . (or 2. (intr.) or or Ucffr 3. (intr.) or (tr.) (intr.) or Plur. Masc. Plur. Fem. 1 . ucfr 3J3TT 2T. or (or ) 3. or $rf or — s In the 3. sg., trans. verbs take the stiff. while the intrans. ’take «a.. A S ain in the 2 ‘ Sg ' maSC ‘ th ® ^ confined to intrans. verbs. The other suff. are common to both. Note • In the eastern parts of the E. H. area the termin. are pronounced with * as ^1- *»• ^ The enclosed in brackets are less usual. 505. Affinities and Derivation. 1) This tense^ exists only in E. and S. Gd. It is made, like- the first .pret. indie., by PARTICIPIAL TENSES. 351 ’§ 505 .] adding the personal suff. of the old pres, indie, (see § 503) to the weak form of the past part, in or ^?r_, except in M., which adds them to the strong form in 33BTT. It should he re- marked, however, that B. and 0. omit the suff. in the 3. sg. of all verbs, and E. H. in the 3. sg. of intrans. verbs. Again M, omits the suff. in the 3. sg. and pi. of intrans. verbs and in all persons, sg. and pi., of trans. verbs *). E. g., he read the look is in E. H. ^ mm q^B , B. m qWfl' qi^?r , 0. £r m?rt qferTT, M. rSTT qVqt oTTfevfi' (Man. 6 5, 2, or exceptionally rft qVeB - q^ccrT Man. 81, 133). On the whole the pers. suff. are added quite regularly. Thus a) 1. sg. 3 in E. H. and M. ; e. g., wk. form, masc. + 3 = E. H. q^rfT I read , fem. q:£% + "3 = E. H. q^erffj here the final 3 is anomalous; it is possibly foun- ded on the strong form + 3 1 . Again strong form, masc. TOcFTT + 3 = M. q^3T t*; but in the fem. M. adds the 1. sg. suff. this may be clearly seen in the pres, indie.; e. g., = q^fiw (Skr. q^ffcTcFTT) + f = M. q^T or q^f I read ; simil- arly q^ctTl = q^f%^ + f = q^ w I read . In the neut., M. uses either 3 or thus q^rV*' or q^“ w . 0. shows the same 1. sg. termin. ^ (a shortened form of ^f), as in its pres, indie. ; .thus qf^BT 1 read, just as or I am . The B-. has the 1. sg. termin. which appears to have preserved the original pres, indie, termin. snfqr (see § 49 7, 2); thus qfe TT^ (= Mg. *qf&3ji?r denom.). — Again b) the 2. sg. suff. or, shortened, occurs in E. H. and M. ; thus wk. f. masc. — E. H. with transfer of ^ into the preceding syllable; fem. E. H. thou remainedst\ or st. f. masc. q^?rr -4- — M. q:£3rrrg^, fem. mmf -F ^== M. q^ib^, neut. M. q^“B^ with an anomalous anun&sika; for the suff. B is anomalously added to the nom. sg. neut. q^Br w instead of to the neut. base q^^ 1) M. which constructs transitive verbs passively, like the W. Gds. (see § 487), not actively, like the E. Gds., follows the usage of the former languages (see § 508, 3, p. 348) in adding no suff. to the past part, of such verbs. 352 PARTICIPIAL TENSES. § 505.]' (= = Mg. qffepr = Skr. ofOTW). The 2. sg. ' fir is found in E H. and B. ; thus wk. f. masc. + f| = E. H. q^rl or (shortened) B. qfisftr; fen.. wfi* + f* = E. H. thou readst. The 2. sg. 3 is peculiar to 0.; thus qfeq, just as in the 0. pres, indie q^ (see § 497, pp. 335. 336). - Again c) the 3. sg. fir occurs in the E. H. <5*^. But there is no s uff. in M., B.,0. or m intrans. verbs of E. H. ; thus M. TOOT m., rcssh t., ^ n. he read, rt^T m., f., ft*" n. U went, 0 . qf^T, TOT c. g., B. qft^, nm c. g., E. H. ntrer c. g., hut q^. Again d) the 1. pi. i is found in M. and 0.;« thus M. q^T c. g. or (shortened) 0. q^ c. g. we read. The E. H. show* the same 1 . pi. termin. t (hut without anunasika) as in its pres. conj. (§ 497 , 2 , d. p. 336); thus E. H. qTO* c. g. we read just as q^T u we read And the fe. has preserved the original pres, indie, termin. otjt ; thus qfernq (= Mg. denom., or *«iffcCP*). — Again e) the 2. pi. S' is preserved in the E. H. fern., thus q^Rb + J or ’ perhaps, st. f. 031 %® + f = E. H. yon read. Otherwise the 2 . pi. f or 5 is used; thus wk. f. masc. q^5T +5 E. H. q^ 5 T K or '(dropping 1 _, § 3 2) OTO parliala, 0. qfer c. g.; the B. qft% c. g. apparently contracts final aha to £ or stands for xcsk\ properly a 3. pi. form (see §497, footnote and .0. 3. pi. qf^?r). Or st. f. q*5TT + t — M. q^rf c. g. — Again f) the 3 . pi. fa or, shortened, O is preserved in E.H. and B. ; thus wk. f. masc. qssf + fit = E. H. «o*T , B. qfe% with transfer of final ^ mto the preceding syllable; fern. qsfar + * = E. H. qsfatN • ThejE-H. also shows the other 3 . pi. termin. f in the masc. q^r they read and, slightly modified, in the fern, q^#", just as^in the E. H. pres. conj. <&" they read. 0. omits the anunasika, qiE^ for *qnj% 3 - SI. uses the strong form, but without any suff., q^T- 2) As regards the E. H. optional forms, 1. sg. and 2. pi. tare, they contain probably the strong part, termin TOTT, .with euph. q for ; thus Skr. denom. *qfirwrfa (= Mg. or *qffes*fa, Ap. E. H. ofimT or q*T«ft - - 3 ) I subjoin a comparative table of terminations: §§ 506 . 507 .] FARTICIPIAL TENSES. 858 Singular. B. 0. E. H. . M. 1. 3^T w m., roff. wTm., wr*f., srefTor 3^r*n. 2. ^ m., ssf&rsrf. 3#*=rjf., 3c7“3n. 3. ^ ^TT 3^7 c.g, 3c3c.g. WTT m., 3<5Tl f., wT n. Plural. 1. ^rf c. g. srsfTc. g. 2. ^ m., 3c^f. srsT? c. g. 3. frsta m. a 3f§T?rf. 3^7 m., 3^2TT f., 33 tT n. ■Zfote; The B. and # 0. forms are of common gender. 506. Preterite conjunctive . This tense is made by mo- difying the termination of the pres. part, in 3r^ (§§ 298. 486) in the following manner, according to the gender, number and person of the subject. Singular. Plural. Masc. Fern. Masc. Fem. 1. 3rfr w (or 3RrT) 37^ 3c ft or ^ 3cft or ^ 2. 3OT or 33 3f3^r or 3cft 336 or 33 (or 3r3g- ) 373 3. sffrorSH ®rr or an a^rorsrfT srffter or air “ *N *■" -*• Mote: The forms enclosed in brackets are more usual in Bs., than in Bh. * — Occasionally this tense is used as a pres, indie. 507. Affinities and Derivation. 1) This tense exists in all Grds., with the exception, apparently, of S. But while W. Grd. uses the strong form of the pres. part, without addition, to express the pret. conj,, the E. and S. Grds. make it by joining to the same part, the personal suff. of the old pres, indie. These composite forms are made exactly on the same model as those of the second pret. indie., see § 505, where the matter has been fully explained. The E. Grds. use the weak, but M. the strong form of the part. Thus 1. sg. masc. O. H. or 3^73“, E. H. tracer 1 ” or q^ffr 1 " (if) I read, B. ofilffre (S. Ch. 147), 0. ersfr (Sn. 32), M. tqurT (Man. 60, 4. 73); but W. H. «KS7T or tnsfft, H. H. 'PSHT (El. 167, a), P. (Ld. 37. 46, etc.), Gr. trarft (Ed. 54); fem. 0? H. qreffrf or cr*&f, E. H. B. and 0. like masc., 23 354 PARTICIPIAL TENSES. § 507 .J M q^", but m. H., H.H., G. W*. P- **$5 “ eut - M: ^ ’ but G. etc.; see the table of termiu. below. Tbe optional E H termiu. qr of tbe 1. P L is, evidently, an intrusion from tbe B., where tbe pres. part, ends in instead of in ** (see o 300) . _ It will be observed, that tbe M. termiu. of tbe'pret. conj are nearly identical with those of its pres, indie.; tbe only difference being in tbe 3. sg.' and plur. (e. g,, 8. ,sg. masc .conj «n, but indie. 3. pb masc. conj. «r, but indie SHTH.) and in tbe 2. sg. masc. (viz. conj. *m*, but indie. «¥*). The indie, has more nearly preserved the old Pr. forms; and moreover, pro- bably, uses tbe weak form of tbe part. Thus the M. 2. sg. indm. «,*?* thou readest is the same as the Pr. xoftfe; ^ile tbe M. 2. Sg : conj. qm (if) thou readst is rather a denom. formation = Pr. + a^T5-f%; see tbe remarks in § 503, 1, p. 347. In the other Gds. tbe pret. conj. itself may be occasionally used as a sort of indefinite pres, indie. 1 ). Examples of this usage of expressing tbe pret. conj. by means of tbe part. pres, with or without the auxil. verb uq to he, are already foun m r. see Wb S pt. 62. 63). Thus Spt. 26 sq w 5^ * thou - Tcnewest, thou wouldst not do. This would be in M. ^ awm** E.H. of the tw0 toetllods ’ tha which*' dispenses with the auxil. verb appears to -have given rise to tbe W. Gd. form of tbe pret. conj., while tbe other which uses that verb apparently led to the S. and E. Gd. denom. fonps of the same tense. • The fact that the Gd. pret. conj and the analogously-formed tenses of the 1 st and 2 nd pret. and ut. m ic., have different forms for the several genders, is thus explained by the Pr. Eor the part, with or without the auxil. verb, mus , o course, agree with the subj. in regard to gender. - 2) S., ap- parently possesses no special pret. conj., but uses mstea . o the ordinary pres, indie, (see Tr. 501). - 3) I subjoin a com- paraAraftj-. ^terminations . rrL3CXA.^u . fver . -CTK 328. _ ci /lb 508.} PARTICIPIAL TENSES. 355 Singular. B. 0. E. H. M. 1. JrTPT affT afTT^m., «sff. afTT* m., a^ f., 5rft'“’ n. 2. ag wm, afa#/. aaTsrm., a?rtt^f., srsn, 3. ■* fi7 afrr ag;e. g. arrrm.. affr f., afTn. Gr. W. H. H. H. P. 1. aerr m., aa! f., arr n. nAi# a(T}m.j am f. 5?rTTm., STrftf. ; m., =%£\ f. 2. dto dto dto dto 3. dto dto dto dto * Plural. B. | 0. I E. H. | M. 1. or ^c. g. aFft'” c. g. 2. ^fT a?r arom,, ara^f. a?rr c.„g. 3. art a&^m., afa^f. aarm., afar f., aai^n. Gr. W. H. H. H. p. 1. aflTru., aatf., ar or ^5^ (§§ 308. 486) in the following manner, according to the gender, number and per- son of the subject. Singular. Plural. Masc. Fem. Masc. Feuj. 1. or ^ •$rsr or 2. * or 5jsr afira or a# ^STsf or or 3. r r *Ssjy ^ itf * With the part, terrain. ^ precisely similar suff. arc formed; thus m. } Ipf^f.j etc. As to the manner of adding them to the root, see § 308. Note: Optionally the masc. termin. may be used with a fem. snbj. — Occasionally this tense is used in the sense of the im- perative. 356 PAEtXCEPIAL TENSES. § 509 .] 509 Affinities and Derivation. The fat 1. famed fa si* different way. in «d-, the disti.gni.hing mark, of wh»% “• the fallowing consonants: 1) ?, 2) T ' J1 *-■ ’ ^ ^ tt a} r 1) The first two types are de- o.d~sJ»dPr. fat. fa Skr. the fat fa »** hy the .off. »• ® ” ltl ““ 5) ' change, in Pr- **« to ^ (Mg. ?*) or to ^ ^ ^ 7 12-15. H. C. 3, 166-169, see also Wb. Eh. 431. . ,531 The Pr. OT or 35 become, in 04- « » W “ **■ “ 4 L 4 „faW fa «■ «• * *■ *• “ 4 •' * and pi. of the E. H. Thn. 3. sg. Skr. nSfaffr to — m* T,. a),U or (h) -«« whence q ^’ E> * ~ (contracted for -,&* far •<»*); 3. ph Skr. - «<* L (.) Wr »r (hi*** whence 0. H. W *• “ 4 E. H. W, Mw. (a) «« (far ’«*■>• The farm, of the 2. so. and pi. of this type also occur in E. H., hut ony in I,, .f the precative (§ 498). - 2) The Pr. (W become, in fld. fc. » (« K« *>■ *” 4 ° f t, T G Thn". !T“hr Pr. (H.C.3,16jror (H C 3,169) I >MU read, 0. P. (»)««, Mw. nftsw (- Ap. P • , 8. W rite; again 3. .g, Skr. ^ - "* 0. P. fa*. Mw. -A «• -A- - fern- tyoe. of the fat. are purely Gd. fom.tion.; thn. 8) the fat of the sr -we is confined to the E. Ode. and .. made y adding to the fat. part, the personal snff. of the -J** (| 503), exactly on the same model as in the fate of itas. ^ / O ^af;\ T n 0 the sr or ST may he changed cond preterite (see § 505). * * " R ^ j $ } ia U to ^ (see §134, note). Thus 1. sg mase. K H. ^ ^ B. %to%; again M. q^3TT% or verb is the ordinary second pret. indie, of the regular verb to remain ; but it is used as the past tense of the defective snr. The verb is a regular verb with a complete conjugation, from which the remainder of the defective tenses of the verb srrt* are supplied.^ Examples see in § 510* Note 1: i 'When the past tense is used as an auxil. verb, it expresses past action generally, „he was “ , precisely like m in H. H. But according to circumstances, it may retain its ordinary meaning „he remained as the past tense of t° remain, and express past action as enduring, precisely like in H. H. Tfius E* H. he had said = H. H. err, or he remained saying, he Jcept saying — H. H. sr^t 7?>t. * Note 2: The past tense or of the verb to he is never used as a mere auxil. verb, but always has its full meaning „he became u , and expresses the commencement and con- tinuation of an action (§ 538, g). Thus E. H. he "began saying , but he was saying . The corresponding Gd. forms are: W. H. UUT (auxil. err), M. cFTToTT (aux. %tcTT or m), G. ^oTT (aux. ^ciV). 514. Affinities and Derivation . The various verbs which are used as auxiliaries in Gd. are the following: 1) The verb STTT. It occurs as a defective auxil. in E. H. and B. ; in both only in the pres, indie. ; but in M.‘ and S. it is a principal verb with a complete conjugation, and is used to form compound verbs; viz., 362 PERIPHRASTIC TENSES. *§ 514 .] M. airit’ to applar (Man. 92 ; in W. H. in the denom. form am* 0 ), S. afPP to continue (Tr. 344). It is derived from the Skr. R- Pr. as or at . The B. pres, indio. (eg. 1. aft. 2 - srfra, 3. ar; Pl 1 "af z, 2 '. as, 3. sfcO is > as usua1 ’ identical tbe ° ld Pr. pres, indie, (see § 501, 4). Thus 3. sg. Skr. a*-*, Pr. ^ B a§\ From the other Pr. form a** comes the E. H. *1* (for CHJ) or ai by the elision of a (§ 153). As regards the other E H. forms «*, at**, etc. which are different for the two gen- ders it is more probable that they are denominatives, made by adding the personal suff. of -the old prgs. indie. (§ 503, l, p. 345) to the part. Skr. aw, P. 8f (H. 0. 2, 29) existing (of R. aa). Thus 1 . sg . masc. Skr. ^tsfar, Pr. ajS*, Ap. Pr. E. H.aiJ X am ; fern. Skr. (st. f.) af^rfai, Pr. affwG*, Ap. Pr. *^*5 or *afN». E. H/ari, etc. - 2) The verb ^ is used only ia E.H. as an auxil., and only in the 2 nd pret. indie. Other- wise it is in E. H. as well as in all other Gds. a regular prin- cipal verb, „to remain“. It is commonly (in E. H., W. H., P., S.) used to make a kind of (continuative) compound verb (see § 538, b). — 3) The verb fTpa to be occurs in E. H. as we as in all other Gds., both as an auxiliary and as^ a principal, with a complete conjugation. It is derived from the 1 Skr. . V, thus 3. sg. pres. conj. E. H. Pr. or ^ 60) ’ Skr. «srfH. As an auxil., however, it has m -E. H. a specia preg. indie, which is made by adding the personal suff. of the oM pres, indie. (§ 503, 1) to the part. Skr. m, Pr. (§ 307, 7) or fcm Tta 1. .g. sk*. P,^, Ap. Pr. .), in E. H. fTW. The negative form ap- pears to have arisen by incorporating the negative particle H not* There are similar negative verbal forms in M?, see Nro. 4* — 4) The verb or or i| he is. It occurs in the S. GcL, N. Gd. and W. Gd. (exc. G.), but not in the E. Gd. (exc. Bs.) ; and it exists only in the pres, indie, (see Man. 88 . Tr. 300. Kl. 201. Ld. 25), as shown in the following table: Singular. 0. H. Bs. M. s. Br. Mw. P. N. H.H. 1 . or irr' J or 5 V % it) m f SJTftjlf tr i f # 2 . or $rff|r or 5 f|r 9tV -?> j|* Ar is) 5^? 1 ■ a or ^ or OT!?t" 3. j ^^or ^or A Sfft A A f A $nrf| Plural. * 1 . ^ or ^F| A in !#? CN 2 . orfj or «TfT : $ or - # - 3. STfff or^ff or wf A w 1 gr^r o *-■ i A ^ | ? A & or or aiftfir A ori^r 1 ) Beames in J. R, A. S. Ill, 495 mentions negative form HTW he is not and an affirmative W he is, and El. 199, 873 follows him. But my authorities deny the existence of either form. 364 PERIPHRASTIC TENSES. *§ 514 .] The origin of this auxil. verb is uncertain. It is commonly iden- tified with the JSkr. E. to he (e. g., Tr. 300. 304). r This view must assume a change of ^ to fr , and also a change of class; for the Skr. E. is^of the II. cl., while the Gd. verb is of the VI. cl.; e. g., 1. sg. 0. H. represents a Skr. "Torn Pr. *srffrr, Ap. *^3' (see H. C. 4, 385); or Gd. = Skr. Pr. None of the Pr. gramm., however, as for as I am aware, notice any such change in the E. There would be also a difficulty in accounting for the initial in M. and S. On the whole, therefore, I api inclined to identify this Gd. auxil. verb with the pres, indie, of the R. to be. This root may become in Pr. ^oT (H. C. 4, 60) and in Gd. gr; thus 3. sg. Skr. JTorffT, Pr. fpj. Mw. Jr (Kl. 232). The form i would easily become i|. * On the other hand, instead of suppressing r it (or rather W, see § 132) may be transposed; thus the Pr. E. might become in Gd. Wjp and thence ^Tl[, with.^nr as com- pensation for the elided sr ; e. g., 3. sg. Pr. = Bs. or M. snri[, etc. It may be ^observed, that the Skr. 3. pi. HSrfH is even in Ap. Pr. contracted to or (H. C. 4, 406.416), which would regularly become in W. H. (see § 497, 2. f, p. 337). The M. possesses a negative form of this verb. If is defective, occuring only in the pres. ind. ; viz., sing. 1. RTfP, 2. 3. Hrff; plur. 1. 2. RlfT, 3. ^TfPc^. There is an oth^r defective negative verb in M., which occurs only in the pres, and pret, * indie. ; viz., pres. sing. 1. 2. or 3. ^5%; plur. 1. or 2. ^Tc^T or 3. or Rc pret sing. masc. 1. ^5|[rTP, 2. ^TcfcTTH , 3. Hc^rTT; plur. 1. Hc^rfP, 2. ^c^rTT, 3. ^o^rT. See Man. 88. 89. This negative form, however, really belongs to the verb (M. ^trrr't), see Nro. 3. Besides M. has a complete negative form of the verb $rcniT w (see Nro. 5), which is made by changing the initial 33* to H ; e. g., inf. HHUp; l.sg. pres. ind. I am noT, from I am, etc. See Man. 89. — 5) The verb or 5% or ^ he is . It occurs in the S. Gd. and N. Gd., in all W. Gds. (exc. Br.), and in all E. Gds. (exc. Bh. PERIPHRASTIC TENSES* 365 §514.]^ — and Bs.)* In M. it has a complete conjugation ^Man. 84 — 86 ), even* in & negative form, see Nro. 4 ; in B., Mth., Mw,, P., Em. it exists in the pres, and pret. tenses; and the rest have it only in the pres, tense. In S. even the pres, is fragmentary, ' In M., P. axti S., 5 is changed to H (see § 11). In B., though $ is written, commonly pronounced, see footnote on p. 84 9. The following comparative table shows the various forms of this auxil. verb : $ % 'g B'S ^ "ft? % By By 8? r • d r . i y i v %f If %f i Bs W so so , % % tu ft? fc B? B? BJ - n a i. ■'i $ uo « •r-i CO od £ | | - *° 1 1 -t cpmsap ^unsap Ph 2 fc ^ % i /ft? s'ft? /& O Jlftvter /ley Jler 'Ey ^ cpmsap ^unsap 5 l©4 ^leb^ ^ler D & 'Ey ^iey 'Ey 'Ey 'Ey & & & 'S' 15- IS- & M - - — S3 B B Ti d 5 fe 6 B B B •zq ®IB, g! IB- * s s w/ SO W J ^unsap S c^unsap Mth. Biff IS a rjg t i tt \&( £ * ley cjfr Jr /fty B te- /fa* tx< 'IE fe' B m pq 5 d? IB, Ifir # la, % BS RS BS • . H (M CO By t?y us d ¥ s i©9 ley - Naip. s. Kn. 1. 'TccT C. £. vS ° or sr c. g. firerratm., fqs^f. ?T m. ? eft f. 2. srra c. g. fejft or zzft 1 c. g. fqq3 m., ftf f. £r m., sft f. 3. *N erar c. g. fej?r or 7 c. g. fq^T m., fq^f. et m., srl f. H. H. P. f G. 1. S' m., gif. qm., srbrf f. STSTT m., qzrf f., qJTT n. 2. ^ m., H f. q m., qbsrf f. tTOT m., qql f., surf n. 3. q m., q) f. ^ m., #fcr? f. mr w., qjfl f., mi n. The pres. conj. is : *1 . sg. Or. qdr, S. fqsrf; 2. sg. Or. qro^, S. fq(r or srT; 3. sg. G. qr?T , S. fq^; 1. pi. G. q& or qq, S. fins; 2. pi. G. arrert, S. fqst; 3. pi. G. qrq, S. fq^u or qtq.- The pres, indie, is in G. qrfjf, etc., S. firarqt, etc.^ (see § 501, 1. 5); the firfc. indie, in G. qsr_, etc., S. qrgw, etc. (see § 509, 2. 6. 7); the imper. G. qT or qnr,' etc., S. UTa or etc. (see §§ 497. 499); the infin. in G. era, S. ferauj the part. pres, in G. 7ciV, S. TT^V; the adv. part, in G. era or eraf, B. — The ori- ginal of this verb appears to he the Skr. R. ^rr stand , exist, which in Pr. becomes ST or err (H. C, 4, 16); e. g., 3. sg. Pr. 5T^(H. C. 4,^436) or err^ G. 7T7 ; 3. pi. Pr. effir (H. G. 4, 395) or *mf% (cf. H C. 4, 382), G. erra . The S. fertrr to be is de- rived from the R. OTT, just as S. Pram to drink, from R. 7T, S. fratrT to give, from R. 57 ; i. e., it is founded on a reduplicated radical form *fwr (for the ordinary Skr. fr^), analogous to fer, « TEIRTH CHAPTER. CONJUGATION. 1. THE DEFECTIVE A.UXILIATY VERB. 515. There is only a pres, tense; the pret. is supplied from the verb to remain and the rest from the complete auxil. •verb to be (see §§ 513. 516). 368 AUXILIARY VERBS. $ 516 .] a) Present tense - : I am, etc. Sing. Masc. Fem. Plur. Masc. Fem. 1. surf *) STFJ ts srrrf 2. STTS^Or mZ ©ufelor oTT^f mz% or ©nr mu O- 3. snror^T^orsrT mzormq^oTm ‘nS, IS)' STC 5tTfr“ J b) Preterite tense : I was, etc. Sing. Masc. Fem. Plur. Masc. Fem. 1. T*f" 2. ■^fRFt^Or JfSTT or 2. THE WEAK COMPLETE AUXILIARY YERB. 516. This verb is complete with the exception of the pret., which is supplied from the verb to remain, to dwell ; see §513, note 2. Indicative mood, a) Present tense: I am, etc. Sing. Masc. Fem. Plur. Masc. Fem. 1. fTi 5TT 3 ) (4» 2. $v. CN 1HHT ^ter^or ^or 3. fril or fT fra or ft Al tel llcr b) Preterite tense : I was, etc. This is 'the same as the pret. of the def. auxil. verb ; see § 515, b. c) Future tense: I shall he, etc. Sing. Masc. and Fem. Plur. Masc. ahd Fern. 1 . ftsrT° or ftpfT" fTsr or fT^ or ft^or 2. or fi^sira or fra or fT^sr 3 ) or ff^sr^or ftsr or ft^sr 3. 1) Throughout, the initial consonant may optionally be 5T^ or ©C&, and m the low forms of E. H. the medial cons, may be or ^ (§ 145) 2) The masc. form may throughout be used also as frm. 3) Fem, also : or ^T5?l' or or § 517,1 AUXILIARY VERBS. 369 .Conjunctive mood, d) Present tense : I be, etc. Sing. Masc. and Pem. Plur. Masc, and Fern. ff 2. f? ITf or ft 3. fta ft\. e) Preterite tense : I ivere, etc. Sing. Masc. Fern. Plur. Masc. Fern. 1. ftfflr” OrfTr 1. 2. q^T^-° r * 3. trs&T^P- _ r plur* Masc p. 1?^ Q 2 .q^T^° r o t. S.q^T^- 01 * Sing. Pem. q^T T^- o cv q^t plur. Pem. q^Tf . 036^ Q - q^I^ OT ^ ~° r W t . i shall have read, etc. m ) future exact . plaT _ iviasc. and.*/ . Sing. M»«- “ 4 !“• ,. «s. ° 0 s? 9 - . ° ^ *s jvl. or q° rfmT /a« s . 0 ®<^ « CMi0 „«„ »o.a. tn , . /if) I he readinf n) Putare condition* - - ^ M,/ gtc- Sing. *»»• a : d m ' q^L^o^.’ and Pem. 1 . q^fL^J or " 0 ^5. q° ^T^r"' 2. q»L^ 01 q ° o ^l q^/ or ^ or q°^ or 3. «L*L co n()it. - GMi » ^ ** 0 ) Sura j W :u,-e reading, etc. ■V Smg. Pem. Sing. Masc. 1. q^l^^ Q 2. q^J^ or q Q 3 . orq ; ^ Plp^H p. v&jRL/- Maso - 2. q^U^" 3. q^at orq °^ tH 1 -o lper- q^l^f- , q^sT ^tfnH or q 0 q^fT.#l or q ° ^ Plur. Pem. q^rrjft^l. q^T^rf, ■ _ ~v. rr° HTF?!' REGULAR ACTIVE VERB. 375 §§ 522 ^ 523 .] . p) Fut. exact condit. : (if) 1 have reah, etc. Sing. Masc. and Fem. Plur. Masc. and Fem, 1. q^#r ftnf or q° ftwU q^£r ftf * or q° ftwt^ 2, ft or q° ftw q^#r ftf or q°-ftwf etc. 8. ft?L or q° ftw q^r ft# or q° * q) Preterite condit. : (if) I had read, etc. Sing. Masc. 1. qqg^r ftcFf u 2. q^^r ft&^or q° ft?r 8, q^^ftrT^ orq°ftil Plur. Masc. 1. q^rfT^r 2. q^r fW or q° ft?r 3. q&k ft#:r or q° ffcV* Sing. Fem. q^ftr# N Cs cr^ or ^Wft cra^r ^ih_ or ir$ Plur. Fem. q^T ft^ q^FT ftr£T q^$f ftftq^or q° ^TctT 522. Participles. a) Adjectival : pres, q^n '^reading , past ^^[Jlaving read or read . b) Conjunctive : q^ ^ or qi^ having read . c) Adverbial : pres, q^i? or q^ft reading, past q^r on having read . , Infinitives. Nom. q^^ tfo read, acc. q^sr m or qt ^ for to read or for reading, instr. q^sr q or q, etc. Noun of agency. Masc. or fem. q^ffTf reader, or fem. 6. LIST OF TYPICAL REGULAR ACTIVE VERBS. 523. Elements. a) dwell, root It- bases T^L b) qhrsr^ drink, 55 Jgv qt or qtq , 55 qteru , c) drip, 55 55 *??*» =cnag: or =5ToI©r , C"- ’ 55 0330 . 55 =£rsr^r d) fVas weep, 55 ft 55 ftau, "{UJ5T or 5 55 (ftO 55 frau, , ^tolQt^. 876 REGULAR ACTIVE VERB. j 523 .] £f a > r> a) Present indicative. Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. 715T s , ftf^T qravrr /y\ N crro^T U I •N % Pn j l “(T^Tcr?^ f^63VT_ b) First preterite. Masc. and Fem. Masc. and Fem. T%L. m X Second preterite. Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. • ferccr^ * & . K 5 -« 5 ar *>*#-**' •-lb) vm*&or* r gJ w 5 *na"or»f IP •Bib) ot^STtV or Q - -o-tA-arBj - | c) ^s*L«n& or < $ar ^ ^ai^ors^ y y X lid) T rarmTCorft°|ra IfwiSTT or^a ^ ^ 1) Pluperfect indicative. Masc. and Fem. Masc. l[;!2S: JS?: Sg lie) WLm «.ip. tpsa jsss? gS i s PS IPS Sift-; k. re«'ll»g p«lpb~tt> *— «. — ■*« *“• logy of Nro. g and 1. g 2 4. Participles. Adjectival. ' 'Conjunctive. Adverbial^ a) T^l- 1^- ^ * 1} 2 « uv Shm ' a w ^ ' rro ^ r 524 . Adjectival. a) T^rL. b) =^JH =f5I5T ftVH flW f) Or : 7 ^ S»i ®* etc- 378 IRREGULAR ACTIVE VERB. §§ 52 $. 526 .] a) 7 ^ b) c) d) ^fosr_ Infinitives. Acc. ^ ek or y^ar if „ viv if or cRif if „ $i or =cjw $* „ ft$r ir or 5 rt Noun of agency. a) ^fil^TT, b) c) d) fem. °ft 7. IRREGULAR ACTIVE VERBS. 525. There are three kinds of irregularities. J Firstly; some verbs add the suffixes rT^ and sr^ instead of or (of the pres, indie.), (of the pres, part.) and or (of the fu- ture). This^ is done by all verbal roots in m and ^ and «by the root be. But the roots in and the R. may optionally take Secondly ; some verbs have a special form of the past par- ticiple (and of all tenses derived from it), of the conjunctive part., and of the first preterite tense. These are the verbal roots: cfqr do, fcqr put, ^tst ^come, 3ToT find, stt go, \ give, % take, be. Thirdly ; the two verbal roots 5 give and ^ take add no suffix in the 2. and 3. pers. sing. pres. conj. and imper. r Note also, that ^TST or ^oT, or OT, ^FT^T or are often contracted into sn f or ^ respectively (see §34). The following verbs will serve as types : to eat, STTsr, to go, ^sr to give , ^ter to be, do, mof^io come. All other verbs in %T are conjugated like ^Tsr^;. to take is conjugated like i^sr^ put like sr^srj c noTsr Jo find like srfors^. 526. a) Present indicative. 1. sing. 8. sing. 1. plur. 3. plur. a) srT^TT W sHW sTT^rTF V) 5:wtV“* <0 fTW § 526.fl IRREGULAR ACTIVE VERB. 379 b) First preterite. t 1. sing. 3. sing. 1 . plnr. 3. plur. a) nut" rrfro^ nm rmr^ b) ffft” fzm ’c) ntfr ^ m d) p- "V 1 ^ TOTT f&m e) {£) SfTHIT mm f) ^rrsTT WT^ WTOT Second preterite. a) *) m^i 1 ) rrf^rt i) JTfcFFT 1 ) b) fffsrt fff^r_ ^foft c) n^rr' 9 *) wist *) *) d) ) gr^ra^ 1 ) cft^vtt x ) cH^Tf 1 ) e ) srro^ 1 ) sr^ft *) * f) ^tr 1 ) jp^ra 1 ) or 3tsr^ Participles. Conjunctive. sTT?T^ 5 ) £ ^ # £ & Adverbial. HTH, JT, 5 ®f>» m UT, etc. 6) Or: m^u^srorlirEfi'; uqaj, sr^sr or etc. §§ 528 ', 529 .] COMPOUND PASSIVE VERB. 381 8. 1 THE REGULAR COMPOUND PASSIVE VERB. 528. The forms of the pass, verb are composed of the past part, in of the principal (i. e. active) verb and the tenses of tSe verb ?FTsr to go (§ 479).. The formation of the past part, is explained in §§ 802 — 807; and the conjugation of the verb ?TTsMs given in §§ 525 — 527. The form of the past part, never changes, but 'the forms of the verb fn&r^vary, as usual, according to the person, number and gender of the subject. ■ ^Present indicative. Sing. Masc. Sing. Fem. 1 . STTSTT 2. q:£*T sTTS^U or q° sTT^T , sfTiWh or q0 3. q:S3T cTT^fT 5TT#f Plur. Masc. u Plur. Fem. 1 . r sTT^rfr sTT^yTT 2. sTT^Tg; or q° sTTorT sTTorST 3. sTTsH. or q° rTT^-" q^T ?TT%^or q°?n^ The rest of the tenses may be formed after the above manner. Participles. Adjectival. Conjunctive. Adverbial. *7° rarar. sror. w srm q° Infinitives. Nouns of agency. *7° ^ & or A ?rrfofqr ; fem. °ff 9. IRREGULAR COMPOUND PASSIVE VERBS. 529. There are only two irregular verbs; viz. sTTST to go and be (§479,exc.). The former uses the participial form sTTST^U, instead of JTET^ in the formation of the compoifhd pass., the latter the part, form or > optionally, All other active verbs, which form an irregular past part, (see §§ 527. 304), use the same also in the- comppund pass. Thus, it is done ; «nvTT it is given ; but sTra^u siT^rr it can go (lit. it is gone)? 4*8^3 rat it can be, see § 530. 382 POTENTIAL PASSIVE VEEB. §§ 58 , 6 . 531 .] 530. The pass, voice of intrans. verbs is only used in an impersonal and potential sense. Thus, iff ^T sHW lit. by me it cannot be sat, i. e., I cannot sit ; or =TTsft u (or SHr^STT^ I cannot stand up. Note: The compound pass, verbs should be carefully dis- tinguished from the compound intensitive verbs; see § 588, a. 10. THE POTENTIAL PASSIVE VEEB. 5 31. The potent, pass, verb, as to the formation of which see § 482, is conjugated precisely lik$ * any other (active) verb in ^T, e. g., like to eat, the conjugation of which is given in §§ 525 — 527. a) Present : I ' can be read, etc. Sg. Mascr- Fern. PI. Masc. Fern. 1. qr^rT TOTW C"- TOT^cFTT tot^tt' 2. q^rfvra 1 ) TOT^a €> 3. 'TOPyTT TOT^r TOTcrFL 1 ) b) Preterite : I could be read , etc. 1. sg. masc. TO^dr'*’ or TO# W ; 3. sg. TOTa*^or TOT3^, etc. There is no first preterite form of the potent, pass. ' c) Future : I shall be able to be read , etc. 1 . sg. masc. TOqSTi'^ or TOsrT*’ or TOT#' 1 ) S.sg.TOT^; pl.TO^f orTO^*, etc. d) Pres. conj. or imper. : 1 may be able to be read, etc. r Smg. 1. TOT 4L 2. TOT or TOlf 3. TOT^ ? Plur. 1. TO'fi"' 2. TOTtf or TOT 3. TO'T^ e) Pret. conj. : 1 would be able to be read, etc. 1. sing. masc. TOTffi^; plur. TO# or TOT^rT., etc. Periphrastic tenses. g) Bur. pres. 1. sg. masc. TOTr^oTRr^or cr° f[# u , etc. h) Dur. pret. „ „ etc. i) Dur. fut. „ * „ TOTrT^^tsft u or q° ^fSrT, etc. 1) Or: 2. sg. m. TOT# f. TOT#; pi. m. TOT3T; 3. pi. m. TOT#, f. TOT#*. r SIMPLE CAUSAL YERB. 383 §§ 582 . 533 .] k) Perfect 1 l) Pluperfect . sg . masc. t^Ttr^STT^t^or g° ^ToTT or g-<§ c^5T° or *1 , etc. „ „ tmzr^X^rt" or etc. Participles. Adjectival. Conjunctive. q^TrU, q^ET^Tor q^T^rT^ q^EI, Infinitives. g^r^or g^isr , q^TU & or ^ Adverbial, g:^, g^^r or q^ Nouns of agency. g^rfufT^, fem. °ft f 11. IRREGULAR POTENTIAL PASSIVE YERBS. 53 2. There is only one anomalous case; viz. the verb. to eat It forms its potent, pass, root irregularly, viz. f%UT ; but the root, thus formed, is conjugated quite regularly* Observe also, that the verbs to give and to take make their potent, pass, roots i^rT and f^UT (§ 482). The verbs to come , sTrsr^ to go and to be possess no potent, passive. 12. THE SIMPLE CAUSAL YERB. 533. The simple causal verb, as to the formation of which see § 4 74, is conjugated regularly like any other (active) verb in 5Tj provided that- °^T5fr° becomes ^T§ (§ 33) and antepenulti- mate 0 ^TcT°, %rET° become €3 or $rf, or \ (§ 34). a) Present: I cause to read or I teach , etc. 1. sg. masc. or g^ToFcrrT; pi. q^T^w, etc. b) First pret. : I caused to read or I taught , etc. Sg. l. g^nfr' 5 ', 2. and 3. g^T^rj pi. 1. q^Err, 2. g^rar, 3. g^r^. Second preterite. 1. sg. g^3ar" or g^r^fr"; pi. g:$33?t or garter!', etc. c) Future: I shall cause to read or I shall teach. , *etc. Sg. 1. g^rr* or gilsff' or g rsssfT or g^srY', 3. g^, etc. PI. l. g^rr^ or g^rss^, 3. g^^" or g^f*, etc. d) Pres. conj. or imper. : I may cause to read, etc. Sg. 1. q^^crf', 2. g^rah or g^Ej or g^o, 3. g^iir. 384 DOUBLE CAUSAL VERB. f % 534.] e) Fret, conj,: I would cause to read , etc. 1. sg. masc. 3F^ I am in the habit of doing (Sn. 42). In the ordinary P., as in H. H., the form of the conj. part, "does not differ from that of the root; e. g., ©TT^sr^crTT to he able to read , m f ZWT to finish eating (Ld. 70, d). — 2) As regards those compounds in which the principal verb takes the form of the obi. infin., the latter js the aec. case of the infin. governed by the auxil. verb. Thus to to read often ib lit. to do reading, crpl fT'fsr_ to he about to die is lit. to desire dying . This is clearly seen from the 0., which actually adds the acc. affix ^ to the obi. inf. irf^srT 37 ^Tfl 1 desire to die, SFff^STT $7 ^rffrr I begin to do (Sn/41. 12). The termination of the obi. inf. is 5TT in G p in P., xrr in S.; e. g., G. sfterr vmfr he began to see (Ed. 51), P. qfi&ETT he is m the habit of reading (Ld. 7 0, e), S. ^trr vttm to begin to cry (Tr, 344, 4). The B. alone forms an ex- ception, in using the obi. form of the pres. part, in (or the adverbial part.) in the place of the obi. inf. ; e. g., B. *rf^rT I desire to die, I am able to do (S. Oh. 192, 4. 5). Kellogg’s conjecture (p. 192), that the H. H. form in m (as TOT cFTpTT to be in the habit of reading) is not the masc. sing, of the past part, but a „gerund“ (i. e., obi. infin.) and identical with* the B. obi. inf. in (S. C. 149), is quite true. — 3) In those compounds, where the principal verb is in the form of an adj. part., the latter really stands in the position of a predicate to the sub- ject or object of the (auxil.) verb. Thus S TOrT^l^®^ he con- tinues reading is lit. he is going as a reader, or 3T he wishes ho die is lit. he wishes (himself) as dead . It appears, therefore, that, strictly speaking, none of these so-called com- pound verbs are really compounds, but in every case the part, or infin. of the principal verb is in ordinary grammatical con- struction of some sort with the (so-called) auxil. verb. — 4) These r various comp, verbs occur in all Gd. languages, and l are generally ADVERBS. 389 §§ 54Q. 541.] formed in the same way, though sometimes a different auxil. verb is #sed! Thus B. and 0. use cross for ^ in potent. (S. Oh. 192, 4. Sn. 41, 2), B. TOg, 0. stand for ^ in oontin. and for qqr in frequent. (S. Ch. 191, 1. 192, 3. Sn. 42); P. has 1[£ tvitli draiv, S. £r?r take, beside in complet. (Tr. 342, c. Ld. 70, d); S. cm <70 for §TT in intens. (Tr. 339, a). One exception has been already mentioned in Nro. 2. — 5) Traces of these comp, verbs already occur in Prakrit. Thus there are desidera- tives in the Bhagavati, made by constructing, the R. ivisli with the past part. past, in ^ET; e. g., iTTrfsrtf $tof fe^rrf&Ef m * sn jf&m, i. e., 1 wish myself to shave , myself to instruct, myself to teach the law, E. H. ^t^Y u fvr^TTor^L ^Ttrfr mm See Wb. Bh. 275. 433 *). FIFTH SECTION. INDECLINABLES. 540. There are four kinds of indeclinables or words in- capable of inflexion: 1) adverbs, 2) postpositions, 3) conjunctions, 4) interjections. 1. ADVERBS. 541. Adverbs may be either nominal, pronominal, numeral, verbal or original, according as they are derived from noups, pro- nouns, numbers, verbs or from none of these. Again each of these classes may be divided into adv. of time, place and manner. Most adv. are native Hindi, but there are a very few of foreign 1 ) may be derived from R. (or for Skr. ef. Pr. = <£5^, for Skr. „to instruct, to initiated — The E. H. root sgTsf or may be better derived from the noun ^x^T, by the loss of initial ^ and the transfer of the aspiration of W (§ 182). Thu^Skr. Pr. Gd. or xTll| or Accordingly §178 should be corrected. 390 NOMINAL ADVERBS. §§ 543, 548.] P origin, whose native equivalents are obsolete. Again most adv. 0 consist of only one word; but there are some that consist of a phrase or of a repetition of the original word. The following list of adv. lays no claim to completeness. The Sanskrit or foreign source of each is added in brackets. 542. Nominal adverbs of time, 1) four days ago or four days hence (for Skr. ; cqsfT three days ago or three days hence (Skr. ; qr^rT the day before yester- day or the day after to-morrow (Skr. qq-sjsQ ; or or yesterday or to-morrow (Skr. g^ar); to-morrow , at daybreak (Skr. fsHTirr) ; or ^sTcrr to-day (Skr. ot); wT hitherto (Skr. sjsrTfq’) ; trC[ the past year (Skr. W(-3ctm or oTTf, cf. §§ 69. 30); rT^$r or ffcrsrq at daybreak, at down (W. H. rtm, Skr. FTTcFT, fi^-5m=q); always (Skr. £r?sr); or #T3T before (§§ 77, exc. 78, exc.); qnw or or after- wards (§§ 77, exc. 78, exc.); 7^ or or (§§ 61. 131) or sr|fj again (Skr. cpq, srjO ; f^PT lastly (Skr. dto). — 2) Ad- verbial phrases ; srr fi^r or yesterday (lit. that day or day of before) ; OTJTcT (lit. becoming red) or gfepq (lit. on clearing off of darkness) at down, early \ ; (lit. the day having risen) late in the morning ; always (lit. every day ) ; frequently ; ^?iqr once (etc., see § 409); ^Tsj^T^or ftrL noiv-a-days. — 3) Eepetitions; every day ; or stsstT StSStT sometimes ; srq'ciTJ’ frequently . — 4) Fo- reign ; c ^TfiPqr (arabic y>t ). 543. Nominal adverbs of place, 1) or ^stt^ be- fore (§§ 210. 77, exc. 78, exc.); cr^rft or or qgsn^ or %° behind (§§210. 7 7, exc. 78, exc.); 3^37 a&wc (Skr. 3*lff); or f^r^TT "iefow (Skr. 4?Nr, of fir-#^); or ^TjTeT in front (Skr. s*gw) ; srf|ff or without (see § 2 1 7, p. 1 1 0) ; srra or (Skr. ^r, of surround, cf. § 374, p. 223, or from fir-$ra surround) ; or tstHI (see § 545) or or ^ or firq; near (Skr. cf. § 104); qrfe or ^ror far (see §§ 172. 144); e^er^ wftere (Ap. Pr. tost, Skr. sisrsr). — 2) Phrases; ^m^i%far (lit. some NOMINAL ADVERBS. 391 §§ 544 f 545.] ■miles = W. H. f%?r Skr. ?rtst, Pr. H. G. 3, 65, cf. §§ 4$8, 4. 464). 544. Nominal adverbs of manner , 1) (Skr. g^fT^rg??) or ^fsfnr (Skr. vrdrrr) accidentally , suddenly ; wrrr^ sepa- rately (Skr. much (Skr. 3rj^) ; ^WT or or ) ; ^sr^t; sr especially (lit. giving respect; arab, ujoS); OTScT or slowly (pers. Xv*£>t). 545. Derivation. Adverbs in ^ or ^ or ^ are modifica- tions of the Ap. Pr. loc. sing, in ufl[, as explained in §§ 77, exc. 378. — Adverbs in 3C are modifications of the Ap. Pr. abl. or *loc. sing, in ^T, see §§ 78, exc. 376. 378. — Adv. in ^ are mo- difications of the Ap. Pr. loc. sing, in or see §§ 45. 378; e. g., Skr. TOTT, Pr. tot, Ap. TOT or cfif§r, E. H. TO% or TOf^r. — Adv. in a quiescent are modif. of the Ap. Pr. acc. sg. or loc. sg. ; see §§41. 45; e. g., Skr. TOST, Pr. TOT, E. H. TOST; the latter, however, might have arisen by the quiescence of the final ^ in the Ap. Pr. or E. H. TOff§T. — The element (in etc.) appears to be the contraction of an Ap. Pr. abl. or loc. (see § 37 6), of sfV (Skr. Sp), formed irregularly after the analogy of nouns (e. g., abl. f$oiw, of f^or^V day). — E. H. ^THT'is derived with the pleon. suff. $f©rr from $fTsT^, and ^sfoTT is contr. to see § 199. — E. H. fitgsrt^r contains an anomalous meta- 392 VERBAL ADVERBS. §§ 546 — 548 .] thesis of m, if is correctly derived from Skr. fit^TSTTOp broken day“, „ day-break “ ; whence Pr. *fwjrsrerE[ or *fiTTjrfc=rT{, Ej, H. — In fer and CCT the 07 and ^ are, perhaps, assimila-” tions to rtFT^ (§ 547); S. has regularly fhfuT or urirr or out (Tr. 410). — E. H. STff^- is formed by the addition of the pleon. suff. ^ to Skr. aj, just as in E. H. sn fgrf^ , see §§ 543. 217. — E. H. VITT^, etc. contain the pleon. suff. (i. e-) ^ 3 + *)> as gained in §§ 210: 217. - E. H. zerffvr and contain the pleon. suff. ^TT, see § 199. — E. H. anW is, pro- bably, a corruption of the persian which may be heard m Hmdi as -isTryj (see § 21, 2), and whence by transposition (see §133) would arise the $ being now medial, is regularly softened to n, see § 102. - E. H. and ^ are really' W. Gd. adverbs; tbs former is the conj. part., the latter the obi. form of the pres. part, of the verbal root (M.), ^ (p.), f®L(S-), %T or (H.) move, go. Thus conj. part. S. (Tr 313), pres. part. ^ (Tr. 313), P. _ E. H. ^ is the pres. part, of the verbal root rctfor^ be quick. — £ is regularly derived from the Skr. srcEfTTU having one’s object not chne r ^successful, Pr. or Ap. Pr. mnrf, whence contr. E. H. ggrw or srem-pL (see §§ 13 7. 138). 546. The pronominal and numeral adverbs have been al- ready enumerated in §§ 467 — 469 and in §§ 402. 417. 419 . respectively. 547. Verbal adverbs. Many conjunctive participles may be used as adverbs ; e. g., ftfcjr or fejr m again (Skr. qfp-^ go round), f*r% or together, knowingly,. quickly (§ 545), etc. By the addition of the conj. part. ^ £ or is having done to nouns, adjectives and numerals adverbial phrases may be^formed; e. g., aw 3! gladly (lit. having made joy ); ^ 37 37 singly (lit. having made one by one), etc. 548. Particles of affirmation and negation. The former are ^ or m m or ST or or yes, or lit. Why not. The latter are * or or Trff or srffT or SfT%. no, not. PARTICLES. 393 §§ 549 "— 551 .] The prohibitive particle is do not , used with £he imper. only. Thu§ f do not act thus, but or qf»° you do *not ad thus. 549. Affinities and Derivation . fTT is a contr. of the Pr. cfe (Yr. 4, 6), Skr. ?ngH . — E. H. it, S. ^3 (Tr. 419) is the Skr. ftoT, used (like Skr. ^ToTT, E. H, ^T). 557. Affinities and Derivation. Most of these have mentioned in §§ 3 74ff. — The origin of sn?r is obscure; it is probably derived from the Skr. srw being ; cf. the Pashtu vatah; or perhaps it may be a corruption of the Urdu srrerT (arab. ^Jaw!#,), see § 143; it is peculiar to E. H.; the W. H. has f&rcr. — E. H. ©r£ is sometimes used like the arabic iOw in exchance for. — E. H. lit. sacrifice , substitute . see § 18, p. 23. — E. H. q^ is Skr. qror in return for , see § 143, — is probably connected with the root hnmv; the Pr. has ^ or ^TTcT^ (H. C. 4, 444) r , §§ 558 ^ 561 .] CONJUNCTIONS. 395 3. CONJUNCTIONS. 558. Copulative conjunctions', or or (§§ 5, b. 26) or ar md\ a^r or uftorTfft or fuRT moreover ; arr — 5JT as well — as. "559. Affinities and Derivation. E.H. ffq, ap, Bs. st^ or 5rr.j is the Pr. sraj or Ap. ssq, Skr. auf ; B. has aif (S. Ch. 237), Br. H. H. uq, P. a.J (Ld. 71), N. J. The latter re- jects the initial a (of sq) and is used enelitically; e. g., 3a^5T sTUir — f nan Tie knew and said or 3o — T utur at sft get up and stand in the middle ! — E. H. U3 or at, B. at, also compounded arjat or aift (S. Cb. 23 7), 0. ar? or at (Sn. 46), M. a (Man. 103), Br. at, S. af (Tr. 410), are, probably, the Pr. afsr (H. C. 1, 4l), Skr. afa or aura. — S. has also af or f (Tr. 410), P. atH or fa, 0. H. (Chand) fa = Pr. a^ or ft, Skr. aft. — M. has also arfar or aunat ‘(Man. 103), Gr. af or f (Ed. 117); they are pro- bably the Pr. aur° or au°, Skr. a?Ucp or a^rw lit. another. — E. H. aft, etc. (§§ 61. 131), 0. aftr (Sn. 46), S. afar or faftfr or gar (Tr. 410), are the Pr. uuft or out (Spt. 276. H. C. 4, 426), Skr. 3*T- -W. H. has 5f3T — am as well — as, S. fta — fta (Tr. 4 1 0). 560. Adversative conjunctions ; sqfft or sufia or sr^ar (§561), ^rfiivT ^(arab. q&J), UJ U, 5rpr_ but. 561. Affinities and Derivation. sq% etc. are corrup- tions of the Persian sXb, see § 1 4 3 ; W. H. Sfvmjr, 51 T%, 5I<5|EK (Kl. 276), P. Brasfi (Ld. 7l). — E. H. tq is the Skr. tqsr, Pr. tfj-, also W. H., P., S. tq; on E. H., W. H. a see § 124; P. has also auf or ^cq (Ld. 71) — Skr. uufa . — E. H. sqq, W. H. srptrr, P. sq is Skr. sqa or arum . — W. H. has also tnq, P. Wf or qnV (Ld. 71), S. rvrtj (Tr. 412) = Pers. X». — 0. has crftjT (Sn. 46), M. unr (Man. 103), G-. urn (Ed. 117), S. ! ^ 3 will you take this or that ; sr^T ^3^Tf « colt or a filly ; sT — qror^rTT—- =T mither-nor ; e. g., R' rft ^ ^ 3 I shall take neither tins nor that ; =stt% — =5rn| or — q?t whether-ar ; e. g., xrr| f =50^; 3 : take either this or that (2. sg. imp.) or whether he take this or that (3. sg. pres. conj.). 563. Affinities and Derivation . E. H. srf is the Pr. af or sir (H. C. 1, 67), Skr. stt; H. E-, H. B., H. 0., etc. have oTT, also ^wr; the latter is preserved in 0. ^arT, contr. form Pr. ^ToTT (H. C. 1, 67), Skr. mm. — E. H. aft, *B. ffe (S. Ch. 240), 0. % or fwimT (S 11 . 46), M. c£T (Man. 103), W. H. f%, P. k or mk (Ld. 71), S, % or 3?t (Tr. 412), N. f% are probably the Pr. fSr, Skr. what. — E. H. =5ffi| is the 3. sg. pres. conj. of the verb to desire. B. also uses either-or (S. Ch. 240), S. rrft-^r rf or rrhrr-^r <7 or *rf-srf (Tr. 412); B. or m^m^neither- nor (S. Ch. 240), P. RT-^TT (Ld. 81). — S. has sTT or (Tr. 412). — W. H. and P. also use 3T, arabic b (Kl. 275. Ld. 71). 564. Conditional and concessive conjunctions ; srr or It if ?rr then ; sfr although , erssrt yet, nevertheless . 565. Affinities. 1) Condit. , B.srf^; — (Worrit (S. Ch. 238), 0. ?n§r - bk (Sn. 4 6), M. sq — cq (Man. II, 1 7), W. IL sfr or sit - ?rr or rrr, P. ir or ir eqr — rTT (Ld. 71), Gr. if or sit — rft (Ed. 1 1 7), S. ir or ir ^ — rT or rTT (Tr. 417), N. TOTT — rfT. — 2) Concess. ; B, sTf^W rfirat or rfsrar or rT^. (S. Ch. 240), O.B3 - — ifir or B^^Sn. 46), M. B^ or Sift — ?rft“ or rfft (Man. II, 17), W. H. (Br.) aft |f — fift f (Kl. 275), P." mar" — rTT m (Ld. 71), S. rib - or fftifr or tr or BrTft or BBftir-- B or erf or B fir or (TCfTlsr (Tr. 411), N. BT — 566. Derivahon. 1) Condit.; a) Skr. Jrft; (or B5T), Pr. BJ (Vr. 1, 11), E. H. B, P., S. B. — b) Skr. aff (Pr. Bft?), M. B^; similarly Skr. UTlf (Pr. Bfr ?), M. and N. BjT. — c) Skr. BTSTB , Pr. BIST (H. C. 1, ll) or BTCET (H. C, 4, 395) or B*5T (H. C. 4, 401), E.H. and W. H. ift, G. bV or S. bt (see § 563) or 0. BiB (§ 468, c); similarly Skr. BTSTB^, Pr. BTar or BJ*sr or B*B, E. H., W. H. ?TT, B,, W. H., G. m or P. BT, S. b~t or (shortened) B, CONJUNCTIONS. 397 §§ 567. p.] N. rFT ort 0. rTST, B. (shortening rtir. — d) The^ N. a^RTT is the conj. jpart. of the verb to say (Skr. tff&rranr), and is always placed at the end of the conditional sentence ; thus, oTT^rf cn^ditlT efft gsr^^renr, ftt ^htit sh ^rm ftt oqrfSr i. e., if (lit. having said that ) a 'son of peace be there, then your peace will remain upon him : if not, then it tvill again come. — 2) The concessive conj. are made by adding to the condit, eonj. some emphatic particle (see § 5 5 0) ; thus a) or 3 in B. srfsftt, Ap. Pr. Frfftrsr, Skr. zrafft; B. Hsrftt = Pr. ftrsr Ski-. FnsrFarfft (loc. sg.) ; B. ftst, E. H. „Frssft for ftsst + 3. — b) ft in W. H. f , ffr f . — c) ft K or ftt" in M. srft" or sift for sTij-f rlfT or Flft for — d) fir or ftt in S. FT T%, P. FTT ft), H. H. (Ti - — e) The emph. particle is reduplicated in 0. ftsrft u for ft-ft-ft^ S. FrftftPfsr for FT3'-ft)''“-fir. — f) The B. UT5T * is the Skr. ittsr indeed, truly, similarly N. uses FTT, E. H., W. H. etc. FTT or FTf; e. g., ^N. q- FTT ~7T3fft ft, ft^ >T f^rf^TT, i. e., I indeed am not afraid of god, yet I shall give. 567. Causal and final conjunctions ; a) fit orft|rft since, rft therefore. — b) ft?r ft or fti? ft therefore. — c) 3?Tf ftft because, for. — d) fts; ft in order that, so that — e) m sTFT lest — f) ?tt else, otherwise (lit., if not, then). m 568. Affinities and Derivation, a) B. ftt^ — ftt^ or FTT^ FT (S. Ch. 239), 0. ftrg — fttrr (Sn. 46), W. H. rft, P. FTT — FTT, S. sft — ftt or fterff — ftsrr, etc. (see Tr. 414. 415); not uncommonly paraphrased, e. g., B. and 0. ft ftrj — ft ftrT, M. sJFTaftt u — FFnrrajft N. FF^^TXtfT.— rr^arqTix, etc. — h) B. x'nr ft or 0- ^rr, M. FFTT^or W. H. fftgft” or fft^ft" 1 , P. ftt, S. ftt (Tr. 415); or paraphrased, e. g., B. ^ ^ftr, ^ fftfftft '(S. Ch. 23 9), 0. ft |ft (S n. 46), N. JTH aTTfOT, etc. — c) B. ft?FTFrr, M. cFTTcDft, W- H. or cftrpfdh', H. H. gftfftr, N. <=W"R_ ; or paraphrased, e. g., B. M. FFrrj[qT^' s , etc. — d) B. ^sTF^ft, ^Fr_ft (S. Ch. 238), W. H. fft^ft”, P. ?rf. - e) B. f% sTrfft, 0. f%5FTfftr, H. H. 5RTT Sift, lit. what do I or does he Tcnow, or B. crrft. lit. after- wards (S. Ch. 240); H. H. ?r ftt far, S. nr or *T sOT, lit. may 898 INTERJECTIONS. §§ 56JJ-671.] it not be that CTr. 415). — f) B. or g stt or WZRnL- — 6. Q. STS eRTW atfj aq raft ^wm 19 f 194 . A. faf raqmTm fen 6 & ateq 6 srr!' 9 ; srffT am 7 raa-m 19 . — 7. Q. atp siraSt ran ar srt wsq 8 srw_? A. ©real) mu am anq mfaq ana ; aifeq a faamr 2 a pT iqsr srq. — 8. Q. mfaa am 2 a; afira 9 mrar_? A. rare^ur am aftm, srrf§> m as saqi; raft 19 |w qu . — 9. Q. aVrau sna a) raft? A. ft af ms. snqqfan. — 10. Q. f arrar fena ft at arum p^far? A. f assrt fsrarm ftf; ^ ijasq p ra$q *q far. — 11. Q. fqar ^rar ©raft ’aftt; 11 a> sra^, % utf^ ra^. «q faq rani ? A. f*q afa cq at ©rarft ami'”, arfaa 10 fra sq an 12 sric^. — 12. Q. utfq srafqn au ap^? A. fa =a| ar sq utar ntoT q fmra ^ftan. — 13. Q. ms. ga far? A. aifgara, a: at& *q ar faw man. — 14. Q. asr^t sq srtsrm sur ant raft? A. s;q fft sfrnar srm), sr^f&r at a ms arqfj 13 aw. — 15. Q. utfu ff) ir aq atf ana) fara uat? A. anf “? *qq fta mf , uqar ar u . — 16. Q. ?rffj fft a gjsq warart ? A. utq nqq ayar srrft. — 17. Q. utq ara a srf^ra a ms aq ftmr mt aift?' A. arant at srp) a aaa^ a mift. aift at sma ftf^Xf^. — 18. Q. at|_ aTa^ f 1 ^ -gwrq; aTa #; fa? A. st 5 _ atfq aa^ ^5.? hw ara, i« fft-gsiTig; 15 aa. — 19. Q. atfq arfsamT mw- a^mt mt aift? A. ft, aq %ft 13 ittstt ; awrf 17 at raaf nara sraL; ran emq afTra a^f erq. — 20. Q. amram a arft steTq^trr? A. ms 1) The following specimens of village-conversations were given to me by Pandit Gopal Bhatta of Benares. The spelling is his, excepting the viramas and interpunctuations which I have added. DIALOGUES. 401 § 871 .]. w, |3S7n_ — 21. Q. f*r# ariat 19 §r UTSaTW *t GtS TcEt^ gTftcrTT. A. SJx^T ! ^ mflRFrr & 5T3T 5FT|[ 5> SRrW^ ^3. ^ Notes: 1) pers. i^L>. 2) adverb, past part. 3) arab. 4) 3. pi. pres. ind. of tbe potent, pass. 5) arab. *.*15. 6) pers. Sjj.N) pers. fi". 8) arab._.*J>. 9) pers. 10) arab. q&J. 11) pers. treated as a denom. root. 1 2) pers. jsj. 13) arab. siAjIj. 14) 2. pi. imperative: or W eft? or w W. 15) conj. part, of tbe double caus. 16) contr. for ^ ^f. 17) anomalous plur. of S^ir, apparently made after Urdu (arabie) analogy, as ?aiPT_ orders, pi. of jaw . 18) 1. pi. pres, conj., used as future. 19) re- dundant form of SUT. b) Between master and servant. l.^Q. Fftf^ar ormrU^fT. f^r a jrrf ? A. p- ftyr^ sf> err? ara, — 5. Q. wicrf eft f5~r_ ftt tm TWW_. A. 9x^T, Fta W WFT^; mpf ^ S^fTHT^ UF 1 ^^. — 6. Q. TWa ER SFTTtq- Wf A. 3TFT FTT UW f£?W pfWT. — 7. Q. WEFW, SFf aufl ^T5TTFT_ 5; ; ETTER W^jTA A. ST£ TSTET5TW, vf 2 ftrl Tjnir ?rraA — 8. Q. sF=sfr, swr aw^ m ftst^ it!^ eft zrtrnft & sr'ls^^f. A. ftF?j ®r^ ^ ir^r ert TprTa - eft — 9. Q. ttt^ a- er^ 3 ft? cr! ptrt pm?'”. A. awlt* frf&a' wa? — 10. Q. ert? 9? tnT to wa_. A. 5;wr_=r ffrlt? — 11. Q. ur’fer 9? 3755. wr^t maFT . A. sT5T?t to a? ! w?t ft! frrf tto 4 wy. — 12. Q. sft wjri, ir“' ftt awfl 6 to to; %tt riVf q sw. A. ft! snu mrif; frfsw — 13. Q. hwt, tofu St si?; EjrrfsWT it sp? sw sits A.'q ft^, ftt sfl^ »qr a; qwr ^TFUsflt- — 14. Q. ERFTUT =5Tfl sft^ A. ^cFF ^ qirf^ ftCT 3t|. — 15. Q. cfttert u wrfr m? A. cftto m ftt^)" amj q- — 16. Q. ^ afV ^ sfr xTT^ ar^ ur' 4 ’, rfr ^Ift. A. A rr^wl® ftt ai[a l|“. — 17. Q. i>t, anrw qn^ ek sr^ ftVtt wt^t afit; m anr_. A. sftftwt wV^t wrfr? 26 402 DIALOGUES. '§ Sti.] sr-r Jr tt'i - 18. Q- ^Tft u yw? ^ A ; srur *; *rw H^L^r- - 19 - <* *• _V*r w kn ft “ 20 - Q - m! fC ^ r A! A. «*r, ft! 3^ 3T ' ^ *«* ^ . Notes: 1) pars. jjtj*. 2) old loo. 3) conj. part. 4) con,, part, of potent, pass. 5) pers. <5^- 6) arak e) Between two sisters. i. q. i y&i A ;^ T * m ; *rt _ 2 . q. £ 4 «Nr ft*T * ^ Tfift **L ml A. **, m «t -it. *1 a 1. - ^ «• w «ra_ «m ®r *mcf ""i ? A ' T* ( ? * A. r «5i * P mi .*. ™L"P- - t' Q - *&ml? A. «, mi^nxf.'. - «• bb* W s, **• «*. i* * - »• «• RH.«" 5 ' -*» A. '«r * w w *i *«.-f ¥~TJt tre 1 ar^ft#**®, - »• «• «f» *0* 0 * a ^ rst'rJ. A. Hi St fit fSratf p — »• Q- *4 •> W - ^w‘ A Aft *s lV ? a. mft, *#' wu^"f * Sr S- A Si. A «.»!* - 10 - «• L i _ u. Q. am! rostj fittrr ill » TT. m S®" sW A. «*? set Tfm it C T^?.. <** * ^ If - 12 . Q. eroft «n "P*™^- A - ’?’ A n i » A* ttTl ! it - **■ «-' WT _* ,f fe: stl»ia aa? A. ary gram, as; arpm 1 . — 3. Q. ntfTq a% gift ara;? A. ntpr_ a> grtq[ tst n. — 4. Q. an; m =sf 5 rr ; an ap”. A. gsta; fan; ama? — 5. Q. nr atfy ma aT^nt apt? A. nrataar; nat ail. — 6 . Q. aia! nat aarf’ ". A. arum sft^'t sup? — 7. Q. garn ajr^fnni. A. nr! nryat ”aqn ; aa ma. p 0 ; an; gterw^ a antL — 8. Q. aa a fa|r sqr a fta aTpTT 1 . A. H_ cRTf at: TTTfT SfTJT ? — 9. Q. efrjT pfi JV STO^Sna : a fa# at A. atfy 2 ? — 10. Q. fr, arp; 3 star it ga; ft. A. fRfT! tit! apt ^f ! — 11. Q. ^r fir rimt at tmf. A. tit apt! Notes: 1) 1. pi. pres, ind., for fut. ind. 2) old loo.; ellip- tic, for gtft ara. 3) pers. *£ta. 3. FOLKLORE, a) The treasure in the field. 57% an spat 1 anj 2 it mft at aa srrama; stirs ary srRorr an; ss nnn;, an; arena ir chfnra S ^ an aty aTa sna aa pn , ata #r a ssry at aasa it ittj fffm srTrr“ ; a amrn aaa, at tqair ; as; sr srffat aft nap ns steq' as; attar fan a; p;gr sift at:y a wa nrrn 3 ; nf%a_ ^ 1:7 aFRt 4 nfy aya a ntyn^ nan ; at a mr^ n u-g_ Jssy 5 uatpin”; Ajaa. asp n nn sTran 01 ; aa at aa, arr fan; ^ atir atq a|a p atn 18 ; an aa^ afn 1 "; p ^antp ar t ara ^ naTft, nt an ntsT ara am n| ,s ma m apq am n aifr, SR 1 !. 'JpT.j f^.3C pit slia^a arfrarB, St srrr! (f^ pit iR Sr dtp qp fTT5T_ S; pif Rfpt SraTsrn ; aa qm I amrr qT?p Sr pit trg^ Sr Sip qp nlnp atp 3f t Sr qprrr 3 ST flap, St pp Sr pqr»qfpt I cFTTn STT-T, % iS qaFfpf ; Hp rirtTf par Rfft g-firrq^ Sr rrafp Sr *nrr Starp Sr tr ft^Sta; aa alf I I par rap Sr qrflp It S“ qrrf a alft 36 Tet I asrap; am 3 Itarer srI I Ststaanp soft®; St Sr p arp rip araSr; asp 3 atm^pSt Rif 1 earR^ijgj flat®; pit a stat® ; paft® 1 3^ pajp ^ rfrnpT. fta ranip; aTfmp 2 Sr p_S? wpn mpa ttstt Sr qra ril® atp pin Sr arqa aaraTp arfl“; am pirnr aftfSta, all h sir ^ Sr qfp=cfr ar; am fa nTfp fsrar sTTRl; 3 fit m3T S Rfd - ® qfpsfT fir Sr; am qffl 7T5TT Staamap dr qfpxfT Im mf a=5ft pltpVr mamTl®; St I ax|t a a?ft apanrpt, al? a a=cf anjp I uh , axfT a a=5fT qqrmta f paarla ; atp Si?r-Tgap Sr mmarp 1 Sr mar Sr mltSrp; am 3r H *tt?t Sr amp sstla , ^aaft' St Sr St I apsq 5 dr ifp anrerj a 3 afpor ftp Sr 33 asm; arn^ pm St Sr qflp St h* sftt|; nTfl w alp • 33 nSr? 3 afrfSr?p ^t mr^sr ^ mr_ ar^Sr; Frsr_ pTsiT %rrFT Sr srr?mrp Sr q^Sra, sIt =aT3p dgrp p f sr atj nip a Sraw^ Sr n St Sr T5 ^tt ? fSnrrrr_ sftwiwT^ It amn^ Srn^ Sr ; nsp pT?n qslr^ It 3 Stf^ Srarp ft? nsr_fSrarpqifSrtr_lt rirntsTps a f p ntifp fefl pflt; fw_pTsrr fitqtfTp Sr sriFTTa^ Sr qf Srn . It 3 alp® la^pf5T_? hst^ faltfrp msic^, It p alp 6 ' nfarr qffl fts^ praT artsTRanp Sr qrfl^, It n® otcH mananp ftS ; Ip nananp Sr srtifrTq^l purr ^ a=Eft fir®srnTprp wferr fSrssrrp^ipfSTrT , atp at Sr Sr arflip; 3 ^fr^; Irarp It I prfn arp nt^ nlft® aTp^; pn cpp sir S atr arp a?, atarp ar I pf_ -arp ap arprprf^p; airp prar at I srlila 4 , atp qifla^lt a® pirn arp am a aaSr? 3 snarcFp It rrfpTa arrta prfa StSr Stf nrfr“ qpm ; pTHT qf^® a=rt% ? 3 atsrapil f&foRT S; qpa 406 FOLKLORE*. ^57L] ir £gpr snqr srrr § 5 t rnrrT fts^ ^tstt sr {ftsn% ir f§rfTSR_ ssstt^ if ffr it ir £crr srq '^ro^s ; rrs^ £rnr gsf 9 ftuir stir eft^r^ % 5W SEFrajj* £ crj srq ^rar yr srgtft n^r if mf^rtfi* Ir ir first ^"ii Notes: 1) f and ^t* are emphatic. 2) arab. J>\. 3)' lit. standing, here ready. 4) shorter form for srtwTsrrrrj see § 26. 5) pers. sJj-«. 6) pers. 7) for 3 ;^, see §67. 8) 3. sg. 2 nd pret. ind. of potent, pass. 9) pers. joy ; here used ad- ject ively, through confusion with adj., formed like swt; see §253. c) The unfortunate Brahman. cRFIT £cfT cTT^T^ Hh T 5 f l «r T ITTcT ir 75o£ £fi 3 T_; 3 SrqS flrtmr ^srecmft ir§r sqir qfrfiranr srr^r^ cpft firfirrT ir erIr; ir £sr fg£T cRT 5TTfT_ff f% £jrt q£Rt srrrff UJ SrTqT. £rR & £=£ 5TRT fircreqr itff sq ir aan^ir firms^ stth £^Fr_; If itsjq Its; iff qf(T^ y. 5) irregular conj. part, of the verb qja; to die. INDEX OF SUBJECTS Note: The numbers refer to the pages. A. Ablative 216, = gen. 210, postpos. % 225, sing. 199.203.210, plur. 199, suff see stiff., aff. see aff. Abstract nouns see stiff., are fem. see %ninine. Accmt of numer. 252. 257 — 258, of pleon forma 99. 100. Accusative 216. sing. 208, proper 185. 186. 220 300. = <3at. = old gen. 196 198, sun see suff. Acquisitive verbs 387. Acta e ease 217 217 — 220. 221, voice 316, past tense 217, use of pass 13S. 145 340 j see also change of voice. Adjective 231 247—250 263 267.268, form of 247? 248, gender 246 — 249. declension 249—250, compar. 250, m deris. sense 249, obi. form 249, pronom. 273. 302 — 310, part. 326. * Advubud phrases 390 391. 392, re- petition 390. 391, part, see part. Adierbs 389 — 394, pronom 273.310 —316. 389 392, nom. 389. 390— 392, num. 389. 392, verb* 389. 392, original 389. Adversative conj see conj. Affiliation of Gd. Lang * 217. Affinities of alphabets 2, short vo- wels 4, nasalisation 6, palatals 7, cerebrals 8, nasals 11, semivowels 13, semicons. 17 — 24, sibilants 25, visarga 26, anusvara 27—31, mase. term. 37. 88.40, fem. term 41. neut. term, 42, change of single vowels 43. 44. 45. 46. 90, insert, of se- mivowels 48, eontr of vowels 50. 52#54, changes of single cons 35. 58. 59. 60. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. 91. 92. 93, changes of conj cons. 76. 78. 82. 83. 85. 86. 87. 88. 89. 94. 95, suff. 96, pleon. 100. 108, deriv. secon- dary 112. 118. 114. 116. 117. 119. 120. 121. 123. 125. 127. 128. 129. 180. 131. 133. 134. 135, deriv. pri- mary 136. 138, 141 147. 152. 154. 155. 156. 158, roots 160, gender 184 248, number 186 — 189, act, case 217— 220, case aff 221—223. 394, adj -declension 249, adj. com- parison 250, card. 253 — 255. 262, ordinals 263, multiplic. 265, col- lect. 266, reduplicat 267. fraction. 269, proport 271, Mibirnct. 271, rlisiribut 272, defmit. 272. inde- finit. 272, first pers. pron. 274, 278, second pers. 276. 280, correl. 285 — 289, refiSx. 302, honor. 303, pos- sess. 304, quantit. 306, qualit 307, mdef. 309. 310, pron. adv. 311 — 313, verbs trans. 817, caus. 318, double caus. 321, comp. pass. 322, pot. pass. 324, auxil. 3Sl — 367, comp. 387—389, infin. 326, adj. part. 326. adv part. 328, conj. part. 329, nouns of agency 330, pres. conj. and imp, 332, precat. 339, pres. xnd. 341 — 34 5. l Bt pret. ind. 345 — 350, 2 3wl pr#t. md. 351, pret. conj. 353, fur. md 85b — 359, periphrastic tenses 300, particles 398. 394, postpos. 394, conjunct. 395. 896. 397, interject. 398. Affirmation see particles. Affix 222, 394, of case = old nouns 202, indicating seven cases 203, of nom. plur. 186, act. 218. 219. 220. 408 INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 224, instr 227— 230. dat. 194. 219. 224—227, abl. 225. 226. 227—230, of gen. 4. 51. 129. 130. 191. 220— 221. 228. 230—240. 299. 394. 304 — 805, loc. 241 — 242, pleon. verbal 338. 345. Agent see active case. Alphabet 1. 2. Anomalous see irreg., gender 183, asp. 309, anunasika 335. 351, short forms 199. 200. 201, long vowel 257, 335, nnm. forms 261. 263. 264. 270, metathesis 391 — 392, suff. 126 136 351. Antepenultimate vow^l shortened 4. 32. 50 51. 318. Anunasika 6. 27 — 31. 46—47, omit- ted 33. 201. 224. 279 337 342. 352, sign of neut. 185. 202, sign of obi plur. 187, anomal. 335. 351. Anusvara 11. 27 — 31. 36,' morg 212. 336. euphon. 336. f Apabhramsa Saar, forms in E. H. 38,- Nagara 276. Apostrophe 3. Arabic influence on Gd. 10, sounds m E. H. 25. 26, words in Gd. see foreign Archaic obi 29. 186. ArdUbacharUro 6. 27. Aryan ption. system. 9. Aspiration of unasp. 72. 255. 309, transferred 73. 92. 224. 364. 389. Assimilation of foreign sounds m E. II. 25 26. visarga^ 26, obi. and dir forms 187. 203, ^86, ST 89, pers suff 336. Auxiliary verbs see verbs. B. Baiswdri forms 137. Bate 398 399. Beames 220. 227. 228. 229. 236. 238. 239. 257. 363 Behan Lcil^ld. Bengali alphabet 2 3, respectf. term 380, term. of 1 st pers. 351, exception, comp verbs 388, pleon. verb affix 37 BBS. Bhagavati 389. Byeforms of poss. pron. 804, pronom, adv. 313. C. CaUqraphic writing 2. Cardinal numb, see num., decfens. J of, 262. Case 216 — 242. 220, seven 216, of< agent see act., aff. 220. 222, see also aff., in Skr. 202. Causal conj. conj., roots 156 164. 170. 171. 178. 317, verb 316. 317— 322. 383—385. 387, rad. suff 154. 157. 317. 319. - r— adv. of, 311. 312. ' ■ 1 of dentals 9. 239. Cerebrals 8—10. Chance , verbs express, of, 386. Chard >39. 195. 196. 206. 208. 210. 219. 227. 231. 232. 233. 234. 237. 288. 276. 278 294. 296. 298. 299. Change of anusvara to nasal 88, mute^ cons, to nasal 85. 87, cons to ^ 89, of % to ^ 42—43. 228, to ^ 45, 3 to in E. H. l(Tl2. 62, 261, ^ and =T 34. 92. 224, ^ to £ 12. 16. 34. 63, £ to cf§r, ^ 13. 64. 65, of 3 to x 13. 34. 60. 61. 62. 111. 120. 160. 294, ff ’ to si, and sl^to 17—24, ^ to 28, 3T to 238. 239, <£ to ^ 62. 140, to 226^ sfto 51 239. 294, 5., 255. 260. 309 364, ^ to <7 258, W to ^296, g_to R^S. 132. 160 or to 295. 347. 365, fin. sounds 36— 42, med. single \ owels 1 42 — 17. vowel- m contact 47 — 56, mit vow id* 90 — 91, 57 — 74.91—98. conj (or-. 75 93—95 337, gender 42. 181. 182. 183—185, voice 138 145. 149. 150. 153. 164. 168—170. 175 217, clas* 161. 164—168. 364, number 208. 211. 274. Circumflex see anunasika. Class see change of class, suff. 161, see also incorporation. Classification of cons. 7. Collective numb, see numerals. Combination of vowels see contraction. Comparison of adj. 250,. INDEX OE SUBJECT b. 409 Comparative degree 250. s i Completion , verbs express, of, 386. Conwleitce verbs 386. Compound eons, see cons., roots 173 —177 177 179. 329, verbs 147. 329. 362 382. 385 — 389, pas-, s'.e pas*., plar. 185 186. 190. 300—302. W t teases see tenses. Compounds resembling suff. 110. 127 — 136- 132. 158. Composite form of per term. 353 Concessive conjunction see conj. Conditional fut. 359, fut exact 359, durat. pres. 359, pres. 360, prefer. 359, conj. see conj. Confusion of gender see gender. ConiuffaUot' of 316 cftl — 375, intrant 316. auxsl. \erb367 — 371. regol. act. verb 371 — 375. 375 — 378, comp. pass, verb 380—382, causal verbs 383—385. Conjugational suff. see suffixes. Conjunct cons, see cons., 23. 24. 72. 78. 89. 94. 95. Conjunction 252. 389. 395 — 398. co- pul. 395, advers. 395, disjunct. 396, condit. or concess. 396, causal or final 397, paraphrased 397 Conjunctive part, see part., mood 816. 331, past tense see past, pres, see pres. Connecting vowel 3JT 176. 252. 261, ^ 189. 148, 157, f 176. Consonants 6 — 26, single 34 — 35. 57 —74, conj. 35—36. 75—89. 85, transposed 73, interchanged 74, interpolated 74, Construction passive 217, pass.-act. 21S Constructions or pravoga*- see prayoga. Continuative verbs 386. Contracted syllables 378. 380. 883. 393. see also contraction and vocab- *ai on Jonas see form uum. forms 271, t ,j rrr» of \ erb*> 339 Contraction of hiatus vowels 24. 26. 29. 33. 34 35. 40. 47. 48. 50. 54. 67. 68 75. 122. 132, 157. 158, 198. 232. 252. Copulative conj. see conjunction. Correlative pron. 273. 274. 284 — 302. ! Corruption of foreign words see tor- Cotku 257. 303. 333— 336. 1 d:- • Dative 216.226, disappear, in Pr 202, = old gen. 198. 195. 197. 202. 206. 210. 279, = old gen. = acc. 196. 198, postpos. 224. 225, sineul. 203: 208, aff. see aff. Declension of adj. 249 — 250, correl. pron. 299, honor, pron. 303, mdef. pron. 309, pers. pron. 282—283, pleon. pron. 282. 300. 302, poss. pron. 304, qual pron. 307, quant, pron. 306, reflex, pron. 302, sub- stant. 242 — 246. Defective num. 267, verb* 361. 364. 867—868. 311). 371. Definite pres. ind. 359, prefer, of perf. ind. 359. Definitive numb, see numerals. Degree of adj. 250, verbs 317 — B&2. Dnnovst rathe general 284. 286 — 287, near 284. 285 — 286. 291. 304, pron. 282. 284, i^mote or far 273. 284. 286. 291. 304. Denominative formation 355, par- ticiple 118, root 81. 82. 164. 172 — 173. 177. 179. 347, rad. suff 154. 157. 158. DentaUsation of cerebrals 14. Derivation of adv. 391 — 392, abl. and mstr. a£f, 227 — 230, act dat. aff. 220, dat. aff. 224 — 227. gen. aff 230—240, loc. aff. 241—242, conj. 395. 396. 397, interject. 398, nouns of agency 330, num. 72. 73. 74. 82. 86^87. 90, plur. signs 189 — 192, particles 393. 394, postpos. 394, pronom. adv. 313 — 316, cor- rel. pron. 289 — 299, honor, pron. 303, indef. pron. 309 — 310. qual. pron. 808, quant, pron. £06, first pers. pron 274 — 276. 278 — 280, 2 nd pers pron 276 — 278 280 — 281, possess, pron 304 — 305, re- flex. pron. 302, a few peculiar rjro- nom. forms 281 — 2S2, direct term. 212 — 216, fem. term. 125—126. 249, obi. term. 195 — 202 tmx. verbs 361 — 367, caus. verbs 319 — 321, double caus. 321 — 322, comp, verbs 387 — 389, conj. part 329, pass. 323 — 324, prec. 339 — 341, fut. ind. 356 — 359, pres conj. and imperf, 384—389, pres. md. 341 — 345, pret. conj. 353 — 355, first pret. ind. 345 — 350, second pret 410 INDEX OF SUBJECTS. ind. 351—354," trans. verbs 817, , suff. see suff. . Q Derivative roots 171 — 172, sun. 95 96. 99, primary 95. 118. IBS. 136. 136—158, secondary 95. 111—136. ' 179. Desiderative verbs 886 . Desire expressed by suff. see sun. Devanagari 1. 2. 15. 24. Dhdtupdtha 172. Deleave? 400 D ant nut i v fb-’T.'s 104. 107.123. 182, suff. 100. 101. 107. 134. Direct form, see form, of demonstr. pron. 2$4, first pwe. pron. 274, = obi. 219. Direction, pronom. adv. of, 311. - T)isa*pt?n*ior> 72. 81. 82. 85. 89. 160. J)i'j"nctirt conj. see conjunction. Dissolution of conj cons. 57. 76. 77 —79. 155. 262. Distribution of Pr. gen. suff. 204— 209. Q Distributive numbers see numerals. Disused past tense act. 217, roots 154. 156. 157. 177, words 106. 107. 124. 126. 128. Double causal 320. 321 — 322. 384.385. Doubling of cons 79 85. 101. 158. 255, retained 80. 158, vowels 85. Dravnhan lang. and sounds 8—10. Dubitaticc pres 359, preter. 360. Durative fat, md. 359, pres, condit. 359, pres. ind. 359, preter. md. 359. E. Elision of causal suff. 145, of a cons 6 . 59. 69 — 72. 76. 79. /9 SO. P5.-86. 93 94. 95. 308, double cons 57. 58. 76. 85 — 87. 113. 254. 258. 362. final anusvara 36, final anunasika 33. 42. 279. 337. 342. 352, final visarga 36, final ^ 252 254, gen. suff. 281, initial vowels 90. 91. 162. 395, nasal 6 . 28. SO. 57 . 58, neutral Vowel 5. person, verb. suff. 347. 351. 3 < 8 , semicons 19, semivowels 57. 58 117. 132. 156. 158. 159, syllables 254. 258. 259, of ^ 34. 47. 70-71. 122. 193. 198. 224. 255. 260. ^270. 295. 299, of of before ^ or ^ 85. 69. 318, of SF 55. 90. 117. 145. 270, of ’ 'J 69. 128. 135 232. 308, i‘ pron. 284. 301.^,301 31o! 31 1 , particles or aff. 299. SO*^ 314. 393. 397. Enclitic conj. 395, particles 393, pro» 4 t 388 345, Euphonic anusvara 346, ^ 335. 35( it 270, semicons. 16. 18. 24. 82 47 — 48. 269. 335. 371. F.rcrg*i r p see anomalous, irregula’^ B. • ',cvfflct ind. 359. - . ,*.i» il verb 382. I ,,!,, oi "h;,' of Arab, and Pers. sounds into Gd. 10 25. Inchoative verb, forms 363. 366, verbs 887, suff. vT or 363. Incorporation of class snff. 161. 162— ^ 164. 165. 1*88, pass. suff. 164. Increment ^ssT 340 — 341, W 362- 363. Indeclinables 389—398. Indefinite pres. ind. 354, pron. ^4. 289. 299. 309—310. Indefinitive numb, see numerals. Indicative 316. 331. 345, fut. see iut., pres, see Jres., perf. see pern, im- per. see impel*., pret. sc~ pres, m Skr. see old, ‘ "' , - and Pr. 339. Infinitive 145. 150. 153. 159. 185. 316. 326, obi. 326. 385. 388. « i r-n OI (2 t rovhe! 316 — 389. Initial letters 3, vowels 90. 97, m E. II. 12 Inorganic anunasika 256, anusvara • H * Habitual pret. 359, past see Mara- thi or Panjabi. Hardening of semivow. 58. 59. 72. 92. Heterogeneous conj. 75. 76. Hiatus 16 33. 47. 52 54. 55. Ihqh Hindi 219. - Hindi , high see high, old see old, vulgar see vulgar, low see low, pleon. verb. aff. or 346. Historical present see Marathi. Homogeneous conj. 75 76. Honorific pron. 273. 303. I. Identity of nom and acc. proper 220, genders 248, pres. conj. and imperf. 332, pres, conj., imper. %,nd xndic. 334, pres. ind. and fut. 212, oT^ 11. Insertion vowels 57, eupk. £T and a- S3. 54. 55. 97. 159. 371, of cons. 74, of ST 50. 55. 138, of 54. 137 -138, of ? 48, 105. 133. 269, see Iso euphonic. ' . . : trumeatal 216, = gen. 218, sing. .99. 208, plur. 199, suff see suff. msitive verbs 382. 385, 386. ,er change of cons. 74, gend. 355. crjection 398, in vocat 217. )erpolation of vowets 76. 77 /9. )3— 94. 252. of cons. 74. 257, see ilso insertion. terrogative pron. 284, 288. 299. 394, particles 394. transitive verbs 316. 317. 333. 348. 850. 360. 380. 382. regular verbs 371. 378 — 380. 381 —382. 383 385, pass. 322. 324 ; 412 INDEX OF SUBJECTS. eaus, 317: 318 — Slg, 320, past part. 138. 326. 345. 38l. K. Kabir 195. 196. 219. 231. 233. Kaithl 1 10. 15. 16. 20. 24. Kashmir/ 240 256. Kellogg 332. Khan bhdshd 16. 75. Kinds of verbs 316 — 317. Konkani 239. 240. 317. Kothwdl se^ MaMjanl. Kutila 2. * l; Lassen on first pers. pron. 275, conj. part. 330, fut. of oT-type in Pr. 357, pers. suff. 836. - Lengthening of short vowels 46. 83. 101. 171. 194. 252. 261, rad. vowel 316. 317. Likeness express, by suff. see suff. Lira ary form of Gd. lang. 219. Locative 216, 241. 242 po^tpo* see postpos . form of ni> ; part 360, sing. 199 208. 210,' plur. 199. Long vowel 3, form see form. Low Hindi 219, see also vulgar and theth 368. M. Magadli forms 137. Mahdjani 2. MaiihiU forms 137. Manner , pron. adv. of, 311. 312. 389. 391. Marathi roots not in E. H. 160, “type of obi. term. 192. dafc. = old gen 193, habitual past or historical pres. .332. 344. 357 — 366, rcspectf. term. 339, identity of teim. of pres, conj and pres. ind. 354. Mdrkayideya on decl. 204. 205, 215. 216 236, pleon forms 101, pron. forms 275. 277. 279. 298 295. 298. 305, conj. part. 329, on euphonic .semicons. 17. Masculine 181. 248. 265, express. „place“ 151. Masculines in ^ 242 — 243, in^T 243, $ 243 — 244, f 244, t 244," 3 244 —245. Meaning of comp, verbs 386—389, norm forms 181. the twopret. ind. 345, suff. 95. 100. 145. Medial single cons. 57 — 60, *cbnj> cons. 75 — 77. Metathesis see transposition. Mewari 240. - Mixed conjuncts 75. Monosyllabic roots, irr. caus. of 318. Moods of verbs 316. 326 — 380, indio 316. 331, conj. 316, 331, imper. 316. 334. Mrchchha/catikd 284. 235. v 1 ij ’ ' * ■'>■ » !■ ■ 2 1 Jo : -jit'. Mute eonson. 6. N. Ndgara Apabhramsa 276. 305, Bha- sha 345. Nagari see Devanagari. Naipdli pleon. verb. suff. ^838. Nasal cons. 6, 5 m E. H. 10, 3 and or in vulg, E. H. 10, m Pr. 11— 12, indicated by anusvara 11. Nasalization 6, of vowels 46 — 47. 81 84. 393, of ST 47. , Negative verb form 363. 364. 370- 371, part 363. 393—394. Neuter 183—185. Neutral rounds 18, vowel 3 4 5. Sonar'll term, see term, denv. 177, adv. see adv. Nominative 216. 217. 220, sing. 36. 38. 208. 214, plur. 185 ' 186 199. 212—216. 272, = dir. form. 185. 203, = gen. 215. 277, = voc. 216. 217, = acc. proper 220. Nth i, \ )" 8. n.il 17 3 of act and agency 145. 150, 330. Number of nouns 185—216, verbs 331. 341. 345 350 353. 355. 360 381. Numeral s* 250 — 273, deriv. of see de- ny. and suffs., ord. 126— 128.250. 263—264 267.209, indef 135.250. 272—273, card 250.251— 262. 2£3. 269. 270, collect. 250. 262. 265. INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 413 - ' aggreg. see collect., con- forms 271, distribut. 250. L72, defin. 272, indef. 185. 272—278, defective 267, fra- tion. 250. 268 — 270, multiplic 250. 264 — 265, proport 250 270 — 271, subtract. 250. 271, adv. see adv., adverb, phrases 372, reduplicatives 250/267— 26S. o. Clique form see form, form in ^ ;51. 70. 136. 137. 145. 360, — old d gen. 202, 218, = dir. 219, = pron. adv. 313, of adj. 249, smg. 185. 186. 187. 192. 195, plur 185. 187. 195. 198. 242, archaic 186, term. 187 — 189. 192—202, inf. see mf. Old gen. term. 191. 193, pres, tense 334 341 344. 851. 353. 856. 357. 362, fut 339 356, Hindi 139. 195. 196 J98. 206. 207. 210. 214. 219. 220. 224 230. 231. 237. 238. 241. 335. 346, Hindi pers. suff. 335— 339. 346, Pr. forms 354, Bengali 19« Ararat’ 21^. 230. 240, Ma- lm. 21 <• 229 2 b. 241. 332—338, V !■ , *•! U»,i 2-wJ 207. 210. 214. 219! 230. 233. 237. 239. 240. 356. Omission *ee change and elision. Ordinal numb see numerals. Organic ajid 5T 16. Origin of cerebrals 8—10, of obi. form 187. 192. 202—203, obi. or gen. suff. 209—212, pleon. suff. 103. 110—111, see also derivation. Original Aryan cerebrals 9, single cons. 57. 78, 81, conj. cons. 75 — 77, >,dv. Orly a ■ . ■ 2. 20. 21. P. PaisdcM 12. Palatal cons 7. Palatalisauon of 37 238 239, 239. Pali 280, suff. of conj part 239. Panjabi anom pronom. forms 279 — 230. 305, anorn. l bt pers. suff. 336, habit past 366, oldPanj see old. Paradigms of dec!. 220. 242 — 246. £83. 300—302. Par r "pbro 55 ad-"" verb. 228. 328. 360 385. 388, conj. 4. 225. 229. 282. 328—330. 378. 385. 387, adj. 360. 385, see also past and pres. part. , Participles 316. 326 — 330. Patlioin.il tenses see tenses. Par tide of affirm and neorabon 392 — 893, interrog. 39 1," „cmpli. see emp^atih , - Past ho uiolecT 15. 16. Pashtu roots 178, past part. 139, eausals 320, postpos. 394, pers. verb suff. 335—337, pleon. m 110. Passive root see root, construct, see constr., compound 822 — 323. 381 —382. Jo5, voice 138. 316. 322— 326, potential 324—325. 382—383. 385, term, used actively 138. 145. 340, see also change of voice. Past conjunctive 331, see also pret. Perfect indicative 359. Periphrastic tenses see tenses. Pcnmssice verbs 387. Permuiatioic of roots 161. Persian influence on Gd. 10, wbrds see foreign, pers. verb. suff. 335 —337. Person of verbs 331. 341. 345. 350. 353. 355.*360. 381. Personal pron. see pron. Phonetic spelling 5. 17, disguises of loots 161, system in Skr. 3. 6. 12. 24. 26. 27, in Hindi 6, in Aryan 9, permutation see prrmuttition Phrase adverb. 390. 391, phrases m E. H. 898-399. Pischel 224. 235. P7 H . . r,- on adv. of 310. 311. 389. 390. P/., i./" ( u o' ' of pron 282.300, verb. aff. 838. 346, verbal form 362, rad. suff. 161.161—162.170—171. 173, suffs. 61. 95. 96—111. 100. 119. 122.. 127. 134—179. 226. 247. 268. 289. 297. 306. 307. 314. 391. 392, 3* (or eff) added 110. 112. 115. 116. 117. 119 120. 122. 125. 127. 133. 137. 140. 141, 154. 155. 156. , 414 ' INDEX OF SUBJECTS. Pluperfect S50. 359. Plural 185 212-^216. 331, comp. 185. 303, simple 185 186, Vw =t '0 186, oblique see obi., - - * ca- used as sing 274, of verbs 331, of long adj 249, old term of 189. Possessicnal adj. see suff. Possessive pron. yrnr Postposition 222. 3-9. 39 J of dat. 224. 225, of abl. 225, of # loc 241, ^fT§f 193. 225. Postpositional loc. 51. 52. Potential verbs 386, pass. see^pass. Prdkrit comp, verbs 389", jnetfio&sjof r forming 'pitet. conj 354, old see old. **". Prayogas 826— 327 v §30. 348 Preeatwe 33^-341. > Prefixing of % 93, of ^ or ^ 95, of 272. Prepositions 394. Present part, see part, dur. 359,, dur. cond. 859, cond. 360- dubit. 359, conj. 51. 52. 159. 331—839. 343. 345. 357. 359, imperat. 331—339. 339—341, ind. 341-345. 353.357. 359, md m Skr. 334. Preterite, first 331. 345-350. 351 375, second 331. 350—353. 361, c ni 34 353-855. 359, ind. 138. 3. ' l . 333. 845 350. 351. 359, cond. 359, dubit. 360. Primal g roots see roots, derivat. stiff, see derivative. Pronominal long forms 273, strong forms 273, short forms 1 adi 273. 303—810, adv. 27 3 diO— 3i<> Pronouns 282 273—315, emphatic 310 311 312 pers. 273 — 284. 303 bxs , con 273. 284—302. 305—808. re- flex 27^. 302 803 bis , honor. 273. 303, pos*. 273. 281—282. 302 303 *, — 305. demonstr. 284 285 — 287 291. 304, rel. 284. 267— 2S8. 310, ' inter. 284. 288. 299, indef. 284. 289. 299 309 — 310, of quantity 289. 291 293 294. 297. 305—307. 313, of qua1it\ 294. 295 307 — 308 313, enclitic 338. 345. Pronunciation of neut. vowel 4, short vowel 4. 5, palatals 7. 8, cerebrals ! 8—10, imt ff^and 51^16, sM6, r, 1 etc. 6, ^ and ^ 12, ^ IS, Ma- gadhil7, semicoi’.s, and semivowels 17. 18, *5T and S 25. 270, anunasih 27. 31, Beng. verb, t H 36, ft 35, if 35* Proportional numb, see num *■ -- Q- •• Quality pron. of 294. 295. 307— 30^ 318. „ 4 k of 28#. 291. 298 29* " .aiv-to; si Quiescent & 4, 31. 36. 37. 38. 97. 12$ ' 265, if and 3 38. 128. 252. 254. 33$ R. Radical vowel 816, tenses 331. 33 — 345. Reduction of asp. 57. 58* 59. 65 — 67. 79. 270, vowels 32. 33. 38. 261. Redundant form see form. Reduplication of roots 367, num 271 272, umpn. part. 397, suff. 97. 101 102. 104. Rt>duplicaVcc numb see num. liejlexioe pron. 273. 302. 303 bl8 . Reflexiveness verbs express, of 386 Regular verb conjugated see conjug Relation express, by; suff. see suff Relative pron. 284. 287 — 288. 310. Remote demonstr. pron. 273. Repetition adverb 390. 391. Respect term, of 393. Respectful terrain 339. Resultant single cons. 57 — 58, conj cons. 75—77. Retention of double cons. 80, of ^ m conj. 74. 76 — 77 255. Romance lang, 239. Roots 159 — 3 79. 331. 387, in long vowels 46. 387, permut. of see per mut., not in E. II 166, primari 161. 161—171. 177, secondary 161 171 — 177. 177, unchanged 161. de rivative see denv., denom see de* nom., compound see compound, simple 168. 171. 174 319. 319, pass 168. 171, caus. see caus., paraphra* s§d 174, tatsama 179. INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 41 - s. SandJuioQ 47. 48. Se&md per s. of verbs 331, preter. see pret., pers. pron. 273. 276. 280. * 281 303 bis . CO" i‘ n i '"‘hriv. suff. see derivat. '.%'*# bw'' 9. 10. 25. S 'emiconsonant 17. 24. Jemi dentals 7. SemitaUamci 67.75 77. 112. 180.255, 309. Semivowels 6. Setvbandha 217. 218. Short vowel 3. 4. 5. 82. 83, form see form. Shortening of antepenult ^owel 32 83. 97, long vowels 46. 90. 101. 102. 145 156. 171. 261. 317. 318. 835. 396, final U 53, radio, vowel 316 317. Sibilants 6. Signs of plur. 185. 189 — 192. 232, nasaftfcatxon 6, vowels 3. Simple roots see roots, plural 185, causal 383—384. 385, verb 316 317. Simplification of conj. cons, 57. 76. 79-85. 115. S't'dl 1 ’ o’d 219, tigrcvn »i* with E. H. 15 16. roots rr M m F II. 160, pre- senes short vowel 85. type of obi. teim 192, obi. m poetry 203, anom pron forms 279—280, anom. mdef. . . % . . f . pron o09. pre=. part, m or 3"cT 358, anom. lirst pers. sufi. 336, fieon suff. in S. 110 ngle cons, see cons., vowels see vowels. Singular 135. 187. 192. 331. Special Hindi vowels 4. Specimens of E. H. 398 — 407. Spelling see phonetic 5, m Gujarati 201, of srFj^as 5PT 252. Softening of cons 57. 58. 59. 60—65. 83. 392. Strong forms see forms, conj. 75, auxil. verb 369 — 370. Subsiantwe 179—246 268, forms 179 — 181, see also foims, gender 181 — 185, numb 185 — 216 Substitution see change. Subtractive numb, see num. Suddenness verbs express of 386. Suffix of nomin. 215, accus. 207 391. i instrument. 205. 206, 212 230, dat. I 207, abl. 205, 2^6. 20?. 211. 230. 391, gen. sing. 192 193. 195. 203. 204—206. 207—208. 209. 211, gen. plur. 194. 198. 203. 205— 20G. 208 . —209.211.212, loc. 51.52. 70. 20&«, 206. 207. 391, obi. plur. 185. 272, pres. ind. 341. 344, ssri 1 '” of losing. pres. 52. 331. 335—336 337, i” of 1 st pi. pres. 70. 331. 335—336. 338, 3 of 2 d sing. pres. 331. 335. 337—338, of 2 d pi. pres. 70. 331. 336. 338—339, STg; or 3f of 2 d plur^ 331—332 336. 339, ^ of 3 d sing, pres 51. 381. 335, ^ of 3 d pi. pres. 51. 70. 227. 337, srffT of 3 d pi. a**?. 83, ?TrT or 3rT or 3^ or tIPT or Ttf vi 839, pres, imper. 381. 333, 3 of imper. 53.%31, pres. conj. 331. 333, prec. 339— 341, 340— 341, first pret. md. 345. 849, 0 f past tense 34. 62—63. 137—144. 350 360, ^ 3 d sing. fut. ind. 33. 70, ^rT_ of part. pres. 83. 136—137. 353. 359. or U3 or 358, past part. 137—144^345 355. 359 378, fut. part. 145—150. 355 378. conj. part. 4. 329, infin. 145 — 154. 159, ^ obi lmjjQ, 87, caus. \crbs 317 319, inchoat. 363, verbal omitted see elision. Suffixes redupl. see reduplication, contr. 100, their meaning see mea- ning, vulg, see vulg., diftunut. see diminutive, expressing smallness 100 107, contempt 100, affection*- 100, likeness 107. 111. 119. 122 134, possession 115. 117.118. 120. 121. 122. 135, relation 120. *22 129. 132. 135, desire J31. workers ol -o'uei: s.'i'jr 129 — 130, wages or p“'c ■ ill* 'strument 151, place 151, resembling compounds see comp., added to \erb. roots 114, forming abstr. nouns 112. 113. 114. 116 117. 123. 131 132, feminines 123, numerals If 8, ord. numbers 126. 267, noungj of act 145 146. 150. 151. 154, 155. 157, nouns of